703795

Mercedes E-Class Wagon 2020 Handleiding

1
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/550
Pagina verder
Digital – in the vehicleVehicle document walletDigital – on the InternetDigital – as an App
Familiarize yourself with the con‐
tents of the Operator's Manual
directly via the vehicle's multi‐
media system (menu item "Vehi‐
cle"). Start with the quick guide,
discover your vehicle's highlights
or broaden your knowledge with
useful tips.
Here you can find comprehen‐
sive information about operating
your vehicle and about services
and warranties in printed form.
You can find the Operator's Man‐
ual on the Mercedes-Benz home‐
page.
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App
is available free-of-charge in
familiar App stores.
É2135845115RËÍ
2135845115
Apple
®
iOS Android
TM
Order no. P213 1400 13 Part no. 213 584 51 15
Edition B2020
E-Class Wagon
Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz E-Class Wagon
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Documentation team
©
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with‐
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstrasse 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Front passenger airbag warning
Example
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
if the front-passenger airbag is enabled
If the front-passenger front airbag is enabled,
a child on the front-passenger seat may be
struck by the front-passenger airbag during
an accident.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
AIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".
As at 25.03.2019
Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-Benz
Before you first drive off, read this Operator's
Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with
your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer
operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the
instructions and warning notices in this Opera‐
tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to
damage to the vehicle or injury to people.
Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre‐
gard of the instructions is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The standard equipment and product description
of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol‐
lowing factors:
R
Model
R
Order
R
National version
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce
changes in the following areas:
R
Design
R
Equipment
R
Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐
fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐
trations.
The following documents are integral parts of
the vehicle:
R
Digital Operator's Manual
R
Printed Operator's Manual
R
Maintenance Booklet
R
Equipment-dependent Supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of
the documents on to the new owner.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2135845115
2135845115
Symbols ........................................................ 5
At a glance .................................................... 6
Cockpit ........................................................... 6
Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ........ 10
Indicator and warning lamps (Wide‐
screen Cockpit) ............................................ 12
Overhead control panel ................................ 14
Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 16
Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 18
Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 20
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 20
General notes ............................................. 21
Protecting the environment .......................... 21
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts ......................21
Operator's Manual ........................................22
Service and vehicle operation ......................23
Operating safety ...........................................24
Declaration of conformity for wireless
vehicle components .....................................25
Diagnostics connection ................................ 26
Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 26
Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 27
Problems with your vehicle ........................... 27
Reporting safety defects ...............................27
Limited Warranty .......................................... 28
QR code for rescue card ...............................28
Data storage .................................................28
Copyright ...................................................... 31
Occupant safety ......................................... 33
Restraint system ...........................................33
Seat belts ..................................................... 35
Airbags ......................................................... 40
PRE-SAFE
®
system ....................................... 47
Safely transporting children in the vehi‐
cle ................................................................49
Notes on pets in the vehicle .........................63
Opening and closing .................................. 65
SmartKey ...................................................... 65
Doors ............................................................ 70
Cargo compartment ...................................... 74
Side windows ............................................... 80
Sliding sunroof ............................................. 84
Roller sun blinds ...........................................89
Anti-theft protection .....................................90
Seats and stowing ..................................... 93
Notes on the correct driver's seat posi‐
tion ............................................................... 93
Seats ............................................................ 94
Steering wheel ............................................ 106
Easy entry and exit feature .........................108
Operating the memory function .................. 109
Stowage areas .............................................110
Cup holder .................................................. 122
Ashtray and cigarette lighter .......................124
Sockets ....................................................... 125
Wireless charging of the mobile phone
and connection with the exterior antenna .. 127
Installing and removing the floor mats ........ 129
Light and visibility ................................... 130
Exterior lighting .......................................... 130
Interior lighting ........................................... 135
Windshield wiper and windshield washer
system ........................................................ 136
Mirrors ........................................................ 140
2
Contents
Operating the sun visors ............................. 143
Area permeable to radio waves on the
windshield .................................................. 144
Infrared-reflective windshield function ........ 144
Climate control ........................................ 145
Overview of climate control systems ..........145
Operating the climate control system ......... 146
Driving and parking ................................. 152
Driving ........................................................ 152
DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................162
Automatic transmission .............................. 164
Function of 4MATIC .................................... 168
Refueling ..................................................... 168
Parking .......................................................170
Driving and driving safety systems .............180
Vehicle towing instructions .........................236
Instrument Display and on-board
computer .................................................. 237
Instrument Display overview .......................237
Overview of the buttons on the steering
wheel ..........................................................238
Operating the on-board computer .............. 238
Setting the design ....................................... 240
Setting the area for additional values .........240
Overview of displays on the multifunc‐
tion display .................................................. 241
Adjusting the instrument lighting ................242
Menus and submenus ................................. 242
Head-up Display ......................................... 249
Voice Control System .............................. 251
Notes on operating safety ...........................251
Operation ................................................... 252
Using the Voice Control System effec‐
tively ........................................................... 253
Essential voice commands .........................254
Multimedia system .................................. 266
Overview and operation .............................. 266
System settings .......................................... 275
Fit & Healthy ............................................... 287
Navigation .................................................. 289
Telephone ...................................................314
Online and Internet functions ..................... 338
Media ......................................................... 343
Radio .......................................................... 356
Sound .........................................................364
Maintenance and care ............................. 366
ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ 366
Engine compartment .................................. 367
Cleaning and care .......................................374
Breakdown assistance ............................ 384
Emergency .................................................. 384
Flat tire ....................................................... 384
Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 390
Tow starting or towing away ....................... 396
Electrical fuses ........................................... 400
Wheels and tires ...................................... 404
Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐
acteristics ...................................................404
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
tires ............................................................ 404
Notes on snow chains ................................ 405
Contents
3
Tire pressure .............................................. 406
Loading the vehicle .....................................412
Tire labeling ................................................ 416
Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... 421
Changing a wheel ....................................... 424
Emergency spare wheel ..............................433
Technical data .......................................... 435
Notes on technical data .............................. 435
Vehicle electronics .....................................435
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and
engine number overview .............................437
Operating fluids .......................................... 439
Vehicle data ................................................ 445
Display messages and warning/indi‐
cator lamps .............................................. 447
Display messages ....................................... 447
Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 495
Index .......................................................... 510
4
Contents
In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol‐
lowing symbols:
&
DANGER Danger due to not observing
the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz‐
ards that may endanger your health or life, or
the health or life of others.
#
Observe the warning notices.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to failure to observe envi‐
ronmental notes
Environmental notes include information on
environmentally responsible behavior or envi‐
ronmentally responsible disposal.
#
Observe environmental notes.
*
NOTE Damage to property due to failure
to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of
risks which may lead to your vehicle being
damaged.
#
Observe notes on material damage.
%
Useful instructions or further information
that could be helpful to you.
X
Instruction
(Q page)
Further information on a topic
Display
Information on the multifunction dis‐
play/media display
+
Highest menu level, which is to be
selected in the multimedia system
*
Corresponding submenus, which are
to be selected in the multimedia sys‐
tem
*Marks a cause
Symbols
5
6
At a glance – Cockpit
1
Steering wheel gearshift paddles
→
166
2
Combination switch
→
131
3
Instrument Display
→
237
4
DIRECT SELECT lever
→
164
5
Media display
→
266
6
Start/stop button
→
153
7
Calls up the main functions
→
270
8
Climate control systems
→
145
9
Glove box
→
112
A
Hazard warning lights
→
132
B
Stowage compartment
→
112
C
Touchpad
→
267
D
Control knob for volume and switching sound
on/off
→
266
E
Switches the multimedia system on/off
→
266
F
Lowers the rear seat head restraint
→
99
G
ECO start/stop function
→
161
H
Active Parking Assist
→
223
I
Sets the vehicle level
→
209
J
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
→
163
K
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
→
45
L
Control panel for multimedia system
→
238
M
Adjusts the steering wheel mechanically
→
106
N
Adjusts the steering wheel electrically
→
107
Switches the steering wheel heater on/off
→
107
O
Operating group:
On-board computer
→
238
Cruise control
→
192
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
→
195
P
Diagnostics connection
→
26
Q
Opens the hood
→
368
R
Electric parking brake
→
177
S
Light switch
→
130
T
Control panel for:
At a glance – Cockpit
7
Active Steering Assist
→
201
Active Lane Keeping Assist
→
235
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
→
214
Head-up Display
→
250
8
At a glance – Cockpit
Instrument Display (standard)
10
At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard)
1
Speedometer
→
237
2
÷ ESP
®
→
505
3
#! Turn signal lights
→
131
4
Ð Electric power steering malfunction
→
498
5
Multifunction display
→
241
6
! ABS malfunction
→
505
7
; Check Engine
→
499
8
Tachometer
→
237
9
% This indicator lamp has no function
A
Electric parking brake applied (red)
→
502
F USA only
! Canada only
B
Brakes (red)
→
502
$ USA only
J Canada only
C
# Electrical malfunction
→
499
D
L Distance warning
→
504
E
ÿ Coolant too hot/cold
→
499
F
Coolant temperature display
→
237
G
! Electric parking brake (yellow)
→
502
H
6 Restraint system
→
497
I
ü Seat belt not fastened
→
497
J
T Parking lamps
→
130
K
Fuel level indicator
8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location
indicator
→
499
L
K High beam
→
131
M
L Low beam
→
130
N
R Rear fog light
→
131
O
ä Suspension malfunction
→
504
P
h Tire pressure monitor
→
508
Q
å ESP
®
OFF
→
505
At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard)
11
Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Display
12
At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (Widescreen Cockpit)
1
Speedometer
→
237
2
ä Suspension malfunction
→
504
3
#! Turn signal lights
→
131
4
Multifunction display
→
241
5
Tachometer
→
237
6
å ESP
®
OFF
→
505
÷ ESP
®
→
505
7
K High beam
→
131
L Low beam
→
130
T Parking lamps
→
130
8
ÿ Coolant too hot/cold
→
499
9
Coolant temperature display
→
237
A
Ð Electric power steering malfunction
→
498
B
L Distance warning
→
504
C
# Electrical malfunction
→
499
D
Brakes (red)
→
502
$ USA only
J Canada only
E
ü Seat belt not fastened
→
497
F
Fuel level indicator
G
8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location
indicator
→
499
H
R Rear fog light
→
131
I
6 Restraint system
→
497
J
% This indicator lamp has no function
K
; Check Engine
→
499
L
Electric parking brake applied (red)
→
502
F USA only
! Canada only
M
h Tire pressure monitor
→
508
N
! ABS malfunction
→
505
O
! Electric parking brake (yellow)
→
502
At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (Widescreen Cockpit)
13
14
At a glance – Overhead control panel
1
Sun visors
→
143
2
p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
→
135
3
S Switches automatic interior lighting con‐
trol on/off
→
135
4
G SOS button
→
332
5
c Switches the front interior lighting
on/off
→
135
6
; me button
→
332
7
u Switches the rear interior lighting
on/off
→
135
8
p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/off
→
135
9
Eyeglasses compartment
→
112
A
3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel
→
84
3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind
→
84
B
Inside rearview mirror
→
141
At a glance – Overhead control panel
15
16
At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment
1
Adjusts the seats electrically
→
96
2
Switches the seat heating on/off
→
101
3
Switches the seat ventilation on/off
→
102
4
Adjusts the front passenger seat from the
driver's seat
→
96
5
&%Locks/unlocks the vehicle
→
70
6
Opens/closes the tailgate
→
74
7
Operates the outside mirrors
→
140
8
W Opens/closes the right side window
→
80
9
W Opens/closes the rear right side win‐
dow
→
80
A
Child safety lock for the rear side windows
→
63
B
W Opens/closes the rear left side window
→
80
C
W Opens/closes the left side window
→
80
D
Opens the door
→
70
E
Sets the memory function
→
109
F
Sets the seat fore-and-aft position
→
94
G
Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support
→
97
H
Configures the seat settings
→
100
I
Adjusts the head restraints
→
98
J
Adjusts the seat height
→
94
K
Adjusts the seat backrest inclination
→
94
At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment
17
18
At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
1
QR code for accessing the rescue card
→
28
2
Safety vests
→
384
3
me button and SOS button
→
332
4
Checking and adding operating fluids
→
439
5
Tow-starting and towing away
→
397
6
Flat tire
→
384
7
Starting assistance
→
394
8
Hazard warning lamps
→
132
9
Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tire
pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing
the rescue card
→
168
A
Tow-starting and towing away
→
397
B
Tire-change tool kit
→
427
C
TIREFIT kit
→
386
At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
19
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
Õ Operator's Manual
#
Select a menu item.
You also have the option of calling up the Opera‐
tor's Manual within a main function (e.g. via Info
on Phone).
The Digital Operator's Manual describes the
function and operation of:
R
The vehicle
R
The multimedia system
For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man‐
ual is deactivated while driving.
The Digital Operator's Manual contains the fol‐
lowing menu items:
R
Search: allows you to search precisely for
keywords.
R
Quick start: provides you with important
information so that you can start using your
vehicle immediately.
R
Tips: provides tips on how to use your vehicle
in certain situations.
R
Messages: provides you with further informa‐
tion about the messages in the instrument
cluster.
R
Bookmarks: provides you with a list of all the
bookmarks you have stored yourself.
1
Picture
2
Menu
3
Navigation window
Some sections of the Digital Operator's Manual,
such as warnings, can be made visible by high‐
lighting and pressing them.
%
The Operator's Manual can also be found in
the Mercedes-Benz Guides app in all com‐
mon app stores.
20
Digital Operator's Manual
Protecting the environment
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to operating conditions and
personal driving style
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is
directly related to the way you operate the
vehicle.
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally
responsible manner to help protect the envi‐
ronment. Please observe the following rec‐
ommendations on operating conditions and
personal driving style.
Operating conditions:
#
Make sure that the tire pressure is cor‐
rect.
#
Do not carry any unnecessary weight
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no
longer need them).
#
Adhere to the service intervals.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐
ute to environmental protection.
#
Always have maintenance work carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
#
Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
#
Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary.
#
Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front.
#
Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration
and braking.
#
Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum
engine speed.
#
Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐
fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop
function.
#
Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO
display for a fuel-efficient driving style.
Environmental issues and recommendations:
It is recommended that you re-use or recycle
materials instead of just disposing of them.
The relevant environmental guidelines and regu‐
lations serve to protect the environment and
must be strictly observed.
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by not using recycled
reconditioned components
Daimler AG offers recycled reconditioned
components and parts with the same quality
as new parts. The same entitlement from the
Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts.
#
Use recycled reconditioned compo‐
nents and parts from Daimler AG.
General notes
21
*
NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐
ciency of the restraint systems from
installing accessory parts or from repairs
or welding
Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices,
as well as control units and sensors for the
restraint systems, may be installed in the fol‐
lowing areas of your vehicle:
R
Doors
R
Door pillars
R
Door sills
R
Seats
R
Cockpit
R
Instrument cluster
R
Center console
R
Lateral roof frame
#
Do not install accessory parts such as
audio systems in these areas.
#
Do not carry out repairs or welding.
#
Have aftermarket installation of acces‐
sories carried out at a qualified special‐
ist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of your
vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well
as accessories relevant to safety which have not
been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐
vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal‐
function. Only use Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels
and accessories that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle model.
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts are subject to
strict quality control. Each part has been spe‐
cially developed, manufactured or selected for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and fine-tuned for them.
Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz
Genuine Parts are available for Mercedes-Benz
models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain
a supply of Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition,
strategically located parts delivery centers pro‐
vide for quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number
(VIN) (/ page 437) when ordering Mercedes-
Benz Genuine Parts.
Operator's Manual
This Operator's Manual describes all models and
all standard and optional equipment available for
your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man‐
ual going to press. Country-specific differences
are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This is also
the case for systems and functions relevant to
safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle
may differ from that in the descriptions and illus‐
trations.
The original purchase agreement for your vehicle
contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi‐
cle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
22
General notes
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept in
the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe
the following points:
R
service points or replacement parts may not
be available immediately.
R
unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi‐
cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
R
the fuel may have an extremely low octane
number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine
damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in
Europe through our European Delivery Program.
For more information, please consult an author‐
ized Mercedes‑Benz service center, or write to
one of the following address:
in the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
in Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Maintenance
Your customer advisor confirms the service in
the service report.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro‐
gram offers technical help in the case of a
breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
You can find further information in the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty booklet
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu‐
ment wallet.
Change of address or change of ownership
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Notification of address change" in the
Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) on the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐
tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We
can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces‐
sary.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera‐
ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the
next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi‐
cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of
Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet
or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
General notes
23
Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐
tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Possible danger due to substances hazard‐
ous to health
In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"),
the following detachable label has been added to
each vehicle sold in California:
Operating safety
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐
functions or system failures
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this could result in malfunctions
or system failures.
#
Always have the prescribed service/
maintenance work as well any required
repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury as
a result of incorrect modifications to
electronic component parts
Modification to electronic components, their
software or wiring could impair their function
and/or the function of other networked com‐
ponent parts. In particular, systems relevant
to safety could also be affected.
As a result, they may no longer function as
intended and/or endanger the operating
safety of the vehicle.
#
Never tamper with the wiring and elec‐
tronic component parts or their soft‐
ware.
#
You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in
"Technical data".
&
WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable
materials on hot parts of the exhaust
system
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system.
#
When driving on unpaved roads or off-
road, regularly check the vehicle under‐
side.
24
General notes
#
Remove trapped plants or other flam‐
mable material.
#
If there is damage, consult a qualified
specialist workshop immediately.
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle
In the following situations, in particular, there
is a risk of damage to the vehicle:
R
The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high curb or an unpaved road
R
The vehicle is driven too fast over an
obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot‐
hole
R
A heavy object strikes the underbody or
chassis components
In situations such as this, the body, the
underbody, chassis components, wheels or
tires could be damaged without the damage
being visible. Components damaged in this
way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of
an accident, may not absorb the loads that
arise as intended.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam‐
mable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can collect between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. These materials may
ignite if they come into contact with hot
parts on the exhaust system.
#
Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
or
#
If driving safety is impaired while con‐
tinuing your journey, pull over and stop
the vehicle immediately in accordance
with the traffic conditions, and contact
a qualified specialist workshop.
Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi‐
cle components
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com‐
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: 1) These
devices may not cause harmful interference, and
2) These devices must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation. Changes or modifications
not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol‐
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may
not cause interference, and (2) These devices
must accept any interference, including interfer‐
ence that may cause undesired operation of the
device."
USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi‐
ces (Model: D-WMI2015A): this device complies
with Part 18 of the FCC Rules."
The name and address of the responsible party
is:
Continental Automotive Systems US Inc.
2400 Executive Hills Drive
Auburn Hills, MI 48326-2980
United States of America
General notes
25
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐
necting devices to the diagnostics con‐
nection
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of vehicle systems.
As a result, the operating safety of the vehi‐
cle could be affected.
#
Only connect the vehicle diagnostics
connection to devices which have been
tested with regard to their use and are
considered safe.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardizes the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
#
Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#
Always install the floor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that there is always sufficient room for
the pedals.
#
Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
*
NOTE Battery discharging from using
devices connected to the diagnostics
connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection
drains the battery.
#
Check the charge level of the battery.
#
If the charge level is low, charge the
battery, e.g. by driving a considerable
distance.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con‐
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor‐
mation being reset, for example. This may lead
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
the next emissions inspection during the main
inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali‐
fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
special skills, tools and qualifications to cor‐
rectly carry out the work required on your vehi‐
cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant
works.
Always have the following work carried out on
your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:
R
Safety-relevant works
R
Service and maintenance work
R
Repair work
R
Modifications as well as installations and
conversions
R
Work on electronic components
26
General notes
Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz
service center.
Correct use of the vehicle
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others
could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave
warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information in particular
when driving your vehicle:
R
the safety notes in this manual
R
technical data for the vehicle
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi‐
ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti‐
fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis‐
faction, please discuss the problem again with
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec‐
essary, contact us at one of the following
addresses:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Customer Relations Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed‐
eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) (inside the USA), go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis‐
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash‐
ington, DC 20590, USA.
Further information on vehicle safety can be
found at: http://www.safercar.gov
General notes
27
Limited Warranty
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising
from violation of these operating instruc‐
tions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola‐
tion of these operating instructions.
This damage is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
#
Follow the instructions in these operat‐
ing instructions on proper operation of
your vehicle as well as on possible vehi‐
cle damage.
QR code for rescue card
The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and
on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event
of an accident, rescue services can use the QR
code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card
for your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐
tains the most important information about your
vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the
electric lines.
Further information can be obtained at http://
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage
Electronic control units
Electronic control units are installed in your vehi‐
cle. Some of these are necessary for the safe
operation of your vehicle, while some assist you
when driving (driver assistance systems). In
addition, your vehicle provides comfort and
entertainment functions, which are also made
possible by electronic control units.
Electronic control units contain data memories
which can temporarily or permanently store
technical information about the vehicle's operat‐
ing state, component loads, maintenance
requirements and technical events or malfunc‐
tions.
In general, this information documents the state
of a component part, a module, a system or the
surroundings such as:
R
Operating status of system components (e.g.
fill levels, battery status, tire pressure)
R
Status messages concerning the vehicle or
its individual components (e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/speed, longitudinal accel‐
eration, lateral acceleration, display of fas‐
tened seat belts)
R
Malfunctions or faults in important system
components (e.g. lights, brakes)
R
Information on events leading to vehicle
damage
R
System reactions in special driving situations
(e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of sta‐
bility control systems)
R
Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain
sensor)
In addition to providing the actual control unit
function, this data assists the manufacturer in
detecting and rectifying malfunctions and opti‐
mizing vehicle functions. The majority of this
28
General notes
data is temporary and is only processed in the
vehicle itself. Only a small portion of the data is
stored in the event or fault memory.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical data
from the vehicle can be read out by service net‐
work employees (e.g. workshops, manufactur‐
ers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services).
Services include repair services, maintenance
processes, warranty claims and quality assur‐
ance measures, for example. The read out is per‐
formed via the legally prescribed port for the
diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The
respective service network locations or third
parties collect, process and use the data. They
document technical statuses of the vehicle,
assist in finding malfunctions and improving
quality and are transmitted to the manufacturer,
if necessary. Furthermore, the manufacturer is
subject to product liability. For this, the manu‐
facturer requires technical data from vehicles.
Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a
service outlet as part of repair or maintenance
work.
Depending on the selected equipment, you can
import data into vehicle convenience and info‐
tainment functions yourself.
This includes, for example:
R
Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia
system
R
Address book data for use in connection with
an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐
grated navigation system
R
Entered navigation destinations
R
Data about the use of Internet services
This data can be saved locally in the vehicle or it
is located on a device which you have connected
to the vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB flash
drive or MP3 player). If this data is stored in the
vehicle, you can delete it at any time. This data
is sent to third parties only at your request, par‐
ticularly when you use online services in accord‐
ance with the settings that you have selected.
You can store or change convenience settings/
individualization in the vehicle at any time.
Depending on the equipment, this includes, for
example:
R
Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐
tions
R
Suspension and climate control settings
R
Customizations such as interior lighting
If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can
connect your smartphone or another mobile end
device to the vehicle. You can control this by
means of the control elements integrated in the
vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone
can be output via the multimedia system. Cer‐
tain information is simultaneously transferred to
your smartphone.
Depending on the type of integration, this can
include:
R
General vehicle data
R
Position data
This allows you to use selected apps on your
smartphone, such as navigation or music play‐
back. There is no further interaction between the
smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehi‐
cle data is not directly accessible. Which type of
General notes
29
further data processing occurs is determined by
the provider of the specific app used. Which set‐
tings you can make, if any, depends on the spe‐
cific app and the operating system of your
smartphone.
Online services
Wireless network connection
If your vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
tion, it enables data to be exchanged between
your vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐
less network connection is enabled via the vehi‐
cle's transmission and reception unit or via con‐
nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones).
Online functions can be used via the wireless
network connection. This includes online serv‐
ices and applications/apps provided by the man‐
ufacturer or other providers.
Manufacturer's services
Regarding online services of the manufacturer,
the individual functions are described by the
manufacturer in a suitable place (e.g. Operator's
Manual, website of the manufacturer) along with
the relevant data protection information. Per‐
sonal data may be used for the provision of
online services. Data is exchanged via a secure
connection, e.g. the manufacturer's designated
IT systems. Personal data is collected, pro‐
cessed and used via the provision of services
exclusively on the basis of legal permissions or
with prior consent.
The services and functions (sometimes subject
to a fee) can usually be activated or deactivated.
In some cases, this also applies to the entire
vehicle's data connection. This excludes, in par‐
ticular, legally prescribed functions and services.
Third party services
If it is possible to use online services from other
providers, these services are the responsibility
of the provider in question and subject to that
provider's data protection conditions and terms
of use. The manufacturer has no influence on
the content exchanged.
For this reason, please ask the service provider
for information about the type, extent and pur‐
pose of the collection and use of personal data
when services are provided by third parties.
Multimedia system/Mercedes me connect
If the vehicle is equipped with the multimedia
system or Mercedes me connect, additional data
about the vehicle's operation, the use of the
vehicle in certain situations, and the location of
the vehicle may be compiled by the multimedia
system or Mercedes me connect.
For additional information please refer to the
chapter "Multimedia system" and/or the
Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
USA only:
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit‐
uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle's systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
30
General notes
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
R
Whether or not the driver and front
passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened
R
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal and
R
How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understand‐
ing of the circumstances in which accidents and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by
your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties that have the special
equipment, such as law enforcement, can read
the information by accessing the vehicle or the
EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat‐
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci‐
dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract
data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with‐
out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les‐
see. Exceptions to this representation include
responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by
federal, state or local government; in connection
with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA
or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required
by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter‐
ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys‐
tem Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of December
2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to
EDRs.
Copyright
Free and open-source software
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle can be found on
the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet
and with updates on the following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Registered trademarks
R
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth SIG Inc.
R
DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
General notes
31
R
Dolby
®
and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
are reg‐
istered trademarks of Mercedes-Benz AG.
R
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
R
Burmester
®
is a registered trademark of
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windows Media
®
are regis‐
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R
SIRIUS
®
is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
R
HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq‐
uity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R
ZAGATSurvey
®
and related brands are regis‐
tered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
32
General notes
Restraint system
Protection provided by the restraint system
The restraint system includes the following com‐
ponents:
R
Seat belt system
R
Airbags
R
Child restraint system
R
Child seat securing systems
The restraint system can help prevent the vehi‐
cle occupants from coming into contact with
parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an
accident. In the event of an accident, the
restraint system can also reduce the forces to
which the vehicle occupants are subjected.
A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐
tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the
detected accident situation, Emergency Tension‐
ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro‐
tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt.
Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags
are not deployed in every accident.
In order for the restraint system to provide the
intended level of protection, each vehicle occu‐
pant must observe the following information:
R
Fasten seat belts correctly.
R
Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest.
R
Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐
sible.
R
Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m)
tall in an additional restraint system suitable
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
However, no system available today can com‐
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every
accident situation. In particular, the seat belt
and airbag generally do not protect against
objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
It is also not possible to completely rule out the
risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Reduced restraint system protection
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
modifications to the restraint system
The restraint system can no longer function
correctly after alterations have been made.
The restraint system may then not protect
the vehicle occupants as intended by failing
in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for
example
#
Never alter the parts of the restraint
system.
#
Never tamper with the wiring or any
electronic component parts or their
software.
If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom‐
modate a person with disabilities, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details.
USA only: for details, contact our Customer
Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1‑800‑367‑6372).
Occupant safety
33
Restraint system functionality
When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is
performed, during which the 6 restraint sys‐
tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the vehicle is started.
The components of the restraint system are then
functional.
Malfunctioning restraint system
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys‐
tem if:
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously or repeatedly during a
journey
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
tions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be trig‐
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as
intended during an accident. This may affect
the Emergency Tensioning Devices or air‐
bags, for example.
#
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Function of the restraint system in an acci‐
dent
How the restraint system works is determined by
the severity of the impact detected and the type
of accident anticipated:
R
Frontal impact
R
Rear impact
R
Side impact
R
Rollover
The activation thresholds for the components of
the restraint system are determined based on
the evaluation of the sensor values measured at
various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-
emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of
the components of the restraint system must
take place in good time at the start of the colli‐
sion.
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci‐
sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do
they provide an indication of airbag deployment.
The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐
out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed
are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration
is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts
such as longitudinal members are hit, for exam‐
ple, this may result in sufficiently high levels of
vehicle deceleration.
34
Occupant safety
The components of the restraint system can
be activated or deployed independently of
each other:
Component Detected deploy‐
ment situation
Emergency Tension‐
ing Devices
Frontal impact, rear
impact, side impact,
rollover
Driver's airbag, front
passenger airbag
Frontal impact
Knee airbag Frontal impact
Side airbag Side impact
Window curtain air‐
bag
Side impact, rollover,
frontal impact
PRE-SAFE
®
Impulse
Side
Side impact
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, make sure, both before and during
the journey, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct (/ page 45).
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag
components
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed.
#
Do not touch the air bag parts.
#
Have a deployed air bag replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon
as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐
ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig‐
gered or an airbag deployed.
If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig‐
gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a
bang, and a small amount of powder may also be
released:
R
The bang will not generally affect your hear‐
ing.
R
In general, the powder released is not haz‐
ardous to health but may cause short-term
breathing difficulties to persons suffering
from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle
immediately or open the window in order to
prevent breathing difficulties.
Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning
Devices contain perchlorate material, which may
require special handling or environmental pro‐
tection measures. National guidelines regarding
waste disposal must be observed. In California,
see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Seat belts
Protection provided by the seat belt
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before
starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide
the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
Occupant safety
35
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
not perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, for example, in the
event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.
#
Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐
pants have their seat belts fastened
correctly and are sitting properly.
Always observe the instructions about the cor‐
rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat
(/ page 93).
In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro‐
vide the intended level of protection, each vehi‐
cle occupant must observe the following infor‐
mation:
R
The seat belt must not be twisted and must
fit tightly and snugly across the body.
R
The seat belt must be routed across the cen‐
ter of the shoulder and as low down across
the hips as possible.
R
The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck nor be routed under
your arm or behind your back.
R
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
R
Push the lap belt down as far as possible
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐
der section of the belt. Never route the lap
belt across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular
care with this.
R
Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐
ted, abrasive or fragile objects.
R
Only one person should use each seat belt at
any one time. Never allow babies and chil‐
dren to travel sitting on the lap of another
vehicle occupant.
R
Never secure objects with a seat belt if the
seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants. Always observe the
instructions for loading the vehicle when
securing objects, luggage or loads
(/ page 110).
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion,
are ever placed between a person and the
seat.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐
ped with a special seatbelt retractor:
R
Front passenger seat
R
Rear seats
The seat belts for the folding bench seat in the
cargo compartment are not equipped with a spe‐
cial seatbelt retractor.
Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt
retractor (/ page 55).
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to
observe the instructions and safety notes on
"Children in the vehicle" (/ page 50).
36
Occupant safety
Limitations of the protection provided by the
seat belt
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved the
seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐
ple.
#
Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
ning your journey.
#
Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the center of your shoul‐
der.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death when
additional restraint systems are not used
for persons with a smaller build
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear
the seat belt correctly without a suitable
additional restraint system.
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
not perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, for example, in the
event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.
#
Always secure persons under 5 ft
(1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys‐
tem.
&
WARNING Danger of injury or death due
to blocked seat belt anchorages
The restraint effect of the seat belt is
impaired if objects between the front seat
and the door are blocking the movable seat
belt anchorage on the front seat.
The seat belt may not then provide the
proper protection.
#
Before starting a journey, make sure
that there are no objects between the
front seat and the door.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
damaged or modified seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the
following situations:
R
The seat belt is damaged, has been modi‐
fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
R
The seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R
Modifications have been made to the
Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt
anchorage or seat belt retractor
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.
Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or
fail in the event of an accident, for example.
Occupant safety
37
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may
be deployed unintentionally or not function
as intended.
#
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency
Tensioning Devices, seat belt ancho‐
rages or seat belt retractors.
#
Make sure that the seat belts are not
damaged, are not worn and are clean.
#
Always have the seat belts checked
immediately after an accident at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts that are approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten‐
sioning Devices
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
that have been deployed are no longer opera‐
tional and are unable to perform their inten‐
ded protective function.
#
Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi‐
ately replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
after an accident.
*
NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it
may become trapped in the door or in the
seat mechanism.
#
Always ensure that an unused seat belt
is fully retracted.
Fastening and adjusting seat belts
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the
seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐
not be pulled out any further.
#
Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the
seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐
responding seat.
#
Press and hold the seat belt outlet release
and slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired
position.
#
Let go of the seat belt outlet release and
ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into
position.
38
Occupant safety
Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐
bag shutoff:
*
NOTE Deployment of the Emergency
Tensioning Device and side air bag when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the unoccupied front
passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning
Device and the side air bag may also deploy
in the event of an accident along with other
systems.
#
Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Vehicles without automatic front passenger
airbag shutoff:
*
NOTE Deployment of the Emergency
Tensioning Device when the front-
passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the unoccupied front-
passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning
Device may also deploy in the event of an
accident along with other systems.
#
Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Seat belt adjustment function
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE
®
: If the front seat belt
is not pulled tightly across your body, the seat
belt adjustment may automatically apply a cer‐
tain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt
tightly while it is adjusting.
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt
adjustment function using the multimedia sys‐
tem (/ page 39).
Releasing seat belts
#
Press the release button in the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the
seat belt tongue.
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment
via the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Belt Adjustment
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Seat belt warning function for the driver and
front passenger
The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru‐
ment Display is a reminder that all vehicle occu‐
pants must wear their seat belts correctly.
The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six
seconds every time the vehicle is started.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
When the driver's and front passenger's doors
are closed and the driver and front passenger
have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt
warning goes out.
Occupant safety
39
In the following cases, the seat belt warning
lights up during a journey if:
R
The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) and the driver's or front
passenger seat belt is not fastened.
R
The driver or front passenger unfastens their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
Airbags
Overview of airbags
1
Knee airbag
2
Driver's airbag
3
Front passenger airbag
4
Window curtain airbag
5
Side airbag
The installation location of an airbag can be rec‐
ognized by the AIRBAG marking.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional
protection for the respective vehicle occupant.
Potential protection from each airbag:
AIRBAG Potential protection for:
Knee airbag Thigh, knee and lower leg
Driver's airbag,
front passenger
airbag
Head and ribcage
Window curtain
airbag
Head
Side airbag Ribcage, also pelvis for
front seat occupants
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
if the front-passenger airbag is enabled
If the front-passenger front airbag is enabled,
a child on the front-passenger seat may be
struck by the front-passenger airbag during
an accident.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
AIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
When installing a child restraint system to the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
cific information (/ page 60). Also, always
observe the notes on rearward-facing or
forward-facing child restraint systems on the
front passenger seat.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐
bag shutoff:
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, make sure, both before and during
40
Occupant safety
the journey, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct (/ page 45).
*
NOTE Important points to remember if
the front passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily
on the front passenger side if:
R
There are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat.
R
The seat belt tongue is engaged in the
seat belt buckle of the front passenger
seat and the front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
#
Stow objects in a suitable place.
#
Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Depending on the detected accident situation,
the window curtain airbag on the front
passenger side may deploy. The airbag is
deployed regardless of whether the front
passenger seat is occupied.
Protection by the airbags
Depending on the accident situation, an airbag
may supplement the protection offered by a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position,
the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐
tective function and deployment may even
cause further injuries.
In order to avoid risks, each vehicle occupant
must always make sure of the following:
R
Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to
ensure that the lap belt never lies across
the abdomen.
R
Adopt the correct seat position and keep
as far away as possible from the airbags.
R
Observe the following information.
#
Always make sure that there are no
objects between the airbag and vehicle
occupant.
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment
of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must
observe the following information in particular:
R
Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; the driver's seat and front
passenger seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
When doing so, always observe the informa‐
tion on the correct driver's seat position
(/ page 93).
R
Only hold the steering wheel by the steering
wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully
deployed.
R
Always lean against the seat backrest when
the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards
or against the door or side window. You may
otherwise be in the deployment area of the
airbags.
R
Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not
put your feet on the cockpit, for example.
Occupant safety
41
Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy‐
ment area of the airbag.
R
If children are traveling in the vehicle,
observe the additional notes (/ page 50).
R
Always stow and secure objects correctly.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an
airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle
occupant must always make sure of the follow‐
ing in particular:
R
There are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air‐
bag.
R
There are no objects between the seat, door
and door pillar (B-pillar).
R
There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
R
There are no accessory parts, such as mobile
navigation devices, mobile phones or cup
holders, attached to the vehicle within the
deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the
cockpit, on the door, on the side window or
on the side wall trim.
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning
straps or retaining straps must be routed or
attached to the vehicle within the deploy‐
ment area of an airbag. Always comply with
the accessory manufacturer's installation
instructions and, in particular, the notes on
suitable places for installation.
R
There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable place.
Limited protection provided by airbags
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐
cations to the airbag cover
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix
objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may
no longer function correctly.
#
Never modify the cover of an airbag and
do not affix objects to it.
The installation location of an airbag is identified
by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 40).
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
the use of unsuitable seat covers
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre‐
vent the deployment of air bags integrated
into the seats.
Consequently, the air bags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they are designed to
do. In addition, operation of the automatic
front passenger air bag shutoff may be
restricted.
#
You should only use seat covers that
have been approved for the correspond‐
ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
tions of the sensors in the door paneling
Sensors to control the airbags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per‐
formed correctly to the doors or door panel‐
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to
the function of the sensors being impaired.
The airbags might therefore not function
properly any more.
42
Occupant safety
Consequently, the airbags cannot protect
vehicle occupants as they are designed to
do.
#
Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors.
#
Always have work on the doors or door
paneling carried out at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed
airbag
A deployed airbag no longer has a protective
function and cannot protect as intended in
the event of an accident.
#
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified
specialist workshop in order to have the
deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
Status of the front passenger front airbag
Function of the automatic front passenger
airbag shutoff
The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is
able to detect whether the front passenger seat
is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys‐
tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or
disabled accordingly.
When installing a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, always make sure of the
following:
R
Ensure that the child restraint system is posi‐
tioned correctly (/ page 49).
R
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
R
Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or
behind the child restraint system.
R
Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐
ment.
R
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
front passenger seat.
R
The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the front
passenger seat.
R
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be put under strain by the head
restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐
tion and the head restraint setting accord‐
ingly.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects between the sitting surface and
the child restraint system
Objects between the sitting surface and the
child restraint system could affect the func‐
tion of the automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff.
This could result in the front passenger air‐
bag not functioning as intended during an
accident.
#
Do not place any objects between the
sitting surface and the child restraint
system.
Occupant safety
43
#
The entire base of the child restraint
system must always rest on the sitting
surface of the front passenger seat.
#
The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possi‐
ble, be resting on the seat backrest of
the front passenger seat.
#
Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
A person on the front passenger seat must
observe the following information:
R
Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 35).
R
Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest.
R
Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐
sible.
The front passenger airbag may otherwise be
disabled by mistake, for example in the following
situations:
R
The front passenger transfers their weight by
supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
R
The front passenger sits in such a way that
their weight is raised from the sitting sur‐
face.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
deactivated front passenger airbag
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa‐
bled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could
then, for example, come into contact with
the vehicle interior, especially if the person is
sitting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐
bled in accordance with the person in the
front passenger seat.
R
The front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
R
The person is seated correctly.
#
Ensure, both before and during the jour‐
ney, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas‐
sification of the person or child restraint system
on the front passenger seat takes place after the
front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the
status of the front passenger airbag.
Always observe the notes on the function of the
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
(/ page 45).
44
Occupant safety
Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐
tor lamps
Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff
When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is
performed during which the two PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up
simultaneously.
The status of the front passenger airbag is dis‐
played after the self-test:
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
60 seconds, subsequently both indicator
lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
OFF): the front passenger airbag is able to
deploy in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu‐
ously: the front passenger airbag is disabled.
It will then not be deployed in the event of an
accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the status of the front passenger
airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
and the 6 restraint system warning lamp
light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat
may not be used. Also in this case, do not install
a child restraint system on the front passenger
seat. Have automatic front passenger airbag
shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Status display
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both before and during the journey, that the sta‐
tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for
the current situation.
After installing a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con‐
tinuously.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
using a rearward-facing child restraint
system when the front passenger front
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag
can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
Always ensure that the front passenger air‐
bag is deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
Occupant safety
45
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat protected by an ENABLED
FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
When installing a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
cific information (/ page 60).
Depending on the child restraint system and the
stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do
not install the rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat.
Instead, install the rearward-facing child
restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
After installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat: depending on the child restraint system
and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off.
Always observe the following information.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect positioning of the forward-
facing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat
and you position the front passenger seat too
close to the cockpit, in the event of an acci‐
dent, the child could:
R
Come into contact with the vehicle inte‐
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp is lit, for example.
R
Be struck by the air bag if the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is off.
#
Always move the front passenger seat
as far back as possible and fully retract
the seat cushion length adjustment.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the seat
belt outlet on the vehicle to the shoul‐
der belt guide on the child restraint sys‐
tem. The shoulder belt strap must be
routed forwards and downwards from
the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary,
adjust the seat belt outlet and the front
passenger seat accordingly.
#
Always observe the child restraint sys‐
tem manufacturer's installation instruc‐
tions.
When installing a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
cific information (/ page 60).
If a person is sitting on the front passenger
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐
tinuously or be off, depending on the person's
stature.
A person on the front passenger seat must
always observe the following information:
R
If the front passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person with a stature correspond‐
ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This
indicates that the front passenger airbag is
enabled.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person
46
Occupant safety
with a build corresponding to that of an adult
should not use the front passenger seat.
Instead, they should use a rear seat.
R
If the front passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp either lights up continuously
or remains off, depending on the result of the
classification.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off: move the front passenger
seat as far back as possible, or the per‐
son of smaller stature should use a rear
seat.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously: the person of
smaller stature should not use the front
passenger seat.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death when
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the system self-test,
the front passenger air bag is deactivated. It
will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐
dent. In this case, the front passenger air bag
cannot perform its intended protective func‐
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front
passenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle interior, especially if
the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the
front passenger air bag is enabled or
deactivated in accordance with the per‐
son in the front passenger seat.
R
The person is seated properly with a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt.
R
The front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Child restraint system on the front passenger
seat (/ page 60).
PRE-SAFE
®
system
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant protec‐
tion)
PRE-SAFE
®
is able to detect certain critical driv‐
ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐
ures to protect the vehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE
®
can implement the following meas‐
ures independently of each other:
R
Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
R
Closing the side windows.
Occupant safety
47
R
Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the
sliding sunroof.
R
Vehicles with memory function: Move the
front passenger seat to a more favorable
seat position.
R
Vehicles with multicontour seat: Increase
the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of
the seat backrest.
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Sound: provided that the multi‐
media system is switched on, generates a
brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐
tective mechanism of a person's hearing.
*
NOTE Damage caused by objects in the
footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐
tion may result in damage to the seat and/or
the object.
#
Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE
®
system measures
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
You will need to perform certain settings your‐
self.
#
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest back slightly.
The locking mechanism releases.
Function of PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS can detect certain impacts,
particularly an imminent rear impact, and take
pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle
occupants. These measures cannot necessarily
prevent an imminent impact.
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS can implement the following
measures independently of each other:
R
Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
R
Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle
is stationary. This brake application is can‐
celed automatically when the vehicle pulls
away.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
System limits
The system will not initiate any action in the fol‐
lowing situations:
R
when backing up
The system will not initiate any braking applica‐
tion in the following situations:
R
whilst driving
or
R
when entering or exiting a parking space
while using Active Parking Assist
Function of PRE-SAFE
®
Impulse Side
If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-
SAFE
®
Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the
front seat vehicle occupant's upper body
towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by
rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat
48
Occupant safety
side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on
which the impact is anticipated. This increases
the distance between the door and the vehicle
occupant.
If PRE-SAFE
®
Impulse Side has been deployed or
is faulty, the PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative
See Operator's Manual display message appears
(/ page 448).
Safely transporting children in the vehicle
Always observe when children are traveling
in the vehicle
%
Also strictly observe the safety notes for the
specific situation. In this way you can recog‐
nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil‐
dren are traveling in the vehicle
(/ page 50).
Be diligent
Bear in mind that neglecting to secure a child in
the child restraint system may have serious con‐
sequences. Always be diligent in securing a child
carefully before every journey.
To improve protection for children younger than
12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height,
Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the
following information:
R
Always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
cle.
R
The child restraint system must be appropri‐
ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
R
The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal‐
ling a child restraint system.
Accident statistics show that children secured
on the rear seats are generally safer than chil‐
dren secured on the front seats. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
a child restraint system on a rear seat.
Generic term "child restraint system"
The generic term child restraint system is used
in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys‐
tem is, for example:
R
A baby car seat
R
A rearward-facing child seat
R
A forward-facing child seat
R
A child booster seat with a backrest and seat
belt guide
Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child
booster seat with a backrest.
The child restraint system must be appropriate
to the age, weight and size of the child.
Observing laws and legal requirements
Always observe the legal requirements when
using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
Observing standards for child restraint sys‐
tems
All child restraint systems must meet the follow‐
ing standards:
R
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
R
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system
complies with the standards can be found on an
instruction label on the child restraint system.
This confirmation can also be found in the instal‐
Occupant safety
49
lation instructions that are included with the
child restraint system.
Detecting risks, avoiding danger
Securing systems for child restraint systems
in the vehicle
Only use the following securing systems for child
restraint systems:
R
The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets
R
The vehicle's seat belt system
R
The Top Tether anchorages
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system is preferred.
Simply attaching to the securing rings on the
vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child
restraint system incorrectly.
When securing a child with the integrated seat
belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system, always comply with the permissible
gross weight for the child and child restraint sys‐
tem (/ page 55).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a
height where a three-point seat belt can be fitted
properly without a booster seat.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child
booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.
Advantage of a rearward-facing child
restraint system
It is preferable to transport a baby or a small
child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint
system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo‐
site direction to the direction of travel and faces
backwards.
Babies and small children have comparatively
weak neck muscles in relation to the size and
weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer‐
vical spine during an accident can be reduced in
a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Always secure a child restraint system cor‐
rectly
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by incorrect installation of the child
restraint system
If the child restraint system is incorrectly
installed on a suitable seating position, it
cannot perform its intended protective func‐
tion.
The child cannot be restrained in the event of
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden
change of direction.
#
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions for the child
restraint system and its correct use.
#
Make sure that the entire base of the
child restraint system always rests on
the sitting surface of the seat.
#
Never place objects under or behind
the child restraint system, e.g. cush‐
ions.
50
Occupant safety
#
Always use child restraint systems with
the original cover designed for them.
#
Always replace damaged covers with
genuine covers.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
unsecured child restraint systems in the
vehicle
If the child restraint system is not correctly
installed or secured, it could release in the
event of an accident, sudden braking or a
sudden change in direction.
The child restraint system could be flung
around and hit vehicle occupants.
#
Always install child restraint systems
correctly, even when not in use.
#
Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
R
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions as well as the vehicle-specific
information:
-
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on the rear seat
(/ page 55).
-
Secure the child restraint system with the
seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 59).
-
Secure the child restraint system with the
seat belt on the front passenger seat
(/ page 61). Observe the specific
instructions for the rearward-facing and
forward-facing child restraint systems
(/ page 60).
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both before and during the jour‐
ney, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct for the cur‐
rent situation (/ page 45).
R
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle
interior and on the child restraint system.
R
Also secure Top Tether if present.
Do not modify the child restraint system
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐
cations to the child restraint system
The child restraint system may no longer
function as it is supposed to if you make
modifications or attach objects to it, e.g. toys
or unsuitable accessories. This poses an
increased risk of injury!
Never modify the child restraint system. Only
attach accessories which the manufacturer
of the child restraint system has authorized
especially for this child restraint system.
Only use child restraint systems which are in
proper working condition
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by the use of damaged child restraint
systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐
tems that have been subjected to a load in
an accident may then not be able to perform
their intended protective function.
Occupant safety
51
The child cannot be restrained in the event of
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden
change of direction.
#
Always replace child restraint systems
immediately that have been damaged or
involved in an accident.
#
Have the securing systems for the child
restraint systems checked at a qualified
specialist workshop before installing a
child restraint system again.
Avoid direct sunlight
&
WARNING Risk of burns when the child
seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to
direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
Children could suffer burns from these parts,
particularly on metallic parts of the child
restraint system.
#
Always make sure that the child
restraint system is not exposed to
direct sunlight.
#
Protect it with a blanket, for example.
#
If the child restraint system has been
exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
cool before securing a child into it.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Observe when stopping or parking
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
&
WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to
exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
If people – particularly children – are
exposed to extreme temperatures over an
extended period of time, there is a risk of
serious or even fatal injury.
#
Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐
dren – unattended in the vehicle.
52
Occupant safety
#
Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐
tended.
Occupant safety
53
Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system
Securing systems for child restraint systems
Vehicle seat
Left/right rear seat
Favored securing system:
®
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing sys‐
tem
¯
Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 57)
Alternative securing system:
R
Vehicle seat belt
Front passenger seat
Securing system:
R
Vehicle seat belt
Be sure to observe:
R
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both before and during the journey, that the sta‐
tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the
current situation (/ page 45).
R
Notes on automatic front passenger airbag shut‐
off (/ page 43).
Center rear seat
Securing system:
R
Vehicle seat belt
¯
Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 57)
54
Occupant safety
Activating/deactivating the seat belt's spe‐
cial seatbelt retractor
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death if a
seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle
is in motion
If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is
in motion, the child restraint system is no
longer correctly secured. The child seat
safety feature is deactivated and the seat
belt is drawn in a bit by the inertia reel.
It is therefore not possible to engage the seat
belt again.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as
soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions.
#
Activate the child seat safety feature
again and correctly secure the child
restraint system.
When enabled, the special seatbelt retractor
ensures that the seat belts of the front
passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken
once the child restraint system is secured.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐
ped with a special seatbelt retractor:
R
Front passenger seat
R
Rear seats
#
To install a child restraint system: when
installing a child restraint system, always
observe the manufacturer's installation and
operating instructions as well as the informa‐
tion in this Operator's Manual.
#
Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt
outlet.
#
Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt
buckle.
#
To activate the special seatbelt retractor:
pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
When the special seatbelt retractor is activa‐
ted, you should hear a ratcheting sound.
#
Push the child restraint system down until
the seat belt sits tightly.
#
To deactivate the special seatbelt retrac‐
tor: press the release button of the seat belt
buckle.
#
Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to
the seat belt outlet.
Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on the rear seat
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on the rear seat
&
WARNING Risk of injury if the rear
bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
R
If this is the case, the vehicle occupant
would be forced into the seat belt by the
rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat
backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
Occupant safety
55
R
Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com‐
partment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
#
Make sure that the seat backrest and
the rear bench seat/rear seat are
engaged before every trip.
If the left and right seat backrests are not
engaged and locked in place, this will be shown
on the multifunction display on the instrument
cluster.
If the center seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, the red lock verification indica‐
tor will be visible.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
permissible gross mass of the child and
child restraint system is exceeded
For LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys‐
tems in which the child is secured using the
integrated seat belt in the child restraint sys‐
tem, the permissible gross mass of the child
and child restraint system is 73 lb (33 kg).
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lb (33 kg), the
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system
with integrated seat belt does not offer suffi‐
cient protection. An excessive load may be
placed on the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
attachments and the child may not be
restrained in the event of an accident, for
example.
#
If the child and the child restraint sys‐
tem together weigh more than 73 lb
(33 kg), use only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint system that secures the
child with the vehicle seat belt.
#
Also secure the child restraint system
with the Top Tether belt, if available.
Always comply with the information about the
mass of the child restraint system:
R
In the manufacturer's installation and operat‐
ing instructions for the child restraint system
used
R
On a label on the child restraint system, if
present
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass
of the child and child restraint system is still
complied with.
When installing a child restraint system, observe
the following:
O
Always observe the correct use of the seats
and consider their suitability for attaching a
child restraint system.
O
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for
the child restraint system used.
O
Make sure that the child's feet do not come
into contact with the front seat. If neces‐
sary, move the front seat forward slightly.
® When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint system, also observe the follow‐
ing:
O
When using a Group 0/0+ baby car seat
and a Group I rearward-facing child
restraint system on a rear seat: adjust
the front seat so that the seat does not
touch the child restraint system.
56
Occupant safety
O
When using a Group I forward-facing
child restraint system: remove the head
restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐
ble. In addition, the backrest of the child
restraint system must, as far as possible, lie
flat against the backrest of the vehicle seat.
After the child restraint system has been
removed, replace the head restraints imme‐
diately and adjust them correctly.
O
For certain child restraint systems in weight
group II or III, there may be restrictions on
the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi‐
ble contact with the roof.
O
The child restraint system must not be ten‐
sioned between the roof and the seat cush‐
ion and/or be installed facing the wrong
direction. Where possible, adjust the seat
cushion inclination accordingly.
O
The child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraints. Adjust
the head restraints accordingly.
1
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting bracket
Before every journey, make sure that the LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehi‐
cle.
*
NOTE Be careful not to damage the seat
belt for the center seat when installing
the child restraint system
#
Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
ped.
#
Remove and stow away covers 1.
#
Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system to both mounting brackets
in the vehicle.
#
After removing the child seat, re-attach cov‐
ers 1.
Securing Top Tether
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
rear seat backrests are not locked after
installing Top Tether belts
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an acci‐
dent or during braking or sudden changes of
direction.
Occupant safety
57
As a result, child restraint systems cannot
perform their intended protective function.
Rear seat backrests that are not locked can
also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the
event of an accident.
#
Always lock rear seat backrests after
installing Top Tether belts.
#
Observe the lock verification indicator.
If the left and right seat backrests are not
engaged and locked in place, this will be shown
on the multifunction display on the instrument
cluster.
If the center seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, the red lock verification indica‐
tor will be visible.
¯
If the child restraint system is equipped
with a Top Tether belt:
The risk of injury can be reduced by a Top
Tether. The Top Tether belt facilitates an
additional connection between the child
restraint system attached with LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) and the vehicle.
#
If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards
(/ page 99).
#
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system with Top Tether. Comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal‐
lation instructions when doing so.
#
Guide Top Tether belt 5 under head
restraint 1 between the two head restraint
bars.
#
Guide Top Tether belt 5 downwards
between combined cargo cover and net 3
and seat backrest 2.
#
Hook Top Tether hook 6 of Top Tether belt
5 into Top Tether anchorage 4 without
twisting.
#
Tension Top Tether belt 5. Comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal‐
lation instructions when doing so.
#
If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down‐
wards (/ page 99). Make sure that you do
not interfere with the correct routing of Top
Tether belt 5.
58
Occupant safety
Securing the child restraint system with the
seat belt
Securing the child restraint system with the
seat belt on the rear seat
&
WARNING Risk of injury if the rear
bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
R
If this is the case, the vehicle occupant
would be forced into the seat belt by the
rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat
backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
R
Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com‐
partment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
#
Make sure that the seat backrest and
the rear bench seat/rear seat are
engaged before every trip.
If the left and right seat backrests are not
engaged and locked in place, this will be shown
on the multifunction display on the instrument
cluster.
If the center seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, the red lock verification indica‐
tor will be visible.
When installing a belt-secured child restraint
system, observe the following:
O
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions for
the child restraint system used.
O
When using a category 0/0+ baby car
seat and a category I rearward-facing
child restraint system on a rear seat:
adjust the front seat so that the seat does
not touch the child restraint system.
O
When using a category I forward-facing
child restraint system: remove the head
restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐
ble.
After the child restraint system has been
removed, replace the head restraints imme‐
diately and adjust them correctly.
O
The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the rear
seat.
O
For certain child restraint systems in weight
category II or III, there may be restrictions
on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to
possible contact with the roof.
O
The child restraint system must not be ten‐
sioned between the roof and the seat cush‐
ion and/or be installed facing the wrong
direction. Where possible, adjust the seat
cushion inclination accordingly.
O
The child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraints. Adjust
the head restraints accordingly.
O
Make sure that the child's feet do not come
into contact with the front seat. If neces‐
sary, move the front seat forward slightly.
Occupant safety
59
The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐
ped with a child seat safety feature:
R
Front passenger seat
R
Rear seats
The seat belts for the folding bench seat in the
cargo compartment are not equipped with a
child seat safety feature.
When enabled, the child seat safety feature
ensures that the seat belts of the front
passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken
once the child restraint system is secured
(/ page 55).
#
Install the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
rear seat.
#
Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the seat belt
outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt
guide on the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐
wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐
let.
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing
child restraint systems on the front
passenger seat
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
using a rearward-facing child restraint
system when the front passenger front
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag
can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
Always ensure that the front passenger air‐
bag is deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat protected by an ENABLED
FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERI‐
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Observe the specific instructions for the rear‐
ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint
systems (/ page 61).
Always observe the status of the front passenger
airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica‐
tor lamp:
R
When using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag must always be disabled.
This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously
(/ page 45).
R
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena‐
bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy
during an accident.
60
Occupant safety
Securing the child restraint system with the
seat belt on the front passenger seat
When installing a belt-secured child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, always
observe the following:
O
Observe the child restraint system manufac‐
turer's installation and operating instruc‐
tions.
O
When using a forward-facing child restraint
system in category I: remove the head
restraint from the respective seat, if possi‐
ble.
After the child restraint system has been
removed, replace the head restraints imme‐
diately and adjust them correctly.
O
The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the front
passenger seat.
O
For certain child restraint systems in weight
category II or III, there may be restrictions
on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to
possible contact with the roof.
O
The child restraint system must not be ten‐
sioned between the roof and the seat cush‐
ion and/or be installed facing the wrong
direction.
O
The child restraint system must not be put
under strain by the head restraints. Adjust
the head restraints accordingly.
O
Never place objects under or behind the
child restraint system, e.g. cushions.
The seat belt on the front passenger side is
equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
When enabled, the special seat belt retractor
function ensures that the seat belt does not
slacken once the child restraint system is
secured (/ page 55).
#
Set the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and move the seat into the highest
position if possible.
#
Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐
ment.
#
Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that
the front edge of the seat cushion is in the
highest position and the rear edge of the
seat cushion is in the lowest position.
#
Set the seat backrest to the most vertical
position possible.
#
Install the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
front passenger seat.
#
Always make sure that the shoulder belt
strap is correctly routed from the seat belt
outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt
guide on the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐
wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐
let.
#
If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and
the front passenger seat accordingly.
Occupant safety
61
Child safety locks
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock
for the rear doors
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
&
WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to
exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
If people – particularly children – are
exposed to extreme temperatures over an
extended period of time, there is a risk of
serious or even fatal injury.
#
Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐
dren – unattended in the vehicle.
#
Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐
tended.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
could, in particular:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
#
Always activate the child safety locks
installed if children are traveling in the
vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors
and the rear side windows.
62
Occupant safety
The child safety lock on the rear doors secures
each door separately. The doors can no longer
be opened from the inside.
#
Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or
2 (deactivate).
#
Make sure that the child safety locks are
working properly.
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock
for the rear passenger compartment side
windows
#
To activate/deactivate: press button 2.
The rear passenger compartment side win‐
dow can be opened or closed in the following
cases:
R
With indicator lamp 1 lit: via the switch
on the driver's door.
R
With indicator lamp 1 off: via the switch
on the corresponding rear door or driv‐
er's door.
%
Vehicles with folding bench seat: the
switch for opening the tailgate which is loca‐
ted on the right-hand wheel arch when
viewed in the direction of travel is also
secured.
Notes on pets in the vehicle
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to animals left unsecured or unat‐
tended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐
ded or unsecured, they could possibly press
down buttons or switches.
Occupant safety
63
Thereby an animal may:
R
activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
R
switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown around in
the vehicle in the event of an accident or
sudden steering and braking maneuver and
injure vehicle occupants in the process.
#
Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐
tended.
#
Always correctly secure animals while
driving, for example using a suitable
animal carrier.
64
Occupant safety
SmartKey
Overview of SmartKey functions
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
*
NOTE Damage to the key caused by
magnetic fields
#
Keep the key away from strong mag‐
netic fields.
%
The SmartKey may vary from the one shown
in the diagram, depending on the vehicle
equipment.
1
Locks
2
Battery check lamp
3
Unlocks
4
Opens/closes the tailgate
5
Panic alarm
%
If battery check lamp 2 does not light up
after pressing the Ü or ß button, the
battery is discharged.
Replacing the SmartKey battery (/ page 67).
The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following
components:
R
The doors
R
The fuel filler flap
Opening and closing
65
R
The tailgate
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately
40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-
theft protection is armed again.
Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec‐
tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect
the SmartKey's functionality.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking
verification signal
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Acoustic Lock
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Activating/deactivating the panic alarm
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched off.
%
The panic alarm function is only available in
certain countries.
#
To activate: press button 1 for approx‐
imately one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
#
To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again.
or
#
Press the start/stop button on the cockpit
(the SmartKey is inside the vehicle).
Changing the unlocking settings
Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey:
R
Central unlocking
R
Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
#
To switch between settings: press the
Ü and ß buttons simultaneously for
approximately six seconds until the battery
check lamp flashes twice.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's
door and fuel filler flap has been selected:
R
To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the
Ü button twice.
R
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch
the inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel
filler flap are unlocked.
Deactivating the SmartKey functions
If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for
an extended period of time, you can reduce the
energy consumption of the respective SmartKey.
To do so, deactivate the SmartKey functions.
#
To deactivate: press the ß button on the
SmartKey twice in quick succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
flashes twice briefly and lights up once.
66
Opening and closing
#
To activate: press any button on the Smart‐
Key.
%
When the vehicle is started with the Smart‐
Key in the marked space of the center con‐
sole, the SmartKey functions are automati‐
cally activated (/ page 153).
Removing/inserting the emergency key
#
To remove: press release knob 1.
Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
#
Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in
the intermediate position.
#
Press release knob 1 again and fully
remove emergency key 2.
#
To insert: press release knob 1.
#
Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate
position or fully until it engages.
%
You can use the intermediate position of
emergency key 2 to attach the SmartKey to
a key ring.
Replacing the SmartKey battery
&
DANGER Serious damage to health
caused by swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐
stances. Swallowing batteries may cause
serious damage to health.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
#
Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐
dren.
#
If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by improper disposal of
batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
Requirements:
R
You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
shop.
Opening and closing
67
#
Remove the emergency key (/ page 67).
#
Press release button 2 down fully and slide
cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.
#
Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the
arrow and remove.
#
Remove battery compartment 3 and take
out the discharged battery.
#
Insert the new battery into battery compart‐
ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking
in the battery compartment and on the bat‐
tery when doing this.
#
Push in battery compartment 3.
#
Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it
engages.
68
Opening and closing
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle.
Possible causes:
R
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
R
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
R
The SmartKey is faulty.
#
Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 67).
#
Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 67).
#
Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a SmartKey.
#
Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
If necessary, have the mechanical lock changed as well.
Opening and closing
69
Doors
Unlocking and opening doors from the inside
#
To unlock and open a front door: pull door
handle 2.
Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is
unlocked.
#
To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door
handle.
The locking pin pops up when the rear door
is unlocked.
#
To open a rear door: pull the rear door han‐
dle again.
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle
from the inside
#
To unlock: press button 1.
#
To lock: press button 2.
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
The vehicle is not unlocked:
R
If you have locked the vehicle using the
SmartKey.
R
If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐
LESS-GO.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐
LESS-GO
Requirements:
R
The SmartKey is outside the vehicle.
R
The distance between the SmartKey and the
vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m).
R
The driver's door and the door at which the
door handle is used are closed.
70
Opening and closing
#
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐
face of the door handle.
#
To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface
1 or 2.
#
Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐
sor surface 2 until the closing process has
been completed.
%
Further information on convenience closing
(/ page 82).
If you open the tailgate from outside it is auto‐
matically unlocked.
Opening and closing
71
Problems with KEYLESS-GO
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.
Possible causes are:
R
The key functions have been deactivated (/ page 66).
R
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
R
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source.
R
The SmartKey is faulty.
#
Activate the SmartKey functions (/ page 66).
#
Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 67).
#
Use the emergency key to unlock or lock the vehicle (/ page 67).
#
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Activating/deactivating the automatic lock‐
ing feature
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn‐
ing faster than walking pace.
72
Opening and closing
#
To activate: press and hold button 2 for
approximately five seconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
#
To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for
approximately five seconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
In the following situations, there is a danger of
being locked out when the function is activated:
R
While the vehicle is being tow started/
pushed.
R
If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna‐
mometer.
Power closing function
If you push the door into the lock to the first
detent position, the power closing function will
automatically pull the door into the lock.
Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the
emergency key
%
If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using
the emergency key, first press the button for
locking from the inside while the driver's
door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv‐
er's door using the emergency key.
#
Insert the emergency key as far as it will go
into opening 1 in the cover.
#
Pull and hold the door handle.
#
Pull the cover on the emergency key as
straight as possible away from the vehicle
until it releases.
#
Release the door handle.
Opening and closing
73
#
To unlock: turn the emergency key counter-
clockwise to position 1.
#
To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to
position 1.
#
Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin‐
der until it engages and is seated firmly.
Cargo compartment
Opening the tailgate
&
DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐
gate is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
#
Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate.
#
Never drive with the tailgate open.
*
NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by
obstacles above the vehicle
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
when it is opened.
#
Make sure that there is sufficient space
behind and above the tailgate.
You have the following options for opening
the tailgate:
#
If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate
handle and release it again immediately.
#
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Use
your foot to kick below the bumper
(/ page 77).
#
Pull remote opening switch 1 for the tail‐
gate.
74
Opening and closing
#
Press and hold the p button on the
SmartKey.
#
For a tailgate stopped in an intermediate
position, pull it upwards and release it as
soon as it starts to open.
The tailgate is equipped with an automatic
obstruction detection function. If a solid object
blocks or restricts the tailgate during automatic
opening, this process will be stopped. The auto‐
matic obstruction detection function is only an
aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness
when you are opening the tailgate.
#
Vehicles with folding bench seat: Pull but‐
ton 1 for the tailgate twice.
The tailgate will be unlocked.
If the tailgate has been locked from the outside,
or the child safety lock has been activated, the
tailgate cannot be unlocked from the inside
using button 1.
Closing the tailgate
&
WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#
Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
To close the tailgate, the following options
are available:
#
Pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release
it as soon as it begins to close.
Opening and closing
75
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
during automatic closing of the tailgate
Parts of the body could become trapped dur‐
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More‐
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing
in the closing area or may enter the closing
area during the closing process.
#
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity
of the closing area during the closing
process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R
Press the p button on the SmartKey.
R
Press or pull the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
R
Press the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
R
Pull the tailgate handle.
#
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is
also possible to stop the closing process by
making a kicking movement below the rear
bumper.
#
Switch on the power supply or the ignition.
#
Press the remote operating switch 1 for the
tailgate.
#
Press closing button 1 on the tailgate.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
#
Press the locking button 2 on the tailgate.
If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle,
the tailgate will close and the vehicle will be
locked.
76
Opening and closing
#
Press and hold the p button on the
SmartKey (with the SmartKey in the vicinity
of the vehicle).
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS
#
Make a kicking movement with your foot
below the bumper (/ page 77).
Automatic reversing function for the tailgate
The tailgate is equipped with automatic obstruc‐
tion detection with reversing function. If a solid
object blocks or restricts the tailgate when it is
automatically closing, the tailgate will automati‐
cally open again slightly. Automatic obstruction
detection with reversing function is only an aid.
It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when
you are closing the tailgate.
#
During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite the reversing function
The reversing function does not react:
R
To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐
gers.
R
Over the last Ó in (8 mm) of the closing
path.
In these situations in particular, the reversing
function cannot prevent someone being trap‐
ped.
#
When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped:
R
Press the p button on the SmartKey,
or
R
Press or pull the remote operating switch
on the driver's door, or
R
Press the closing or locking button on the
tailgate, or
R
Pull the tailgate handle.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close
or stop the closing process of the tailgate by
performing a kicking movement under the rear
bumper.
The kicking movement triggers the opening or
closing process alternately.
Opening and closing
77
Observe the notes when opening (/ page 74)
and closing (/ page 75) the tailgate.
%
Two warning tones sound when the tailgate
is opening or closing.
&
WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot
exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very
hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you
could burn yourself by touching the exhaust
system.
#
Always ensure that you only make a
kicking movement within the detection
range of the sensors.
*
NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten‐
tional opening of the tailgate
R
when using an automatic car wash
R
when using a high pressure cleaner
#
Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure
that the key located is at least 10 ft
(3 m) away from the vehicle in such sit‐
uations.
When making the kicking movement, make sure
that your feet are firmly on the ground, other‐
wise you could lose your balance, e.g. on ice.
Observe the following notes:
R
The SmartKey is behind the vehicle.
R
Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
vehicle while performing the kicking move‐
ment.
R
Do not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement.
R
Do not carry out the kicking movement too
slowly.
R
The kicking movement must be towards the
vehicle and back again.
1
Detection range of the sensors
If several consecutive kicking movements are
not successful, wait ten seconds.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following cases:
R
The area around the sensor is dirty, e.g. due
to road salt or snow.
R
The kicking movement is made using a pros‐
thetic leg.
78
Opening and closing
The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in
the following situations:
R
If a person's arms or legs are moving in the
sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing
the vehicle or picking up objects.
R
If objects are moved or placed behind the
vehicle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage.
R
If clamping straps, tarps or other coverings
are pulled over the bumper.
R
If a protective mat with a length reaching
over the trunk sill down into the detection
range of the sensors is used.
R
If the protective mat is not secured correctly.
R
When working on the trailer hitch, trailers or
rear bicycle racks.
Deactivate the SmartKey functions (/ page 66)
or do not carry the SmartKey about your person
in such situations.
Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate
Activating the opening angle limiter
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in
the top half of its opening range to approx‐
imately 8 in (20 cm) before the end position.
#
Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at
the desired position.
#
Press and hold the closing button on the tail‐
gate until you hear a short acoustic signal.
The opening angle limiter will be activated.
The tailgate will then stop in the stored posi‐
tion when opened.
To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the
outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped
automatically.
Deactivating the opening angle limiter
#
Press and hold the closing button on the tail‐
gate until two short acoustic signals sound.
Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency
key
#
Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
#
Remove the combined cargo cover and net
(/ page 117).
#
Insert emergency key 2 into opening 1 in
the trim and push it in.
The tailgate will be unlocked.
Opening and closing
79
Emergency release of the tailgate from
inside (vehicles with a folding bench seat)
#
Press the cover down in the direction of
arrow 1 and pull in the direction of arrow
2 to remove it.
#
Pull the emergency release lever in the direc‐
tion of arrow 3.
The tailgate will be unlocked.
Side windows
Opening and closing the side windows
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when
opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#
When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
#
If someone is trapped, release the but‐
ton immediately or pull it in order to
close the side window again.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts
could be trapped in the closing area in the
process.
#
When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#
If someone is trapped, release the but‐
ton immediately or press the button in
order to reopen the side window.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they oper‐
ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐
tended.
#
Activate the child safety lock for the
rear side windows.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Requirements:
R
The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
80
Opening and closing
1
Closes
2
Opens
The buttons on the driver's door take prece‐
dence.
#
To start automatic operation: press the
W button beyond the point of resistance
or pull and release it.
#
To interrupt automatic operation: press or
pull the W button again.
When the vehicle is switched off, the side win‐
dows can continue being operated.
This function is available for around four minutes
or until a front door is opened.
Automatic reversing function of the side win‐
dows
If an object blocks a side window during the
closing process, the side window will open again
automatically. The automatic reversing function
is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness.
#
During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite there being reversing protection
on the side window
The reversing function does not react:
R
To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
During resetting
This means that the reverse function cannot
prevent someone from becoming trapped in
these situations.
#
When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#
If someone becomes trapped, press the
W button to open the side window
again.
Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle
before starting a journey)
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when
opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#
When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
#
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
Opening and closing
81
#
Press and hold the Ü button on the
SmartKey.
The following functions are performed:
R
The vehicle is unlocked
R
The side windows are opened.
R
The sliding sunroof is opened.
R
The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened.
R
The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is
switched on.
%
If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic slid‐
ing sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds
are opened first.
#
To interrupt convenience opening: release
the Ü button.
#
To continue convenience opening: press
and hold the Ü button again.
Convenience closing (closing the vehicle
from outside)
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by
inadvertent convenience closing
When the convenience closing feature is
operating, parts of the body could become
trapped in the closing area of the side win‐
dow and the sliding sunroof.
#
Observe the complete closing proce‐
dure when using convenience closing.
#
When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#
Press and hold the ß button on the
SmartKey.
The following functions are performed:
R
The vehicle is locked.
R
The side windows are closed.
R
The sliding sunroof is closed.
R
The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.
#
To interrupt convenience closing: release
the ß button.
#
To close the roller sunblinds: press and
hold the ß button again.
%
Convenience closing can also be operated
with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 70).
Problems with the side windows
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
fatally injured if reversing protection is
not activated
If you close a side window again immediately
after it has been blocked, the side window
will close with increased or maximum force.
The reversing feature will then not be active.
Parts of the body could become trapped in
the closing area in the process.
#
Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area.
#
To stop the closing process, release the
button or press the button again to re-
open the side window.
82
Opening and closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
A side window cannot be closed and
you cannot see the cause.
#
Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
#
Adjust the side windows.
Adjusting the side windows
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:
#
Immediately after this, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold
the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment).
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.
If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:
#
Immediately after this, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold
the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment).
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function.
The side windows cannot be opened or
closed using the convenience opening
feature.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
#
Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 67).
Opening and closing
83
Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the sliding sunroof
%
The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while opening and closing the sliding
sunroof
During opening and closing, parts of the
body could get caught in the sweep of the
sliding sunroof.
#
When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep.
#
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Press the button in any direction during
the automatic opening/closing process.
The opening/closing process is stop‐
ped.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the sliding sunroof is operated by chil‐
dren
Children operating the sliding sunroof could
get caught in the moving parts, particularly if
unattended.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while opening and closing the roller sun
blind
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts become trapped between the
roller sun blind and frame or the sliding sun‐
roof.
#
When opening or closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep of
the roller sun blind.
#
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Press the button in any direction during
the automatic opening/closing process.
The opening/closing process is stop‐
ped.
*
NOTE Malfunction caused by snow and
ice
Snow and ice may lead to a malfunction of
the sliding sunroof.
#
Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
of snow and ice.
*
NOTE Damage caused by protruding
objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐
roof may damage the sealing strips.
#
Do not allow anything to protrude from
the sliding sunroof.
84
Opening and closing
*
NOTE Important points to remember
when a roof rack is installed
When a roof rack is installed, raising or open‐
ing the sliding sunroof may be limited.
#
Check whether the sliding sunroof can
be raised or opened when a roof rack is
installed.
#
If in doubt, do not raise or open the
sliding sunroof.
1
Raises
2
Opens
3
Closes/lowers
Use the 3 button to operate the panoramic
sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
can be operated only when the roller sunblind is
open.
#
Check whether the sliding sunroof can be
raised or opened when a roof rack is instal‐
led.
#
To start automatic operation: press the
3 button beyond the point of resistance
or pull and release it.
#
To interrupt automatic operation: briefly
press the 3 button in any direction.
The opening/closing process will be stop‐
ped.
Vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel: The automatic raising feature
is available only when the sliding sunroof is
closed or raised.
Vehicles without a panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel: The automatic open‐
ing and raising feature is available only when the
sliding sunroof is closed.
Automatic reversing function of the sliding
sunroof
If an object is obstructing the sliding sunroof
during the closing process, the sliding sunroof
will open again automatically. The automatic
Opening and closing
85
reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐
stitute for your attentiveness.
#
During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment even with
the reversing function active
The reversing feature does not react in par‐
ticular:
R
To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
Over the last ã in (4 mm) of the closing
path
R
During resetting
This means that the reverse function cannot
prevent someone from becoming trapped in
these situations.
#
When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Briefly press the button in any direction
during automatic operation.
The closing process is stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the roller
sunblind
If an object is obstructing the roller sunblind dur‐
ing the closing process, the roller sunblind will
open again automatically. The automatic revers‐
ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute
for your attentiveness.
#
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of move‐
ment.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite reversing feature
In particular, the reversing feature does not
react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐
gers.
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent entrapment in these situations.
#
When closing the roller sunblind, make
sure that no body parts are in the range
of movement.
#
Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Press the button in any direction during
the automatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof
%
The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.
By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can
interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing
function when driving" and "Automatic lower‐
ing".
Rain closing function when driving
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: If
it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof is
automatically lowered while the vehicle is in
motion.
86
Opening and closing
Automatic lowering function
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: If
the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it is
automatically lowered slightly at higher speeds.
At low speeds, it is raised again automatically.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto‐
matic lowering of the sliding sunroof
At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof
automatically lowers slightly at the rear.
This could trap you or other persons.
#
Make sure that nobody reaches into the
sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
#
If somebody becomes trapped, briefly
push the sliding sunroof button for‐
wards or backwards.
The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
%
The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panoramic sliding sunroof.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injury by closing the sliding sunroof again
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof
closes with increased force.
Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process.
#
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
#
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
#
Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process.
The closing process is stopped.
Opening and closing
87
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
#
Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resist‐
ance until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly:
#
Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.
Vehicles without a panoramic slid‐
ing sunroof: The sliding sunroof does
not operate smoothly.
#
Push the 3 button up to the point of resistance a number of times until the sliding sunroof is fully
open.
#
Press the 3 button for another second.
#
Close the sliding sunroof.
Vehicles with a panoramic sliding
sunroof: The sliding sunroof or the
roller sunblind does not operate
smoothly.
#
Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
#
Pull and hold the 3 button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
#
Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.
88
Opening and closing
Roller sun blinds
Extending the rear side window roller sun‐
blinds
*
NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to
it snapping back
If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel
may be damaged.
#
Always move the roller sun blind by
hand.
#
Do not drive with the roller sun blind
hooked in and side windows opened at
the same time.
#
Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and
hook it onto brackets 2 at the top of the
window.
Extending or retracting the rear-window
roller sunblind
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when
extending or retracting the roller sun
blind
Body parts could become entrapped in the
sweep of the roller sun blind when it is being
extended or retracted.
#
Make sure that no body parts are in the
sweep of the roller sun blind when it is
being extended or retracted.
#
If someone becomes trapped, briefly
press the button again.
The opening or closing process is
briefly stopped. The roller sun blind
then returns to its starting position.
*
NOTE Damage caused by objects
#
Make sure that the roller sun blind can
move freely.
Opening and closing
89
#
To extend or retract: press button 1.
Anti-theft protection
Function of the immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being
started without the correct SmartKey.
The immobilizer is automatically activated when
the ignition is switched off and deactivated when
the ignition is switched on.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart‐
Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can
start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left
inside the vehicle.
%
In the event the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the
system is not operational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Function of the ATA system
If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible
alarm is triggered in the following situations:
R
When a door is opened
R
When the tailgate is opened
R
When the hood is opened
R
When the interior motion sensor is triggered
(/ page 92)
R
When the tow-away alarm is triggered
(/ page 91)
The ATA system is armed automatically after
approximately ten seconds in the following situa‐
tions:
R
After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey
R
After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
90
Opening and closing
Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system
is armed.
The ATA system is deactivated automatically in
the following situations:
R
After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart‐
Key
R
After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R
After pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the stowage compartment
(/ page 153)
%
When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call
system is active and the alarm stays on for
more than 30 seconds, a message is auto‐
matically sent to the Customer Assistance
Center (/ page 336).
%
In the case of severe battery discharging,
the anti-theft alarm system is automatically
deactivated to facilitate the next engine
start.
Deactivating the ATA
#
Press the Ü, ß or p button on the
SmartKey.
or
#
Press the start/stop button with the Smart‐
Key in the stowage compartment
(/ page 153)
Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
#
Grasp the outside door handle with the
SmartKey outside the vehicle.
Function of the tow-away alarm
%
This function may not be available in all
countries.
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an
alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is
detected while the tow-away alarm is armed.
The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after
approximately 60 seconds:
R
After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey
R
After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol‐
lowing components are closed:
R
The doors
R
The tailgate
The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva‐
ted:
R
After pressing the Ü or p button on
the SmartKey
R
After pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 153)
R
After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R
When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Information on detecting damage on a parked
vehicle (/ page 179).
Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Tow-away Protection
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow‐
ing cases:
R
The vehicle is unlocked again.
Opening and closing
91
R
A door is opened.
R
The vehicle is locked again.
Function of the interior motion sensor
%
This function may not be available in all
countries.
When the interior motion sensor is activated, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered if move‐
ment is detected in the vehicle interior.
The interior motion sensor is activated automati‐
cally after approximately ten seconds:
R
after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey
R
after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The interior motion sensor is only activated
when the following components are closed:
R
the doors
R
the tailgate
The interior motion sensor is automatically deac‐
tivated:
R
after pressing the Ü or p button on
the SmartKey
R
after pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the stowage compartment
(/ page 153)
R
after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R
when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
The following situations can lead to a false
alarm:
R
moving objects such as mascots in the vehi‐
cle interior
R
when the side window is open
R
when the sliding sunroof is open
R
when the panoramic sliding sunroof is open
Activating/deactivating the interior motion
sensor
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Interior Motion Sensor
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
The interior motion sensor is activated again in
the following cases:
R
The vehicle is unlocked again.
R
A door is opened.
R
The vehicle is locked again.
92
Opening and closing
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
Ensure the following when adjusting steering
wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
R
You are sitting as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible, taking the following
points into consideration.
R
You are sitting in an upright position
R
Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
R
Your legs are not fully extended and you can
depress the pedals properly
R
The back of your head is supported at eye
level by the center of the head restraint
R
You can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
R
You can move your legs freely
R
You can see all the displays on the instru‐
ment cluster clearly
R
You have a good overview of the traffic con‐
ditions
R
Your seat belt sits snugly against your body
and passes across the center of your shoul‐
der and across your hips in the pelvic area
Seats and stowing
93
Seats
Adjusting the front seat mechanically and
electrically (without Seat Comfort Package)
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
The seats can be adjusted when the ignition is
switched off.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.
#
When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐
dren in the vehicle".
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to the
driver's seat not being engaged
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in
motion.
This could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
#
Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you
or other vehicle occupants could be trapped
and thereby injured.
94
Seats and stowing
Children in particular could accidentally
press the electrical seat adjustment buttons
and become trapped.
#
While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get
under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints which are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can‐
not provide protection as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the
head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an
accident or when braking.
#
Always drive with the head restraints
installed.
#
Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
able to adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved the
seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐
ple.
#
Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
ning your journey.
#
Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the center of your shoul‐
der.
*
NOTE Damage to the seats when moving
the seats back
The seats may be damaged by objects when
moving the seats back.
#
When moving the seats back, make
sure that there are no objects in the
footwell, under or behind the seats.
Seats and stowing
95
1
Seat backrest inclination
2
Seat height
3
Seat fore-and-aft position
#
To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:
lift lever 3 and slide the seat into the
desired position.
#
Make sure that the seat is engaged in posi‐
tion.
Adjusting the front seat electrically
1
Head restraint height
2
Seat backrest inclination
3
Seat height
4
Seat cushion length
5
Seat cushion inclination
6
Seat fore-and-aft position
#
Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 109).
Adjusting the front passenger seat electri‐
cally from the driver's seat
Requirements:
R
The power supply is switched on.
This function is available only in vehicles with an
electrically adjustable front passenger seat.
96
Seats and stowing
You can call up the following functions for the
front passenger seat:
R
Seat adjustment
R
Seat heating
R
Seat ventilation
R
Memory function
#
To select the front passenger seat: press
button 1.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front
passenger seat is selected.
#
Adjust the front passenger seat using the
buttons on the driver's side door control
panel.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
1
Raise
2
Soften
3
Lower
4
Harden
#
Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour
of the backrest individually to suit your back.
Seats and stowing
97
Head restraints
Adjusting the front seat head restraints
mechanically
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints which are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints are not installed or are
adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can‐
not provide protection as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury in the
head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an
accident or when braking.
#
Always drive with the head restraints
installed.
#
Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
able to adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
#
To raise: pull the head restraint up.
#
To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down.
#
To move forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards.
#
To move backwards: press release knob 2
and push the head restraint backwards.
98
Seats and stowing
Adjusting the front-seat luxury head
restraints mechanically
#
To adjust the side bolsters of the head
restraint: pull or push right or left-hand side
bolster 2.
#
To move forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards.
#
To move backwards: press release knob 1
and push the head restraint backwards.
Lowering the rear seat head restraints from
the front
#
Press button 1.
Adjusting the head restraints of the rear
seats mechanically
#
To raise: pull the head restraint up.
#
To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down.
Seats and stowing
99
Installing/removing the outer rear seat head
restraints
Removing
#
Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for‐
wards slightly (/ page 113).
#
Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it
will go.
#
Push release knob 1 in the direction of the
arrow and pull out the head restraint.
Installing
#
Insert the head restraint such that the
notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
#
Push the head restraint down until it
engages.
#
Fold the rear seat backrest back until it
engages.
Configuring the seat settings
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
a Seats
#
Select Driver's Seat or Passenger Seat.
Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
#
Select Side Bolsters.
#
Adjust the air cushions.
Adjusting the seat contour in the lumbar
region of the seat backrest (lumbar)
#
Select Lumbar.
#
Adjust the air cushions.
Memory function
#
Save the seat settings with the memory func‐
tion (/ page 109).
Setting automatic adjustment of the lateral
support (active multicontour seat)
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
a Seats
With this function, the lateral support of the
active multicontour seat is automatically adjus‐
ted to the driving and cornering dynamics of the
vehicle.
#
Select Driver's Seat or Passenger Seat.
#
Select Dynamic Seat.
#
Select setting: Off, Level 1 or Level 2.
100
Seats and stowing
Overview of massage and workout programs
Massage program
The following programs can be selected:
R
Hot Relaxing Back
R
Hot Relaxing Shoulder
R
Activating Massage
R
Classic Massage
R
Wave Massage
R
Mobilizing Massage
Active Workout
The Act. Workout Back and Act. Workout Cush-
ion programs require your active cooperation.
Tensing and releasing also helps to improve
blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pres‐
sure point as soon as you feel it.
Selecting the massage program for the front
seats
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
a Seats
#
Select Driver's Seat or Passenger.
#
Select Massage.
#
Select a massage program.
The massage program runs for approximately
9 to 15 minutes, depending on the setting.
#
To set the massage intensity: switch High
Intensity on O or off ª.
Resetting seat adjustments
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
a Seats
5
Reset
#
Select Yes or No.
Depending on whether the settings for the driver
or front passenger seat are selected, only the
selected seat can be reset.
Switching the seat heating on/off
&
WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐
edly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest
padding to become very hot.
The health of persons with limited tempera‐
ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to
high temperatures may be affected or they
may even suffer burn-like injuries.
#
Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating
may be temporarily deactivated after it is
switched on repeatedly.
*
NOTE Damage to the seats caused by
objects or documents when the seat
heating is switched on
When the seat heating is switched on, over‐
heating may occur due to objects or docu‐
Seats and stowing
101
ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush‐
ions or child seats. This could cause damage
to the seat surface.
#
Make sure that no objects or docu‐
ments are on the seats when the seat
heating is switched on.
Requirements:
R
The power supply is switched on.
#
To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
Depending on the heating level, up to three
indicator lamps will light up.
#
To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating
level is set.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating
is switched off.
%
The seat heating will automatically switch
down from the three heating levels after 8,
10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating is
switched off.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Requirements:
R
The power supply is switched on.
102
Seats and stowing
#
To switch on/increase the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐
tion level is set.
Depending on the ventilation level, up to
three indicator lamps will light up.
#
To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐
ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐
tion level is set.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventila‐
tion is switched off.
Folding bench seat in the cargo compart‐
ment
Notes on the folding bench seat
&
WARNING Risk of injury when the seat
backrest is not upright and locked in
position
If the seat backrests of the rear bench seat
are not locked in the upright position, the
seat backrest of the folding bench seat may
fold down while driving.
In this case, the seat belts may not perform
their intended protective function.
#
Make sure that the seat backrests of
the rear bench seat are locked in the
upright position.
Observe the notes on "Seat belts" (/ page 39),
"Head restraints" (/ page 98) and "Children in
the vehicle" (/ page 50).
The folding bench seat is only approved for use
with child seats designed for children up to six
years old . Information on suitable child restraint
systems on the folding bench seat can be
obtained at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter.
The folding bench seat may only be used when
the combined cargo cover and net is installed.
The tailgate can be opened from the folding
bench seat. The switch is located on the wheel
arch on the right-hand side when viewed in the
direction of travel.
Folding out the folding bench seat
Requirements:
R
The seat backrests of the rear bench seat are
locked in the upright position.
R
The handle for the combined luggage cover
and net has been moved up. To improve the
rear view, the upper part of the plate has
been folded down.
Seats and stowing
103
#
Pull release handle 1 and fold the seat
backrest of the folding bench seat upwards.
#
Hook the seat belts into retainers 3.
#
Secure the seat belt buckles in the back of
the seat backrest.
#
Pull release 2 and fold the seat cushion of
the folding bench seat into the seat position.
#
Push down the seat cushion until the seat
backrest engages fully.
#
Fold the head restraints upwards.
Folding back the folding bench seat
#
Pull the seat cushion upwards by tab 1 and
fold it back into its starting position until it
engages.
104
Seats and stowing
*
NOTE Damage to the folding bench seat
when folding back
The folding bench seat may be damaged
when it is folded back.
#
Fully insert the head restraints into the
guides.
#
Make sure that the seat belt buckles
engages in their guides.
#
Press release knob 3 and fold the head
restraints down.
#
Press release knob 4 and push the head
restraints all the way in.
#
Fold back seat backrest 2 of the folding
bench seat into its starting position.
Opening/closing the cargo compartment
floor
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to an open
cargo compartment floor
If you drive when the cargo compartment
floor is open, objects could be thrown around
and thereby strike vehicle occupants. There
is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of
sudden braking or a sudden change in direc‐
tion.
#
Always close the cargo compartment
floor before a journey.
Opening
#
Press the release knob in the middle of the
cargo compartment floor and turn to the
OPEN position.
#
Pull the loop on the cargo compartment floor
and fold the cargo compartment floor up.
%
If the seat cushions are not installed
(/ page 105), the cargo compartment floor
can be completely removed.
Closing
#
Reinstall the cargo compartment floor, if nec‐
essary, and fold down.
#
Press the release knob and turn to the
CLOSE position.
Removing or installing the seat cushion
If you want to open the cargo compartment floor
while the folding bench seat is folded back, you
must first of all remove the seat cushion.
Seats and stowing
105
#
To remove: fold seat cushion 2 vertically
upwards and remove it from seat cushion
guide 1.
Installing
#
Push seat cushion 2 into seat cushion
guide 1 at a slight angle from the rear 3.
#
Fold seat cushion 2 back into its starting
position 4 until it engages.
Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐
dren when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel.
106
Seats and stowing
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
#
Push release lever 1 down as far as it will
go.
The steering column is unlocked.
#
Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the
steering wheel.
#
Push release lever 1 up as far as it will go.
The steering column is locked.
#
Check and make sure that the steering col‐
umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
The steering wheel can be adjusted when the
power supply is switched off.
1
Adjusts the distance to the steering wheel
2
Adjusts the height
#
Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 109).
Switching the steering wheel heater on/off
Requirements:
Seats and stowing
107
R
The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
#
Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 1 or
2.
If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering
wheel heater is switched on.
When you switch the ignition off, the steering
wheel heater will switch off.
Easy entry and exit feature
Using the easy entry and exit feature
&
WARNING Risk of accident when driving
off while adjusting the easy exit feature
‑ If you drive off while the easy entry and exit
feature is making adjustments, you could
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Always wait until the adjustment proc‐
ess is complete before driving off.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
while adjusting the easy entry and exit
feature
When the easy entry and exit feature adjusts
the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you
and other vehicle occupants – particularly
children – could become trapped.
#
During the adjustment process of the
easy entry and exit feature, make sure
that no one has any body parts in the
sweep of the seat or the steering wheel.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the
steering wheel:
#
Move the adjustment lever of the steer‐
ing wheel.
The adjustment process is stopped.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the
driver's seat:
#
Press the seat adjustment switch.
The adjustment process is stopped.
Vehicles with memory function: You can stop
the adjustment process by pressing one of the
memory function position switches.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
during activation of the easy entry and
exit feature by children
If children activate the easy entry and exit
feature, they can become trapped, particu‐
larly when unattended.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
108
Seats and stowing
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the
steering wheel will move upwards and the driv‐
er's seat will move back in the following situa‐
tions:
R
You switch the ignition off with the driver's
door open
R
You open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off
%
The steering wheel will move upwards only if
it is not already as high as it will go. The driv‐
er's seat will move backwards only if it is not
already in the rearmost position.
The steering wheel and the driver's seat will
move back to the last drive position in the fol‐
lowing cases:
R
You switch the power supply or the ignition
on when the driver's door is closed
R
You close the driver's door with the ignition
switched on.
The last drive position will be stored when:
R
You switch the ignition off.
R
Vehicles with memory function: You call
up the seat settings via the memory function.
R
Vehicles with memory function: You save
the seat settings via the memory function.
Vehicles with memory function: Press one of
the memory function saved position buttons to
stop the adjustment process.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Easy Entry/Exit
#
Select Steering Wheel & Seat, Steering
Wheel Only or Off.
Operating the memory function
&
WARNING Risk of an accident if the
memory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driv‐
er's side while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made.
#
Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station‐
ary.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment when set‐
ting the seat with the memory function
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants – particu‐
larly children – could become trapped.
#
During the adjustment process of the
memory function, make sure that no
one has any body parts in the sweep of
the seat.
Seats and stowing
109
#
If someone becomes trapped, press a
preset position button or seat adjust‐
ment switch immediately.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti‐
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
The memory function can be used when the igni‐
tion is switched off.
Storing
Seat adjustments for up to three people can be
stored and called up using the memory function.
The following systems can be selected:
R
Seat, backrest and head restraint
R
Steering wheel
R
Outside mirrors
R
Head-up Display
#
Set the seat, the steering wheel, the Head-up
Display and the outside mirrors to the
desired position.
#
Press memory button M together with one of
preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3.
An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are
stored.
#
To call up: press or briefly hold preset posi‐
tion button 1, 2 or 3.
The front seat, the steering column, the
Head-up Display and the outside mirror move
to the stored position.
Stowage areas
Notes on loading the vehicle
&
DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐
gate is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
#
Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate.
#
Never drive with the tailgate open.
110
Seats and stowing
&
WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#
Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If you do not adequately stow objects in the
vehicle interior, they could slip or be tossed
around and thereby strike vehicle occupants.
In addition, cup holders, open stowage
spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot
always restrain the objects they contain in
the event of an accident.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be tossed about in these or
similar situations.
#
Always make sure that objects do not
project from stowage spaces, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
#
Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#
Stow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or
too large in the cargo compartment.
&
WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐
pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could
burn yourself.
#
Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and
supervise children especially closely in
this area.
#
Allow vehicle parts to cool down before
touching them.
The driving characteristics of your vehicle are
dependent on the distribution of the load within
the vehicle. You should bear the following in
mind when loading the vehicle:
R
Never exceed the permissible gross mass or
the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle
(including occupants). The values are speci‐
fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
vehicle's B-pillar.
R
The load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
R
When transporting objects in the cargo com‐
partment, always install the combined cargo
cover and net (cargo compartment cover and
partition net).
R
always place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
Seats and stowing
111
R
secure the load using the tie-down eyes and
distribute the load evenly.
Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior
Overview of the front stowage compart‐
ments
1
Stowage compartment in the doors
2
Stowage/telephone compartment in the
armrest with multimedia connections and
stowage compartment, e.g. for an MP3
player
3
Stowage compartment in the front center
console with a USB port (depending on the
vehicle's equipment)
4
Glove box
Locking/unlocking the glove box
#
Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock‐
wise 2 (to lock) or counter-clockwise 1 (to
unlock).
Opening the eyeglasses compartment
#
Press button 1.
112
Seats and stowing
Opening the stowage compartment in the
rear armrest
#
Press release catch 1 and swing the cover
of the armrest upwards.
Through-loading feature in the rear bench
seat
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
&
WARNING Risk of injury if the rear
bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
R
If this is the case, the vehicle occupant
would be forced into the seat belt by the
rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat
backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
R
Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com‐
partment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
#
Make sure that the seat backrest and
the rear bench seat/rear seat are
engaged before every trip.
If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in
place, this will be shown on the multifunction
display on the instrument cluster.
Requirements:
R
The rear seat backrest head restraints are
fully inserted.
The center and outer seat backrests can be fol‐
ded forwards separately.
The right seat backrest can be folded forwards
only together with the center seat backrest.
The outer seat backrests are unlocked electri‐
cally. Depending on the equipment, the release
buttons are located either in the cargo compart‐
ment or beside the seat backrests.
Seats and stowing
113
Button in the cargo compartment
#
Vehicles with a memory function: If at
least one section of the rear seat backrest is
folded forwards, the corresponding front seat
will move forwards slightly, if necessary, to
avoid a collision.
#
Left and right seat backrest: pull the but‐
ton on the right or left 1.
The corresponding seat backrest will fold for‐
wards.
#
Center seat backrest: pull release catch 3
of seat backrest 2 forwards.
#
Fold seat backrest 2 forwards.
Folding the rear seat backrest back
*
NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt when folding back the seat
backrest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus
damaged when the seat backrest is folded
back.
#
Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
ped when folding back the seat back‐
rest.
#
Vehicles with a memory function: If at
least one part of the seat backrest in the rear
passenger compartment is folded back, the
corresponding front seat will automatically
return to the most recent original position.
114
Seats and stowing
#
Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back
until it engages.
Left and right seat backrests: if the seat
backrest is not engaged and locked, this will
be shown on the multifunction display on the
instrument cluster.
Center seat backrest: if the seat backrest is
not engaged and locked, red lock verification
indicator 2 will be visible.
Locking the release catch of the center rear
seat backrest
Requirements:
R
The left and center seat backrests are
engaged and joined together.
Lock the center seat backrest release catch if
you want to secure the cargo compartment from
unauthorized access. The center seat backrest
can then be folded forwards only together with
the left seat backrest.
#
Fold the center and left seat backrests for‐
wards.
#
To lock: slide catch 1 upwards.
The release catch of the center seat backrest
will be locked.
#
To unlock: slide catch 1 downwards.
Seats and stowing
115
Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backr‐
ests (cargo position)
To enlarge the cargo compartment, you can
adjust the seat backrests so that they are ten
degrees steeper (cargo position).
#
Fold the seat backrest forwards
(/ page 113).
#
Move bracket 1 in the direction of the
arrow.
#
Push seat backrest 2 back to bracket 1
until the backrest engages.
Cargo compartment cover with partition net
(combined cargo cover and net)
Notes on the cargo compartment cover
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects being poorly secured
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads.
You could be hit by an unsecured load during
sudden changes in direction, braking or in
the event of an accident.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#
Secure objects, luggage or loads
against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie-downs, even if you are using
the cargo compartment cover.
*
NOTE Damage to the cargo compart‐
ment cover when loading the vehicle
The cargo compartment cover may be dam‐
aged when loading the vehicle.
#
Do not place any objects above the
lower edge of the side windows or on
the cargo compartment cover.
The cargo compartment cover and the dividing
net form the combined cargo cover and net.
When the cargo compartment cover is clipped
in, no objects in the cargo compartment should
obstruct the downward movement of the cover
when the tailgate is closed. The cargo compart‐
ment cover will otherwise be raised again auto‐
matically.
116
Seats and stowing
Extending/retracting the cargo compart‐
ment cover
#
To extend: pull cargo compartment cover 1
back by grab handle 2 and clip it into the
brackets on the left and right.
The cargo compartment cover raises auto‐
matically when the tailgate is opened and
lowers again when the tailgate is closed.
Retracting
#
Remove cargo compartment cover 1 from
the brackets on the left and right.
#
Guide cargo compartment cover 1 forwards
by grab handle 2 until it is fully retracted.
The handle strip of the extended cargo compart‐
ment cover 1 can be used in the following posi‐
tions:
1
Folded up by 45° (loading position)
2
Horizontal position (driving position)
3
Folded down and locked in place (rattle-free
position when driving)
Installing/removing the combined cargo
cover and net
Requirements:
R
The cargo compartment cover and partition
net are retracted.
Removal
Remove the combined cargo cover and net from
the cargo compartment, or from the left-hand
rear door if the seat backrests are folded for‐
wards.
#
Press button 2.
#
Fold the combined cargo cover and net back‐
wards with the seat backrest folded up.
Seats and stowing
117
#
First, detach the combined cargo cover and
net from left-hand catch 1 and then remove
it from right-hand bracket 4.
Installing
#
Slide the combined cargo cover and net into
right-hand bracket 4 as far as it will go.
#
Place the combined cargo cover and net into
the left-hand bracket and slide it into catch
1 until the combined cargo cover and net
engages audibly.
Red lock verification indicator 3 must no
longer be visible.
Attaching the combined cargo cover and net
to the rear seat backrest
*
NOTE Damage to the combined luggage
cover and net when attaching it to the
seat backrest
When the combined luggage cover and net is
attached to the seat backrest, it may be
damaged when the seat backrest is folded
back.
#
Do not fold the seat backrests back.
Requirements:
R
The seat backrests are folded forwards.
#
Insert combined cargo cover and net 2 into
both guides 1 and push it as far as it will go
in the direction of the arrow.
To disassemble the combined cargo cover and
net, follow the instructions in reverse order.
Attaching the partitioning net
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects being poorly secured
On its own, the partition net cannot secure
or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage
and heavy loads.
You could be hit by an unsecured load during
sudden changes in direction, braking or in
the event of an accident.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#
Secure objects, luggage or loads
against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using lashing material, even when you
are using the partition net.
For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net
when transporting a load.
Damaged partitioning nets can no longer fulfill
their protective functions and must be replaced.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
118
Seats and stowing
Partitioning net without cargo compartment
enlargement
#
Pull the partitioning net far out towards the
rear from the rear bench seat using tab 1.
#
Hook the partition net into eyelets 2, first
on the left, then on the right.
Partitioning net with cargo compartment
enlargement
#
Guide the partition net upwards using the tab
1.
#
Hook the partition net into the eyelets 2.
Overview of the tie-down eyes
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 110).
1
Cargo tie-down rings
Seats and stowing
119
Overview of bag hooks
&
WARNING Risk of injury when using bag
hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage.
Objects or items of luggage could be thrown
around and thereby hit vehicle occupants
when braking or abruptly changing direc‐
tions.
#
Only hang light objects on the bag
hooks.
#
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 110).
The bag hooks can bear a maximum load of
6.6 lbs (3 kg). Do not use them to secure a load.
1
Bag hook
Attaching the parcel net
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If you do not adequately stow objects in the
vehicle interior, they could slip or be tossed
around and thereby strike vehicle occupants.
In addition, cup holders, open stowage
spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot
always restrain the objects they contain in
the event of an accident.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be tossed about in these or
similar situations.
#
Always make sure that objects do not
project from stowage spaces, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
#
Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#
Stow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or
too large in the cargo compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
120
Seats and stowing
#
Fold up the tie-down eyes.
#
Hook parcel net 1 into the front and rear
tie-down eyes.
Opening or closing the stowage space under
the cargo compartment floor
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to an open
cargo compartment floor
If you drive when the cargo compartment
floor is open, objects could be thrown around
and thereby strike vehicle occupants. There
is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of
sudden braking or a sudden change in direc‐
tion.
#
Always close the cargo compartment
floor before a journey.
Opening
#
Pull handle 1 upwards.
#
Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
using handle 1.
#
Fold out hook on the underside of the cargo
compartment floor.
#
Clip hook onto drip rail 2.
Closing
#
Unhook the hook from drip rail 2 and fasten
it to the bracket on the underside of the
cargo compartment floor.
#
Fold the cargo compartment floor down‐
wards and then press handle 1 down until it
engages.
%
Vehicles with folding bench seat: The
cargo compartment floor is below the seat
cushion (/ page 105).
Attaching a roof rack
&
WARNING Risk of injury if the maximum
roof load is exceeded
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the usual driving
characteristics as well as the steering and
braking characteristics change. During cor‐
nering, the vehicle tilts more strongly and
may react more sluggishly to steering move‐
ments.
Seats and stowing
121
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the
driving characteristics, as well as the steer‐
ing and braking characteristics, will be
greatly impaired.
#
Always comply with the maximum roof
load and adjust your driving style.
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section.
*
NOTE Vehicle damage from non-
approved roof racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof racks
which have not been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
#
Use only roof racks tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
#
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that when the roof rack is instal‐
led, the sliding sunroof can be fully
raised.
#
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that when the roof rack is instal‐
led, the tailgate can be fully opened.
#
Position the load on the roof rack in
such a way that the vehicle will not sus‐
tain damage even when it is in motion.
*
NOTE Damage to the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel caused by a non-
approved roof rack
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel may be damaged by the roof rack if
you attempt to open it when using a roof
rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-
Benz.
#
When a roof rack is installed, open the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel only if the roof rack has been tes‐
ted and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle
interior, you can raise the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel.
#
Secure the roof rack to the roof railing.
#
Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Cup holder
Installing the cup holder in or removing it
from the center console (automatic trans‐
mission)
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
when using the cup holder while the
vehicle is moving
The cup holder cannot secure containers
while the vehicle is moving.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is
moving, the container may be flung around
and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu‐
pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You
could be distracted from traffic conditions
and you may lose control of the vehicle.
122
Seats and stowing
#
Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐
cle is stationary.
#
Only use the cup holder for containers
of the right size.
#
Close the container, particularly if the
liquid is hot.
#
To remove: slide catch 2 forwards and pull
out cup holder 1.
#
To install: insert cup holder 1 and slide
back catch 2.
%
The cup holder rubber mat can be removed
for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm
water.
Opening the cup holder in the rear armrest
*
NOTE Damage to the cup holder
When the rear armrest is folded back the cup
holder could become damaged.
#
Only fold the rear armrest back when
the cup holder is closed.
#
Press cup holder 1 or 2.
#
Place a container in or remove a container
from cup holder 1 or 2.
Seats and stowing
123
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
Using the ashtray in the front center console
*
NOTE Damage to the stowage compart‐
ment under the ashtray due to intense
heat
The stowage compartment under the ashtray
is not heat resistant and could be damaged if
you rest a lit cigarette on it.
#
Make sure that the ashtray is fully
engaged.
#
To open: push up cover 2 of the ashtray on
its right or left side.
#
To remove the insert: press insert 1 for‐
wards slightly and pull it out upwards.
#
To re-install the insert: press insert 1 into
the holder until it engages.
Using the rear passenger compartment ash‐
tray
#
To open: pull cover 2 out by its top handle
edge.
#
To remove the insert: push ribbing 3 from
the left side and pull insert 1 upwards and
out.
#
To install the insert: install insert 1 from
above and press down into the holder until it
engages.
Using the cigarette lighter
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the ciga‐
rette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials may ignite
if:
R
you drop the hot cigarette lighter
R
a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
#
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the
knob.
124
Seats and stowing
#
Always make sure that the cigarette
lighter is out of reach of children.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched on.
#
Press in cigarette lighter 1.
The cigarette lighter will pop out automati‐
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
Sockets
Using the 12 V socket in the rear passenger
compartment
Requirements:
R
Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 W (15 A).
#
Briefly press the trim element of cover 2.
#
Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the
plug of the device.
Using the 12 V socket in the front passenger
footwell
Requirements:
R
Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 W (15 A).
#
Lift up socket cap 1.
#
Make sure that no cables are running
through or secured in the airbag deployment
Seats and stowing
125
area when using the socket. Also observe the
notes on airbag protection (/ page 41).
Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger
compartment
&
DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐
aged connecting cables or sockets
If a suitable device is connected, the 115 V
socket will be carrying a high voltage. If the
connecting cable or the 115 V socket is
pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet,
you could receive an electric shock.
#
Only use dry and damage-free connect‐
ing cables.
#
When the ignition is switched off,
ensure that the 115 V socket is dry.
#
If the 115 V socket is damaged or gets
pulled out of the paneling, immediately
have the socket checked or replaced at
a qualified specialized workshop.
#
Never plug the connecting cable into a
115 V socket that is damaged or has
been pulled out of the trim.
&
DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐
rect handling of the socket
You could receive an electric shock:
R
if you reach into the socket.
R
if you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket.
#
Do not reach into the socket.
#
Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.
Requirements:
R
Only connect devices with a suitable plug
which conforms to the standards specific to
the country you are in.
R
Only connect devices up to a maximum of
150 W.
R
Do not use multiple socket outlets.
#
Open flap 3.
#
Insert the plug of the device into 115 V
socket 1.
When the on-board electrical system voltage
is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up.
126
Seats and stowing
Using the 12 V socket in the cargo compart‐
ment
Requirements:
R
Only connect devices up to a maximum of
180 W (15 A).
#
Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the
plug of the device.
USB port in the rear passenger compartment
You can charge a USB device, e.g. a mobile
phone, at USB ports 1 using a suitable charg‐
ing cable.
The devices can be charged with 5 V (2.1 A) and
when the ignition is switched on.
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and
connection with the exterior antenna
Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile
phone
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If you do not adequately stow objects in the
vehicle interior, they could slip or be tossed
around and thereby strike vehicle occupants.
In addition, cup holders, open stowage
spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot
always restrain the objects they contain in
the event of an accident.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be tossed about in these or
similar situations.
#
Always make sure that objects do not
project from stowage spaces, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
Seats and stowing
127
#
Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#
Stow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or
too large in the cargo compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of fire from placing
objects in the mobile phone stowage
compartment
There is a risk of fire, in particular, if you
place more than one mobile phone in the
mobile phone stowage compartment.
#
Apart from a mobile phone, do not
place any other objects in the mobile
phone stowage compartment, espe‐
cially those made of metal.
*
NOTE Damage to objects caused by
placing them in the mobile phone stow‐
age compartment
If objects are placed in the mobile phone
stowage compartment, they may be dam‐
aged by electromagnetic fields.
#
Do not place credit cards, storage
media or other objects sensitive to
electromagnetic fields in the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
*
NOTE Damage to the mobile phone
stowage compartment caused by liquids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage
compartment, the compartment may be
damaged.
#
Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
R
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's
exterior antenna via the charging module.
R
The charging function and wireless connec‐
tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's
exterior antenna are only available if the igni‐
tion is switched on.
R
Small mobile phones may not be able to be
charged in every position of the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
R
Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in
the mobile phone stowage compartment may
not be able to be charged or connected with
the vehicle's exterior antenna.
R
The mobile phone may heat up during the
charging process. This depends on the appli‐
cations (apps) currently running.
The mobile phone can be cooled in the
mobile phone stowage compartment when
the air conditioning system is switched on.
The cooling output in the mobile phone stow‐
age compartment is highest when the con‐
troller in the glove box is closed.
R
To ensure more efficient charging and con‐
nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna,
remove the protective cover from the mobile
128
Seats and stowing
phone. Protective covers which are designed
for wireless charging are excluded.
R
When charging, the mat should be used if
possible.
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone
Requirements:
R
The mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone). You
can find a list of Qi-compatible mobile
phones at:
https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com
#
Place the mobile phone as close to the cen‐
ter of mat 1 as possible with the display
facing upwards.
When the charging symbol is shown in the
multimedia system, the mobile phone is
being charged.
Malfunctions during the charging process are
shown in the media display.
%
The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g.
using clean, lukewarm water.
Installing and removing the floor mats
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardizes the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
#
Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#
Always install the floor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that there is always sufficient room for
the pedals.
#
Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
#
To install: press studs 1 onto holders 2.
#
To remove: pull the floor mat off holders 2.
Seats and stowing
129
Exterior lighting
Information about lighting systems and your
responsibility
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are
only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible
for correct vehicle illumination in accordance
with the prevailing light and visibility conditions,
legal requirements and traffic situation.
Light switch
Operating the light switch
1
W Left-hand standing lamps
2
X Right-hand standing lamps
3
T Parking lamps and license plate lamp
4
à Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)
5
L Low beam/high beam
6
R Switches the rear fog light on/off
When low beam is activated, the T parking
lamps indicator lamp will be deactivated and
replaced by the L low beam indicator lamp.
#
Always park your vehicle safely using suffi‐
cient lighting, in accordance with the rele‐
vant legal stipulations.
*
NOTE Battery discharging by operating
the standing lights
Operating the standing lights over a period of
hours puts a strain on the battery.
#
Where possible, switch on the
right X or left W parking light.
In the case of severe battery discharging, the
standing lights or parking lamps will automati‐
cally be switched off to facilitate the next engine
start.
The exterior lighting (except standing and park‐
ing lamps) will switch off automatically when the
driver's door is opened.
130
Light and visibility
R
Observe the notes on surround lighting
(/ page 135).
Automatic driving lights function
The parking lamps, low beam and daytime run‐
ning lamps will be switched on automatically
depending on the ignition status and the ambi‐
ent light.
&
WARNING Risk of accident when the low
beam is switched off in poor visibility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low
beam may not be switched on automatically
if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor
visibility such as spray.
#
In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You
are responsible for vehicle lighting.
Switching the rear fog lights on or off
Requirements:
R
The light switch is in the L or à posi‐
tion.
#
Press the R button.
Please observe the country-specific laws on the
use of rear fog lamps.
Operating the combination switch for the
lights
1
High beam
2
Turn signal indicator, right
3
High-beam flasher
4
Turn signal indicator, left
#
Use the combination switch to activate the
desired function.
Light and visibility
131
High beam
#
To switch on: turn the light switch to the
L or à position.
#
Push the combination switch beyond the
point of resistance in the direction of arrow
1.
When the high beam is activated, the L
low beam indicator lamp will be deactivated
and replaced by the K high beam indica‐
tor lamp.
#
To switch off: move the combination switch
back to its starting position.
High-beam flasher
#
Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 3.
Turn signal light
#
To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the point of resistance in the
direction of arrow 2 or 4.
The corresponding turn signal indicator will
flash three times.
#
To indicate permanently: press the combi‐
nation switch beyond the point of resistance
in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist:
R
Indicator operation activated by the driver
can extend for the duration of the lane
change.
R
If the driver indicated directly beforehand
but a lane change was not immediately
possible, the turn signal indicator may
activate automatically.
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning
lamps
#
Press button 1 .
The hazard warning lamps will switch on auto‐
matically if:
R
the airbag has been deployed.
132
Light and visibility
Cornering light
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illumi‐
nation of the roadway over a wide angle in the
turning direction, enabling better visibility on
tight bends, for example. It can be activated only
when the low beam is switched on.
The function is active in the following cases:
R
At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when
the turn signal indicator is switched on or the
steering wheel is turned
R
At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and
45 mph (70 km/h) when the steering wheel
is turned
Traffic circle and intersection function: the
cornering light will be activated on both sides
based on an evaluation of the current GPS posi‐
tion of the vehicle. It will remain active until after
the vehicle has left the traffic circle or the inter‐
section.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist function
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog‐
nize the following road users:
R
Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐
trians
R
Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists
R
Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognize other road users
with their own lighting, or may recognize
them too late.
In these or similar situations, the automatic
high beam is not deactivated or is activated
despite the presence of other road users.
#
Always observe the traffic carefully and
switch off the high beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Detection may be restricted in the following
cases:
R
In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
R
If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to
the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi‐
tions.
Light and visibility
133
%
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is available only in
vehicles with LED high performance head‐
lamps.
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically
switches between the following types of light:
R
Low-beam headlamps
R
High-beam headlamps
At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h):
R
If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will be switched on automatically.
The high beam switches off automatically in the
following cases:
R
At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h).
R
If other road users are detected.
R
If street lighting is sufficient.
At speeds greater than approximately 31 mph
(50 km/h):
R
The headlamp range of the low beam is regu‐
lated automatically based on the distance to
other road users.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off
#
To switch on: turn the light switch to the
à position.
#
Switch on the high beam using the combina‐
tion switch.
When the high beam is switched on automat‐
ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp on
the multifunction display comes on.
#
To switch off: switch off the high beam
using the combination switch.
Switching the daytime running lamps on/off
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Daytime Run. Lights
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay
time
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Ext. Light Switch Off
#
Set the switch-off delay time.
134
Light and visibility
Setting the surround lighting
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Locator Lighting
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
If the surround lighting is switched on, the exte‐
rior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after the
vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle,
the surround lighting is deactivated and the
automatic driving lights are activated.
Interior lighting
Adjusting the interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
1
p Front left reading lamp
2
S Automatic interior lighting control
3
c Front interior lighting
4
u Rear interior lighting
5
p Front right reading lamp
#
To switch on or off: press button 1 – 5
accordingly.
Control panel in the grab handle
1
p Rear passenger compartment reading
lamp
#
To switch on or off: press button 1.
Adjusting the ambient lighting
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Ambient Light
Setting the color
#
Select Color.
Light and visibility
135
#
Set a color.
Adjusting the brightness
#
Select Brightness.
#
Set a brightness value.
Activating the brightness for zones
#
Select Brightness Zones.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
The Display, Front and Rear zones can be set
separately.
Activating multi-colored lighting
#
Select Multi-color.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
There are ten preset color combinations
available.
Activating multi-colored animation
#
Select Multi-color Anim..
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
The chosen color combination will change at
predefined intervals.
Activating dependency on air conditioning
settings
#
Select Climate.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
If changes are made to the temperature set‐
ting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient
lighting will change briefly.
Activating welcome lighting
#
Select Welcome.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
When the vehicle is unlocked, a special inte‐
rior lighting sequence will run.
Setting the interior lighting switch-off delay
time
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
÷ Light Settings
5
Int. Light Switch Off
#
Set the switch-off delay time.
Windshield wiper and windshield washer
system
Switching the windshield wipers on/off
1
g Windshield wiper off
2
Ä Intermittent wiping, normal
3
Å Intermittent wiping, frequent
136
Light and visibility
4
° Continuous wiping, slow
5
¯ Continuous wiping, fast
#
Turn the combination switch to the corre‐
sponding position 1 - 5.
#
Single wipe/washing: push the button on
the combination switch in the direction of
arrow 1.
R
í Single wipe
R
î Wipes with washer fluid
Switching the rear window wiper on/off
1
ô Wipes with washer fluid
2
° Switches on intermittent wiping
3
g Switches off intermittent wiping
4
ô Wipes with washer fluid
#
Turn è switch 1 to the correct position
1 - 4.
The è symbol will appear on the instru‐
ment cluster when the rear window wiper is
switched on.
Changing the windshield wiper blades
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the windshield wipers are switched on
while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can
be trapped by the wiper arm.
#
Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the
wiper blades.
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement
position
#
Switch the ignition on and switch off again
immediately.
Light and visibility
137
#
Within around 15 seconds, press the î
button on the combination switch for approx‐
imately three seconds(/ page 136).
The wiper arms will move into the replace‐
ment position.
Removing the wiper blades
#
Fold the wiper arms away from the wind‐
shield.
#
Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc‐
tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm as
far as it will go.
#
Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the removal position.
#
Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 4.
Installing the wiper blades
#
Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper
arm in the direction of arrow 1.
#
Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the locking position.
#
Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor‐
rectly.
138
Light and visibility
#
Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind‐
shield.
#
Switch on the ignition.
#
Press the î button on the combination
switch.
The wiper arms will move into the original
position.
#
Switch off the ignition.
Maintenance display
#
Remove protective film 1 from the mainte‐
nance display on the tip of the newly instal‐
led wiper blades.
If the color of the maintenance display changes
from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
%
The duration until the color changes varies
depending on the usage conditions.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
the windshield wipers are switched on
while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can
be trapped by the wiper arm.
#
Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the
wiper blades.
Removing the wiper blade
#
Switch the ignition off.
Light and visibility
139
#
Fold wiper arm 2 away from the rear win‐
dow until it engages in the replacement posi‐
tion.
#
Unclip wiper blade 1 from wiper arm 2
and remove it in the direction of arrow 3.
Installing the wiper blade
#
Position wiper blade 1 with both lugs 3 on
holder 2 on the wiper arm.
#
Push wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow
4 until it engages in holder 2.
#
Make sure that wiper blade 1 is seated cor‐
rectly.
#
Fold the wiper arm from the replacement
position back onto the rear window.
Mirrors
Operating the outside mirrors
&
WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting
the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in
motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
if you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
R
if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion
#
Before starting the engine: adjust the
driver's seat, the head restraint, the
steering wheel or the mirror and fasten
your seat belt.
140
Light and visibility
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐
judgment of distances when using the
passenger mirror
The outside mirror on the front-passenger
side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The
objects in view are in fact closer than they
appear.
As a result, you may misjudge the distance
between you and the road user driving
behind you, for example, when changing
lanes.
#
Therefore, always look over your shoul‐
der in order to ensure that you are
aware of the actual distance between
you and the road users driving behind
you.
Folding the outside mirrors in/out
#
Briefly press switch 1.
Resetting the outside mirrors
%
If the battery has been disconnected or com‐
pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must
be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror
folding function work properly.
#
Briefly press switch 1.
Adjusting the outside mirrors
#
Press buttons 3 or 4 to select the outside
mirror to be adjusted.
#
Press button 2 to adjust the position of the
mirror glass.
Engaging the outside mirrors
#
Press and hold button 1.
You will hear a click and the mirror will audi‐
bly engage in position. The outside mirror is
set to the correct position.
Automatic anti-glare mirrors function
&
WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi‐
soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec‐
trolyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an
automatic anti-glare mirror breaks.
The electrolyte is hazardous to health and
causes irritation. It must not come into con‐
tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs
or clothing or be swallowed.
Light and visibility
141
#
If you come into contact with electro‐
lyte, observe the following:
R
Immediately rinse the electrolyte
from your skin with water and seek
medical attention.
R
If electrolyte comes into contact
with your eyes, immediately rinse
them thoroughly with clean water
and seek medical attention.
R
If the electrolyte is swallowed,
immediately rinse your mouth out
thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing
which has been contaminated with
electrolyte.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek
medical attention immediately.
The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir‐
ror on the driver's side will automatically go into
anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the
sensor on the inside rearview mirror.
System limits
The system will not go into anti-glare mode if:
R
The engine is switched off.
R
Reverse gear is engaged.
R
The interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐
tion function
%
The parking position is available only in vehi‐
cles with a memory function.
The parking position makes parking easier.
The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel
downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on
the front passenger's side when:
R
The parking position is stored (/ page 142).
R
The front-passenger mirror is selected.
R
Reverse gear is engaged.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move
back to its original position when:
R
You shift the transmission to another trans‐
mission position.
R
You are traveling at a speed greater than
9 mph (15 km/h).
R
You press the button for the outside mirror
on the driver's side.
Storing the parking position of the front-
passenger outside mirror using reverse gear
Storing
142
Light and visibility
#
Select the front-passenger outside mirror
using button 2.
#
Engage reverse gear.
#
Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button 1.
Calling up
#
Select the front-passenger outside mirror
using button 2.
#
Engage reverse gear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move
to the stored parking position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror
folding function
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Autom. Mirror Folding
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Operating the sun visors
Using the single sun visor
#
Glare from the front: fold sun visor 1
down.
#
Glare from the side: swing sun visor 1 to
the side.
#
Vehicles with an extendable sun visor: slide
sun visor 1 horizontally as required.
Light and visibility
143
Area permeable to radio waves on the
windshield
Radio-controlled equipment, e.g. toll systems,
can be mounted only on areas of the windshield
that are permeable to radio waves 1.
The area permeable to radio waves 1 is best
visible from outside the vehicle when the wind‐
shield is illuminated with an additional light
source.
Infrared-reflective windshield function
The infrared-reflective windshield is coated and
reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle inte‐
rior.
The coating shields the vehicle interior from
radio waves.
144
Light and visibility
Overview of climate control systems
Notes on climate control
An interior air filter in combination with the pre‐
filter in the engine compartment must always be
used so that the air conditioning system, pollu‐
tion level monitoring and the air filtration work
correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed
correctly and the filter housing in the engine
compartment is closed correctly using the cap
and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use
filters recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car‐
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Overview of the control panel for dual-zone
automatic climate control
The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that
the corresponding function is activated.
1
w Sets the temperature, left
2
_ Sets the air distribution
3
H Sets the airflow or switch off climate
control
4
à Sets climate control to automatic
mode (/ page 147)
5
¬ Defrosts the windshield
6
t Calls up the air conditioning menu
7
¤ Switches the rear window heater
on/off
8
0 Activates or deactivates synchroniza‐
tion (/ page 147)
9
g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
(/ page 148)
A
¿ Switches the A/C function on/off
(/ page 146)
B
w Sets the temperature, right
Overview of the control panel for 3-zone
automatic climate control
The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that
the corresponding function is activated.
1
w Sets the temperature, left
2
_ Sets the air distribution, left
3
H Sets the airflow or switches off climate
control
Climate control
145
4
à Sets climate control to automatic
mode (/ page 147)
5
¬ Defrosts the windshield
6
! Calls up the air conditioning menu
Switches the residual heat on or off
(/ page 148)
7
¤ Switches the rear window heater
on/off
8
¿ Switches the A/C function on/off
(/ page 146)
9
g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
(/ page 148)
A
_ Sets the air distribution, right
B
w Sets the temperature, right
Rear operating unit
1
Sets the temperature
2
Display
3
Sets the airflow
Operating the climate control system
Switching climate control on/off
#
To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or
higher using the H button.
#
To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using
the H button.
%
If climate control is switched off, the win‐
dows may fog up more quickly. Switch off
climate control only briefly.
Switching the A/C function on or off via the
control panel
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies
the vehicle's interior air.
#
Press the ¿ button.
Switch off the A/C function only briefly; other‐
wise, the windows may fog up more quickly.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is
not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via
the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
b Climate Control
5
A/C
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies
the vehicle's interior air.
146
Climate control
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Setting climate control to automatic mode
In automatic mode, the set temperature is con‐
trolled and maintained at a constant level by the
air supply.
#
Press the à button.
#
To switch to manual mode: press the H
or _ button.
Climate style
Climate style function
In automatic mode, you can select the following
climate style settings for the driver's and front
passenger areas:
R
FOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting
R
MEDIUM: medium airflow, standard setting
R
DIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and
draft-free setting
Adjusting the climate mode settings
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
b Climate Control
5
Climate Mode
#
Select Driver and/or Passenger.
#
Select FOCUS, MEDIUM or DIFFUSE.
%
To feel the effect of the climate style, the
à function must be active (/ page 147).
Overview of the air distribution settings
The symbols on the display indicate which vents
the airflow is being directed through:
¯
defroster vents
P
center and side air vents
O
footwell vents
S
center, side and footwell vents
a
defroster and footwell vents
_
all vents
b
defroster, middle and side air vents
W
automatic air distribution
Setting the rear climate control using the
multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
b Climate Control
5
Rear
Setting the airflow
#
Select Airflow.
#
Set the airflow.
Setting the temperature
#
Select Temperature.
#
Set the temperature.
Activating/deactivating the climate control
synchronization function via the control
panel
Climate control can be set centrally using the
synchronization function. The temperature and
air distribution settings for the driver's side are
adopted automatically for the front passenger
side.
#
Press the 0 button.
Climate control
147
The synchronization function is deactivated if the
settings for one of the other climate zones are
changed.
Activating or deactivating the climate con‐
trol synchronization function using the multi‐
media system
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
b Climate Control
5
SYNC
The climate control can be controlled centrally
using the synchronization function. The tempera‐
ture setting is automatically adopted for all cli‐
mate zones.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Removing condensation from the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
#
Press the à button.
#
If the windows continue to fog up: press the
¬ button.
Windows fogged up on the outside
#
Switch on the windshield wipers.
#
Press the à button.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
#
Press the g button.
The interior air will be recirculated.
Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to
fresh air mode after some time.
%
If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on
air-recirculation mode only briefly.
Switching the residual heat on or off
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is parked.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
from the engine to continue heating or ventilat‐
ing the front compartment of the vehicle for
approximately 30 minutes.
#
To switch on: press the ! button.
Residual heat is switched off automatically.
Activating/deactivating ionization
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
b Climate Control
5
Ionization
Ionization cleans and refreshes the interior air of
the vehicle. The ionization of the interior air is
odorless.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Fragrance system
Setting the fragrance system
Requirements:
R
Automatic climate control is activated.
R
The glove box is closed.
148
Climate control
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
b Climate Control
5
Air Freshener
The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra‐
grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla‐
con located in the glove box.
#
To set the intensity: select High, Medium,
Low or Off.
Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra‐
grance system
&
WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per‐
fume
If children open the flacon, they could drink
the liquid perfume or it could come into con‐
tact with their eyes.
#
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
Consult a doctor immediately if liquid
perfume has been drunk.
#
If liquid perfume comes into contact
with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes
with clean water.
#
If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of full
flacons
Full flacons must not be disposed
of with household waste.
#
Full flacons must be taken to
a harmful substance collection point.
1
Cap
2
Flacon
#
To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as
far as it will go.
#
To remove: pull out the flacon.
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety
notices on the perfume packaging.
Climate control
149
Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill
it.
Refillable flacon
#
Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon.
#
Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz.
(15 ml).
#
Screw the cap back on to the flacon.
Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the
same perfume. Observe the separate informa‐
tion sheet with the flacon.
Information on the windshield heater
The windshield heater is switched on automati‐
cally if the ¬ button is activated.
After the vehicle is started, the windshield
heater is switched on automatically as required.
Air vents
Adjusting the front air vents
&
WARNING ‑ Danger of burns or frostbite
due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents.
This could result in burns or frostbite in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents.
#
Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sufficient distance to
the air vents.
#
If necessary, direct the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
To guarantee the fresh air supply through the air
vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the
following:
R
Always keep the vents and the ventilation
grille in the vehicle interior free.
R
Keep the air inlet free of deposits
(/ page 374).
#
To open or close: turn controller 2 to the
left or right as far as it will go.
#
To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1
in the center and move it up or down or to
the left or right.
150
Climate control
Adjusting the rear passenger compartment
air vents
#
To open or close: turn controller 2 to the
left or right as far as it will go.
#
To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1
in the center and move it up or down or to
the left or right.
Opening or closing the air vent in the glove
box
*
NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive
objects in the glove box
Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the
glove box may be damaged by the air vent
located inside it.
#
Close the air vent when you heat the
vehicle.
#
At high outside temperatures, open the
air vent and switch on the A/C func‐
tion.
The automatic climate control must be switched
on to cool the glove box.
1
Air vent controller
2
Air vent
#
To open or close: turn controller 1 to the
left or right.
Climate control
151
Driving
Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Observe the notes on the following topics in the
Supplement, as you may otherwise fail to recog‐
nize dangers:
R
RACE START
R
AMG adaptive sport suspension system
R
(DYNAMIC SELECT switch) drive programs
R
Functions of ESP
®
Switching on the power supply or the igni‐
tion (without engine start)
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
Also observe the "Notes on pets in the vehicle".
Requirements:
R
The SmartKey is located in the vehicle and
the SmartKey battery is not discharged.
R
The brake pedal is not depressed.
#
To switch on the power supply: press but‐
ton 1 once.
You can activate the windshield wipers, for
example.
The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐
lowing conditions are met:
R
You open the driver's door.
R
You press button 1 twice more.
152
Driving and parking
#
To switch on the ignition: press button 1
twice.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
The ignition is switched off again if one of the
following conditions is met:
R
You do not start the vehicle within
15 minutes and the transmission is in posi‐
tion j or the electric parking brake is
applied.
R
You press button 1 once.
Starting the vehicle
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐
ton
&
DANGER Risk of death caused by
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and leads to poisoning.
#
Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
&
WARNING Risk of fire caused by flam‐
mable material on the exhaust system
Flammable materials brought in by either ani‐
mals or environmental influences may ignite
if they come into contact with hot parts of
the engine or exhaust system.
#
Therefore, check regularly that there
are no flammable materials in the
engine compartment or on the exhaust
system.
Requirements:
R
The SmartKey is located in the vehicle and
the SmartKey battery is not discharged.
#
Shift the transmission to position j or i.
#
Depress the brake pedal and press button
1 once.
#
If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-
essential consumers and press button 1
once.
#
If the vehicle still does not start and the
Place the Key in the Marked Space See
Operator's Manual display message also
appears in the multifunction display: start
the vehicle in emergency operation mode.
%
You can switch off the engine while driving
by pressing button 1 for about three sec‐
onds or by pressing button 1 three times
within three seconds. Be sure to observe the
safety notes under "Driving tips"
(/ page 157).
Starting the vehicle with SmartKey in the
marked space (emergency operation mode)
If the vehicle does not start and the Place the
Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual
message appears in the multifunction display,
you can start the vehicle in emergency operation
mode.
Driving and parking
153
#
Make sure that marked space 2 is empty.
#
Remove SmartKey 1 from the key ring.
#
Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2.
The vehicle will start after a short time.
If you remove SmartKey 1 from marked
space 2 the engine continues running. For
further vehicle starts however, SmartKey 1
must be located in marked space 2 during
the entire journey.
#
Have SmartKey 1 checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
If the vehicle does not start:
#
Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2 and
leave it there.
#
Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi‐
cle using the start/stop button.
%
You can also switch on the power supply or
the ignition with the start/stop button.
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv‐
ices
Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before
commencing your journey
%
This function is not available in all countries.
If you start the vehicle via your smartphone, the
previously selected air conditioning adjustment
is active.
Ensure the following before starting the engine:
R
The legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
smartphone.
R
It is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked.
R
The fuel tank is sufficiently filled.
R
The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
%
You can also set the temperature with your
smartphone. Information on Mercedes me
connect and other services: https://
www.mercedes.me
This function is not available for all models.
Charging the battery before commencing
your journey
%
This function is not available in all countries.
If the vehicle battery is discharged, you receive a
message on your smartphone. You can then
start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge
the battery. The vehicle is automatically
switched off after ten minutes.
Ensure the following before starting the engine:
R
The legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
smartphone.
R
It is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked.
R
The fuel tank is sufficiently filled.
154
Driving and parking
Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)
&
WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap‐
ment due to unintentional starting of the
engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during
service or maintenance work.
#
Always secure the engine against unin‐
tentional starting before carrying out
maintenance or repair work.
Requirements:
R
Park position j is selected.
R
The anti-theft alarm system is not activated.
R
The panic alarm is not activated.
R
The hazard warning lights are switched off.
R
The hood is closed.
R
The doors are closed and locked.
R
The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
#
Start the vehicle using the smartphone.
After every vehicle start, the engine runs for
ten minutes.
You can carry out a maximum of two consecu‐
tive starting attempts. The vehicle must be star‐
ted once with the SmartKey before trying to
start the vehicle again with the smartphone. you
can stop the vehicle again at any time.
%
Further information can be found in the
smartphone app.
Securing the engine against starting before
carrying out maintenance or repair work:
#
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
or
#
Unlock the doors.
or
#
Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
Breaking-in notes
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
To preserve the engine during the first
1,000 miles (1,500 km):
R
Drive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds.
R
Drive the vehicle in drive program A
or ;.
R
Shift to the next highest gear at the very lat‐
est when the needle reaches the last third
before the red area in the tachometer.
R
Do not shift down a gear manually in order to
brake.
R
Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
full throttle.
R
Do not depress the accelerator pedal past
the pressure point (kickdown).
R
Only increase the engine speed gradually and
accelerate the vehicle to full speed after
1,000 miles (1,500 km).
This also applies when the engine or parts of the
drivetrain have been replaced.
Driving and parking
155
Please also observe the following breaking-in
notes:
R
In certain driving and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐
tain distance is being driven after the vehicle
has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys‐
tem effectiveness is not reached until the
end of this teach-in process.
R
Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are
either new or have been replaced only ach‐
ieve optimum braking effect and grip after
several hundred kilometers of driving. Com‐
pensate for the reduced braking effect by
applying greater force to the brake pedal.
Notes on optimized acceleration
If all necessary prerequisites and activation con‐
ditions are fulfilled, the best possible accelera‐
tion can be achieved from a standstill.
Do not use the optimized acceleration on public
roads. Individual wheels could spin and you
could lose control of the vehicle. There is an
increased risk of skidding and/or accident.
Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa‐
tion on ESP
®
(/ page 182).
Pulling away with optimized acceleration
&
WARNING Risk of skidding and having
an accident from wheels spinning
When you use optimized acceleration, indi‐
vidual wheels could spin and you could lose
control of the vehicle.
If ESP
®
is deactivated, there is a risk of skid‐
ding and accident.
#
Make sure that no persons or obstacles
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been broken in
(/ page 155).
R
The vehicle and tires are in good condition.
R
You are on a high-grip roadway.
R
The engine and transmission are at normal
operating temperature.
*
NOTE Increased wear due to optimized
acceleration
When pulling away with optimized accelera‐
tion, all components of the drivetrain are
subjected to a very high load.
This can lead to increased component wear.
#
Do not always pull away with optimized
acceleration.
#
Engage the h drive position (/ page 165).
#
Move the steering wheel to the straight-
ahead position.
#
Select the sportiest available drive program
B or C(/ page 163).
#
Deactivate ESP
®
(/ page 186).
#
Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with
your left foot.
#
With your right foot, fully depress the accel‐
erator pedal.
156
Driving and parking
#
After no more than five seconds, take your
left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera‐
tion.
#
Switch on ESP
®
once the acceleration proce‐
dure is complete.
Ending optimized acceleration
#
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
#
Reactivate the ESP
®
.
%
After you pull away with optimized accelera‐
tion, components of the drivetrain can
become very hot, which means that opti‐
mized acceleration values may be reached
again only after a few minutes.
Notes on driving
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardizes the operating and road
safety of the vehicle.
#
Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#
Always install the floor mats securely
and as prescribed in order to ensure
that there is always sufficient room for
the pedals.
#
Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
unsuitable footwear
Operation of the pedals may be restricted
due to unsuitable footwear such as:
R
Shoes with platform soles
R
Shoes with high heels
R
Slippers
#
When driving always wear suitable
shoes in order to be able to operate the
pedals safely.
&
WARNING Risk of accident when switch‐
ing off the ignition when driving
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety functions are restricted or no longer
available. This may affect the power steering
system and the brake force boosting, for
example.
You will then need to use considerably more
force to steer and brake.
#
Do not switch off the ignition while driv‐
ing.
&
DANGER Risk of death caused by
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and leads to poisoning.
#
Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
Driving and parking
157
&
WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
accident due to shifting down on slippery
road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
increase the engine braking effect, the drive
wheels may lose traction.
#
Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐
faces to increase the engine braking
effect.
&
DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐
sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐
cle. This is the case when the vehicle
becomes stuck in snow, for example.
#
Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the
engine or the stationary heater are run‐
ning.
#
Open a window on the side of the vehi‐
cle facing away from the wind to ensure
an adequate supply of fresh air.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to being under the influence of alco‐
hol and drugs while driving
Driving when under the influence of alcohol
and/or drugs is an extremely dangerous
combination. Even small quantities of alcohol
or drugs may affect your reflexes, perception
and judgment.
The probability of a serious or even fatal acci‐
dent greatly increases if you drive when
under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
#
Do not drink alcohol or take drugs while
driving, and do not allow anyone to
drive who has been drinking alcohol or
taking drugs.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to the
brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal
when driving, the brake system may over‐
heat.
This increases the braking distance and the
brake system may even fail.
#
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
#
Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time
while driving.
*
NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by
continuously depressing the brake pedal
#
Do not depress the brake pedal contin‐
uously whilst driving.
#
To use the braking effect of the engine,
shift to a lower gear in good time.
158
Driving and parking
*
NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and
engine when pulling away
#
Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐
ately.
#
Avoid high engine speeds and driving at
full throttle until the engine has reached
its operating temperature.
*
NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is
misfiring.
Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐
lytic converter.
#
Only depress the accelerator pedal
slightly.
#
Have the cause rectified immediately at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on driving on salt-treated roads
The braking effect is limited on salt-treated
roads.
Therefore, observe the following notes:
R
due to salt build-up on the brake discs and
brakepads, the braking distance can increase
considerably or result in braking only on one
side
R
maintain a much greater safe distance to the
vehicle in front
To remove salt build-up:
R
brake occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions
R
carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next
journey
Notes on hydroplaning
Hydroplaning can take place once a certain
amount of water has accumulated on the road
surface.
Observe the following notes during heavy precip‐
itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning
may occur:
R
reduce speed
R
avoid tire ruts
R
avoid sudden steering movements
R
brake carefully
%
Also observe the notes on regularly checking
wheels and tires (/ page 404).
Notes on driving through water on the road
surface
Water which has entered into the vehicle can
damage the engine, electrics and transmission.
Water can also enter the air intake of the engine
and cause engine damage.
Observe the following if you must drive through
water:
R
the water, when calm, may only reach the
lower edge of the vehicle body
R
drive at walking pace at most, otherwise
water can enter the vehicle interior or engine
compartment
R
vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi‐
cles, can create waves which may exceed the
maximum permissible height of the water
The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after
fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to
Driving and parking
159
the traffic conditions until braking power has
been fully restored.
ECO start/stop function
Operation of the ECO start/stop function
Vehicles without a 48 V on-board electrical
system (EQ Boost technology)
The engine is switched off automatically in the
following situations if all vehicle conditions for
an automatic engine stop are met:
R
you brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐
mission position h or i.
If you switch on the HOLD function in transmis‐
sion position h or i, the engine will automati‐
cally stop in the following situations:
R
you stop behind a vehicle that is pulling
away.
R
you stop at a stop sign when there is no vehi‐
cle in front of you.
R
you turn the steering wheel hard at a low
speed.
%
In transmission position k, the engine is
not switched off automatically even when
the HOLD function is switched on.
The engine is restarted automatically if:
R
you release the brake pedal in transmission
position h when the HOLD function is not
active.
R
you engage transmission position h or k.
R
you depress the accelerator pedal.
R
an automatic engine start is necessary.
ECO start/stop function symbols in the multi‐
function display:
R
the è symbol (green) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was
switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
R
the ç symbol (yellow) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi‐
tions for an engine stop have been met.
R
neither the è nor ç symbol appears
when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli‐
gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop
sign.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/
stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐
ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted.
The Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition
Off Before Exiting display message also appears
in the multifunction display. If you do not switch
off the ignition, the ignition is automatically
switched off after three minutes.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐
tem (EQ Boost technology)
The engine is switched off automatically in the
following situations if all vehicle conditions for
an automatic engine stop are met:
R
You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐
mission position h or i.
R
You depress the brake pedal when traveling
at a low speed.
If you switch on the HOLD function or select a
different transmission position than k, the
engine will automatically stop in the following
situations:
R
You stop behind a vehicle that is pulling
away.
160
Driving and parking
R
You stop at a stop sign when there is no vehi‐
cle in front of you.
R
You turn the steering wheel hard at a low
speed.
The engine is restarted automatically if:
R
You release the brake pedal in transmission
position h when the HOLD function is not
active and one of the following conditions are
met:
-
Drive program A or ; is not selec‐
ted.
-
Drive program A or ; is selected
but the does not start to move.
-
Drive program A or ; is selected,
the vehicle is moving at a speed of more
that 15 mph (20 km/h) and glide mode is
not activated.
R
You engage transmission position h or k.
R
You release the brake pedal, the vehicle is
not in glide mode and it starts to move on a
gentle downhill gradient at a speed below
2 mph (3 km/h).
R
You depress the accelerator pedal.
R
You engage drive program B.
R
An automatic engine start is necessary.
ECO start/stop function symbols in the multi‐
function display:
R
The è symbol (green) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was
switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
R
The ç symbol (yellow) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi‐
tions for an engine stop have been met.
R
Neither the è nor ç symbol appears
when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli‐
gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop
sign.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/
stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐
ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted.
The Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition
Off Before Exiting display message also appears
in the multifunction display. If you do not switch
off the ignition, the ignition is automatically
switched off after three minutes.
Deactivating or activating the ECO start/
stop function
#
Press button 1.
If indicator lamp 2 lights up, the ECO start/
stop function is activated.
%
Depending on the model and the vehicle
equipment, the button may also be located
at a different position in the center console.
Driving and parking
161
ECO display function
The ECO display summarizes your driving char‐
acteristics from the start of the journey to its
completion and assists you in achieving the
most economical driving style.
You can influence consumption if you:
R
Drive with particular care
R
Drive the vehicle in drive program ;.
R
Observe the gearshift recommendations
The inner segment lights up green and the outer
segment fills up:
R
1 moderate acceleration
R
2 gentle deceleration and rolling
R
3 consistent speed
The inner segment is gray and the outer seg‐
ment empties:
R
1 sporty acceleration
R
2 heavy braking
R
3 fluctuations in speed
You have driven economically when:
R
The three outer segments are completely fil‐
led simultaneously.
R
The ECO display border lights up
The additional range achieved as a result of your
driving style in comparison with a driver with a
very sporty driving style is shown under Bonus
fr. Start . The range displayed does not indicate
a fixed reduction in consumption.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Plug-in hybrid: observe the notes in the Supple‐
ment. Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dan‐
gers.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change
between the following drive programs:
=
(Individual): individual settings
B
(Sport +): particularly sporty driving style
C
(Sport): sporty driving style
A
(Comfort): comfortable and economical
driving style
;
(Eco): particularly economical driving
style
%
The drive program selected appears in the
multifunction display of the on-board com‐
puter.
Depending on the drive program, the following
systems change their characteristics:
R
Drive:
-
Engine and transmission management
162
Driving and parking
-
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
ESP
®
R
Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or
DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL: suspension
R
Electric power steering
Selecting the drive program
#
Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards
or backwards.
The drive program selected appears in the
multifunction display.
Configuring drive program I
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
e DYNAMIC SELECT
5
Individual
#
Select the individual setting.
Switching the operation feedback for drive
program on/off
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
e DYNAMIC SELECT
#
Switch Notification for User on O or off ª.
When this function is active, a corresponding
message is shown in the media display when
a drive program is selected with the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Displaying vehicle data
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
e DYNAMIC SELECT
#
Select Vehicle Data.
The vehicle data is displayed.
Displaying engine data
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
e DYNAMIC SELECT
#
Select Engine Data.
%
The actual (maximum) values that can be
achieved for engine output and engine tor‐
que may deviate from the certified values
within the country-specific guidelines for
permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No.
85 or country-specific guidelines).
Factors that can influence this are, for exam‐
ple:
R
Sea level
R
Fuel grade
R
Outside temperature
Driving and parking
163
%
The values displayed serve only as orienta‐
tion. The values for engine output and
engine torque shown in the media display
may deviate from the actual values.
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi‐
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
sharply.
#
If you engage the transmission position
h or k when the vehicle is at a
standstill, always depress the brake
pedal firmly and do not accelerate at
the same time.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the trans‐
mission position. The current transmission posi‐
tion is displayed in the multifunction display.
j
Park position
k
Reverse gear
164
Driving and parking
i
Neutral
h
Drive position
Engaging reverse gear R
#
Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first
point of resistance.
The transmission position display k is
shown in the multifunction display.
Engaging neutral N
#
Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first
point of resistance.
The transmission position display shows i
in the multifunction display.
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will
allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push
it or tow it away.
Proceed as follows if you want the automatic
transmission to remain in neutral i
i even if
the ignition is switched off:
#
Start the vehicle.
#
Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
i.
#
Release the brake pedal.
#
Switch the ignition off.
%
If you then exit the vehicle leaving the
SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans‐
mission remains in neutral i.
Engaging park position P
#
Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
(/ page 170).
#
Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is
stationary.
#
When the vehicle is stationary, press button
j.
Park position is only engaged when the
transmission position display j is shown in
the multifunction display. If no transmission
position display j appears, secure the vehi‐
cle to prevent it from rolling away.
Park position j is engaged automatically if one
of the following conditions is met:
R
You switch off the ignition when the vehicle
is stationary and the transmission is in posi‐
tion h or k.
R
You open the driver's door when the vehicle
is stationary or when driving at a very low
speed and the transmission is in position h
or k.
%
To maneuver with an open driver's door,
open the driver's door while stationary and
engage transmission position h or k
again.
Engaging drive position D
#
Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first
point of resistance.
The transmission position display h is
shown in the multifunction display.
Driving and parking
165
When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐
sion position h, it shifts the gears automati‐
cally. This depends, among other things, on the
following factors:
R
The selected drive program
R
The position of the accelerator pedal
R
The driving speed
Manual gearshifting
&
WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
accident due to shifting down on slippery
road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
increase the engine braking effect, the drive
wheels may lose traction.
#
Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐
faces to increase the engine braking
effect.
When the automatic transmission is shifted to
position h, you can manually shift it with the
steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the
automatic transmission shifts to a higher or
lower gear depending on the steering wheel
gearshift paddle being pulled.
You have two options to manually shift the auto‐
matic transmission:
R
Temporary setting
R
Permanent setting
The gears shift automatically when manual gear‐
shifting is deactivated.
Temporary setting:
#
To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 1 or 2.
Manual gearshifting is activated for a short
time. Transmission position p and the cur‐
rent gear appear in the multifunction display.
%
How long the manual gearshifting stays acti‐
vated is dependent on various factors. Man‐
ual shifting can be deactivated automatically
when changing the drive program, restarting
the vehicle when the transmission position is
engaged again h or due to the driving style.
#
To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 2.
#
To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 1.
#
To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift
paddle 2 and hold it in place.
The transmission position h appears in the
multifunction display.
Permanent setting:
#
Change to drive program =(/ page 163).
#
Select drive setting p (/ page 163).
166
Driving and parking
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
Gearshift recommendation
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
The gearshift recommendation assists you in
adopting an economical driving style.
#
If gearshift recommendation message 1 is
shown on the multifunction display, shift to
the recommended gear.
Using kickdown
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
#
Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐
erator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the next
gear when the maximum engine speed is
reached to protect the engine from overrevving.
Glide mode function
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
With an anticipatory driving style, glide mode
helps you to reduce fuel consumption.
Glide mode is characterized by the following:
R
The combustion engine is disconnected from
the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral.
R
The transmission position h is displayed in
green in the multifunction display.
Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐
tions are met:
R
Drive program ; is selected.
R
The speed is within a suitable range.
R
The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep
uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends.
R
You do not depress the accelerator or brake
pedal (except for light brake applications).
%
Glide mode can also be activated if you have
selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the
drive program =.
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the
conditions is no longer met.
Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow‐
ing parameters:
R
Incline
R
Downhill gradient
R
Temperature
R
Height
R
Speed
R
Operating status of the engine
Driving and parking
167
R
Traffic situation
Function of 4MATIC
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven
when needed. Together with ESP
®
and 4ETS,
4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle
whenever a driven wheel spins due to insuffi‐
cient traction.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over‐
ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic conditions.
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe‐
cially for maintaining a safe distance from the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in lane.
%
In wintry road conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you
use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
chains if necessary.
Refueling
Refueling the vehicle
&
WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly flammable.
#
Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided.
#
Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while
refueling the vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
#
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#
Do not inhale fuel vapor.
#
Keep children away from fuel.
#
Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
#
Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water.
#
If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water. Seek medical
attention immediately.
#
If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
ing.
#
Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
&
WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due
to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can create sparks and
thereby ignite fuel vapors.
168
Driving and parking
#
Before you open the fuel filler cap or
take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the
metallic vehicle body.
This discharges any electrostatic charge
that may have built up.
#
Do not get into the vehicle again during
the refueling process.
Otherwise, electrostatic charge can
build up again.
*
NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a gasoline engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#
The RON requirement is located in the
fuel filler flap.
#
Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded
fuel.
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your
vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.
Never refuel using any of the following fuels:
R
Diesel
R
Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100
R
Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100
R
Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:
#
Do not switch the ignition on.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
*
NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐
cles with a gasoline engine
If you have accidentally refueled with the
wrong fuel:
R
Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Have the fuel tank and fuel lines
drained completely.
*
NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused
by overfilled fuel tanks
#
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
nozzle switches off.
*
NOTE Fuel may spray out when you
remove the fuel pump nozzle
#
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
nozzle switches off.
Requirements
R
The vehicle is unlocked (/ page 66).
%
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 439).
Driving and parking
169
1
Fuel filler flap
2
Bracket for fuel filler cap
3
Tire pressure table
4
QR code for rescue card
5
Stationary heater indication
6
Fuel type
#
Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1.
#
Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and
remove it.
#
Insert the fuel filler cap from above into
bracket 2.
#
Completely insert the pump nozzle into the
tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
#
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
#
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
#
Close fuel filler flap 1.
%
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle.
Parking
Parking the vehicle
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
caused by an insufficiently secured vehi‐
cle rolling away.
If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi‐
ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled
way even at a slight downhill gradient.
#
Ensure that the parked vehicle is always
properly secured against rolling away as
follows:
R
On uphill or downhill gradients, turn
the front wheels so that the vehicle
rolls towards the curb if it starts
moving.
R
Apply the parking brake.
R
Switch the transmission to position
j.
170
Driving and parking
&
WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot
exhaust system parts
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system or
exhaust gas flow.
#
Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot
vehicle components.
#
In particular, do not park on dry grass‐
land or harvested grain fields.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it
rolling away
#
Always secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing away.
#
Bring the vehicle to a standstill by applying
the brake pedal.
#
On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front
wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the
curb if it starts moving.
#
Apply the electric parking brake.
Driving and parking
171
#
Engage transmission position j in a station‐
ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied
(/ page 165).
#
Switch off the engine and the ignition by
pressing button 1.
#
Release the service brake slowly.
#
Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
%
When you park the vehicle, you can still
operate the side windows and the panoramic
sliding sunroof for approximately five
minutes if the driver's door is closed.
%
When you park the vehicle, you can still
operate the side windows and the sliding
sunroof for approximately five minutes if the
driver's door is closed.
Garage door opener
Programming buttons for the garage door
opener
&
DANGER Risk of death caused by
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and leads to poisoning.
#
Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an
enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
&
WARNING Risk of injury when opening
or closing a door with the garage door
opener
When you operate or program the door with
the integrated garage door opener, people in
the range of movement of the door may
become trapped or struck by the door.
#
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody
is within the range of movement of the
door.
Only operate the following doors using the
garage door opener:
R
Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea‐
ture.
R
Doors which conform to the current U.S.
safety standards.
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been parked outside the
garage or outside the range of movement of
the door.
R
The engine is switched off.
R
The ignition is switched on.
%
The garage door opener function is always
available when the ignition is switched on.
172
Driving and parking
#
Check if the transmission frequency of the
remote control has the frequency range of
280 to 868 MHz.
Radio equipment approval number:
R
NZLMUAHL5 (USA)
R
4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)
#
Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you
wish to program.
Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow.
%
It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐
cator lamp flashes yellow.
#
Release the previously pressed button.
Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow.
#
Point remote control 5 from a distance of
0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button
1, 2 or 3.
#
Press and hold button 6 of remote control
5 until one of the following signals appears:
R
Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin‐
uously. Programming is complete.
R
Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro‐
gramming was successful. Additionally,
synchronization of the rolling code with
the door system must also be carried out.
#
If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash
green: repeat the procedure.
#
Release all of the buttons.
%
The remote control for the door drive is not
included in the scope of delivery of the
garage door opener.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Requirements:
R
The door system uses a rolling code.
R
The vehicle must be within range of the
garage door or door drive.
R
The vehicle as well as persons and objects,
are located outside the range of movement
of the door.
Driving and parking
173
#
Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Initiate the next step within approximately
30 seconds.
#
Press previously programmed button 1, 2
or 3 repeatedly until the door closes.
When the door closes, programming is com‐
plete.
%
Please also read the operating instructions
for the door drive.
Troubleshooting when programming the
remote control
#
Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
control 5 is supported.
#
Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
#
Hold remote control 5 at various angles
from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in
(8 cm) in front of the inside rearview mirror.
You should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
#
Hold remote control 5 at the same angles
at various distances in front of the inside
rearview mirror. You should test every posi‐
tion for at least 25 seconds before trying
another position.
#
Note that some remote controls transmit
only for a limited period, press button 6 on
remote control 5 again before transmission
ends.
#
Align the antenna line of the door opener unit
with the remote control.
%
Support and additional information on pro‐
gramming:
R
On the toll free HomeLink
®
Hotline on
1-800-355-3515.
R
On the Internet at https://
www.homelink.com/mercedes.
Opening or closing the door
Requirements:
R
The corresponding button is programmed to
operate the door.
174
Driving and parking
#
Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until
the door opens or closes.
#
If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after
approximately 20 seconds: press and hold
the previously pressed button again until the
door opens or closes.
Clearing the garage door opener memory
#
Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
#
If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release
buttons 1 and 3.
The entire memory has been deleted.
Radio equipment approval numbers for the
garage door opener
Radio equipment approval numbers
Brazil
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário,
isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interfer‐
ência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo
tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas
operando em caráter primário.
Para maiores informações acessar
www.anatel.gov.br
Driving and parking
175
Radio equipment approval numbers
CountryRadio type approval number
EgyptTAC.2511151293.WIR
Andorra CE
Australia R-NZ
Barbados MED1578
Chile 2488/DFRS20576/F-74
European
Union
CE
GibraltarCE
Iceland CE
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/299
CanadaIC: 4112A-MUAHL5
Kuwait CE
Liechten‐
stein
CE
CountryRadio type approval number
Mexico RCPGEMU15-0448
Monaco CE
New Zea‐
land
R-NZ
NorwayCE
Russian
Federa‐
tion
Not required
Saudi Ara‐
bia
TA 10525
Switzer‐
land
CE
South
Africa
TA-2015/1386
Turkey Not required
Country Radio type approval number
United
Arab Emi‐
rates
ER41849/15
Dealer No: DA35176/14
United
States
FCC ID: NZLMUAHL5
Further information on the declaration of con‐
formity for wireless vehicle components
(/ page 25).
176
Driving and parking
Electric parking brake
Electric parking brake function (applying
automatically)
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
If children are left unattended in the vehicle,
they could:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R
Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by:
R
Releasing the parking brake.
R
Changing the transmission position.
R
Starting the vehicle.
#
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#
When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
#
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of
children.
The electric parking brake is applied if the trans‐
mission is in position j and one of the follow‐
ing conditions is fulfilled:
R
The engine is switched off.
R
The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
driver's door is opened.
%
To prevent application: pull the handle of the
electric parking brake.
In the following situations, the electric parking
brake is also applied:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing
the vehicle to a standstill.
R
The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐
tionary.
R
Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary.
This is the case if one of the following conditions
is also fulfilled:
R
The engine is switched off.
R
The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
driver's door is opened.
R
There is a system malfunction.
R
The power supply is insufficient.
R
The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the
red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp
appears in the instrument cluster.
The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Driving and parking
177
Electric parking brake function (releasing
automatically)
The electric parking brake is released when the
following conditions are fulfilled:
R
The driver's door is closed.
R
The engine is running.
R
The transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator pedal or you
shift from transmission position j to h or
k when on level ground with the driver's
door closed.
R
If the transmission is in position k, the tail‐
gate must be closed.
R
The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
belt buckle of the driver's seat.
If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, the follow‐
ing conditions must be fulfilled:
R
You shift from transmission position j.
R
You have previously driven at speeds greater
than 2 mph (3 km/h).
When the electric parking brake is released, the
red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp
in the instrument cluster goes out.
Applying/releasing the electric parking
brake manually
Applying
#
Push handle 1.
The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐
tor lamp appears in the instrument cluster.
%
The electric parking brake is only securely
applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu‐
ously.
Releasing
#
Switch on the ignition.
#
Pull handle 1.
The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐
tor lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Emergency braking
#
Press and hold handle 1.
As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please
Release Parking Brake message is displayed.
When the vehicle has been braked to a
standstill, the electric parking brake is
applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Can‐
ada) indicator lamp appears in the instru‐
ment cluster.
178
Driving and parking
Information on detecting damage on a
parked vehicle
If a collision is detected when the tow-away
alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will
receive a notification in the multimedia system
when you switch on the ignition.
You will receive information about the following
points:
R
The area of the vehicle that may have been
damaged.
R
The force of the impact.
The following situations can lead to inadvertent
activation:
R
The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-
story garage.
%
Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to
prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti‐
vate the tow-away alarm, damage detection
will also be deactivated.
%
In the case of severe battery discharging,
the function for detecting damage on a
parked vehicle is automatically deactivated
to facilitate the next engine start.
System limits
Detection may be restricted in the following sit‐
uations:
R
The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g.
if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is
damaged by a key.
R
Impact occurs at low speed.
R
The electric parking brake is not applied.
Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended
period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse.
The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam‐
aged by heavy discharging.
%
Further information can be obtained at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐
tery's period out of use)
Standby mode function
%
This function is not available for all models.
If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be
minimized during extended periods of non-oper‐
ation.
Standby mode is characterized by the following:
R
the starter battery is preserved.
R
the maximum non-operational time appears
in the media display.
R
the connection to online services is interrup‐
ted.
R
the ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not avail‐
able.
R
the interior motion sensor and tow-away
alarm functions are not available.
R
the function for detecting damage on a
parked vehicle is not available.
Driving and parking
179
If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby
mode can be activated or deactivated using the
multimedia system:
R
the engine is switched off.
R
the ignition is switched on.
Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera‐
tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can‐
not be guaranteed that the starter battery will
reliably start the engine.
The starter battery must be charged first in the
following situations:
R
The vehicle's non-operational time must be
extended.
R
The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby
Mode message appears in the media display.
%
Standby mode is automatically deactivated
when the ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating standby mode
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
î Vehicle Settings
5
Standby Mode
%
This function is not available for all models.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
When you activate the function, a prompt
appears.
#
Select Yes.
Standby mode is activated.
Driving and driving safety systems
Driving systems and your responsibility
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems
which assist you in driving, parking and maneu‐
vering the vehicle. The driving systems are aids
and do not relieve you of your responsibility per‐
taining to road traffic law. Pay attention to the
traffic conditions at all times and intervene
when necessary. Be aware of the limitations
regarding the safe use of these systems.
Information on radar and ultrasonic sensors
Some driving and driving safety systems use
radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area
in front of, behind or next to the vehicle (depend‐
ing on the vehicle's equipment).
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar
sensors are integrated behind the bumpers
and/or behind the Mercedes star. The ultrasonic
sensors are located in the front and rear bump‐
ers. Keep these parts free of dirt, ice and slush
(/ page 380). The sensors must not be cov‐
ered, for example by bicycle racks, overhanging
loads, stickers, foil or foils to protect against
stone chipping. Additional license plate brackets
can likewise impair the function of the ultrasonic
sensors. In the event of damage to the bumpers
or radiator grill, or following a collision impacting
the bumpers or radiator grill, have the function
of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. If the sensors are damaged, some
driving systems and driving safety systems may
no longer function properly.
Overview of driving systems and driving
safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving systems and driving safety
systems:
R
360° Camera (/ page 218)
180
Driving and parking
R
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(/ page 181)
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 194)
R
AIR BODY CONTROL (/ page 207)
R
Active Brake Assist (/ page 186)
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 233)
R
ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 227)
R
BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 181)
R
Hill Start Assist (/ page 206)
R
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
(/ page 186)
R
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
(/ page 182)
R
ESP
®
Crosswind Assist (/ page 186)
R
Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 197)
R
HOLD function (/ page 206)
R
STEER CONTROL (/ page 186)
R
Active Steering Assist with rescue lane func‐
tion (/ page 200)
R
Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 203)
R
Active Parking Assist (/ page 221)
R
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 211)
R
Rear view camera (/ page 216)
R
Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 202)
R
Cruise control (/ page 191)
R
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
(/ page 231)
R
Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 229)
Function of ABS
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the
brake pressure in critical driving situations:
R
During braking, e.g. at full brake application
or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are
prevented from locking.
R
Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake
pedal can be an indication of hazardous road
conditions and can serve as a reminder to take
extra care while driving.
System limits
R
ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 mph
(8 km/h).
R
ABS may be impaired or may not function if a
malfunction has occurred and the yel‐
low ! ABS warning lamp lights up contin‐
uously in the instrument cluster after the
engine is started.
Function of BAS (Brake Assist System)
&
WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys‐
tem)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased.
#
Depress the brake pedal with full force
in emergency braking situations. ABS
prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS supports your emergency braking situation
with additional brake force.
Driving and parking
181
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is
activated:
R
BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐
sure.
R
BAS can shorten the braking distance.
R
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Function of ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram)
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is
malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
cannot carry
out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other
driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is
deactivated
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
cannot carry
out vehicle stabilization.
#
ESP
®
should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognize dangers.
ESP
®
can monitor and improve driving stability
and traction in the following situations, within
physical limits:
R
When pulling away on wet or slippery road‐
ways.
R
When braking.
R
In strong side winds from approx. 50 mph
(80 km/h).
If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired
by the driver, ESP
®
can stabilize the vehicle by
intervening in the following ways:
R
One or more wheels are braked.
R
The engine output is adapted according to
the situation.
ESP
®
is deactivated if the å ESP
®
OFF warn‐
ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument
cluster:
R
Driving stability will no longer be improved.
R
Crosswind Assist is no longer active.
R
The drive wheels could spin.
R
ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
%
When ESP
®
is deactivated, you are still assis‐
ted by ESP
®
when braking.
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp flashes in the
instrument cluster, one or several vehicle wheels
has reached its grip limit:
R
Adapt your driving style to suit the current
road and weather conditions.
R
Do not deactivate ESP
®
.
R
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
is necessary when pulling away.
182
Driving and parking
Deactivate ESP
®
in the following situations to
improve traction:
R
When using snow chains.
R
In deep snow.
R
On sand or gravel.
%
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting
action, which enhances traction.
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp lights up continu‐
ously, ESP
®
is not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the following information:
R
Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 495)
R
Display messages (/ page 447)
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP
®
and
makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on
a slippery roadway.
ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by
intervening in the following ways:
R
The drive wheels are braked individually if
they spin.
R
More drive torque is transferred to the wheel
or wheels with traction.
Influence of drive programs on ESP
®
The drive programs enable ESP
®
to adapt to dif‐
ferent weather and road conditions as well as
the driver's preferred driving style. You can
select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC
SELECT switch (/ page 163).
Driving and parking
183
ESP
®
characteristics per drive program
Drive program
ESP
®
mode
Characteristics
A (Comfort)
; (Eco)
ESP
®
Comfort
These drive programs provide the ideal balance
between traction and stability.
Select drive program ; or A in difficult
road conditions, such as snow or ice, or when
the road is wet from rain.
C (Sport)
ESP
®
Sport
This drive program continues to offer stability
but with a sporty setup which allows the enthu‐
siastic driver a more active driving style.
Select drive program C in good road condi‐
tions, for example on dry roads and clear
stretches of road.
184
Driving and parking
Drive program
ESP
®
mode
Characteristics
All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles: B
(Sport +)
ESP
®
Sport +
The vehicle's own understeering and oversteer‐
ing characteristics are accentuated. This allows
a more active driving style to be adopted.
Select drive program B in good road condi‐
tions, for example on dry roads and clear
stretches of road.
All-Terrain vehicles: F (All‑Terrain):
ESP
®
All-Terrain
This drive program offers a traction-orientated
setting. It functions in the speed range of up to
approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) and provides maxi‐
mum traction. This drive program provides maxi‐
mum traction particularly on unpaved, very
uneven surfaces and easily negotiable off-road
terrain.
Select the drive program All-Terrain when driv‐
ing on unpaved tracks in easily negotiable off-
road terrain or very uneven surfaces.
Driving and parking
185
Activating/deactivating ESP
®
(Electronic Sta‐
bility Program)
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
ESP
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
ESP
®
is deactivated if the å ESP
®
OFF warn‐
ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument
cluster.
Observe the information on warning lamps and
display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster.
Function of ESP
®
Crosswind Assist
ESP
®
Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of
side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi‐
cle in the lane:
R
ESP
®
Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
speeds between approx. 50 mph (80 km/h)
and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving
straight ahead or cornering slightly.
R
The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ‐
ual brake application on one side.
Function of EBD (electronic brake force dis‐
tribution)
EBD is characterized by the following:
R
Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on the rear wheels.
R
Improved driving stability when braking,
especially on bends.
Function of STEER CONTROL
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in
the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
This steering recommendation is given particu‐
larly in the following situations:
R
Both right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you
brake
R
The vehicle starts to skid
System limits
STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not
function in the following situations:
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
R
The steering is malfunctioning.
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
further by the electric power steering.
Function of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist consists of the following
functions:
R
Distance warning function
R
Autonomous braking function
R
Situation-dependent braking assistance
R
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: Evasive Steering Assist
186
Driving and parking
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the
risk of a collision with vehicles or pedestrians or
to reduce the effects of such a collision.
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐
sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis‐
tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument
cluster.
If you do not react to the warning, autonomous
braking can be initiated in critical situations.
In especially critical situations, Active Brake
Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly.
In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone
occur simultaneously with the braking applica‐
tion.
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐
tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐
ing, situation-dependent braking assistance
occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max‐
imum full-stop braking if necessary.
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent
braking assistance has occurred, display 1
appears in the multifunction display and then
automatically goes out after a short time.
If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐
tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered,
additional preventive measures for occupant
protection (PRE-SAFE
®
) may also be initiated.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
limited detection performance of Active
Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa‐
tions.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:
R
Give a warning or brake without reason
R
Not give a warning or not brake
#
Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake
Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only
an aid. The driver is responsible for
maintaining a suitable distance to the
vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for
braking in good time.
#
Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐
essary.
%
If the system is unavailable, the æ display
appears in the multifunction display.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake
Assist.
Driving and parking
187
The individual subfunctions are available in
the following speed ranges:
The distance warning function issues a warning
in the following situations:
R
From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your
vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or
pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent
warning tone and the L distance warning
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi‐
ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation
allows this.
The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:
Vehicles traveling in
front
Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Moving pedestrians Stationary pedes‐
trians
Vehicles without Driv‐
ing Assistance Pack‐
age
Up to approx. 155 mph
(250 km/h)
Up to approx. 50 mph
(80 km/h)
No reaction Up to approx. 37 mph
(60 km/h)
No reaction
Vehicles with Driving
Assistance Package
Up to approx. 155 mph
(250 km/h)
Up to approx. 62 mph
(100 km/h)
Up to approx. 43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx. 50 mph
(80 km/h)
Up to approx. 43 mph
(70 km/h)
188
Driving and parking
The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:
Vehicles traveling in
front
Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Moving pedestrians Stationary pedes‐
trians
Vehicles without Driv‐
ing Assistance Pack‐
age
Up to approx. 124 mph
(200 km/h)
Up to approx. 31 mph
(50 km/h)
No reaction Up to approx. 37 mph
(60 km/h)
No reaction
Vehicles with Driving
Assistance Package
Up to approx. 155 mph
(250 km/h)
Up to approx. 62 mph
(100 km/h)
Up to approx. 43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx. 43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx. 43 mph
(70 km/h)
Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations:
Vehicles traveling in
front
Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Moving pedestrians Stationary pedes‐
trians
Vehicles without Driv‐
ing Assistance Pack‐
age
Up to approx. 155 mph
(250 km/h)
Up to approx. 50 mph
(80 km/h)
No reaction Up to approx. 37 mph
(60 km/h)
No reaction
Vehicles with Driving
Assistance Package
Up to approx. 155 mph
(250 km/h)
Up to approx. 62 mph
(100 km/h)
Up to approx. 43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx. 43 mph
(70 km/h)
Up to approx. 43 mph
(70 km/h)
Driving and parking
189
Canceling a brake application of Active Brake
Assist
You can cancel a brake application of Active
Brake Assist at any time by:
R
Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or
with kickdown.
R
Releasing the brake pedal.
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli‐
cation when one of the following conditions is
fulfilled:
R
You maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
R
There is no longer a risk of collision.
R
An obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.
Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with
Driving Assistance Package)
Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac‐
teristics:
R
The ability to detect stationary or moving
pedestrians.
R
Assistance through power-assisted steering if
it detects a swerving maneuver.
R
Activation by an abrupt steering movement
during a swerving maneuver.
R
Assistance during swerving and straightening
of the vehicle.
R
Reaction from a speed of approximately
12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx‐
imately 43 mph (70 km/h).
You can prevent the assistance at any time by
actively steering.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident despite
Evasive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa‐
tions.
In addition, the steering support of Evasive
Steering Assist is generally not sufficient to
avoid a collision.
In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can:
R
give an unnecessary warning or provide
assistance
R
not give a warning or not provide assis‐
tance
#
Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Evasive
Steering Assist alone.
#
Be ready to brake and take evasive
action if necessary.
#
Prevent the assistance by actively
steering in non-critical driving situa‐
tions.
#
Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes‐
trians are close to the path of your vehi‐
cle.
System limits
Full system performance is not available for a
few seconds after switching on the ignition or
after driving off.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
ambient light.
190
Driving and parking
R
If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered.
R
If the sensors are impaired due to interfer‐
ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong
radar reflections in parking garages.
R
If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has
been detected and displayed.
R
In complex traffic situations where objects
cannot always be clearly identified.
R
If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into
the sensor detection range.
R
If pedestrians are hidden by other objects.
R
If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot
be distinguished from the background.
R
If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.
due to special clothing or other objects.
R
On bends with a tight radius.
%
The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto‐
matically while a certain distance is being
driven after the vehicle has been delivered.
Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only
partially available during this teach-in period.
Setting Active Brake Assist
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Active Brake Assist
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: The settings can be made after starting the
vehicle.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
The settings can be made when the ignition is
switched on.
The following settings are available:
R
Early
R
Medium
R
Late
#
Select a setting.
%
Your selection is retained when the vehicle is
next started.
Deactivating Active Brake Assist
%
It is recommended that you always leave
Active Brake Assist activated.
#
Select Off.
The distance warning function and the auton‐
omous braking function are deactivated.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: When the vehicle is next started, the
medium setting is automatically selected.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: Evasive Steering Assist is not available.
When the ignition is next started, the
medium setting is selected automatically and
Evasive Steering Assist is available.
%
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
æ symbol appears in the status bar of the
multifunction display.
Speed control cruise control
Function of cruise control
Cruise control regulates the speed to the value
selected by the driver.
If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the
stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking,
Driving and parking
191
cruise control will resume speed regulation back
to the stored speed.
Cruise control is operated using the correspond‐
ing steering wheel buttons. You can store any
speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maxi‐
mum speed.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con‐
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take
into account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Cruise control is only an aid. The driver is
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in lane.
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: Cruise control is
available up to a maximum speed of 155 mph
(250 km/h).
Displays on the multifunction display
The status of cruise control and the stored
speed are shown in the multifunction display.
1
Cruise control is selected
2
Speed is saved, cruise control is deactivated
3
Speed is saved, cruise control is activated
%
The segments between the stored speed and
the end of the segment display light up in
the speedometer.
System limits
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the
stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored
speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. Take particular
note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By
doing so, you will make use of the engine's brak‐
ing effect. This relieves the load on the brake
system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐
ing and wearing too quickly.
Do not use cruise control in the following situa‐
tions:
R
In traffic situations which require frequent
changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on
winding roads.
R
On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause
the drive wheels to lose traction and the
vehicle could then skid.
R
If you are driving when visibility is poor.
Operating cruise control
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to stored
speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is
lower than your current speed, the vehicle
decelerates.
#
Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
192
Driving and parking
Requirements:
R
ESP
®
must be activated, but not intervening.
R
The driven speed is at least 15 mph
(20 km/h).
R
The transmission is in position h.
#
To activate cruise control: press rocker
switch 1 up.
#
To activate cruise control: press rocker
switch 2 up (SET+) or down (SET-).
The current speed is stored and maintained
by the vehicle.
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (RES).
The last stored speed is called up and main‐
tained by the vehicle.
If the last stored speed has previously been
deleted, the currently driven speed is stored.
%
When you switch off the vehicle, the last
speed stored is cleared.
#
To increase/reduce speed: press rocker
switch 2 up (SET+) or down (SET-) to the
pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
1 mph (1 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 2 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
5 mph (10 km/h).
or
#
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
#
Press rocker switch 2 up (SET+).
If cruise control is activated and Traffic Sign
Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with
a maximum permissible speed and this is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster, you can choose
between the following options:
#
To adopt the detected speed: press rocker
switch 3 up (RES).
The maximum permissible speed shown by
the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle
maintains this speed.
#
To deactivate cruise control: press rocker
switch 3 down (CNCL).
#
To deactivate cruise control: press rocker
switch 1 down.
%
If you brake, deactivate ESP
®
or if ESP
®
intervenes, cruise control is deactivated.
Driving and parking
193
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the
set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in
front are detected, the set distance is main‐
tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a
halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend‐
ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and
the set speed. The speed and distance to the
vehicle in front are set and saved on the steering
wheel on vehicles without the Driving Assistance
Package, in the range between 15 mph
(20 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h) and, on
vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, in
the range between 15 mph (20 km/h) and
130 mph (210 km/h).
Other features of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC:
R
Adjusts the driving style depending on the
selected drive program (fuel efficient, com‐
fortable or dynamic) (/ page 162)
R
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: reacts to stationary vehicles detected in
urban speed ranges (except bicycles and
motorcycles).
R
Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if
the turn signal indicator is switched on to
change to the overtaking lane.
R
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐
age: takes one-sided overtaking restrictions
into account on highways or on multi-lane
roads with separate roadways (country-
dependent).
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driv‐
ing Assistance Package: if the vehicle has
been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, sepa‐
rate roadways by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehi‐
cle in front driving off again within 30 seconds. If
a critical situation is detected when driving off, a
visual and acoustic warning is given indicating
that the driver must now take control of the vehi‐
cle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for keeping a safe dis‐
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed
and for braking in good time.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying
ambient light.
R
The windshield in the area of the camera is
dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered.
R
If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
R
In parking garages or on roads with steep
uphill or downhill gradients.
194
Driving and parking
R
If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel‐
erating can cause one or several wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in
these situations.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐
ation or braking by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐
erate or brake in the following cases, for
example:
R
If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC.
R
If the stored speed is called up and is
considerably faster or slower than the
currently driven speed.
R
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no
longer detects a vehicle in front or does
not react to relevant objects.
#
Always carefully observe the traffic con‐
ditions and be ready to brake at all
times.
#
Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
ficient deceleration by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes
your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum
possible deceleration. If this deceleration is
not sufficient, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and
acoustic warning.
#
In these cases, adjust your speed and
keep a sufficient distance.
#
Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if detection
function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react or has a limited reaction:
R
when driving on a different lane or when
changing lanes
R
to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta‐
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
R
to complex traffic conditions
R
to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor
intervene in such situations.
#
Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been started.
R
The electric parking brake is released.
R
ESP
®
is activated and is not intervening.
Driving and parking
195
R
The transmission is in position h.
R
The driver's door is closed.
R
The check of the radar sensor system has
been successfully completed (vehicle travel‐
ing faster than 12 mph (20 km/h))
R
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being
used to park the vehicle or to exit from a
parking space.
R
The vehicle does not skid.
#
To activate/deactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC: press button 1.
#
To activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: press rocker switch 3 up (SET
+) or down (SET-), or press rocker switch 4
up (RES). Remove your foot from the acceler‐
ator pedal.
The current speed is stored and maintained
by the vehicle.
or
#
To activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC with a stored speed: press
rocker switch 4 up (RES). Remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
%
By pressing rocker switch 4 up again, the
speed limitation shown in the instrument
cluster will be adopted by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC.
#
To accept the displayed speed restriction
when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
is active: press rocker switch 4 up (RES).
The speed limit displayed in the instrument
cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The
vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle
in front, but only up to the stored speed.
#
To pull away with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the
brake pedal and activate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC.
#
Press rocker switch 4 up (RES).
or
196
Driving and parking
#
Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and
firmly.
The functions of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC still being
activated when you leave the driver's
seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle
is being braked by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
#
Always deactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi‐
cle to prevent it from rolling away
before you leave the driver's seat.
#
To deactivate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: press rocker switch 4 down
(CNCL).
#
To increase/reduce speed: press rocker
switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-) to the
pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
1 mph (1 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) to the pressure point and hold.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
increments of 1 mph (1 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
5 mph (10 km/h).
or
#
Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down
(SET-) and hold beyond the pressure point.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
increments of 5 mph (10 km/h).
#
To increase or reduce the specified dis‐
tance from the vehicle in front: press
rocker switch 2 up or down.
Function of Active Speed Limit Assist
%
The following function is country-dependent
and only available in conjunction with the
Driving Assistance Package.
If a change in the speed limit is detected and
automatic adoption of speed limits is activated,
the new speed is automatically adopted as the
stored speed (/ page 230).
Driving and parking
197
The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is
level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the
case of signs indicating entry into an urban area,
the speed is adapted according to the speed
permitted within the urban area. The speed limit
display in the Instrument Display is always upda‐
ted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign.
If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited
stretch of road (e.g. on a freeway), the recom‐
mended speed is automatically adopted as the
stored speed. The system uses the speed stored
on an unlimited stretch of road as the recom‐
mended speed. If you do not alter the stored
speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the rec‐
ommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h).
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been
put into passive mode by pressing the accelera‐
tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher
than the set speed are adopted.
Active Speed Limit Assist is only an aid. The
driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance
from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and
for braking in good time. The maximum permissi‐
ble speed also depends on factors such as the
road surface and traffic conditions.
System limits
Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain
time or due to weather conditions) cannot be
properly detected by the system. The maximum
permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a
trailer is not detected by the system. In these sit‐
uations you must adjust your speed yourself.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to Active
Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's
speed
The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit
Assist may be too high or incorrect in some
individual cases, such as:
R
In the wet or in fog
R
When towing a trailer
#
Ensure that the driven speed complies
with traffic regulations.
#
Adjust the driving speed to suit current
traffic and weather conditions.
Function of route-based speed adaptation
%
The following function is country-dependent
and only available in conjunction with the
Driving Assistance Package.
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti‐
vated, the vehicle speed will be adjusted accord‐
ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on
the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti‐
ates a route event ahead in a fuel-saving, com‐
fortable or dynamic manner. When the route
event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates
again to the stored speed. The set distance to
the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and
speed restrictions ahead are taken into account.
Route-based speed adaptation can be config‐
ured in the multimedia system (/ page 199).
The following route events are taken into
account:
R
Bends
R
T-intersections, traffic circles and toll sta‐
tions
R
Turns and exits
198
Driving and parking
%
When the toll station is reached, Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as
the stored speed.
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi‐
cator to change lanes is switched on and one of
the following situations is detected:
R
Turning off at intersections
R
Driving on slowing-down lanes
R
Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down
lanes
The driver is responsible for choosing the right
speed and observing other road users. This
applies in particular to intersections, traffic cir‐
cles and traffic lights, as route-based speed
adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand‐
still.
When route guidance is active, the first speed
adjustment is carried out automatically. If the
turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected
route is confirmed and further speed adjustment
is activated.
Speed adjustment is canceled in the following
cases:
R
If the turn signal indicator is switched off
before the route event.
R
If the driver depresses the accelerator or
brake pedal during the process.
System limits
Route-based speed adaptation does not take
right of way regulations into account. The driver
is responsible for complying with road traffic
regulations and driving at a suitable speed.
In difficult conditions, for example unclear roads,
lane narrowing, wet road surfaces, snow or ice,
or when driving with a trailer, the speed adjust‐
ment made by the system may not always be
suitable. In these situations the driver must
intervene accordingly.
&
WARNING Risk of accident in spite of
route-based speed adjustment
Route-based speed adjustment might mal‐
function or be temporarily unavailable in the
following situations:
R
If map data is not up to date or available
R
If you do not follow the selected route
guidance
R
If the set route is re-planned
R
In road construction areas
R
When towing a trailer
R
In bad weather or road conditions
R
If the accelerator pedal is depressed
#
Adjust the speed to the traffic situation.
Setting route-based speed adjustment
Requirements:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Speed Adjustment
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Driving and parking
199
Active Steering Assist
Function of Active Steering Assist
%
The following function is country-dependent
and only available in conjunction with the
Driving Assistance Package.
Active Steering Assist is only available up to a
speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps
you to stay in the center of the lane by means of
moderate steering interventions. Depending on
the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the
vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer‐
ence.
%
Depending on the country, in the lower
speed range Active Steering Assist can use
the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec‐
essary, Active Steering Assist can then also
provide assistance when driving outside the
center of the lane to form a rescue lane, for
example.
When the system is actively steering, the à
symbol is shown in green in the multifunction
display.
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles
ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist
switches to passive mode. The system provides
no support in this case. During the transition
from active to passive status, the à symbol is
shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the sys‐
tem is passive, the à symbol is shown as
gray in the multifunction display.
Steering and touch detection
The driver is required to keep their hands on the
steering wheel at all times and be able to inter‐
vene at any time to correct the course of the
vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must
expect a change from active to passive mode or
vice versa at any time.
If the system detects that the driver has not
steered the vehicle for a considerable period of
time or has removed their hands from the steer‐
ing wheel, an optical warning is given first. Dis‐
play 1 appears in the multifunction display. If
the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or
gives no confirmation to the system, a warning
tone sounds in addition to the visual warning
message.
The warning is not issued, or is stopped, when
the driver gives confirmation to the system:
R
The driver steers the vehicle.
R
The driver presses a steering wheel button or
operates Touch Control.
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system
limit has been reached, a visual warning is
issued and a warning tone sounds.
Active Steering Assist is only an aid. The driver is
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in lane. Before changing lanes,
the driver must make sure that the neighboring
lane is free (glance over the shoulder).
200
Driving and parking
System limits
Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor‐
que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the
steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the
vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following instances:
R
There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient
light or strong shadows on the roadway.
R
There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections.
R
Insufficient road illumination.
R
The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g.
by a sticker.
R
No, or several, unclear lane markings are
present for one lane, or the markings change
quickly, e.g. in a construction area or inter‐
sections.
R
The lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
R
The distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected.
R
The road is narrow and winding.
R
There are obstacles on the lane or projecting
out into the lane, such as object markers.
The system does not provide assistance in the
following conditions:
R
On tight bends and when turning.
R
When crossing intersections.
R
At traffic circles or toll stations.
R
When actively changing lane without switch‐
ing on the turn signal indicator.
R
When the tire pressure is too low.
Depending on the selected vehicle settings,
Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.
Observe the status display of Active Steering
Assist in the multifunction display
(/ page 204).
&
WARNING Risk of accident if Active
Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func‐
tioning
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist
are reached there is no guarantee that the
system will remain active or will keep the
vehicle in lane.
#
Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel and observe the traffic carefully.
#
Always steer the vehicle paying atten‐
tion to traffic conditions.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if Active
Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes
A malfunction in the detection of lane mark‐
ings and objects can occur.
This could cause unexpected steering inter‐
vention.
#
Steer according to traffic conditions.
Activating Active Steering Assist
Requirements
Driving and parking
201
R
ESP
®
must be activated, but not intervening.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
#
If indicator lamp 1 is off: press button 2.
Function of Active Lane Change Assist
%
The following function is country-dependent
and only available in conjunction with the
Driving Assistance Package.
Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver
when changing lanes by applying steering torque
if the driver operates a turn signal indicator.
Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all
the following conditions are met:
R
You are driving on a freeway or road with
multiple lanes in the direction of travel.
R
The neighboring lane is separated by a bro‐
ken lane marking.
R
No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane.
R
The driven speed is between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h).
R
Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in
the multimedia system.
R
Active Steering Assist is switched on and
active.
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and
a lane change is permitted, the lane change
begins after the driver has activated the turn sig‐
nal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a
green arrow 2 next to the steering wheel sym‐
bol. The Lane Change to the Left message also
appears, for example. If Active Lane Change
Assist has been activated with the turn signal
indicator but a lane change is not immediately
possible, a gray arrow 1 appears next to the
steering wheel symbol, which remains green.
When the lane change assistance starts, the turn
signal indicator is automatically activated along
with the display in the multifunction display.
202
Driving and parking
If a lane change is not possible, the arrow fades
out after a few seconds and a new lane change
must be initiated. An immediate lane change is
only possible on freeway sections without speed
limits.
If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change
Assist may be canceled. If it is canceled, the
Lane Change Canceled message appears in the
multifunction display and a warning tone sounds.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from chang‐
ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane
Lane Change Assist cannot always detect
clearly if the adjacent lane is free.
The lane change might be initiated although
the adjacent lane is not free.
#
Before changing lanes, make sure that
the neighboring lane is free and there is
no danger to other road users.
#
Monitor the lane change.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if Lane
Change Assist unexpectedly stops func‐
tioning
If the system limitations for Lane Change
Assist have been reached, there is no guar‐
antee that the system will remain active.
Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you
by applying steering torques.
#
Always monitor the lane change and
keep your hands on the steering wheel.
Observe the traffic conditions and steer
and/or brake if necessary.
System limits
The system limitations of Active Steering Assist
apply to Active Lane Change Assist
(/ page 200).
The system may also be impaired or may not
function in the following situations:
R
The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty,
damaged or covered by a sticker or ice and
snow, for example.
R
The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
%
The Active Lane Change Assist sensors
adjust automatically while a certain distance
is being driven after the vehicle has been
delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is
unavailable or only partially available during
this teach-in period, no arrow appears next
to the Ø Active Steering Assist symbol
when the turn signal indicator is activated.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Change
Assist
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
#
Select Lane Change Assist.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
If the driver continually ignores the visual or
acoustic warning to put their hands on the steer‐
ing wheel, the Beginning Emergency Stop mes‐
sage appears in the multifunction display. If the
driver still does not respond, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehi‐
cle is decelerated in stages to a standstill.
Driving and parking
203
Depending on the country, at speeds below
40 mph (60 km/h) the hazard warning lights
switch on automatically.
When the vehicle is stationary, the following
actions are carried out:
R
the vehicle is secured with the electric park‐
ing brake
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended
R
the vehicle is unlocked
R
if possible, an emergency call is placed to
the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
The driver can cancel the deceleration at any
time by performing one of the following actions:
R
steering
R
braking or accelerating
R
pressing a steering-wheel button
R
operating Touch Control
R
activating or deactivating Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Overview of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC displays in the instrument clus‐
ter
The assistance graphic and the status display
show the status of the following functions in the
instrument cluster:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
Route-based speed adaptation
R
Active Steering Assist
Assistant display
1
Route-based speed adaptation: type of route
event
2
Vehicle in front
3
Distance indicator
4
Set specified distance
5
Own vehicle
204
Driving and parking
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC status dis‐
play and route-based speed adaptation
1
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected,
set specified distance (number of segments
below the vehicle)
2
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC deactiva‐
ted, speed stored
3
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active,
speed stored, no vehicle detected (bright
vehicle symbol)
4
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active,
speed stored, vehicle detected (green vehi‐
cle symbol)
5
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and route-
based speed adaptation active, speed stored
%
On highways or high-speed major roads, the
green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cycli‐
cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away.
%
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond
the setting of the Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas‐
sive mode. The ç Suspended message
appears in the multifunction display.
Speedometer
The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom‐
eter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the
speed adjustment is less than the stored speed
due to the route event ahead, the segments in
the speedometer light up. Deactivation of Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as altera‐
tions to the speed due to manual or automatic
adoption of the speed limit, are displayed in the
control feedback of the multifunction display on
a single line.
Active Steering Assist status display
1
Gray steering wheel: Active Steering Assist
switched on and passive
2
Green steering wheel: Active Steering Assist
switched on and active
3
Flashing steering wheel: prompt to the driver
to actively confirm or transition from active
to passive status, system limits detected
During the transition from active to passive sta‐
tus, symbol 3 is shown as enlarged and flash‐
Driving and parking
205
ing. Once the system is passive, symbol 1 is
shown as gray in the multifunction display.
Function of Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short
time when pulling away on a hill under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
R
The transmission is in position h or k.
R
The electric parking brake is released.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll
away.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to the vehicle rolling away
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer
holds the vehicle and it can roll away.
#
Therefore, swiftly move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator
pedal. Never attempt to leave the vehi‐
cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
HOLD function
HOLD function
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐
still without requiring you to depress the brake
pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.
The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi‐
bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains
with the driver.
System limits
The HOLD function is only intended to provide
assistance when driving and is not a sufficient
means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling
away when stationary.
R
The incline must not be greater than 30%.
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to the
HOLD function being activated when you
leave the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLD
function is braking the vehicle, the vehicle
can roll away in the following situations:
R
If there is a malfunction in the system or
in the power supply.
R
If the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
#
Always deactivate the HOLD function
and secure the vehicle against rolling
away before leaving the vehicle.
206
Driving and parking
*
NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is switched
on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐
tain situations:
R
Active Brake Assist
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
HOLD function
R
Active Parking Assist
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit‐
uations:
#
During towing
#
In a car wash
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is stationary.
R
The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened.
R
The engine is running or has been automati‐
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
R
The electric parking brake is released.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐
vated.
R
The transmission is in position h, k or i.
Activating the HOLD function
#
Depress the brake pedal and after a short
time quickly depress further until the ë
display appears in the multifunction display.
#
Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function
#
Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
or
#
Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐
play disappears from the multifunction dis‐
play.
The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐
ing situations:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
R
The transmission is switched to position j.
R
The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐
ing brake.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by
transmission position j and/or by the electric
parking brake:
R
The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's
door is opened.
R
The vehicle is switched off.
R
There is a malfunction in the system or the
power supply is insufficient.
AIR BODY CONTROL
AIR BODY CONTROL function
AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system
with variable damping for improved driving com‐
fort. The all-round level control system ensures
the best possible suspension and constant
ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle.
When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered
automatically to improve driving safety and to
reduce fuel consumption. You also have the
option of manually adjusting the vehicle level.
Driving and parking
207
AIR BODY CONTROL includes the following com‐
ponents and functions:
R
air suspension with variable spring rate
R
automatic level control system
R
speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel
consumption
R
manually selectable high level setting for
greater ground clearance
R
ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with
constant damping force adjustment)
R
DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button
Available suspension settings
Drive programCharacteristics
A (Comfort)
R
The suspension setting is comfortable.
R
The vehicle is set to the normal level.
R
When driving at speeds of above 78 mph (125 km/h) the vehicle is lowered.
R
When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h) the vehicle is raised again.
; (Eco)
R
The suspension setting is comfortable.
R
The vehicle is set to the low level.
R
The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds.
C (Sport)
R
The suspension setting is firmer.
R
The vehicle is set to the low level.
R
The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds.
208
Driving and parking
Drive programCharacteristics
All vehicles except All-Terrain
vehicles: B (Sport +)
R
The suspension setting is even firmer.
R
The vehicle is set to the low level.
R
The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds.
All-Terrain vehicles: F
(All‑Terrain):
R
The suspension setting is for easily negotiable offroad terrain.
R
The vehicle is set to the high level.
R
When driving at speeds of above 22 mph (35 km/h) the vehicle is lowered to the normal level.
R
When driving at speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h), the vehicle is raised again.
Setting the vehicle level
&
WARNING Risk of accident because
vehicle level is too high
If you drive at a higher vehicle level, the driv‐
ing characteristics may be impaired due to
the higher vehicle center of gravity.
The vehicle can drift outwards, for example,
when steering or cornering.
#
Always choose a vehicle level which is
suited to the driving style and the road
surface conditions.
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐
cle lowering
When lowering the vehicle, people could
become trapped if their limbs are between
the vehicle body and the tires or underneath
the vehicle.
#
Make sure no one is underneath the
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of
the wheel arches when the vehicle is
being lowered.
&
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
due to the vehicle lowering
Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or
level control system: when you unload lug‐
gage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first
Driving and parking
209
rises slightly and then returns to the set level
shortly afterwards.
You or anyone else in the vicinity of the
wheel arches or the underbody could thus
become trapped.
The vehicle can also be lowered after being
locked.
#
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
that nobody is in the vicinity of the
wheel arches or the underbody.
*
NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering
Parts of the body could be damaged when
the vehicle is lowered.
#
Make sure that there are no obstacles
such as curbs underneath or in the
immediate vicinity of the body when the
vehicle is being lowered.
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been started.
R
All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles:
The vehicle must not be moving faster than
37 mph (60 km/h).
R
All-Terrain vehicles: The vehicle must not be
moving faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
Raising the vehicle
#
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 lights up.
The vehicle is set to the high level.
Your selection is saved.
%
In the All-Terrain drive program, the vehicle
cannot be raised further by using button 1.
The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit‐
uations:
R
All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles:
When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
R
All vehicles except All-Terrain vehicles:
When driving between 37 mph (60 km/h)
and 50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately
three minutes.
R
All-Terrain vehicles: When driving faster
than 22 mph (35 km/h).
R
After changing a drive program using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last
active drive program.
210
Driving and parking
Lowering the vehicle
#
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is
adjusted to the height of the active drive pro‐
gram.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking assistance system with ultrasound. It
monitors the area around your vehicle using mul‐
tiple sensors 1 on the front bumper and on the
rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows
you the distance between your vehicle and a
detected obstacle visually and audibly.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐
roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐
ing and parking remains with you. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in/exiting parking spaces.
In the standard setting, an intermittent warning
tone sounds from a distance of approximately
1.0 ft (0.3 m) to an obstacle in front and approx‐
imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) to an obstacle behind. A
continuous warning tone sounds from a distance
of approximately 0.7 ft (0.2 m). Using the Warn
Early setting in the multimedia system, the warn‐
ing tones for front and side impact protection
can be set to sound at a greater distance of
approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front and 2.0 ft
(0.6 m) on the sides (/ page 215).
%
The Warn Early setting is always active at the
rear of the vehicle.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
Active Parking Assist is unavailable.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the
multimedia system
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist without a
360° Camera
Driving and parking
211
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and a 360°
Camera
If Active Parking Assist is deactivated and an
obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a
pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
The color of the individual segments of the warn‐
ing display is based on the distance to the detec‐
ted obstacle:
R
Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft
(1.0 m)
R
Orange segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft
(0.6 m)
R
Red segments: obstacles at a very short
distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less
System limits
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐
rily take into account the following obstacles:
R
Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.
persons, animals or objects.
R
Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading
ramps of trucks.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush.
Otherwise, they may not function correctly.
Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them.
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Vehicles without 360° Camera
Vehicles with 360° Camera
212
Driving and parking
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
Rear segments 1 or all-round seg‐
ments 2 light up red. The é sym‐
bol appears in the multifunction dis‐
play.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning and has been deactivated due to signal interference.
#
Start the vehicle again.
#
Check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.
Rear segments 1 or all-round seg‐
ments 2 light up red. At the same
time, a warning tone sounds for
approximately two seconds every time
the vehicle is started. The é symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
The sensors are dirty.
#
Clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 380).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
#
Start the vehicle again.
#
If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Function of the passive side impact protec‐
tion
Passive side impact protection is an additional
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which
warns the driver about obstacles at the side of
the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles
are detected between the front and rear detec‐
tion range. In order for an object on the side to
be detected, the sensors in the front and rear
bumper must first detect the object while you
are driving past it.
During the parking procedure or maneuvering,
objects are detected as the vehicle drives past.
If you steer in the direction of a detected obsta‐
cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a
warning is issued. The segments on the sides
light up yellow or red, depending on the distance
to the obstacle.
Segment color depending on distance
Color Lateral distance
YellowApprox. 1.0 - 2.0 ft
(30 - 60 cm)
RedApprox. < 1.0 ft
(30 cm)
Driving and parking
213
In order for lateral front or rear segments to be
displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance
of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the
vehicle has traveled the length of the vehicle, all
of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis‐
played.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles
without a 360° Camera
1
Operational front and rear
2
Operational front, rear and sides
3
Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow)
and rear (red)
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles
with a 360° Camera
1
Operational front and rear
2
Operational front, rear and sides
3
Obstacles detected at the front right (red)
Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the
following situations, for example:
R
You park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐
tion.
R
You open the doors.
After the engine is restarted, obstacles on the
sides must be detected again before a new
warning can be issued.
System limits
The system limits for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact pro‐
tection.
The following objects are not detected, for exam‐
ple:
R
Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from
the side
R
Objects placed next to the vehicle
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
*
NOTE Risk of an accident from objects
at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect
certain objects at close range.
#
When parking or maneuvering the vehi‐
cle, pay particular attention to any
objects which are above or below the
sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars.
The vehicle or other objects could oth‐
erwise be damaged.
214
Driving and parking
If indicator lamp 1 is not lit, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit
or the é symbol appears in the multifunction
display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not
active.
#
Press button 2.
%
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located in the center
console.
%
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the vehicle is started.
Adjusting the warning tones of Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Camera & Parking
5
Set Warning Tones
Adjusting the volume of the warning tones
#
Select Warning Tone Volume.
#
Set a value.
Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones
#
Select Warning Tone Pitch.
Set a value.
Specifying the starting point for the warning
tones
You can specify whether the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence
when the vehicle is further away from an obsta‐
cle.
#
Select Warn Early.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout
You can specify whether the volume of a media
source in the multimedia system is to be
reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC gives
an audible warning.
#
Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Driving and parking
215
Reversing camera
Function of the rear view camera
When you engage reverse gear, the image from
rear view camera 1 is shown in the multimedia
system. Dynamic guide lines show the path the
vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its
current position. This helps you to orient your‐
self and to avoid obstacles when backing up.
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the
maneuvering area while maneuvering and park‐
ing.
The guide lines in the media display show the
distances to your vehicle. The distances dis‐
played only apply to road level.
You can select from the following views:
R
Normal view
R
Wide-angle view
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
Vehicles without Active Parking Assist
The following camera views are available in the
multimedia system:
Normal view
1
Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
2
Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
3
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐
imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area
4
Bumper
5
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
216
Driving and parking
Wide-angle view
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist
The following camera views are available in the
multimedia system:
Normal view
1
Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
2
Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
3
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
4
Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance
between approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and
3.3 ft (1.0 m)
5
Red warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close
(approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less)
6
Orange warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis‐
tance away (between approximately 1.0 ft
(0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m))
%
If the entire system fails, the segments of
the warning display are shown in red. The
indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button
lights up and the é symbol appears in
the multifunction display.
If the system fails at the rear, the display of
the segments changes as follows:
R
The rear segments are shown in red
when backing up.
R
The rear segments are hidden when driv‐
ing forwards.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
the warning display fades out (/ page 212).
Driving and parking
217
Wide-angle view
System failure
If there is no operational readiness, the following
message appears in the multimedia system:
System limits
The rear view camera will not function or will
only partially function in the following situations:
R
The tailgate is open.
R
There is heavy rain, snow or fog.
R
The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at
night.
R
The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐
ged up. Observe the notes on cleaning the
rear view camera (/ page 380).
R
Cameras, or vehicle components in which
the cameras are installed, are damaged. In
this event, have the cameras, their positions
and their setting checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate bracket or bicycle rack).
%
The display contrast may be impaired due to
incident sunlight or other light sources. In
this case, pay particular attention.
%
Have the display repaired or replaced if, for
example, pixel errors considerably restrict its
use.
360° camera
Function of the 360° Camera
The 360° Camera is a system that consists of
four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate
vehicle surroundings. The system assists you,
e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil‐
ity.
The views of the 360° Camera are always availa‐
ble when driving forwards up to a speed of
approx. 10 mph (16 km/h) and when backing
up.
The 360° Camera is only an aid. It is not a sub‐
stitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the
maneuvering area while maneuvering and park‐
ing.
218
Driving and parking
The system evaluates images from the following
cameras:
R
Rear view camera
R
Front camera
R
Two side cameras in the outside mirrors
Views of the 360° Camera
You can select from different views:
1
Wide-angle view, front
2
Top view with image from the front camera
3
Top view with images from the side cameras
in the outside mirrors
4
Wide-angle view, rear
5
Top view with image from the rear view cam‐
era
6
Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a
trailer hitch)
Top view
1
Lane indicating the route the vehicle will
take at the current steering wheel angle
2
Yellow warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of
approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) or less
3
Your vehicle from above
If the distance to the object lessens, the color of
warning display 2 changes. From a distance of
approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) the warning display
is shown in orange. From a distance of approx‐
imately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) the warning display is
shown in red.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational
and no object is detected, the segments of the
warning display are shown in gray.
%
If the entire system fails, the segments of
the warning display are shown in red. The
indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button
lights up and the é symbol appears in
the multifunction display.
If the system fails at the rear, the display of
the segments changes as follows:
R
The rear segments are shown in red
when backing up.
R
The rear segments are hidden when driv‐
ing forwards.
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated,
the warning display fades out (/ page 212).
Driving and parking
219
Guide lines
1
Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
take at the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
2
Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐
face) depending on the current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
3
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
4
Mark at a distance of approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m)
%
When Active Parking Assist is active, the
lane markings are displayed in green.
The guide lines in the multimedia system dis‐
play show the distances to your vehicle. The
distances only apply to road level.
Side view of the mirror cameras
The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.
1
Guide line of external vehicle dimensions
with outside mirrors folded out
2
Marker of the wheel contact points
System failure
If there is no operational readiness, the following
message appears in the media display:
System limits
The 360° Camera will not function or will only
partially function in the following situations:
R
The doors are open.
R
The side mirrors are folded in.
R
The tailgate is open.
R
There is heavy rain, snow or fog.
R
The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at
night.
R
The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐
ged up.
R
If cameras or vehicle components in which
the cameras are installed are damaged. In
220
Driving and parking
this event, have the cameras, their positions
and their setting checked at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Do not use the 360° Camera under such circum‐
stances. You could otherwise injure others or
collide with objects when parking or maneuver‐
ing the vehicle.
On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension or
if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the
standard height can result in inaccuracies in the
guide lines and in the display of the generated
images, depending on technical conditions.
The field of vision and other functions of the
camera system may be restricted due to addi‐
tional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license
plate bracket, bicycle rack).
%
The contrast of the display may be impaired
by abrupt direct sunlight or by other light
sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In
this case, pay particular attention.
%
Have the display repaired or replaced if, for
example, pixel errors considerably restrict its
use.
See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera
(/ page 380).
Selecting a view for the 360° Camera
Requirements:
R
The Auto. Rear View Cam. function is selec‐
ted in the multimedia system.
#
Engage reverse gear.
#
In the multimedia system, select the desired
view.
Opening the camera cover of the rear view
camera
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Camera & Parking
#
Select Open Camera Cover.
%
The camera cover closes automatically after
some time or after an ignition cycle.
Setting the camera as a favorite
You can call up the camera view directly in the
multimedia system by setting it as a favorite.
#
Press the ò button on the control ele‐
ment.
The main functions are displayed.
#
Navigate downwards twice.
The Favorites menu appears.
#
Select New Favorite.
#
Select Vehicle.
#
Select Camera.
Active Parking Assist
Function of Active Parking Assist
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
assistance system which uses ultrasound and is
automatically activated during forward travel.
The system is operational at speeds of up to
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). When all the
conditions are fulfilled, the c symbol appears
in the multifunction display and the system auto‐
matically searches for and measures parking
spaces on both sides of the vehicle parallel and
perpendicular to the direction of travel. If Active
Parking Assist is activated, suitable parking
spaces are displayed in the multimedia system.
Driving and parking
221
The ë symbol appears in the multifunction
display. The arrows show on which side of the
road free parking spaces are located.
The parking space and, if necessary, the parking
direction can be selected as desired. Active
Parking Assist calculates a suitable vehicle path
and assists you in parking and exiting the park‐
ing space.
Active Parking Assist changes gear, accelerates,
brakes and steers the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that no
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
maneuvering range.
Active Parking Assist is canceled if, among other
things, one of the following actions is carried
out:
R
You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC.
R
You deactivate Active Parking Assist.
R
You begin steering.
R
You apply the parking brake.
R
You engage j.
R
ESP
®
intervenes.
R
You open the tailgate.
System limitations of Active Parking Assist
Objects located above or below the detection
range of Active Parking Assist are not detected
when the parking space is being measured.
These are also not taken into account when the
parking maneuver is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or
the boundaries of parking spaces. In some cir‐
cumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore
guide you into the parking space prematurely.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
objects located above or below the
detection range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the
detection range, the following situations may
arise:
R
Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of
these objects.
This could cause a collision.
#
In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately. Parking
spaces that are partially occupied by trailer
drawbars might not be identified as such or be
measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking
Assist on level, high-grip ground.
Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following
situations:
R
If you are driving in extreme weather condi‐
tions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy
rain.
R
If you are transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle.
R
If the parking space is on a steep downhill or
uphill gradient.
R
If you have installed snow chains.
222
Driving and parking
Active Parking Assist may also display parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking, e.g.:
R
Parking spaces where parking is prohibited.
R
Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.
Active Parking Assist will not assist you with
parking spaces at right angles to the direction of
travel in the following situations:
R
If two parking spaces are located immedi‐
ately next to each other.
R
If the parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a curb.
Active Parking Assist will not assist you with
parking spaces parallel or at right angles to the
direction of travel in the following situations:
R
If the parking space is on a curb.
R
If the parking space is bordered by an obsta‐
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer.
Parking with Active Parking Assist
%
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located at a different
position in the center console.
#
Press button 1.
The media display shows the view of Active Park‐
ing Assist. Area 2 displays detected parking
spaces 4 and vehicle path 3.
%
Vehicle path 3 shown on the media display
may differ from the actual vehicle path.
#
If you have driven past a parking space: bring
the vehicle to a standstill.
#
Select desired parking space 4.
#
Where necessary, select the parking direc‐
tion: forwards or reverse.
Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on
selected parking space 4 and the parking
direction.
Driving and parking
223
#
Confirm selected parking space 4.
%
The turn signal indicator is switched on auto‐
matically when the parking procedure
begins. The turn signal indicator is switched
off automatically when you switch to h.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal
indicator in accordance with the traffic condi‐
tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica‐
tor accordingly.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐
cle swinging out while parking or pulling
out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas
of the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects
or other road users.
#
Pay attention to objects and other road
users.
#
Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with
Active Parking Assist.
#
If, for example, the Please Engage Reverse
Gear message appears in the media display:
select the corresponding transmission posi‐
tion.
The vehicle drives into the selected parking
space.
On completion of the parking procedure, the
Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle
display message appears. Further maneuvering
may still be necessary.
#
After completion of the parking procedure,
safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
When required by legal requirements or local
conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb.
%
You can stop the vehicle and change the
transmission position during the parking pro‐
cedure. The system then calculates a new
vehicle path. The parking procedure can
then be continued. If no new vehicle path is
available, the transmission position will be
changed again. If the vehicle has not yet
reached the parking space, the parking pro‐
cedure will be canceled, should a gear be
changed.
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking
Assist
Requirements:
R
The vehicle has been parked with Active
Parking Assist.
%
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
button may also be located at a different
position in the center console.
Please note that you are responsible for the vehi‐
cle and surroundings during the entire parking
procedure.
#
Start the vehicle.
224
Driving and parking
#
Press button 1.
The media display shows the view of Active
Parking Assist.
#
If the vehicle has been parked at right angles
to the direction of travel: in area 2, select
direction of travel 3.
%
The vehicle path shown on the media display
may differ from the actual vehicle path.
#
Confirm direction of exit 3 to drive out of
the parking space.
%
The turn signal indicator is switched on auto‐
matically when the exiting procedure begins.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal
indicator in accordance with the traffic condi‐
tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica‐
tor accordingly.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐
cle swinging out while parking or pulling
out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas
of the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects
or other road users.
#
Pay attention to objects and other road
users.
#
Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with
Active Parking Assist.
#
If, for example, the Please Engage Forward
Gear message appears in the media display:
select the corresponding transmission posi‐
tion.
The vehicle moves out of the parking space.
The turn signal indicator is switched off auto‐
matically.
After the exiting procedure has been completed,
the Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of
Driving and parking
225
Vehicle message appears in the media display. A
warning tone and the following display in the
media display prompt you to take over control of
the vehicle:
You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change
gear yourself again.
Function of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an
impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is
detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's
speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph
(2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, sym‐
bol È appears in the media display.
&
WARNING Risk of accident caused by
limited detection performance of Drive
Away Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐
tify objects and traffic situations.
In such cases, Drive Away Assist might:
R
Warn you without reason and limit the
vehicle speed.
R
Not warn you or not limit the vehicle
speed.
#
Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away
Assist alone.
#
Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐
essary, provided the traffic situation
permits and that it is safe to take eva‐
sive action.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐
stitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that no
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
maneuvering range.
A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit‐
uations, for example:
R
If the driver mixes up the accelerator and
brake pedals.
R
If the wrong gear is selected.
Drive Away Assist is active under the following
conditions:
R
If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.
R
Every time the gear is changed to k or h
when the vehicle is at a standstill.
R
If the detected obstacle is less than approx.
3.3 ft (1.0 m) away.
R
If the maneuvering assistant function is acti‐
vated in the multimedia system.
System limits
The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited
on inclines.
%
Also observe the system limits of Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 211).
Function of Cross Traffic Alert
%
Also read the instructions on Blind Spot
Assist (/ page 231).
226
Driving and parking
Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: Cross Traffic
Alert can warn drivers of any crossing traffic
when backing up out of a parking space. The
radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the
area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation
is detected, symbol 1 appears in the media dis‐
play. If the driver does not respond to the warn‐
ing, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automat‐
ically.
If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles
or other objects, detection is not possible.
Cross Traffic Alert is active under the following
conditions:
R
If Blind Spot Assist is activated.
R
If the vehicle is backing up at walking pace.
R
If the maneuvering assistant function is acti‐
vated in the multimedia system.
System limits
Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines.
%
Also observe the system limits of Active
Blind Spot Assist (/ page 231).
Deactivating/activating maneuvering assis‐
tance
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Camera & Parking
5
Maneuvering Assist.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
%
Maneuvering assistance must be active for
the function of Drive Away Assist
(/ page 226).
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐
nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati‐
gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the
part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration
in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-
rested and attentive driver. On long journeys,
take regular breaks in good time that allow for
adequate recuperation.
You can choose between two settings:
R
Standard: normal system sensitivity.
R
Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The
driver is warned earlier and the attention
level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap‐
ted accordingly.
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐
tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take
a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis‐
play. You can acknowledge the message and
Driving and parking
227
take a break where necessary. If you do not take
a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to
detect increasing lapses in concentration, you
will be warned again after a minimum of
15 minutes.
You can have the following status information for
ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance
menu of the on-board computer:
R
The length of the journey since the last
break.
R
The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the
attention level and cannot issue a warning, the
System Suspended message appears.
If a warning is given in the Instrument Display,
the multimedia system offers to search for a rest
area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐
tion to this rest area. This function can be activa‐
ted and deactivated in the multimedia system.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Û
symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the
Instrument Display when the engine is running.
ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically
when the engine is re-started. The last selected
sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits
ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph
(60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all in the following situations:
R
If you have been driving for less than approx‐
imately 30 minutes.
R
If the road condition is poor (uneven road
surface or potholes).
R
If there is a strong side wind.
R
If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
R
If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC is active.
R
If the time has been set incorrectly.
R
In active driving situations, if you change
lanes and vary your speed frequently.
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness
assessment is deleted and restarted when con‐
tinuing the journey in the following situations:
R
If you switch off the engine.
R
If you unfasten your seat belt and open the
driver's door (e.g. changing drivers or taking
a break).
228
Driving and parking
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
ATTENTION ASSIST
Setting options
#
Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Suggesting a rest area
#
Select Suggest Rest Area.
#
Activate O or deactivate the function ª.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or
increasing lack of attention, it suggests a
rest area in the vicinity.
#
Select a suggested rest area: you are gui‐
ded to the selected rest area.
Traffic Sign Assist
Function of Traffic Sign Assist
Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with mul‐
tifunction camera 1. It assists you by display‐
ing detected speed limits and overtaking restric‐
tions in the instrument cluster.
Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data
stored in the navigation system, it can update
the display in the following situations without
detecting traffic signs:
R
When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. on a
highway entry or exit road.
R
When a village or city boundary which is
stored in the digital map is passed.
The camera also detects traffic signs with a
restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in
wet conditions).
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid. The driver is
responsible for keeping a safe distance from the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking
in good time.
Warning when the maximum permissible
speed is exceeded
The system can warn you if you unintentionally
exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do
this, you can specify in the multimedia system
by how much the maximum permissible speed
can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You
can specify whether the warning is to be just a
visual warning or an acoustic one as well.
Driving and parking
229
Display in the Instrument Display
Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit
1
Permissible speed
2
Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3
Additional sign with restriction
%
Vehicles with a standard Instrument Dis‐
play: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in the
Instrument Display indicates that additional
traffic signs have been detected. These can
also be displayed in the media display and
optionally in the head-up display.
Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun‐
tries. If it is unavailable, display 1 is shown in
the speedometer.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
cient illumination of the road, if there are
highly variable shade conditions or in rain,
snow, fog or heavy spray.
R
If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections.
R
If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐
tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐
ged up, damaged or covered.
R
If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due
to dirt or snow, or because they are covered
or due to insufficient lighting.
R
If the information in the navigation system's
digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
R
If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs
on construction sites or in adjacent lanes.
R
If you turn sharply, when passing traffic signs
outside the camera's field of vision.
Setting Traffic Sign Assist
Requirements:
R
For automatic adoption of speed limits:
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted.
230
Driving and parking
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Traffic Sign Assist
Activating/deactivating automatic adoption
of speed limits
#
Select Limit Adoption.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign
Assist are automatically adopted by Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
Displaying detected traffic signs in the
media display
#
Select Display in COMAND.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
%
If one of the following systems is activated,
the speed detected can be manually adopted
as the speed limit:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
Cruise control
Further information (/ page 195).
Adjusting the type of warning
#
Select Visual & Audible, Visual or None.
Adjusting the warning threshold
This value determines the speed at which a
warning is issued when exceeded.
#
Select Warning Threshold.
#
Set the desired speed.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot
Assist
Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active
Blind Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing
radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft
(40 m) behind your vehicle and 10 ft (3 m)
directly next to your vehicle.
If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx‐
imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse‐
quently enters the monitoring range directly next
to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside
mirror lights up red.
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in
the lateral monitoring range and you switch on
the turn signal indicator in the corresponding
direction, a warning tone sounds once. The red
warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the
turn signal indicator remains switched on, all
other detected vehicles are indicated only by the
flashing of the red warning lamp.
If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is
given.
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind
Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles
approaching and overtaking you at a greatly
different speed.
As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn
drivers in this situation.
#
Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
tance at the side of the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
are only aids. They may fail to detect some vehi‐
Driving and parking
231
cles and are no substitute for attentive driving.
Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to
the side for other road users and obstacles.
System limitations
The system may be limited in the following situa‐
tions:
R
The sensors are dirty or covered.
R
Poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,
snow or spray.
R
Narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles, are within the
monitoring range.
Warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor‐
ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside long vehicles, for example trucks, for a
prolonged time.
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse
gear is engaged.
Function of brake application (Active Blind
Spot Assist)
%
The brake application function is only availa‐
ble for vehicles with a Driving Assistance
Package.
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side
impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐
recting brake application is carried out. This is
designed to help you avoid a collision.
The course-correcting brake application is availa‐
ble in the speed range between approximately
20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite
brake application of Active Blind Spot
Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision.
#
Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐
self, especially if Active Blind Spot
Assist warns you or makes a course-
correcting brake application.
#
Always maintain a safe distance at the
sides.
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite
Active Blind Spot Assist
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the
following:
R
If vehicles overtake too closely on the
side, placing them in the blind spot area
R
Vehicles approaching and overtaking you
at a greatly different speed
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei‐
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit‐
uations.
#
Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
tance at the side of the vehicle.
232
Driving and parking
If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐
ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis‐
play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision
appears in the multifunction display.
In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐
priate brake application. This brake application
may be interrupted at any time if you steer
slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
System limits
Either a course-correcting brake application
appropriate to the driving situation, or none at
all, may occur in the following situations:
R
Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
located on both sides of your vehicle.
R
A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
R
You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
R
You brake or accelerate significantly.
R
A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP
®
or Active Brake Assist.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
R
A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is
detected.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or
Active Blind Spot Assist
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
k Assistance
5
Blind Spot Assist
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin‐
tentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned
by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and gui‐
Driving and parking
233
ded by a course-correcting brake application
back into your lane.
You are warned by vibration pulses in the steer‐
ing wheel in the following circumstances:
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane
marking.
R
A front wheel drives over this lane marking.
You will also be guided back into your lane by
means of a course-correcting brake application
if the following conditions are met:
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on both edges of the lane.
R
A front wheel drives over a solid lane mark‐
ing.
You can activate or deactivate the Active Lane
Keeping Assist warning.
Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce
the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your
driving style nor override the laws of physics. It
cannot take into account road, weather or traffic
conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an
aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying
in lane.
Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package or
Driving Assistance Plus Package: Active Lane
Keeping Assist can bring the vehicle back into
the lane with a lane-correcting brake application.
In the case of a broken lane marking being
detected, a brake application will only be made if
a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane.
Oncoming vehicles, overtaking vehicles and vehi‐
cles in adjacent lanes can be detected.
Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the
speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and
124 mph (200 km/h).
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis‐
play 1 appears in the multifunction display.
System limits
No lane-correcting brake application occurs in
the following situations:
R
You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐
erate.
R
You have switched on the turn signal indica‐
tor (situation-dependent).
R
A driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP
®
, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
R
You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐
eration.
R
When ESP
®
is deactivated.
R
If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has
been detected and displayed.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
cient illumination of the road, if there are
234
Driving and parking
highly variable shade conditions or in rain,
snow, fog or heavy spray.
R
If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections.
R
If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐
tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐
ged up, damaged or covered.
R
If there are no lane markings, or several
unclear lane markings are present for one
lane, e.g. around roadworks.
R
If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov‐
ered.
R
If the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be
detected.
R
If the lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge.
R
If the roadway is very narrow and winding.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐
age or Driving Assistance Plus Package:
Active Lane Keeping Assist uses radar sensors
to monitor several areas around the vehicle. If
the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or
covered with snow, the system may be impaired
or may not function. If an obstacle in the lane in
which you are driving has been detected, no
lane-correcting brake application occurs.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping
Assist (vehicles with Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC)
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite
Active Lane Keeping Assist warning
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring the vehicle back into the origi‐
nal lane.
#
Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐
self, especially if Active Lane Keeping
Assist warns you or makes a lane-cor‐
recting brake application.
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite inter‐
vention of Active Lane Keeping Assist
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
cases, the system may make an inappropri‐
ate brake application, e.g. after intentionally
driving over a solid lane marking.
The brake application can be interrupted at
any time if you steer slightly in the opposite
direction.
#
Always make sure that there is suffi‐
cient distance to the side for other traf‐
fic or obstacles.
&
WARNING Risk of accident despite Lane
Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
detect lane markings.
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
R
give an unnecessary warning
R
not give a warning
#
Always pay particular attention to the
traffic situation and keep within the
lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping
Assist alerts you.
Driving and parking
235
Be sure to observe the system limitations of
Active Lane Keeping Assist.
#
Press button 2.
If indicator lamp 1 lights up, Active Lane
Keeping Assist is activated, the lane mark‐
ings are shown as light in the assistance
graphic. When Active Lane Keeping Assist is
active, the lane markings are shown in green
in the assistance graphic.
Vehicle towing instructions
The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar
systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy
towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar
systems can lead to damage on the vehicle.
When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys‐
tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be
guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed
vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may
swerve from side to side. Comply with the per‐
mitted towing methods (/ page 396) and the
instructions for towing with both axles on the
ground (/ page 397).
236
Driving and parking
Instrument Display overview
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognize dangers.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to an
instrument display malfunction
If the Instrument Display has failed or mal‐
functioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions applying to safety relevant sys‐
tems.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have the vehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, park the vehicle immediately and
safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Instrument Display (standard)
1
Speedometer
2
Multifunction display
3
Tachometer
4
Coolant temperature gauge
5
Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐
tor
Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cock‐
pit
1
Speedometer
2
Multifunction display
3
Example: area for additional values
4
Coolant temperature gauge
5
Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐
tor
%
Further display content can be shown on dis‐
play 3 for additional values (/ page 240).
The segments in speedometer 1 indicate the
status of the following systems:
R
Cruise control (/ page 191)
Instrument Display and on-board computer
237
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 194)
*
NOTE Engine damage due to excessively
high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with
the engine in the overrevving range.
#
Do not drive with the engine in the over‐
revving range.
The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the
engine when the red mark on the tachometer
(overrevving range) is reached.
During normal operating conditions, coolant
temperature display 4 may rise to the red
mark.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.
Overview of the buttons on the steering
wheel
1
¤ Back/Home button (press and hold),
on-board computer
2
Touch Control, on-board computer
3
Control panel for cruise control or Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC
4
Control panel for multimedia system:
£ Voice Control System
ß Displays favorites
VOL: control knob, adjusts the volume or
switches the sound off 8 (press)
6 Makes/accepts a call
~ Rejects/ends a call
5
ò Calls up the home screen
6
Touch Control multimedia system
7
% Back button
Operating the on-board computer
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
238
Instrument Display and on-board computer
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country
in which you are currently driving when operat‐
ing the on-board computer.
%
The on-board computer displays will appear
on the multifunction display (/ page 241).
The on-board computer is operated using left-
hand Touch Control 2 and the left-hand back/
home button 1.
When the on-board computer is being operated,
different acoustic signals will sound as operating
feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached
or when you are scrolling through a list.
The following menus are available:
R
Service
R
DriveAssist
R
Trip
R
Navigation
R
Radio
R
Media
R
Phone
R
Head-up Disp.
R
Vehicles with an Instrument Display in
the Widescreen Cockpit: Designs
The menus can be called up from the menu bar
on the multifunction display.
#
To call up the menu bar: press back button
on the left 1 until the menu bar is dis‐
played.
%
Vehicles without Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: press the ò button to call
up the menu bar of the on-board computer.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
239
#
To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or
right on left-hand Touch Control 2.
#
To call up a menu or confirm a selection:
press left-hand Touch Control 2.
#
To scroll through displays or lists on the
menu: swipe upwards or downwards on left-
hand Touch Control 2.
#
To call up a submenu or confirm a selec‐
tion: press left-hand Touch Control 2.
#
To exit a submenu: press back button on
the left 1.
Full menu display
Vehicles with an Instrument Display in the
Widescreen Cockpit: the following menus can
be shown in full on the Instrument Display:
R
DriveAssist
R
Trip
#
On the corresponding menu, use left-hand
Touch Control 2 to scroll to the end of the
list.
#
Press left-hand Touch Control 2.
The selected menu will be displayed in full.
Setting the design
On-board computer:
4
Designs
%
This function is available only for vehicles
with a Widescreen Cockpit.
The following designs can be selected:
R
Classic
R
Sport
R
Progressive
#
To select a design: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The Instrument Display will be shown in the
selected design.
Setting the area for additional values
G-meter (example)
1
Area for additional values
2
Index points
#
To select display content: swipe to the
right on the left-hand Touch Control.
240
Instrument Display and on-board computer
#
Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control to select display content.
When display content is selected, the area
for additional values 1 will briefly be high‐
lighted.
Index points 2 will display the selected list
item.
The following display content can be selected in
the Classic and Sport designs:
R
Tachometer
R
Navigation
R
ECO display
R
Consumption
R
G-meter
The following content can be selected in the Pro-
gressive design:
R
date
R
Navigation
R
ECO display
R
Consumption
R
G-meter
Overview of displays on the multifunction
display
1
Outside temperature
2
Drive program
3
Transmission position
4
Time
5
Display section
%
Vehicles with an Instrument Display in
the Widescreen Cockpit: the position of
the displays will differ from those displayed
here.
Further displays on the multifunction display:
Z
Gearshift recommendation (/ page 167)
ë
Active Parking Assist activated
(/ page 223)
é
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
(/ page 214)
h
Cruise control (/ page 191)
ç
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 194)
æ
Active Brake Assist(/ page 191)
è
Active Steering Assist(/ page 200)
Ã
Active Lane Keeping Assist(/ page 233)
±
Active Lane Change Assist(/ page 202)
è
ECO start/stop function (/ page 160)
ë
HOLD function (/ page 206)
_
Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 133)
Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected
instructions and traffic signs (/ page 229).
Instrument Display and on-board computer
241
Adjusting the instrument lighting
#
Turn brightness control 1 up or down.
The lighting of the Instrument Display and in
the control elements of the vehicle interior is
adjusted.
Menus and submenus
Calling up functions on the Service menu of
the on-board computer
On-board computer:
4
Service
#
To select a function: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Functions on the Service menu:
R
Message memory (/ page 447)
R
Tires:
-
Check the tire pressure with the tire pres‐
sure monitor (/ page 410)
-
Restart the tire pressure monitor
(/ page 411)
R
ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date
(/ page 366)
R
Vehicles with a Widescreen Cockpit: Cool-
ant: coolant temperature display
R
Engine Oil Level: engine oil level
Calling up displays on the Assistance menu
On-board computer:
4
DriveAssist
%
Vehicles with an Instrument Display in
the Widescreen Cockpit: when you have
the design set to Progressive, you can view
the assistant display in the left-hand area of
the Instrument Display.
The following displays are available on the Assis‐
tance menu:
R
Assistant display
R
Attention level (/ page 227)
#
To switch between the displays: swipe
upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
242
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Status displays on the assistant display:
R
Û ATTENTION ASSIST: deactivated
R
æ: Active Brake Assist deactivated
R
Light lane markings: Active Lane Keeping
Assist enabled
R
Green lane markings: Active Lane Keeping
Assist active
R
¸ Gray radar waves next to vehicle: Blind
Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist ena‐
bled
R
¸ Green radar waves next to vehicle:
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist
active
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays
(/ page 194)
R
Active Lane Change Assist displays
(/ page 202)
Calling up displays on the trip menu
On-board computer:
4
Trip
%
Vehicles with an Instrument Display in
the Widescreen Cockpit: When you have
the design set to Progressive, you can view
information about the journey in the left-
hand area of the Instrument Display.
#
To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Displays on the Trip menu:
R
Standard display
R
Range and current fuel consumption
When glide mode is active, Gliding Mode will
be displayed instead of the current fuel con‐
sumption (/ page 167).
A recuperation display is also available for
certain engines. If there is only a small
amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the dis‐
play will show a vehicle being refueled
instead of the range.
R
ECO display(/ page 162)
R
Trip computer From Start and From Reset
R
Digital speedometer
%
Vehicles with an Instrument Display in
the Widescreen Cockpit: The digital speed‐
ometer appears only in the Classic and Sport
designs.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
243
Example: standard display
1
Trip distance
2
Total distance
Vehicles without a 48 V on-board electrical
system (EQ Boost technology):
Example: trip computer
1
Total distance
2
Driving time
3
Average speed
4
Average fuel consumption
Resetting values on the trip menu of the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4
Trip
%
The spelling of the main menu displayed may
differ. Therefore, observe the menu overview
for the Instrument Display (/ page 238).
You can reset the values of the following func‐
tions:
R
Trip distance
R
Trip computer From Start and From Reset
R
ECO display (/ page 162)
#
To select the function to be reset: swipe
upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Select Yes .
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
If you press and hold the left-hand Touch Con‐
trol, the values of the function will be reset
immediately.
244
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Calling up navigation instructions on the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4
Navigation
Example: no change of direction announced
1
Distance to the next destination
2
Estimated arrival time
3
Distance to the next change of direction
4
Current road
Example: change of direction announced
1
Road to which the change of direction leads
2
Distance to the change of direction
3
Change-of-direction symbol
4
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction (white)
5
Possible lane
6
Lane not recommended (dark gray)
Further possible displays on the Navigation
menu:
R
Direction of Travel: display of direction of
travel and road currently being traveled on.
R
New Route... or Calculating Route...: a new
route is being calculated.
R
Road Not Mapped: the road is unknown, e.g.
for newly built roads.
R
No Route: no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
R
Off Map: the map for the current location is
not available.
R
Area of Destination Reached: you have
reached the area of the destination.
R
O: you have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
#
To exit the menu: press the back button on
the left.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys‐
tem: You can also start navigation to one of the
recent destinations on the Navigation menu:
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
To select a destination: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Route guidance will start.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
245
If route guidance has already been activated,
a query will appear asking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
#
Select Yes.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Route guidance will start.
Selecting radio stations using the on-board
computer
On-board computer:
4
Radio
1
Frequency range
2
Station
3
Name of track
4
Name of artist
%
The illustration shows the Instrument Display
in the Widescreen Cockpit
When you select a station from the memory pre‐
sets, the preset will appear next to the station
name. When you select a saved station in the
frequency range, an asterisk will appear next to
the station name.
#
To select a radio station: swipe upwards or
downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Selecting the frequency range or memory
preset
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
246
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Operating media playback using the on-
board computer
On-board computer:
4
Media
1
Media source
2
Track number and current track
3
Name of artist (example)
4
Name of album
%
The illustration shows the Instrument Display
in the Widescreen Cockpit
#
To change tracks on an active media
source: swipe upwards or downwards on the
left-hand Touch Control.
Changing a media source
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
To select a media source: swipe upwards
or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐
trol.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Dialing telephone numbers using the on-
board computer
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
When using the phone, observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
Requirements:
R
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system.
On-board computer:
4
Phone
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys‐
tem: The most recent telephone calls (dialed,
received and missed calls) are displayed on the
Phone menu.
#
To select an entry: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
247
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
If there is only one telephone number
saved to an entry: the telephone number
will be selected.
#
If there are multiple telephone numbers
saved to an entry: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control to
select the desired telephone number.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
The telephone number will be dialed.
The following displays may appear instead of the
telephone numbers dialed:
R
Please Wait...: the application is starting. If a
Bluetooth
®
connection to the mobile phone
is not established, the menu for authorizing
and connecting a mobile phone will be dis‐
played on the multimedia system
(/ page 317).
R
Updating data...: the call list is being upda‐
ted.
R
Importing Contacts...: contacts are being
imported from the mobile phone or a storage
medium.
Accepting/rejecting an incoming call
Vehicles with Head-up Display: when you
receive a call, the Incoming Call message will
appear on the Head-up Display.
#
Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control and select 6 (Accept)
or ~ (Reject).
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
You may accept or reject the call using the 6
or ~ button on the steering wheel.
Adjusting the Head-up Display settings on
the on-board computer
On-board computer:
4
Head-up Disp.
The following Head-up Display settings can be
adjusted:
R
Position
R
Brightness
R
Display Content
#
To select a setting: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
#
To adjust a value: swipe upwards or down‐
wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
#
Press the left-hand Touch Control.
1
Setting currently selected
2
Digital speedometer
248
Instrument Display and on-board computer
3
Traffic Sign Assist
4
Navigation displays
Head-up Display
Function of the Head-up Display
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognize dangers.
The Head-up Display projects the following con‐
tent into the driver's field of vision:
R
Information from the navigation system
R
Information from the driver assistance sys‐
tems
R
Some warning messages
Display elements
1
Navigation instructions
2
Current speed
3
Detected instructions and traffic signs
4
Set speed in the driver assistance system
(e.g. cruise control)
When you receive a call, the 6 Incoming Call
message will appear on the Head-up Display.
In audio mode, the station name or track will be
shown temporarily when the audio source is
being actively operated.
System limitations
The visibility is influenced by the following condi‐
tions:
R
Seat position
R
The positioning of the display image
R
Light conditions
R
Wet roads
R
Objects on the display cover
R
Polarization in sunglasses
%
In extreme sunlight, sections of the display
may appear washed out. You can correct this
by switching the Head-up Display off and on
again.
Instrument Display and on-board computer
249
Switching the Head-up Display on/off
#
Press button 1.
250
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Notes on operating safety
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobile communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the
driver from the traffic situation. This could
also cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
#
As the driver, only operate mobile com‐
munications devices when the vehicle is
stationary.
#
As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile
communications devices in the areas
intended for this purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone receptacles cannot always
retain all objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#
Always stow objects so that they can‐
not be thrown around in such situa‐
tions.
#
Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#
Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#
Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the trunk/load compartment.
For your own safety, always observe the follow‐
ing points when operating mobile communica‐
tions equipment and especially your voice con‐
trol system:
R
Observe the legal requirements for the coun‐
try in which you are driving.
R
While driving, only operate mobile communi‐
cations equipment and your voice control
system when the traffic conditions permit it.
You may otherwise be distracted from the
traffic conditions and cause an accident,
injuring yourself and others.
Voice Control System
251
R
If you use the voice control system in an
emergency your voice can change and your
telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can
thereby be unnecessarily delayed.
R
Familiarize yourself with the voice control
system functions before starting the journey.
R
Comply with the loading guidelines
(/ page 110).
Operation
Overview of operation of the Voice Control
System on the multifunction steering wheel
The Voice Control System is operational approx‐
imately thirty seconds after the ignition is
switched on.
1
Press the rocker switch up: £ starts the
Voice Control System
2
Press the control knob: 8 switches the
sound off or on (ends the Voice Control Sys‐
tem)
Turn the control knob up/down: increases/
decreases the volume
3
Press the rocker switch up: 6 makes/
accepts a call
Press the rocker switch down: ~ rejects/
ends a call (ends the Voice Control System)
Conducting a dialog with the Voice Control
System
#
To start or continue a dialog: on the multi‐
function steering wheel, press the £
rocker switch up.
You can say a voice command after an
acoustic signal.
#
To correct an entry: say the Correction
voice command.
#
To select an entry from the selection list:
say the line number or the contents.
#
To browse the selection list: say the Next
or Back voice command.
#
To interrupt the dialog: say the Pause voice
command.
#
To cancel the dialog: say the Cancel voice
command.
252
Voice Control System
Operable functions
You can use the Voice Control System to operate
the following equipment depending on the fea‐
tures:
R
Telephone
R
Text messages
R
Navigation
R
Address book
R
Radio
R
Audio (memory card, Media Interface, USB
and Bluetooth
®
audio)
R
Vehicle
Overview of types of voice command
A distinction is made between the following
voice commands:
R
Global voice commands can be said at any
time and regardless of the current applica‐
tion, e.g. the voice commands Navigate to,
Call or Text message to.
R
Application-specific voice commands are
only available for the active application.
Once the Voice Control System is started an
autocue is shown. Apart from the available voice
commands for the application currently active,
this also cites example voice commands for
other applications which are not active. In this
way, you will be familiar more quickly with the
available voice commands. The list can be scrol‐
led or it can be operated by speech or the con‐
troller/touchpad.
Notes on the language setting
You can change the language of the Voice Con‐
trol System via the system language settings. If
the set system language is not supported by the
Voice Control System, English will be selected.
The Voice Control System is available in English,
French, Portuguese and Spanish.
Using the Voice Control System effectively
Features of audible help functions
You receive information and help for the follow‐
ing topics:
R
Optimum operation: say the brief instruc-
tion voice command.
R
Current application: on the multifunction
steering wheel, press the £ rocker switch
up and say the Help voice command.
R
Continued dialog: say the Help voice com‐
mand during a voice dialog.
R
Specific function: say voice commands for
the desired function, e.g. Help telephone.
Notes on how to improve speech quality
If the Voice Control System does not understand
you:
R
only operate the Voice Control System from
the driver's seat.
R
say the voice commands coherently and
clearly, but do not exaggerate the words.
Voice Control System
253
R
avoid loud noises that cause interference
while making a voice command entry, e.g.
the blower.
A voice tag in the address book is not recog‐
nized:
R
only create sensible address book entries in
the system/mobile phone, e.g. enter sur‐
name and first name in the correct field.
R
do not use any abbreviations, unnecessary
spaces or special characters.
If a station list entry is not recognized:
R
say the Read out station list voice command.
Essential voice commands
Overview of switch voice commands
Switch voice commands can be used to open
certain applications. The voice command selec‐
tion can be used regardless of the application
that is currently active.
Switch voice commands
Voice command Function
Navigation
To switch to navigation mode
Map
To switch to map display
Address book
To switch to address book
Telephone
To switch to telephone mode
Text message
To switch to text messages
Radio
To switch to radio mode
Media
To switch to media mode
254
Voice Control System
Voice command Function
USB
To switch to USB
Memory card
To switch to memory card
Internet application <Name>
To start a Mercedes-Benz online application. The application must be called up by touch once prior
to use.
Mercedes-Benz Apps
To switch to Mercedes-Benz Apps
Connect
To switch to Internet mode
Vehicle menu
To switch to vehicle settings
System settings menu
To switch to system settings
Overview of navigation voice commands
Using navigation voice commands, you can enter
POIs or conventional addresses as well as
directly change important navigation settings.
Voice Control System
255
Navigation voice commands
Voice command Function
Navigate to <Address/POI/Contact>
Universal search for all types of destinations. A search is conducted in the address book contacts,
the navigation database and on the Internet (POIs). The order of the details, e.g. city, street or
house number, can be changed.
Address in <Country>
Destination entry in a desired country, e.g. address in France
Home
Starts navigation to home address
Work
Starts navigation to your workspace
POI <POI>
Destination entry for a POI, e.g. the POI Brandenburg Gate. A search is performed in the navigation
database and on the Internet.
POI online search <POI>
Conducts a POI search on the Internet only
Navigate to contact <Name>
Destination entry to a contact in the address book
256
Voice Control System
Voice command Function
Enter country
Enter city
Enter district
Enter street
Enter intersection
Enter house number
Enter ZIP code
Enters a country/city/district/street/intersection/house number/ZIP code
Nearest restaurant
Nearest parking lot
Nearest rest area with restrooms
Nearest gas station
Searches for nearby restaurants, parking lots, rest areas with restrooms and gas stations
Restaurant along the route
Parking along the route
Rest area with restrooms along the route
Gas stations along the route
Searches for restaurants, parking options, rest areas with restrooms and gas stations along the
route
Voice Control System
257
Voice command Function
Restaurant at destination
Parking at destination
Rest area with restrooms at destination
Gas station at destination
Searches for restaurants, parking options, rest areas with restrooms and gas stations at the desti‐
nation
Last destinations
Selects a destination from the list of last entered destinations
Alternative routes
Switches route guidance to another route
Start route guidance
Starts route guidance after entering a valid destination
Cancel route guidance
Cancels route guidance
Guidance instructions on
Guidance instructions off
Switches the route guidance voice output on/off
Show traffic map
Hide traffic map
Switches the traffic map on/off
Switch on POI symbols
Switch off POI symbols
Switches the POI symbols display on the map on/off
258
Voice Control System
Overview of telephone voice commands
You can use the telephone voice commands to
make phone calls or search through the address
book.
Telephone voice commands
Voice command Function
Call <Name>
Makes a phone call. All address book names are available.
Search for contact <Name>
Searches for and displays a contact. All address book names are available.
Outgoing calls
Displays the last call
Redial
Selects the last phone number dialed
Overview of radio voice commands
Radio voice commands can also be used when
the radio application is running in the back‐
ground.
Voice Control System
259
Radio voice commands
Voice command Function
Station <Name>
To call up receivable or saved stations
<Frequency>
To enter a frequency directly
Next station
To switch to the next available station
Previous station
To switch to the previous station
Save station
To save a station in the station list
Show station list
To display the names of all receivable stations
Read out station list
To listen to the names of all receivable stations
Traffic information on
Traffic information off
To switch the traffic information service on/off
Radio info on
Radio info off
To switch information about the current station on/off
260
Voice Control System
Overview of media player voice commands
Media player voice commands can also be used
when the media player is running in the back‐
ground.
Media player voice commands
Voice command Function
Play <Tracks>
Play <Albums>
Play <Artists>
Play<Composers>
Play <Genres>
Play <Playlists>
The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists are accepted dur‐
ing the search.
Media search <Track>
Media search <Albums>
Media search <Artists>
Media search <Composers>
Media search <Genres>
Media search <Playlists>
The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists are accepted dur‐
ing the search.
Voice Control System
261
Voice command Function
Show all albums
Show all artists
Show all composers
Show all genres
Show all tracks
Show all playlists
Available albums, artists, composers, genres, tracks or playlists are searched for.
Next track
To select the next track
Previous track
To select the previous track
Random track list on
Random track list off
To switch the random track list on/off
Overview of message voice commands
Text messages can be created, edited and lis‐
tened to using the message voice commands.
262
Voice Control System
Message voice commands
Voice command Function
Text message to <Name>
To create a message. All address book names are available.
Reply
To reply to a message
Forward text message
To forward a message
Overview of vehicle voice commands
You can use the vehicle voice commands to
directly call up the corresponding menus for the
vehicle settings.
Vehicle voice commands
Voice command Function
Ambient light menu
To display ambient light settings
Ambient light "blue"
To switch ambient light to blue
Display and styles menu
To show display settings
Assistance menu
To display assistance settings
Voice Control System
263
Voice command Function
Scent menu
To display fragrance settings
Energy flow
To display energy flow settings
Ionization menu
To display ionization settings
Climate control menu
To display climate control settings
Automatic climate control driver on
To switch on the automatic climate control settings on the driver's side
Light menu
To display light settings
Massage menu
To display massage settings
Massage driver's seat on
To switch on the massage function for the driver's seat
Massage driver's seat off
To switch off the massage function for the driver's seat
Outside temperature
To display the outside temperature
Engine data
To display engine data
Seats menu
To display seat adjustment settings
Seat heating front passenger level "2"
To set the seat heating for the front passenger seat to level 2
264
Voice Control System
Voice command Function
Consumption menu
To display consumption
Vehicle data
To display vehicle data
Voice Control System
265
Overview and operation
Overview of the multimedia system
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
1
Touch Control
Multimedia system button group on the
steering wheel (/ page 238)
2
Multimedia system display
3
Main function button group (/ page 270)
4
Touchpad
5
Control knob
Adjusts the volume (/ page 272)
Switches the mute function on/off
(/ page 272)
6
Ü button
Switches multimedia system on/off
7
Controller
Notes on the media display
*
NOTE Scratches on the display
The display has a highly sensitive, high-gloss
surface. There is a risk of it becoming
scratched.
#
Avoid touching the display.
#
Observe the notes on cleaning.
Observe the notes on caring for the interior
(/ page 382).
Automatic temperature-controlled switch-
off feature: if the temperature is too high, the
brightness is initially reduced automatically. The
display may then switch off completely for a
while.
266
Multimedia system
%
If you are wearing polarized sunglasses, it
may be difficult to read the display.
Central control elements overview
1
Touch Control
2
Controller
3
Touchpad
Touch Control
Operating Touch Control
#
To call up main functions: press button 1.
or
#
Press and hold button 3.
#
To call up favorites: press button 1.
#
Swipe down on Touch Control 2.
#
To open a list: press Touch Control 2.
#
To close a list: press button 3.
or
#
Swipe right on Touch Control 2.
#
To select a menu item: swipe up, down, left
or right on Touch Control 2.
#
Press Touch Control 2.
#
To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
Setting the sensitivity for the Touch Control
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
w Input
5
Touch Control Sensitivity
#
Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
Multimedia system
267
Operating the controller
1
% button
Press briefly: returns to the previous display
Press and hold: calls up main functions
2
© button
Calls up the main functions
To call up favorites: when the main functions
are displayed, slide controller 3 down.
3
Controller
Controller operating options:
#
Turn 3 counter-clockwise or clockwise.
#
Slide 1 left or right.
#
Slide 4 up or down.
#
Slide 2 diagonally.
#
Press 7 briefly or press and hold.
Touchpad
Activating/deactivating the touchpad
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
w Input
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the Touchpad.
Operating the touchpad
Requirements:
R
The touchpad is switched on (/ page 268).
1
Touchpad
2
© button
Calls up main functions and favorites
3
D button
Calls up the control menu of the last active
audio source
4
% button
268
Multimedia system
Press briefly: returns to the previous display
Press and hold: calls up main functions
You can navigate in menus and lists via touch-
sensitive surface 1 by using a single-finger
swipe.
#
To open or close lists: swipe left or right.
#
To select the menu item: swipe up, down,
left or right.
#
Press touchpad 1.
#
To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
Use the following functions with a two-finger
swipe:
#
To call up main functions and favorites:
swipe down with two fingers. The swipe must
start in the upper area of the touchpad.
#
To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart.
#
To call up the control menu of the last
active audio source: swipe up with two fin‐
gers. The swipe must start in the lower area
of the touchpad.
Setting the sensitivity for the touchpad
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
w Input
#
Select Touchpad Sensitivity.
#
Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
#
To set the pressure sensitivity: switch
Touchpad Tap on O or off ª.
If the function is switched on O, a tap on
the touchpad is enough to select a menu
item.
Handwriting recognition: switching the read-
aloud function on/off
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
õ Audio
5
System Feedback
#
Switch Read Out Handwriting Recognition on
O or off ª.
Activating/deactivating haptic operating
feedback on the touchpad
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
w Input
The function supports you when making entries
on the touchpad and when selecting menus.
#
Switch Haptic Operating Feedback on O or
off ª.
When the function is activated, a tactile feed‐
back in the form of a vibration is effected
when the touchpad is operated.
Selecting a station and track using the
touchpad
#
Press the D button on the touchpad.
or
#
Swipe up with two fingers. The swipe must
start in the lower area of the touchpad.
The control menu appears for the audio
source that was last selected.
#
Use one finger to swipe up or down.
Radio: the previous or the next station is set.
Media source: the previous or the next music
track is selected.
Multimedia system
269
#
To hide the control menu: swipe down with
two fingers. The swipe must start in the
upper area of the touchpad.
Main functions
Calling up the main functions
1
ß button
Calls up navigation
2
$ button
Calls up the radio
3
Õ button
Calls up media
4
% button
Calls up the telephone
5
Ø button
Sets vehicle functions
#
Alternatively: press the © button on the
Touch Control, controller or the touchpad.
The main functions are displayed.
#
Select the main function.
Calling up lists and menus on the multimedia
system
Call up a list
#
Call up a main function (/ page 270).
#
To open a list: swipe left on the touchpad.
#
To close a list: swipe right on the touchpad.
#
To select a menu item: swipe up or down
on the touchpad.
#
Press the touchpad.
Favorites
Overview of favorites
Favorites offer you quick access to frequently
used applications. It is possible to create 20
favorites in total.
The following functions are available:
R
add pre-defined favorites from the follow‐
ing categories (/ page 271):
-
Navigation
-
Entertainment
-
Phone
-
Connect
-
Vehicle
-
System Settings
R
add your own favorites (/ page 271)
R
rename favorites (/ page 271).
R
move favorites (/ page 271).
R
delete favorites (/ page 271).
R
reset all favorites (/ page 271)
270
Multimedia system
Calling up favorites
#
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
#
Navigate downwards once.
Navigating means:
R
Swiping on the Touch Control or the
touchpad
R
Sliding the controller
Leaving the favorites menu
#
Press the © button.
Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
#
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
#
Navigate downwards twice.
The Favorites menu appears.
#
Select New Favorite.
The categories are displayed.
#
Select a category.
The favorites are displayed.
#
Select a favorite.
#
Store the favorite at the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Example: adding your own favorites
#
Select Vehicle.
#
Select Full Screen: Consumption.
#
Press and hold the © button until the
favorites are displayed.
#
Store the favorite at the desired position.
If No function available for saving. is shown, the
selected function cannot be added.
Renaming favorites
#
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
#
Navigate downwards once.
#
Select a favorite.
#
Navigate downwards once.
The Favorites menu appears.
#
Select Rename.
#
Enter the characters.
#
To confirm the entry: select ¡.
Moving favorites
#
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
#
Navigate downwards once.
#
Select a favorite.
#
Navigate downwards once.
The Favorites menu appears.
#
Select Move.
#
Move the favorite to the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Deleting favorites
#
Press the © button.
The main functions are displayed.
#
Navigate downwards once.
#
Select a favorite.
#
Navigate downwards once.
The Favorites menu appears.
#
To delete: select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
Multimedia system
271
#
To restore all favorites: select Reset All.
A prompt appears.
#
Select Yes.
The favorites are reset to the factory set‐
tings.
Switching the sound on/off
On the multifunction steering wheel
On the multimedia system
#
To mute: press volume control 1.
The 8 symbol appears in the status line
of the media display.
You will also hear traffic announcements and
navigation announcements even when the
sound is muted.
#
To switch on: change the media source or
turn volume control 1.
Adjusting the volume
Setting with the volume control
On the multifunction steering wheel
272
Multimedia system
On the multimedia system
#
Turn volume control 1.
The volume of the current radio or media
source is set. The volume of other audio
sources can be adjusted separately.
Adjust this in the following situations:
R
During a traffic announcement
R
During a navigation announcement
The volume of the navigation announce‐
ment changes in accordance with the vol‐
ume of the current media source.
R
During a telephone call
R
When entering or exiting a parking space
while using Active Parking Assist
Setting in the menu
#
Select System in the multimedia system.
#
Select Audio.
#
Select a volume setting.
#
Set the volume.
Entering characters
Using the character input function
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Use the character input function in the following
situations, for example:
R
Renaming a favorite
R
Entering a POI or address
R
Making a phone call
The following functions are available:
R
Selecting a character in the character bar
R
Writing a character on the touchpad
Character input can be started with a control
element and resumed with another.
Multimedia system
273
#
On the Touch Control and controller:
select the characters in the character bar.
Depending on the target entry, the following
characters are available:
R
The full set of characters is shown
R
Only those characters which are useful
for the current input string are shown
Other characters are grayed out.
#
On the touchpad: select the characters in
the character bar.
or
#
Write the characters on the touch-sensitive
surface of the touchpad.
Handwriting recognition supports you by
means of character suggestions and a read-
aloud function.
Examples of character entry:
R
Renaming a favorite
R
Entering a POI or an address using free or
step-by-step search
R
Entering a web address
Entering characters using the controller
Example: renaming favorites
#
Call up the "Renaming favorites" function
(/ page 271).
#
To enter a character: turn 3, slide 4
and press the controller.
The character is entered in the input line.
Use the following entry functions:
%
To delete a character: press the control‐
ler.
To delete an entry: press and hold the
controller until the entire entry is deleted.
Ä
To switch to special characters and sym‐
bols.
X
To switch to upper-case or lower-case let‐
ters.
B
To switch the language.
v
To switch to character entry on the touch‐
pad.
%
The available editing functions depend on
the editing task, the language set and the
character level.
#
To confirm the entry: select ¡.
Example: entering a destination (navigation)
#
Enter the POI or address (/ page 290).
Entering characters on the touchpad
Requirements:
R
The touchpad is switched on (/ page 268).
R
The entered or selected character should be
read out: the handwriting recognition read-
aloud function is switched on (/ page 269).
274
Multimedia system
Example: renaming favorites
#
Call up the "Renaming favorites" function
(/ page 271).
#
To enter a character: use your finger to
write characters on the touchpad.
The character is entered in the input line. If
different interpretations are possible, charac‐
ter suggestions are displayed.
#
To select a character suggestion: swipe up
or down on the touchpad.
#
Resume character input.
#
To enter a space: swipe right when the cur‐
sor is located in the input line.
#
To delete a character: swipe left when the
cursor is located in the input line.
#
To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.
#
To finish character entry: swipe upwards.
or
#
Press the % button.
Example: entering a destination (navigation)
#
Enter the POI or address (/ page 290).
System settings
Display
Configuring display settings
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
G Display and Designs
Styles
#
Select Designs.
#
Select Sport, Classic or Progressive.
Adapting the ambient lighting for the style
#
Select Adjust Amb. Lighting.
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
This function adjusts the ambient lighting for
the selected display style.
Setting the display brightness
#
Select Display Brightness.
#
Select a brightness value.
Switching the display off/on
#
Off: select Display Off.
#
On: press a button, %, for example.
Display design
#
Select Day/Night Design.
#
Select Automatic, Day Design or Night
Design.
Additional display area
Depending on the vehicle, various items of addi‐
tional information can be shown. The additional
display area comprises the left-hand or right-
hand third of the display.
#
Select Additional Disp. Area.
The following display content can be selected:
R
Dynamic
Multimedia system
275
R
Navigation Map
R
Consumption
R
Time and Date
Time and date
Setting the time and date automatically
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
#
Deactivate ª Manual Time Adjustment.
The time and date are set automatically for
the selected time zone and summer time
option.
%
The correct time is required for the following
functions:
R
Route guidance with time-dependent
traffic guidance.
R
Calculation of expected time of arrival.
Setting the time zone
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
5
Time Zone:
The list of countries is displayed.
#
Select a country #.
Depending on the country, time zones are
displayed.
#
Select a time zone.
The time zone set is displayed after Time
Zone:.
Setting summer time
The Automatic Daylight Saving Time and Day-
light Saving Time options cannot be selected in
all countries.
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
Automatically
#
Switch Automatic Daylight Saving Time on
O or off ª.
Manually
#
Deactivate ª Automatic Daylight Saving
Time.
#
Select Daylight Saving Time.
#
Select On or Off.
Setting the time and date format
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
5
Set Format
#
Set the date and time format #.
Setting the time manually
Requirements:
R
The Manual Time Adjustment function is
switched on.
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
& Time and Date
5
Set Time
#
Set the hours.
#
Navigate to the right to set the minutes.
#
Set the minutes.
276
Multimedia system
#
Confirm changes when exiting the menu.
The date is set automatically via GPS.
Connectivity
Switching transmission of the vehicle posi‐
tion on/off
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
ö Connectivity
#
Select Transmit Vehicle Pos..
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Bluetooth
®
Information about Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
technology is a standard for short-
range wireless data transfer up to approximately
32.8 ft (10 m).
You can use Bluetooth
®
to connect your mobile
phone to the multimedia system and use the fol‐
lowing functions, for example:
R
Hands-free system with access to the follow‐
ing options:
-
contacts (/ page 321)
-
call lists (/ page 324)
-
text message (/ page 324)
R
Internet connection (/ page 338)
R
Listening to music via Bluetooth
®
audio
R
Transferring business cards (vCards) into the
vehicle
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue‐
tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
%
Internet connection via Bluetooth
®
is not
available in all countries.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
®
Requirements:
R
Deactivate Bluetooth
®
: Apple CarPlay™ is not
active.
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
ö Connectivity
#
Activate O or deactivate ª Bluetooth
®
.
If Android Auto is active, a prompt appears ask‐
ing whether Bluetooth
®
should be deactivated.
#
Select Yes.
Android Auto is closed and Bluetooth
®
is
deactivated.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi connection overview
You can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection with
a Wi-Fi network and to access the Internet or
other network devices.
The following connection options are available:
R
Wi-Fi connection
The Wi-Fi connection to a Wi-Fi-capable
device, e.g. the customer's mobile phone or
a tablet PC is established.
R
Multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot
Using this function, a tablet PC or notebook
can be connected, for example.
To establish a connection, you can use the fol‐
lowing methods:
R
WPS PIN
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made via a PIN.
Multimedia system
277
R
WPS PBC
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made by pressing a button (push button).
R
Security key
The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is
made via a security key.
Setting up Wi-Fi
Requirements:
R
The device to be connected supports one of
the three means of connection described
(/ page 277).
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
ö Connectivity
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi
#
Switch Wi-Fi on O or off ª.
If Wi-Fi is deactivated ª, communication via
Wi-Fi to all devices is interrupted. This also
means that a connection to the HERMES
communication module cannot be estab‐
lished. Then functions such as dynamic route
guidance with Live Traffic Information are not
available.
Connecting the multimedia system with a
device via Wi-Fi
This function is available if a HERMES communi‐
cation module is not installed.
The type of connection established must be
selected on the multimedia system and on the
device to be connected.
%
The connection procedure may differ
depending on the device. Follow the instruc‐
tions that are shown in the display. Further
information (see the manufacturer's operat‐
ing instructions).
#
Select Internet Settings.
#
Select Search for Wi-Fi Networks.
Using a security key
#
Select a Wi-Fi network in the list.
#
Have the security key displayed on the device
to be connected (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions).
#
Enter this security key on the multimedia sys‐
tem.
#
Confirm the entry with ¡.
%
All devices support a security key as a
means of connection.
Using a WPS PIN
#
Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.
#
Select ¥ Connect via WPS PIN Input.
The multimedia system generates an eight-
digit PIN.
#
Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.
#
Confirm the entry.
Using a button
%
This function is only available in a Wi-Fi fre‐
quency of 2.4 GHz.
#
Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list.
#
Select ¥ Connect via WPS PBC.
#
Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options
on the device to be connected.
#
Press the WPS button on the device to be
connected.
#
Select Continue in the multimedia system.
278
Multimedia system
Device has already been connected:
#
To automatically connect: highlight a Wi-Fi
network in the list.
#
Activate ¥ Connect AutomaticallyO.
#
To connect: highlight a Wi-Fi network in the
list.
#
Select ¥ Connect.
The connection is established again. These
functions are possible when the device has
already been connected to the Wi-Fi network.
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
Requirements:
R
For connection by pressing a button: this
function is only available in a Wi-Fi frequency
of 2.4 GHz.
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
ö Connectivity
Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-
Fi hotspot
The type of connection established depends on
the device to be connected. The function must
be supported by the multimedia system and by
the device to be connected. The type of connec‐
tion established must be selected on the multi‐
media system and on the device to be connec‐
ted.
#
Select Set Up Hotspot.
#
Highlight Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
Generating a WPS PIN
#
Select ¥ Connect via WPS PIN Genera-
tion.
#
Enter the PIN shown in the media display on
the device to be connected and confirm.
Connecting using a WPS PIN
#
Select ¥ Connect via WPS PIN Input.
#
Select Enter WPS PIN.
#
Enter the PIN that is shown on the external
device's display on the multimedia system.
#
Select Continue.
Connecting using a button
#
Select ¥ Connect via WPS PBC.
#
Press the WPS button on the device to be
connected or select Connect.
#
Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Connecting using a security key
#
Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
A security key is displayed.
#
Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the
SSID MB Hotspot XXXXX.
#
Enter the security key which is shown in the
media display on the device to be connected.
#
Confirm the entry.
Connecting using NFC
#
Select Connection via NFC.
#
Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
#
Bring the mobile device into the NFC area of
the vehicle (/ page 319).
#
Select Done.
The mobile device is now connected to the
multimedia system hotspot via NFC.
Multimedia system
279
Generating a new security key:
#
Select Set Up Hotspot.
#
Select Generate Security Key.
A connection will be established with the
newly created security key.
#
To save a security key: select Save.
When a new security key is saved, all existing
Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If
the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab‐
lished, the new security key must be entered.
Managing COMAND Touch devices
Requirements:
R
The COMAND Touch app is installed on the
external device (e.g. tablet or smartphone).
R
Wi-Fi is activated (/ page 278) and the mul‐
timedia system is configured as a Wi-Fi hot‐
spot (/ page 279).
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
COMAND Touch
Connecting and authorizing a new device
#
Select Authorize a New Device.
#
Select Connect New Device.
#
Enter the security key in the external device.
The Please start COMAND Touch on your
device and follow the instructions. message
appears.
#
Select Continue.
#
Accept the connection request from the new
device.
#
Enter the PIN shown on the external device.
The device is authorized.
Authorizing a connected device
#
Select Authorize a New Device.
The devices already connected are displayed.
#
Select Continue Using Connected Devices.
The Please start COMAND Touch on your
device and follow the instructions. message
appears.
#
Select Continue.
#
The connection request from the device
Accept.
#
Enter the PIN shown on the external device.
The device is authorized.
De-authorizing the device
#
Select an authorized device from the list.
A prompt will appear asking whether you
would like to de-authorize the selected
device.
#
Select Yes.
The device is de-authorized.
Activating/deactivating child safety lock
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
Parental Control
Locking an external device
#
Select an external device.
#
Select Lock.
The device connected via the COMAND
Touch app is locked O or unlocked ª.
280
Multimedia system
System language
Notes on the system language
This function allows you to determine the lan‐
guage for the menu displays and the navigation
announcements. The selected language affects
the characters available for entry. The navigation
announcements are not available in all lan‐
guages. If a language is not available, the naviga‐
tion announcements will be in English.
Setting the system language
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
Language
#
Set the language.
%
If you are using Arabic map data, the text
information can also be shown in Arabic on
the navigation map. To do so, select  as
the language from the language list. Naviga‐
tion announcements are then also made in
Arabic.
Setting the distance unit
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
% Units
#
Select km or mi.
#
In the multifunction display of the Instrument
Display, switch the Additional Speedometer
display on O.
Data import and export
Data import/export function
The following functions are possible:
R
Transferring data from one system or vehicle
to another system or vehicle.
R
Creating a backup copy of your personal data
and loading it again.
R
Protecting your personal data against unwan‐
ted export with PIN protection.
%
Please note that the NTFS file system is not
supported. The FAT32 file system is recom‐
mended.
Importing/exporting data
*
NOTE Loss of data due to premature
removal
#
Do not remove the data storage
medium when data is being exported.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of
data.
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is stationary.
R
The ignition is switched on or the vehicle has
been started.
R
The SD card is inserted (/ page 345) or the
USB device is connected (/ page 347).
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
System Backup
#
Select Import Data or Export Data.
Importing
#
Select a data storage medium.
A prompt appears asking whether you really
wish to overwrite the current data. If data
Multimedia system
281
originates from another vehicle, this is recog‐
nized during data reading.
The multimedia system is restarted once the
data has been imported.
%
Current vehicle settings can be edited after
the import.
Exporting
If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques‐
ted.
#
Enter the four-digit PIN.
#
Select a data storage medium.
The data is exported. The data export may
take several minutes.
Activating/deactivating PIN protection
Requirements
To unlock the PIN:
R
There is an Internet connection.
R
A Mercedes me account exists at http://
www.mercedes.me.
R
The Personalization service is active
(/ page 283).
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
PIN Protection
Setting the PIN
#
Select Set PIN.
#
Enter a four-digit PIN.
#
Enter the four-digit PIN again.
If both PINs match, PIN protection is active.
Changing the PIN
#
Select Change Settings.
#
Enter the current PIN.
#
Select Change PIN.
#
Set a new PIN.
Activating PIN protection for data export
#
Select Change Settings.
Confirm with the PIN.
#
Select Protect Data Export.
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Unblocking the PIN
If the PIN has been entered incorrectly three
times, the PIN will be blocked. You can have a
single-use password sent to you via the
Mercedes me connect online portal to reset the
PIN protection.
#
Select Unblock PIN.
#
Enter the single-use password.
PIN protection is reset, and you can set a
new PIN.
%
The availability of this function is country
dependent and may not be available in your
country.
Alternatively, you can have PIN protection
reset at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter.
User profile
Setting a user profile
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
g Personalization
Displaying a user profile when starting
If this function is active, a prompt appears when
starting the system asking which user profile to
use.
282
Multimedia system
#
Select Display Profile Selection after Start.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Selecting a user profile
#
Select Guest Profile or individual profile #.
%
Some settings from the user profile are only
loaded when the vehicle is stationary or
when the ignition is switched on.
Automatic synchronization
Each time the ignition is switched off or on, the
individual user profiles are synchronized on the
multimedia system and on the server. This
ensures that the latest user profiles are availa‐
ble.
#
Select Automatic Synchronization.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
%
For more information about importing/
exporting user profiles (/ page 283).
Creating a user profile
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
g Personalization
5
Create Profile
#
Enter a name.
#
Select a.
The following information is saved in the user
profile, for example:
R
System settings
R
Settings in the TV tuner's channel list
R
Navigation and traffic information
The settings differ depending on the vehicle
equipment.
Importing/exporting a user profile
Requirements:
R
There is an Internet connection .
R
A Mercedes me account exists at http://
www.mercedes.me.
R
The Personalization service is active.
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
g Personalization
5
Manual Export/Import
This function is not available in all countries.
Only individual profiles can be imported or
exported.
The individual profiles are always collectively
imported or exported.
#
To import: select Import Profiles from
Server.
The The profile data import overwrites all
existing profile data. Do you want to con-
tinue? message appears.
#
Select Yes.
User profiles are imported.
#
To export: select Export Profiles to the
Server.
User profiles are exported.
%
Certain settings, such as address book
entries or previous destinations from the
navigation system, are not exported.
Multimedia system
283
Setting user profile options
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
g Personalization
#
Highlight a profile.
#
Select ¥ options.
The following options are available:
R
Rename
R
Delete
R
Reset
%
The guest profile cannot be deleted or
renamed.
Software update
Information on software updates
The multimedia system provides a message
when an update is available.
Depending on the source, you can perform vari‐
ous updates:
Software update
Source of the
update
Update type
Updates via mobile
phone
Navigation map, sys‐
tem updates, Digital
Operator's Manual
Updates via an exter‐
nal storage medium,
e.g. a USB flash drive
Navigation maps
%
Updates via mobile phone require an active
Internet connection for the vehicle. This is
not available in all countries. For further
information on connecting to the Internet,
see (/ page 338).
Advantages of updating software
Software updates ensure your vehicle's technol‐
ogy is up-to-date.
In order to constantly improve the quality of our
services you will receive future updates for your
multimedia system, the Mercedes me connect
services and your vehicle's communication mod‐
ule. These will conveniently be sent to you via
the mobile phone connection in your vehicle
and, as an option, installed automatically. You
can monitor the status of your updates on the
Mercedes me portal and find information about
potential innovations.
Your advantages at a glance:
R
Conveniently receive software updates via
the mobile phone network
R
Improves the quality and availability of
Mercedes me connect services
R
Keeps your multimedia system and communi‐
cation module up-to-date
Further information about software updates can
be found at http://me.mercedes-benz.com
Performing a software update
Requirements:
R
There is an Internet connection
(/ page 338).
R
For automatic updates: your vehicle has a
permanently installed communication mod‐
ule.
284
Multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
Software Update
Automatic update
#
Switch Automatic Online Update on O.
Updates are performed.
The current status of the updates is dis‐
played.
Manual update
#
Deactivate ª Automatic Online Update.
#
Select an update from the list and start the
update.
Activating the software update
#
Restart the system.
Function of important system updates
Important system updates may be necessary for
the security of your multimedia system's data.
Please install these updates, otherwise the
security of your multimedia system cannot be
ensured.
%
If automatic software updates are activated,
the system updates will be downloaded auto‐
matically (/ page 284).
As soon as an update is available for download,
a corresponding message appears on the media
display.
You have the following selection options:
R
Download
The update will be downloaded in the back‐
ground.
R
Details
Information about the pending system
update is displayed.
R
Later
The update can be downloaded manually at a
later time (/ page 284).
If the download is completed and the update is
ready for installation, you will be informed of this
after the next ignition cycle, for example.
%
Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location
before starting the installation.
Requirements for the installation:
R
The ignition is switched on.
R
The engine is not running.
R
Notes and warnings have been read and
accepted.
R
The parking brake is applied.
If all requirements are met, the update will be
installed. The multimedia system cannot be
operated while the update is being installed and
vehicle functions are restricted.
If errors should occur during the installation, the
multimedia system automatically attempts to
restore the previous version. If restoration of the
previous version is not possible, a symbol
appears on the multimedia system display.
Please consult a qualified specialist workshop to
resolve the problem.
Multimedia system
285
Reset function
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
Reset
Personal data is deleted, for example:
R
Station presets
R
Connected mobile phones
#
Select Yes.
If PIN protection is activated, a prompt appears
asking if you also wish to restore this to the fac‐
tory settings during a reset.
#
Select Yes.
#
Enter the current PIN.
The PIN is reset.
or
#
Select No.
The current PIN stays the same after reset‐
ting.
%
If you have forgotten your PIN, an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center can deactivate the
PIN protection for you.
A prompt appears again asking whether you
really wish to reset.
#
Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory
settings.
286
Multimedia system
Fit & Healthy
ENERGIZING COMFORT
Overview of the ENERGIZING COMFORT program
Program overview
ProgramFunction
Refresh
Can make targeted changes to the interior climate to refresh vehicle occupants. Cooling airflow and ioniza‐
tion purify the air. The vehicle interior is illuminated with cool colors and the seats are ventilated.
Warmth
Can increase the comfort level of the vehicle occupants. The vehicle's panel, seat and steering wheel heat‐
ing produce a cozy warmth. The air is purified using ionization and a pleasant fragrance is released. The
vehicle interior is illuminated with warm lighting.
Vitality
Can counteract diminishing attentiveness in monotonous driving situations. Fast-paced music and a vitaliz‐
ing massage provide invigorating stimulation for the vehicle occupants. The air is purified using ionization
and a pleasant fragrance is released. The vehicle interior is illuminated in a stimulating hue and the seat is
ventilated.
Pleasure
Can promote a positive mood in the vehicle occupants as well as mental and physical regeneration. Moder‐
ately fast music is played and a massage program is activated. The air is purified using ionization and a
pleasant fragrance is released. The vehicle interior is illuminated with amicable lighting.
Multimedia system
287
ProgramFunction
Well being
Can aid the physical and mental relaxation of vehicle occupants. A back massage combined with local
warmth provide relaxation. The air is purified using ionization and a pleasant fragrance is released. The
audio player plays selections of calming music and the vehicle interior is illuminated with pleasant lighting.
Training
Can counteract the onset of muscle tension, limbs falling asleep or stress with targeted relaxation or stim‐
ulation exercises. The exercises are demonstrated in short videos. The air is purified using ionization and a
pleasant fragrance is released. The vehicle interior is illuminated with lighting appropriate to the exercise.
%
Please note that the available program and
the associated functions depend on your
vehicle equipment. Depending on your
equipment, fewer functions may be availa‐
ble.
Starting the ENERGIZING Comfort program
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched on.
%
ENERGIZING Comfort is available approx‐
imately five minutes after starting the multi‐
media system.
Multimedia system:
4
Vehicle
5
ENERGIZING Comfort
Selecting a seat
#
Select Seat Selection.
#
Select the desired seat or All Seats O.
Starting a program
#
Select Refresh, Warmth, Vitality, Enjoyment
or Well-being.
The selected program will run for ten minutes.
Configuring a program
#
Call up further options Ü for the desired
program.
#
Switch the functions included in the program
on O or off ª.
Starting training
#
Select Training.
#
Select Muscle Relaxation, Muscle Stimula-
tion or Balance.
The selected training video starts and is dis‐
played in the media display.
#
Select Full Screen: Video.
The training video is displayed in full screen.
288
Multimedia system
%
For more information on pausing or skipping
through videos, see (/ page 348).
If, during an active program, a function require‐
ment is no longer met, a corresponding message
appears. The active program is canceled.
Navigation
Switching navigation on
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Alternatively: press the ß button.
The map appears and shows current vehicle
position 1.
%
If a climate control setting is changed, a cli‐
mate bar appears briefly.
Showing/hiding the navigation menu
Requirements:
R
The map displays the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Multimedia system
289
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
To show: swipe left on the touchpad or the
Touch Control.
or
#
Slide the controller to the left.
#
To hide: swipe right on the touchpad or the
Touch Control.
or
#
Slide the controller to the right.
%
To show or hide lower menu levels, swipe or
slide to the left or right as many times as
necessary.
Destination entry
Entering a POI or address
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Requirements:
R
For the online search: Mercedes me con‐
nect is available.
R
You have a user account for the Mercedes
me portal.
R
The service is available.
R
The service has been activated at an author‐
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes.me
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Show the navigation menu.
#
Select ª Enter Destination .
290
Multimedia system
The state or province in which the vehicle is
located is set 1.
There are two available methods of destination
entry:
R
Free search 2
R
Search step-by-step 3
Method 1: free search
#
Enter the POI or address in 2. The entries
can be made in any order.
During destination entry, suggestions are
made by the multimedia system. A selection
of destinations appears in a list.
Enter these address elements, for example:
R
City, street, house number
R
Street, city
R
ZIP code
R
POI name
R
POI category, e.g. Gas Station
R
City, POI name
#
To switch to handwriting recognition:
select v 5.
#
Write the character on the touchpad.
#
To switch to character selection: press the
% button.
or
#
Press the touchpad.
#
To delete an entry: select % 4 (if avail‐
able).
Use the following options:
R
Press briefly: deletes the last character
entered or the last suggestion adopted.
R
Press and hold: deletes the entire entry.
#
To set the language: select B 8.
#
Select the language.
%
This function is useful for countries in which
several character sets are supported. An
example is Russia, which uses Cyrillic and
Latin characters.
#
To call up the online search function:
select Online Search 6.
Once an Internet connection is established, a
list appears. It shows online destinations
related to the previous entry.
Online destinations are provided by the Inter‐
net service provider.
#
Select the online destination.
or
#
Enter the online destination or a 3 word
address in the input line.
%
Enter a 3 word address (/ page 295).
Online search is not available in all coun‐
tries.
#
To call up the list: press the % button.
or
Multimedia system
291
#
If the top line of the character bar is highligh‐
ted, navigate upwards.
#
Select the destination in the list.
#
To adopt a destination: select 7 Select
Destination .
If there are several listings for a destination,
a list appears.
#
Select the destination.
The destination address is shown.
Method 2: search step-by-step
#
Press % button.
or
#
If the top line of the character bar is highligh‐
ted, navigate upwards.
The character bar is hidden. City or ZIP is
highlighted. Additional entry fields, e.g. for
POI, are available.
#
Select City or ZIP.
The character bar appears.
#
Enter the city or the ZIP code.
During destination entry, suggestions are
made by the multimedia system. A selection
of destinations appears in a list.
The address entries can be made in any
order, for example:
R
City or ZIP, Street, House No.
Enter an intersecting street, if available.
R
Street, City or ZIP
R
POI, e.g. Gas Station, City or ZIP
%
During destination entry, use the following
functions:
R
Switch to handwriting recognition.
R
Switch to character selection.
R
Delete an entry.
An entry, e.g. POI, can be deleted with
£ in a step-by-step search. Navigate
to the left to do so.
R
Call up the online search function (if
available).
R
Call up a list.
The functions are described in the free
search.
#
To change the state/province: select the
state or the province.
#
Enter the state or the province. You only
need to enter the first character.
#
Select the state or the province in the list.
#
To change the country: select the country.
#
Enter the country. You only need to enter the
first character.
#
Select the country on the list.
#
To adopt a destination: select Select Desti-
nation.
If there are several listings for a destination,
a distance-orientated list appears.
#
Select the destination.
The destination address is shown.
Selecting previous destinations
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
#
Select Previous Destinations.
#
Select the destination.
The destination address is shown.
or
292
Multimedia system
#
If favourites have been saved already
(/ page 305), select From My Favorites.
#
Select the favourite.
The destination address is shown.
Selecting a POI
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
5
POIs
#
Select the category.
or
#
Select All Categories and the category.
If route guidance is not active: the search
begins in the vicinity of the current vehicle
position. The list is sorted by distance in
ascending order.
The POIs show the following information:
R
name of POI
R
linear distance to the POI
R
the direction of the linear distance to the
POI (arrow) is displayed when searching
for the vehicle's current position
#
Select the POI.
#
Route guidance is active: select the search
position prior to choosing a POI (see exam‐
ple).
#
If intermediate destinations are set, these
can also be selected as the search position
after selecting Near Destination.
Filtering displays for POIs
#
Enter the search term in ª Search:.
The results list shows relevant POIs.
#
Select ¡.
The first POI in the list is highlighted.
#
Select the POI.
Example: setting the search position for the
parking category during active route guid‐
ance
#
Select In the Vicinity, Near Destination or
Along the Route.
The list shows the located POIs or opens an
overview of the route destination after
selecting Near Destination.
#
Select the POI.
#
Select Near Destination: select the inter‐
mediate destination or the destination.
Starting an automatic gas station search
Requirements:
R
The automatic gas station search is activated
O (/ page 299).
Driving situation
Route guidance is active. The fuel level in the
fuel tank reaches the reserve fuel level.
The Reserve Fuel Do you want to start a search
for surrounding gas stations? message is shown.
#
Select Yes.
The automatic gas station search begins. The
available gas stations along the route or in
the vicinity of the vehicle's current position
are displayed.
#
Select the gas station.
The address of the gas station is displayed.
#
If route guidance is not active, select Start
Route Guidance.
The selected gas station is set as the desti‐
nation. Route guidance begins.
or
Multimedia system
293
#
If route guidance is active, select Start New
Route Guidance or Set as Next Way Point.
Start New Route Guidance: the selected gas
station is set as a new destination. The previ‐
ous destinations and intermediate destina‐
tions are deleted. Route guidance to the gas
station begins.
Set as Next Way Point: the selected gas sta‐
tion is set as the next intermediate destina‐
tion. Route guidance begins.
#
If there are already four intermediate des‐
tinations: select Yes in the prompt.
The selected gas station is entered into posi‐
tion 1 of the intermediate destinations menu.
Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route
guidance begins.
Entering an intermediate destination
Requirements:
R
A destination is entered.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Way Points and Info
#
Select Search for Way Point.
#
Enter the intermediate destination as a POI
or address (/ page 290).
#
Select the intermediate destination.
#
Select Set as Destination.
or
#
Select an intermediate destination using
ª Enter Destination during route guid‐
ance.
#
Select Set as Next Way Point after entering
the destination.
Editing intermediate destinations
Requirements:
R
The destination and at least one intermediate
destination have been entered.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Way Points and Info
#
To call up the map: highlight the destination
or the intermediate destination.
#
Select ¥ Map .
#
Move the map (/ page 309).
#
Select destination on the map (/ page 296).
#
To change the order of destinations: high‐
light the destination or the intermediate des‐
tination.
#
Select ¥ Move .
#
Move the intermediate destination to the
desired position.
#
Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
#
To delete a destination: highlight the desti‐
nation or the intermediate destination.
#
Select ¥ Delete.
Calculating a route with intermediate desti‐
nations
Requirements:
R
The destination and at least one intermediate
destination have been entered.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Way Points and Info
#
Select Start New Route Guidance.
The route is calculated with the set inter‐
mediate destinations.
294
Multimedia system
Selecting a contact for destination entry
Requirements:
R
A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
dia system (/ page 317).
R
Contacts have been downloaded
(/ page 322).
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
5
Contacts
#
Select the contact.
The contact details are displayed.
#
Select the address.
The Please Wait... message appears.
The search is carried out first online and then
in the multimedia system database.
#
Select the destination.
Filtering displays for contacts
#
Enter a name or telephone number, for exam‐
ple, into the search field.
#
Select ¡.
The first contact in the list is highlighted.
#
Select the contact.
#
Select the address.
Entering geo-coordinates
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
5
Geo-coordinates
#
Enter geo-coordinates as latitude and longi‐
tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and
seconds.
The map shows the position.
#
Confirm the entry.
#
To calculate a route: select Start Route
Guidance.
#
If a route has already been created, select
Start New Route Guidance or Set as Way
Point.
Entering the destination as a 3 word address
Requirements:
R
Searching for a destination using 3 word
addresses is possible in the online search
(/ page 290).
R
There is an Internet connection.
%
Searching for a destination using 3 word
addresses is not possible in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
ª Enter Destination
#
Select Online Search.
#
Enter the destination address as a 3 word
address. Separate each of the words with a
full stop.
The search results are displayed.
#
Select the destination in the list.
The destination address is shown. The route
can be calculated.
%
3 word addresses from what3words are an
alternative addressing system for multilin‐
gual georeferencing of global locations with
a resolution of three meters. Using this grid,
locations on the Earth's surface are included
which do not have a building address such
as street and house number, for example.
Multimedia system
295
The Empire State Building has this language
dependent 3 word address:
R
English: parade.help.bleat
R
French: commun.verbe.bisquer
R
Spanish: suertes.diga.pesca
3 word addresses are unique, easy to
remember and suffice for most routine appli‐
cations.
You can convert addresses to 3 word
addresses and back again:
R
at the website http://what3words.com
R
in the what3words apps
Selecting a destination on the map
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
#
Select Map Menu.
or
#
If the map is displayed in full screen mode,
press the central control element.
The map menu appears.
#
Select "move map" in map menu 2
(/ page 308).
#
Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control
or touchpad.
or
#
Slide the controller in any direction.
The map moves in the corresponding direc‐
tion under the crosshair. The more you move
your finger away from the starting position
on the touchpad, the faster the map moves.
#
Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
If several destinations are located around the
crosshair, a list shows the available POIs and
roads.
If a destination is located exactly on the
crosshair, the destination address is dis‐
played.
#
Select the destination in the list.
The destination address is shown.
Setting the map orientation to 2D or 3D
#
Highlight Map Orientation: 2D/3D.
#
Press the Touch Control, the touchpad or the
controller.
The map will be displayed in the selected
map orientation.
Showing traffic messages in the vicinity of
the map
#
Select Traffic Messages for the Vicinity.
The map appears.
#
Swipe left or right on the touchpad.
or
#
Slide the controller to the left or right.
The previous or next traffic incident is high‐
lighted on the map. Information on the traffic
incident is displayed.
%
Traffic reports are not available in all coun‐
tries.
Showing POIs in the vicinity of the map
#
Select POIs in the Vicinity.
#
Swipe left or right on the touchpad.
or
296
Multimedia system
#
Slide the controller to the left or right.
The previous or next POI is highlighted on the
map. The name or the address is shown.
#
To filter the display by POI category:
swipe down on the Touch Control or the
touchpad.
or
#
Slide the controller down.
#
Select the POI category.
%
User Defined allows personal POI symbols to
be selected (/ page 310).
Route
Calculating a route
Requirements:
R
The destination has been entered.
R
The destination address is shown.
#
If route guidance is not active, select Start
Route Guidance.
The route to the destination is calculated.
The map shows the route. Route guidance
then begins.
or
#
If route guidance is active, select Start New
Route Guidance or Set as Next Way Point.
Start New Route Guidance: the selected des‐
tination address is set as a new destination.
The previous destinations and intermediate
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to
the new destination begins.
Set as Next Way Point: the selected destina‐
tion address is set as the next intermediate
destination. Route guidance begins.
Taking alternative routes into consideration
#
Select an alternative route (/ page 299).
Other menu functions
#
To save the destination: select ¥ Store
in "Previous Destinations".
#
To display on the map: select ¥ Map.
#
To call a telephone number: select
¥ Call (if available).
#
To call up an Internet address: select
¥ www (if available).
Selecting a route type
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
#
Select Route Settings.
#
Select the route type.
If route guidance is active, the new route is
calculated with the new route type.
If route guidance is not active, the next route
is calculated with the new route type.
You can choose from the following route types:
R
Eco Route
An economical route is calculated. The jour‐
ney time may be somewhat longer than for
quicker routes.
The symbol for the current vehicle position is
displayed in green.
R
Fast Route
A route with a quick journey time is calcula‐
ted.
R
Short Route
A route with a short driving distance is calcu‐
lated.
Multimedia system
297
Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance can be
switched on O or off ª for these route types.
If Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance is switched
on, Ask in the Event of Traffic Jam Avoidance can
be selected.
The Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance and Ask in
the Event of Traffic Jam Avoidance settings are
not available in every country.
The settings enable the following:
R
Automatic Traffic Jam Avoidance
The route is calculated with the currently set
route type.
Traffic reports via Live Traffic Information are
taken into account.
Live Traffic Information is not available in all
countries.
R
Ask in the Event of Traffic Jam Avoidance
A prompt appears when a new route is detec‐
ted with a shorter journey time based on traf‐
fic reports. You can continue to use the cur‐
rent route or use the dynamic route instead.
Selecting route options
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
5
Avoid Options
Avoiding areas
#
Select Areas (/ page 311).
Avoiding highways, ferries, motorail trains,
tunnels, unpaved roads
#
Select O or deselect ª avoid option.
Using toll roads
#
Select Use Toll Roads.
#
Select Cash or Electronic Billing or Off.
The route takes into account roads that
require the payment of a usage fee (toll).
If Off is selected, toll roads are not taken into
account.
The selected route options cannot always be
implemented. Therefore, a route may include a
ferry, for instance, even though the avoid Ferries
option is enabled. A message appears and you
will hear a corresponding message.
Using carpool lanes
#
Select Number of Occupants in the Vehicle.
#
Select number.
When using carpool lanes, observe the appli‐
cable legal requirements as well as any con‐
ditions pertaining to when and where such
lanes may be used. Carpool lanes may only
be used if certain conditions are met.
These route options are not available in every
country.
Selecting notifications
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Announcements
#
Switch an announcement on O or off ª.
You can choose from the following announce‐
ments:
R
Announce Traffic Warnings
This function is not available in all countries.
R
Announce Street Names
298
Multimedia system
The multimedia system announces the
names of the roads that will follow the
upcoming change of direction.
This function is not available in all countries
and languages.
Displaying destination information
Requirements:
R
A destination is entered.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Select Way Points and Info.
The following information is displayed:
R
Intermediate destinations and destination
The route can also include up to four
intermediate destinations.
R
Name, address
R
Remaining driving distance
R
Time of arrival
Selecting an alternative route
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
#
Select Alternative Route.
The routes are displayed in accordance with
the setting made in the route settings.
The currently selected route is shown with a
dark blue line.
#
Select the alternative route.
Switching the automatic gas station search
on/off
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
#
Switch Reserve Fuel on O or off ª.
Switched on O: when the fuel reserve level
is reached, a prompt appears asking whether
you want to start searching for gas stations.
Using automatic gas station search
Requirements:
The automatic gas station search is activated O
(/ page 299).
The prompt Reserve Fuel Do you want to start a
search for surrounding gas stations? appears.
#
Select Yes.
The automatic gas station search begins. The
available gas stations along the route or in
the vicinity are displayed.
#
Select the gas station.
#
When there is no route, the gas station is set
as the destination.
or
#
When there is a route, the gas station is set
as the next intermediate destination.
Starting the automatic service station
search
Requirements:
R
ATTENTION ASSIST and the Suggest Rest
Area function are activated (/ page 229).
Driving situation
The ATTENTION ASSIST Do you want to search
for a rest area? message is shown.
Multimedia system
299
#
Select Yes.
The service station search starts. The availa‐
ble service stations along the route or in the
vicinity of the vehicle's current position are
displayed.
#
Select the service station.
The service station address is displayed.
#
If route guidance is not active, select Start
Route Guidance.
The selected service station is set as a desti‐
nation. Route guidance begins.
or
#
If route guidance is active, select Start New
Route Guidance or Set as Next Way Point.
Start New Route Guidance: the selected
service station is set as a new destination.
The previous destination and all intermediate
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to
the service station begins.
Set as Next Way Point: the selected service
station is set as the next intermediate desti‐
nation. Route guidance begins.
Route guidance
Notes on route guidance
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating integrated communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.
This could also cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Route guidance begins once a route has been
calculated.
The road and traffic rules and regulations always
have priority over multimedia system driving
instructions.
The following driving instructions can be used:
R
Navigation announcements
R
Route guidance displays
R
Lane recommendations
If you do not follow the driving instructions or if
you leave the calculated route, a new route is
calculated automatically.
Driving instructions may differ from the actual
road and traffic conditions if:
R
The route is diverted
R
The direction of a one-way street has been
changed
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey as well as the prevailing traffic condi‐
tions.
The route may differ from the ideal route due to
the following:
R
Roadworks
300
Multimedia system
R
Incomplete digital map data
Notes on GPS reception
The correct function of the navigation system
depends amongst other things on GPS recep‐
tion. In certain situations GPS reception can be
impaired, defective or even not possible, e.g. in
tunnels or in parking garages.
Changing direction overview
There are three phases when changing direction:
R
Preparation phase
If there is enough time between the changes
of direction, the multimedia system prepares
you for the upcoming change of direction. A
navigation announcement is issued, e.g.
"Prepare to turn right".
The map appears in full-screen mode.
R
Announcement phase
The multimedia system announces the
upcoming change of direction, e.g. by
announcing "Turn right in 300 ft (100 m)".
The display is split into two parts. The map is
displayed on the left; on the right, there is a
detailed image of the intersection or a 3D
image of the upcoming change of direction.
R
Change-of-direction phase
The multimedia system announces the immi‐
nent change of direction, e.g. by announcing
"Now turn right".
The display is split into two parts.
The vehicle has successfully changed direc‐
tion when the light-color bar on the right
drops down to 0 feet (0 m) and the current
vehicle position symbol has reached the
highlighted change-of-direction point.
When the change of direction is complete,
the map appears in full-screen mode.
%
Changes of direction are also shown in the
Instrument Display.
Lane recommendations overview
This display appears for multi-lane roads.
If the digital map contains the relevant data, the
multimedia system can display lane recommen‐
dations for the next two changes of direction.
Multimedia system
301
1
Recommended lane
2
Possible lane
3
Lanes not recommended
The following lanes are displayed:
R
Recommended lane 1
In this lane, you will be able to complete both
the next change of direction and the one
after that.
R
Possible lane 2
In this lane, you will only be able to complete
the next change of direction.
R
Lane not recommended 3
In this lane, you will not be able to complete
the next change of direction without chang‐
ing lane.
During the change of direction, new lanes may
be added.
%
Lane recommendations can also be dis‐
played in the Instrument Display and in the
Head-up Display.
Overview of destination reached
Once the destination is reached, you will see the
Í checkered flag. Route guidance is finished.
When an intermediate destination has been
reached, you will see the intermediate destina‐
tion flag with the number of your Î inter‐
mediate destination. After this, route guidance is
continued.
Switching navigation announcements on/off
Requirements:
R
Route guidance is active.
#
To switch off: press the volume control on
the multifunction steering wheel during a
navigation announcement (/ page 272).
or
#
Press the volume control on the center con‐
sole during a navigation announcement
(/ page 272).
The Voice Guidance has been deactivated.
message appears.
or
#
Show the navigation menu (/ page 289).
#
Select ! Voice Guidance .
The symbol changes to #.
#
To activate: select # Voice Guidance .
The current navigation announcement is
played.
%
In the following situations, navigation
announcements are switched on automati‐
cally:
R
A new route guidance is started.
R
The route is recalculated.
302
Multimedia system
%
You can add and call up this function as a
favorite under Voice Guidance On/Off.
Switching navigation announcements on/off
during a phone call
#
Select System.
#
Select õ Audio.
#
Select Navigation and Traffic Announce-
ments.
#
Switch Voice Guidance During Call on O or
off ª.
Adjusting the volume of navigation
announcements
Requirements:
R
Route guidance is active.
#
On the multifunction steering wheel or
on the multimedia system: turn the volume
control on the multifunction steering wheel
during a navigation announcement.
or
#
Turn the volume control on the center con‐
sole during a navigation announcement
(/ page 272).
%
In the following situations, the volume is
raised to the maximum volume or lowered to
the minimum volume:
R
A new route guidance is started.
R
The route is recalculated.
%
The minimum volume can be individually set
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
#
Via system settings: select System.
#
Select õ Audio.
#
Select Navigation and Traffic Announce-
ments.
#
Select Voice Guidance Volume.
#
Set the volume.
#
To switch audio fadeout on/off during
navigation announcements: select System.
#
Select õ Audio.
#
Select Navigation and Traffic Announce-
ments.
#
Switch Audio Fadeout During Voice Guidance
on O or off ª.
Repeating navigation announcements
Requirements:
R
A route has already been created.
R
Route guidance is active.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Select ! Voice Guidance .
#
Select # Voice Guidance .
The current navigation announcement is
repeated.
%
You can add and call up this function as a
favorite under Repeat Voice Guidance.
Canceling route guidance
Requirements:
R
A route has already been created.
R
Route guidance is active.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
Select % Cancel Route Guidance.
Multimedia system
303
Overview of route guidance to an off-road
destination
An off-road destination is within the digital map.
The map contains no roads that lead to the des‐
tination.
You can enter geo-coordinates or a three word
address for off-road destinations on the map.
Route guidance guides you for as long as possi‐
ble with navigation announcements and displays
on roads that are known to the multimedia sys‐
tem.
Shortly before you reach the last known position
on the map, you will hear the "Please follow the
direction arrow" announcement. The display
shows a direction arrow and the linear distance
to the destination.
Overview of route guidance from an off-road
location to a destination
Off-road position: the current vehicle position is
located within the digital map on roads that are
not available.
When route guidance begins the following dis‐
plays appear:
R
The Road Not Mapped message is shown.
R
A direction arrow showing the linear direc‐
tion to the POI.
When the vehicle is back on a road known to the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as
normal.
Overview of off-road status during route
guidance
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif‐
ferences between the data on the digital map
and the actual course of the road. In such cases,
the multimedia system will temporarily be
unable to locate the vehicle's current position on
the digital map. The vehicle is off-road.
When the vehicle is off-road, the following dis‐
plays are shown:
R
the Road Not Mapped message
R
a direction arrow showing the linear direction
to the POI
When the vehicle is back on a road known to the
multimedia system, route guidance continues as
normal.
Destination
Saving the current vehicle position
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
If the map is displayed in full screen mode,
press the central control element.
The map menu appears.
#
Select 1 on the map menu (/ page 308).
The current vehicle position is saved to the
"Previous destinations" memory.
Storing a map position
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
The map is in full-screen mode.
#
Press the Touch Control, the controller or the
touchpad.
#
Select "move map" in map menu 2
(/ page 308).
#
Select a position on the map.
If multiple entries are available for a map
position, a list appears.
#
Highlight an entry.
304
Multimedia system
#
Select ¥ Store in "Previous Destina-
tions" .
The map position is saved to the "Previous
destinations" memory.
Editing the previous destinations
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
¬ Previous and Other Destinations
5
Previous Destinations
#
Highlight one of the previous destinations.
#
To save as a favorite: select ¥ Save My
Favorite .
The favorites are displayed.
#
Move the favorite to the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
#
To save as "Home" address: select ¥
Save as "Home" .
#
To save as "Work" address: select ¥
Save as "Work" .
#
To delete a single or all destinations:
select ¥ Delete or Delete All.
A prompt appears.
#
Select Yes.
#
To display destination information: select
¥ Details.
Using external destinations
External destinations can be received from the
following sources:
R
Mercedes-Benz Apps
R
Door-to-door navigation with Companion app
(USA)
%
Received destinations are saved in the previ‐
ous destinations.
A prompt appears on the media display.
#
A destination has been received without
picture information: select Yes.
#
If route guidance is not active, select Start
Route Guidance.
The route to the destination is calculated.
The map shows the route. Route guidance
then begins.
or
#
If route guidance is active, select Start New
Route Guidance or Set as Next Way Point.
Start New Route Guidance: the received des‐
tination address is set as a new destination.
The previous destinations and intermediate
destinations are deleted. Route guidance to
the new destination begins.
Set as Next Way Point: the received destina‐
tion address is set as the next intermediate
destination. Route guidance begins.
#
A destination has been received with pic‐
ture information: select Start Route Guid-
ance.
Route guidance starts.
Route guidance with current traffic reports
Traffic information overview
Traffic reports are received using Live Traffic
Information and are used for route guidance.
This service is unavailable in some countries.
Multimedia system
305
%
There may be differences between the traffic
reports received and the actual road and
traffic conditions.
Important information on Live Traffic Informa‐
tion:
R
Current traffic reports are received via the
Internet connection.
R
The traffic situation is updated at short, regu‐
lar intervals.
R
The status of the service subscription can be
displayed (/ page 306).
Information on the vehicle's position is regularly
sent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren‐
dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwarded
to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf‐
fic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are
sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor
for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the
quality of the traffic reports.
If you do not want to transmit the vehicle posi‐
tion, you have the following options:
R
You switch off the transmission of the vehicle
position (/ page 277).
R
You have the service deactivated at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Displaying subscription information
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic
Information.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
The subscription expiration date is automatically
displayed:
R
one month before the expiration date.
R
one week before the expiration date.
R
on the expiration date.
#
To display manually: select Live Traffic Sub-
scription Info.
Depending on the status, one of the following
messages appears:
R
the period of validity for the subscription
is displayed.
R
the subscription has expired.
%
The subscription can be extended:
R
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R
via an MB Info call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center
Displaying the traffic map
Requirements:
R
For Live Traffic Information: the vehicle is
equipped with a communication module fea‐
turing an activated, integrated SIM card.
R
When the vehicle is started, the communica‐
tion module automatically establishes an
Internet connection. Traffic information is
made available shortly afterwards.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Menu
#
Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full
screen mode, press the Touch Control, the
controller or the touchpad.
The map menu appears.
#
Activate O º.
306
Multimedia system
The traffic map shows the following information,
for example:
R
Traffic incidents, for example:
-
Roadworks
-
Road blocks
-
Warning messages
The symbols for traffic incidents are dis‐
played in color (on the route) or gray (off the
route).
R
Traffic flow information:
-
Traffic jam (red line)
-
Slow-moving traffic (orange line)
-
Heavy traffic (yellow line)
-
Free-flowing traffic (green line)
R
Display for traffic delays on the route lasting
at least one minute
R
Warning message symbols:
-
Symbol Ô
-
Additional road safety notes when
approaching a traffic incident, e.g. the
end of a traffic jam
If the vehicle approaches a danger area
on the route, a warning message is dis‐
played on the map. A warning message
may also be issued (/ page 308).
Displaying traffic incidents
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Content
#
Activate O Traffic Incidents.
Roadworks, road blocks, local area reports
(e.g. fog) and warning messages are dis‐
played.
Activating free flow and traffic display
#
Activate O Free Flowing Traffic and Traffic
Delays.
%
The traffic delay is displayed for the current
route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or
longer are taken into consideration.
Displaying details
#
Displays the traffic map (/ page 306).
#
Moves the map (/ page 309).
#
When a traffic report symbol is under the
crosshair, press on the central control ele‐
ment.
The traffic report details are displayed.
or
#
Press on the central control element.
#
Select Information on Traffic Reports.
The map shows the traffic report symbols in
the vicinity.
Traffic report information is displayed in the
status line:
R
Traffic report symbol
R
Reason for the traffic report, e.g. traffic
congestion
R
Warning message (highlighted in red)
#
To select a traffic report symbol: select
Next or Previous.
#
Press on the central control element.
The traffic report details are displayed.
Multimedia system
307
Issuing hazard warnings
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Announcements
#
Activate O Announce Traffic Warnings.
Warning messages are issued and tailbacks
which pose a risk are announced.
Map and compass
Map and compass overview
1
Saves the current vehicle position
2
Moves the map
3
Selects the map orientation and map view
4
Selects the function depending on the equip‐
ment:
• Sends a hazard warning via Car-to-X.
• Filters the display of POIs in the vicinity
according to POI category
5
Switches the display of personal POI sym‐
bols on the map on or off
6
Switches one of the following displays on or
off depending on the equipment:
• Weather information
• Satellite map
• Traffic incidents
7
Switches the traffic map display on or off
The map and satellite images are shown in globe
projection. This allows for a realistic map display
in all map scales. The map uses elevation model‐
ing.
Depending on the map data, important buildings
in many cities are depicted realistically on the
map in small map scales (e.g. 1/32 mi (20 m),
1/16 mi (50 m)). Other buildings are shown as
models.
%
You can set the unit of measurement of the
map scale (/ page 281).
308
Multimedia system
If online information is available, fuel prices and
the availability of parking spaces in parking
garage are displayed, for example.
%
Requirements:
R
Mercedes me connect is available.
R
You have a user account for the
Mercedes me portal.
R
The service has been activated at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes.me
%
The online information is not available in all
countries.
If Display in COMAND is activated in Traffic Sign
Assist (/ page 230), speed limits and overtak‐
ing restrictions are displayed on the map.
%
Company logos displayed on the map are
trademarks of the respective companies and
used solely for the purpose of indicating the
locations of these companies. The use of
such logos on the map does not indicate
approval of, support of or advertising by
these companies for the navigation system
itself.
Setting the map scale
Requirements:
R
The map is shown.
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
#
To zoom in: swipe down on the Touch Con‐
trol.
or
#
Turn the controller counter-clockwise.
or
#
Move two fingers apart on the touchpad.
#
To zoom out: swipe up on the Touch Control.
or
#
Turn the controller clockwise.
or
#
Move two fingers together on the touchpad.
%
You can set the unit of measurement of the
map scale (/ page 281).
Moving the map
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Menu
#
Alternatively, if the map is displayed in full
screen mode, press the central control ele‐
ment.
The map menu appears.
#
Select "Move map" in map menu 2
(/ page 308).
#
Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control
or touchpad.
or
#
Slide the controller in any direction.
The map moves in the corresponding direc‐
tion under the crosshair. The further you
move your finger away from the starting posi‐
tion on the touchpad, the faster the map
moves.
Multimedia system
309
Selecting the map orientation
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Menu
#
Alternatively, if the map is displayed in full
screen mode, press the central control ele‐
ment.
The map menu appears.
#
In map menu 3 , select N, 2D or
3D(/ page 308).
R
N: the 2D map view is displayed so that
north is always at the top.
R
2D: the 2D map view is aligned to the
direction of travel.
R
3D: the 3D map view is aligned to the
direction of travel.
Selecting POI symbols
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Content
POIs include gas stations and hotels which can
be displayed as symbols on the map, for exam‐
ple. Not all POIs are available everywhere.
#
Select POI Symbols.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Standard displays symbols of predefined cat‐
egories on the map.
User Defined allows you to personally select
the symbols for the available categories.
None switches the display off.
#
Select a setting.
#
User Defined: select categories.
The POI symbols of the selected categories
are displayed O or not displayed ª.
Selecting the display of text information in
the map
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Text Information
#
Select text information.
Current Street shows the street you are cur‐
rently driving on at the bottom of the display.
When the map is moved, the following infor‐
mation appears under the crosshair:
R
Street name
R
POI name
R
Area name
Geo-coordinates displays the following infor‐
mation:
R
Longitude and latitude
R
Elevation
The elevation shown may deviate from
the actual elevation.
R
Number of satellites from which a signal
can be received
When the map is moved, this information
does not appear.
Climate Control displays the current climate
control settings.
None switches the display off.
Displaying the next intersecting street
Requirements:
R
Route guidance is not active.
310
Multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
#
Activate O Next Intersecting Street.
The name of the next intersecting street will
be displayed at the upper edge of the display.
Displaying the map version
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
#
Select Map Version.
#
Select Details.
%
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Overview of avoiding an area
You can define areas along a route that you
would like to avoid.
The route can include an area that is to be avoi‐
ded in the following situations:
R
the destination is located in an area that is to
be avoided
R
if freeways are located within the area that is
to be avoided
Freeways are always taken into account for
the route.
R
there is no sensible alternative route
Avoiding a new area
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
5
Avoid Options
5
Areas
#
Select Avoid New Area.
#
To search for an area via the map: select
Using Map.
#
Move the map.
or
#
To search for an area using an address:
select Address Entry.
#
Enter the address.
#
Select Select Destination.
The map appears.
#
To display an area: press the Touch Control,
the touchpad or the controller.
A red rectangle appears. This designates the
area that should be avoided.
#
To change the size of the area: swipe up or
down on the Touch Control or the touchpad.
or
#
Slide the controller up or down.
The map scale is enlarged or reduced and
changes the size of the area.
#
To set the area: press the Touch Control,
the touchpad or the controller.
The area is entered into the list.
Changing an area
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
5
Avoid Options
5
Areas
#
Highlight an area in the list.
#
Select ¥ Edit.
Moving the area on the map
#
Swipe in any direction on the Touch Control
or touchpad.
or
#
Slide the controller in any direction.
Multimedia system
311
Changing the size of the area
#
To start: press the Touch Control, the touch‐
pad or the controller.
#
To change: swipe up or down on the Touch
Control or the touchpad.
or
#
Slide the controller up or down.
#
To stop: press the Touch Control, the touch‐
pad or the controller.
Taking the area for the route into account
#
Avoid O an area in the list.
If route guidance is active, a new route is cal‐
culated.
If there is no route yet, the setting is carried
over to the next route guidance.
Deleting one or all areas
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
5
Avoid Options
5
Areas
#
Highlight an area in the list.
#
Select ¥ Delete or ¥ Delete All.
#
Confirm the prompt with Yes.
One or all areas are deleted.
Map data update overview
Updating at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center
The digital maps generated by the map software
become outdated in the same way as conven‐
tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can
only be provided by the navigation system in
conjunction with the most up-to-date map data.
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You can have updates to the digital map imple‐
mented there.
%
Additional costs can be incurred in this con‐
nection.
Online map update
The online map update service from Mercedes
me connect can be used to update map data.
%
The online map update service is not availa‐
ble in all countries.
The following options are available for the
update:
R
The automatic map update updates map data
for one region.
For automatic map updates Automatic
Online Update must be activated in the sys‐
tem settings (/ page 284).
R
The manual map update updates map data
for several or all regions.
Further information on the online map update is
available at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or at https://www.mercedes.me.
Further information on updates: https://
manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/connectme/
en_GB/index.html.
Overview of map data
Your vehicle is supplied with map data at the fac‐
tory. Depending on the country, map data for
your region is either pre-installed or the map
data is supplied on a data storage medium.
If the map data on your vehicle has been instal‐
led at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, you
do not need to enter the activation code.
312
Multimedia system
For map data that you have purchased in the
form of a data storage medium, you must enter
the accompanying activation code.
%
If you save the map data on a data storage
medium with the online map update service,
no entry is required. The activation code is
stored on the data storage medium during
the downloading process.
Observe the following when entering the activa‐
tion code:
R
The activation code can be used for one vehi‐
cle
R
The activation code is not transferable
R
The activation code has six digits
In the event of the following problems, please
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
R
The multimedia system does not accept the
activation code
R
You have lost the activation code
Displaying the compass
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
À Route and Position
#
Select Compass.
The compass display shows the following
information:
R
the current direction of travel with bear‐
ing (360° format) and compass direction
R
longitude and latitude coordinates in
degrees, minutes and seconds
R
height (rounded)
R
number of GPS satellites from which a
signal can be received
Setting the map scale automatically
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
The map scale is set automatically depending on
your driving speed.
For journeys in cities with detailed city models, a
map view from the driver's perspective is used.
#
Switch Auto Zoom on O or off ª.
%
The automatically selected map scale can be
changed manually for a short time. The set‐
ting is reset automatically after a few sec‐
onds.
Displaying the satellite map
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Content
#
Switch Satellite Map on O or off ª.
or
#
If satellite map display 6 is available in the
map menu, switch it on O or off ª
(/ page 308).
Switched on O: satellite maps are displayed
in map scales of 2 mi (2 km) or less.
Switched off ª: satellite maps are not dis‐
played in map scales from 2 mi (2 km) to
10 mi (10 km).
%
Satellite maps for these map scales are not
available in all countries.
Displaying weather information
Requirements:
Multimedia system
313
R
Mercedes me connect is available.
R
You have a user account for the Mercedes
me portal.
R
The service is available.
R
The service has been activated at an author‐
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes.me
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Map Content
#
Activate Weather Information O.
or
#
If weather information display 6 is available
in the map menu, activate O(/ page 308)
it.
Current weather information is displayed on
the navigation map, e.g. temperature or
cloud cover.
%
Weather information is not available in all
countries.
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual
(navigation)
Calling up information on navigation
Multimedia system:
4
Navigation
5
Z Options
5
Navigation Info
#
Select the topic.
Telephone
Telephony
Notes on telephony
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐
ating integrated communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you
will be distracted from the traffic situation.
This could also cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobile communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the
driver from the traffic situation. This could
also cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
#
As the driver, only operate mobile com‐
munications devices when the vehicle is
stationary.
#
As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile
communications devices in the areas
intended for this purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
314
Multimedia system
operating mobile communication equipment in
the vehicle.
Further information can be obtained from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
Telephone menu overview
1
Bluetooth
®
device name of the currently
connected mobile phone
Multimedia system
315
2
Signal strength of the mobile phone network
for the currently connected and selected
mobile phone
3
Battery status of the currently connected
and selected mobile phone
4
¢ (telephone ready) or w (call active)
5
Contacts (/ page 321)
6
Recent Calls (/ page 324)
7
Text Message
8
One mobile phone connected: Active Call.
Two mobile phones connected: changes view
between telephone 1 and 2 or Active Call
9
Devices (/ page 317)
A
Options
Symbols 1 to 4 are not shown until after a
mobile phone has been connected to the multi‐
media system. The symbols depend on your
mobile phone and your mobile phone network
provider.
Bluetooth
®
profile overview
Bluetooth
®
profile
of the mobile phone
Function
PBAP (Phone Book
Access Profile)
Contacts are auto‐
matically displayed in
the multimedia sys‐
tem
MAP (Message
Access Profile)
Message functions
can be used
Telephony operating modes overview
Depending on your equipment, the following tel‐
ephony operating modes are available:
R
A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
dia system via Bluetooth
®
(/ page 317).
R
Two mobile phones are connected with the
multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(two
phone mode) (/ page 317).
Information on telephony
The following situations can lead to the call
being disconnected while the vehicle is in
motion:
R
There is insufficient network coverage in the
area
R
You move from one GSM or UMTS transmit‐
ter/receiver area (cell) into another and no
communication channels are free
R
The SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available
R
A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged
into the network with the second SIM card at
the same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD
Voice
®
for improved speech quality. A require‐
ment for this is that the mobile phone and the
mobile phone network provider of the person
you are calling support HD Voice
®
.
Depending on the quality of the connection, the
voice quality may fluctuate.
316
Multimedia system
Connecting a mobile phone (Bluetooth
®
tel‐
ephony)
Requirements:
R
Bluetooth
®
is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐
tions).
R
Bluetooth
®
is activated on the multimedia
system (/ page 277).
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Devices
Searching for a mobile phone
#
Select Connect New Device.
#
Select Start Search on System.
The available mobile phones are displayed. If
a new mobile phone is found, it is indicated
by the # symbol.
Connecting a mobile phone (authorization
using Secure Simple Pairing)
#
Select the mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
#
If the codes match: confirm the code on
the mobile phone.
Connecting a mobile phone (authorization by
entering a passkey)
#
Select the mobile phone.
#
Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi‐
nation as a passkey.
#
On the multimedia system: enter the pass‐
key and select a.
#
On the mobile phone: enter the passkey
again and confirm.
%
Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorized
on the multimedia system.
Authorized mobile phones are reconnected
automatically.
Connecting a second mobile phone (two
phone mode)
Requirements:
R
At least one mobile phone is already connec‐
ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
.
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Devices
#
Select Connect New Device.
#
Select Start Search on System.
The available mobile phones are displayed.
#
Select the mobile phone.
#
Answer the How would you like to connect
the new device? prompt.
#
To replace the currently connected
mobile phone: select Phone 1.
The currently connected mobile phone is
replaced by the new mobile phone.
or
#
To connect the second mobile phone:
select Phone 2.
The new mobile phone is connected as
Phone 2. If two mobile phones have already
been connected, the second telephone is
replaced by the new mobile phone.
or
#
To use the mobile phone as an audio
source: select Audio Source (/ page 353).
Multimedia system
317
%
A mobile phone can be operated both as an
audio source as well as telephone in parallel.
%
It is possible at any future point to change
the type of connection for the mobile phone
already connected and to set this as Phone
1, Phone 2 or Audio Source (/ page 318).
Functions of the mobile phone in two phone
mode
Functions overview
Mobile phone in the
foreground
Mobile phone in the
background
Full range of func‐
tions
Incoming calls
Interchanging mobile phones (two phone
mode)
Requirements:
R
The mobile phones are authorized
(/ page 317).
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Devices
#
In the device overview, select a mobile phone
which has already been authorized and set
as Phone 1 or Phone 2.
After interchanging the mobile phones, the
mobile phone in the foreground is replaced by
the mobile phone in the background.
1
Bluetooth
®
device name of the currently
connected mobile phone
2
Connects a mobile phone as Phone 1
3
Connects a mobile phone as Phone 2
4
Connects a mobile phone as Audio Source
5
Disconnecting a mobile phone(/ page 319)
6
De-authorizing a mobile phone(/ page 319)
318
Multimedia system
%
If a new mobile phone is connected and
defined as Phone 1, for example, this over‐
writes the previously connected mobile
phone in the foreground of the system.
Disconnecting a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Devices
#
Select the i symbol in the line of the
mobile phone.
The disconnection of the mobile phone takes
place without a confirmation prompt. The
mobile phone remains authorized in the sys‐
tem.
De-authorizing a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Devices
#
Select the % symbol in the line of the
mobile phone.
#
Answer the confirmation prompt with Yes.
The mobile phone is de-authorized and
deleted from the system.
Information on Near Field Communication
(NFC)
NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer
or (re)connection of a mobile phone with the
multimedia system.
The following functions are available without
having authorized a mobile phone:
R
Transferring a URL to be viewed in the multi‐
media system (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions).
R
Setting up the vehicle's Wi-Fi access data via
the system settings (/ page 279).
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Using the mobile phone with Near Field Com‐
munication (NFC)
Requirements:
R
NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions)
R
The mobile phone's screen is switched on
and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions)
#
To connect a mobile phone: open stowage
compartment cover 1.
#
Place the NFC area of the mobile phone (see
manufacturer's operating instructions) on
NFC logo 2 on the inside of the cover.
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system.
Multimedia system
319
#
To change mobile phones: place the NFC
area of the mobile phone (see manufactur‐
er's operating instructions) on NFC logo 2.
If the mobile phone has already been author‐
ized on the multimedia system, it is now con‐
nected.
If the mobile phone is authorized on the mul‐
timedia system for the first time, it is connec‐
ted after confirming the mobile phone
instructions (see the manufacturer's operat‐
ing instructions).
Further information can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Setting the reception and transmission vol‐
ume
Requirements:
R
A mobile phone is authorized (/ page 317).
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
Z Options
5
Phone
This function ensures optimal language quality.
#
Select Reception Volume or Transmission
Volume.
#
Set the volume.
Further information on the recommended recep‐
tion and transmission volume: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Adjusting the call and ringtone volume
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
õ Audio
5
Phone
#
Select Call Volume or Ringtone Volume.
#
Set the volume.
Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog‐
nition
Requirements:
R
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system (/ page 317).
Starting mobile phone voice recognition
#
Press and hold the ó button on the multi‐
function steering wheel for more than one
second.
You can use mobile phone voice recognition.
Stopping mobile phone voice recognition
#
Press the 8 or ~ button on the multi‐
function steering wheel.
Calls
Using the telephone
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
Making a call
#
Select Numerical Keypad.
#
Enter the number.
#
Select w.
The call is made.
Accepting a call
#
Select Accept.
Rejecting a call
#
Select Reject.
Ending a call
#
Select =.
320
Multimedia system
Activating functions during a call
#
To show all functions, navigate down.
The following functions are available during a
call:
R
End Call
R
Make Additional Call
R
Keyboard (show to send DTMF tones)
R
Switch Mute Mic on O or off ª.
R
Private Mode (an active call in hands-free
mode is transferred over to the telephone)
Conducting calls with several participants
Requirements:
R
There is an active call (/ page 320).
R
Another call is being made.
Switching between calls
#
Select call #.
The selected call is active. The other call is
on hold.
Activating or ending a call on hold
#
Select Continue Call or End Call.
Conducting a conference call
#
Select Create Conference Call in the tele‐
phone menu.
The new participant is included in the confer‐
ence call.
Ending an active call
#
Select =.
%
On some mobile phones, the call on hold is
activated as soon as the active call is ended.
Accepting/rejecting a waiting call
Requirements:
R
There is an active call (/ page 320).
If you receive a call while already in a call, a
message is displayed. An acoustic signal also
sounds.
#
Select Accept.
The incoming call is active.
If only one mobile phone is connected with
the multimedia system, the previous call will
be put on hold.
If during a call you accept a call with the
other mobile phone when in two phone mode
then the existing call is ended.
#
Select Reject.
%
This function and behavior depends on your
mobile phone network provider and the
mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions).
Contacts
Information about the contacts menu
The contacts menu contains all contacts from
existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or
memory card. You can store up to 6,000 con‐
tacts.
Depending on the data source, you have the fol‐
lowing number of contacts:
R
Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries
R
Contacts loaded from the mobile phone:
3,000 entries
Multimedia system
321
From the contacts menu, you can perform the
following actions:
R
Using the telephone:
-
Calling a contact (/ page 323)
-
Calling a new number (/ page 320)
R
Navigation (/ page 295)
R
Compose messages (/ page 325)
If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system (/ page 317) and automatic calling up
(/ page 322) is activated, the mobile phone's
contacts are displayed in the address book.
Downloading mobile phone contacts
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
Z Options
5
Contacts
Automatically
#
Switch Synchronize Contacts Automatically
on O.
Manually
#
Deactivate ª Synchronize Contacts Auto-
matically.
#
Select Synchronize Contacts.
Calling up contacts
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
Depending on the character set, the following
options can be used to search for contacts:
R
searching by initials
R
searching by name
R
searching by phone number
#
Enter characters into the search field.
A selection of possible contacts appears.
Entering more characters into the search
field narrows down the number of possible
selections.
#
Select the contact.
A contact can contain the following details:
R
phone numbers
R
navigation addresses
R
geo-coordinates
R
Internet address
Editing the format of a contact's name
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
Z Options
5
Contacts
5
Name Format
The following options are available:
R
Last Name, First Name
R
Last Name First Name
R
First Name Last Name
#
Select an option.
Overview of importing contacts
Contacts from various sources
Source Requirements
ò Memory cardThe SD memory card
is inserted.
ò USB device The USB device is
inserted in the USB
port.
322
Multimedia system
Source Requirements
ñ Bluetooth
®
con‐
nection
If the sending of
vCards via Bluetooth
®
is supported, vCards
can be received on
mobile phones or net‐
books, for example.
Bluetooth
®
is activa‐
ted in the multimedia
system and on the
respective device
(see the manufactur‐
er's operating instruc‐
tions).
ó Mobile phone The mobile phone is
connected to the mul‐
timedia system.
Importing contacts into the contacts menu
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
Z Options
5
Contacts
#
Select Import.
#
Select an option.
Saving a mobile phone contact
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
#
Select the mobile phone contact ó.
#
Select p.
#
Select Save to Vehicle.
The contact saved in the multimedia system
is identified by the f symbol.
Calling a contact
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
#
Enter characters into the search field.
#
Select the contact.
#
Select the telephone number.
The number is dialed.
Selecting further options in the contacts
menu
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
#
Select a contact.
#
Select p.
Depending on the stored data, the following
options are available:
R
Call
R
Send Text Message
R
Show Website (if an Internet address has
been stored)
R
Navigate (if an address has been stored)
R
Save My Favorite
R
Send DTMF Tones (for a number with DTMF
tones)
#
Select an option.
Deleting a contact
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
You can delete contacts stored in the vehicle.
#
Search for the contact.
#
Select the contact.
#
Select p.
#
Select Delete Contact.
#
Select Yes.
Multimedia system
323
Call list
Call list overview
Depending on whether your mobile phone sup‐
ports the PBAP Bluetooth
®
profile or not, this
can have different effects on the presentation
and functions of the call list.
If the PBAP Bluetooth
®
profile is supported, the
effects are as follows:
R
The call lists from the mobile phone are dis‐
played in the multimedia system.
R
When connecting the mobile phone, you may
have to confirm the connection for the PBAP
Bluetooth
®
profile.
If the PBAP Bluetooth
®
profile is not supported,
the effects are as follows:
R
The multimedia system generates its own call
lists.
R
The call list is not synchronized with the call
lists in the mobile phone.
Making a call from the call list
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ø Recent Calls
#
Select a number.
The call is made.
Text messages
Overview of text message functions
If the connected mobile phone supports the
MAP Bluetooth
®
profile, the text message func‐
tions can be used on the multimedia system.
You can obtain further information about set‐
tings and supported functions of Bluetooth
®
-
capable mobile phones from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Some mobile phones require further settings
after being connected to the multimedia system
(see manufacturer's operating instructions).
New messages are identified by the i sym‐
bol in the media display and an audible signal.
Depending on the mobile phone, the multimedia
system only displays new incoming text mes‐
sages or the 100 newest text messages.
Configuring the text messages displayed
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
Z Options
5
Text Message
5
Message Display
#
Select p.
A menu with the following options is shown:
R
All Messages
R
New and Unread Messages
R
New Messages
R
Off (The text messages are not displayed
automatically.)
#
Select an option.
%
The setting may not be active until the
mobile phone is reconnected.
324
Multimedia system
Reading text messages
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
i Text Message
Reading a text message
#
Select a text message.
The message text is displayed.
Using the read-aloud function
#
Select a text message.
#
Select Read Aloud.
The text message is read aloud.
Composing and sending a text message
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
i Text Message
#
Select Write New Text Message.
Adding a recipient
#
Select Press to Add Recipient.
#
Select the contact.
Dictating text
#
Select Press to Dictate.
#
To start the dictation function: press on
the central control element.
The app for the dictation function is loaded.
If there was no prior Internet connection, a
connection is now established.
#
Say the message.
The dictation ends automatically after you
have finished speaking.
After the voice message has been processed,
it is shown as text.
#
To replace a message: select Replace mes-
sage.
The text that has been dictated and shown
on the display is reset and can be dictated
again.
Editing text
#
Select the word.
#
To call up the correction menu: press on
the central control element.
The following options are available:
R
Adjusting the capitalization of words (if
supported by the character set)
R
Expanding the choice of words
R
Deleting the selection
R
Recording a new dictation
#
To leave the menu: select Done.
Sending text messages
#
Select Send Text Message.
Replying to a text message
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
i Text Message
#
Open the text message.
#
Select p.
#
Select Reply.
Calling a text message sender
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
i Text Message
#
Open the text message.
#
Select p.
#
Select Call Sender.
Multimedia system
325
Deleting text messages
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
i Text Message
#
Select p.
#
To delete a text message: select Delete.
#
Outbox
or
#
Select Drafts.
In-Car Office
"In Car Office" functions
Using "In Car Office", you can connect your
online services with the multimedia system.
The following functions are available:
R
Display of upcoming meetings in the calen‐
dar
R
Selection of a meeting as a destination in the
navigation
R
Display of upcoming telephone conferences
R
Selection of telephone conferences for auto‐
matic dialing
R
Display of participants in a telephone confer‐
ence
R
Display and selection of calls to be made
%
Please note that certain functions are only
available when the vehicle is stationary.
%
If the ! symbol appears in the status
line, the "In Car Office" service is available in
the vehicle.
Calling up "In Car Office"
Requirements:
R
A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
dia system.
R
You have a user account on the Mercedes
me portal (https://me.mercedes-benz-com).
R
The "In Car Office" service is activated in the
Mercedes me portal.
R
You have an account with an online service,
for example Office 365.
#
Select In Car Office.
Switching automatic start of "In Car Office"
on/off
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
In Car Office Options
#
Switch Start In Car Office Automatically on
O or off ª.
If the automatic start of "In Car Office" is
switched on, displays with options regarding
upcoming appointments automatically
appear in the media display.
If the automatic start of "In Car Office“ is
switched off, you can call up the application
via the main menu.
Selecting "In Car Office" functions
Multimedia system
4
In Car Office
#
Select an appointment.
Depending on the appointment and the
stored information, the following functions
are available:
R
Start Route Guid./Cancel Route Guid.
R
Display Participants
326
Multimedia system
R
Set Up Call/Connect Now
#
Select a function.
Marking an entry in the to-do list as comple‐
ted
Multimedia system
4
In Car Office
#
Select an entry in the to-do list O.
The following functions are available:
R
Mark the selected entry as concluded or
still open
R
Call up the selected entry w
R
Start automatic processing of the to-do
list: Start To-do Items
Noting an incoming call
When you receive an incoming call a prompt
appears asking whether the call should be
accepted, rejected or noted.
#
Select Remind.
The call is rejected and automatically added
to the "In Car Office" to-do list.
Mercedes-Benz link
Overview of Mercedes-Benz Link
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
Using Mercedes-Benz Link, various functions
and selected mobile phone apps can be transfer‐
red to the media display.
The Mercedes-Benz Link control box supplemen‐
tary equipment is required for this. You can
obtain this at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter.
%
The Mercedes-Benz Link control box uses
the Android operating system.
%
The service provider is responsible for these
apps and the services and content connec‐
ted to it.
Connecting Mercedes-Benz Link with the
multimedia system
#
Connect the Mercedes-Benz Link control box
with the ç USB port of the multimedia
connection unit using a suitable connecting
cable.
%
A suitable connecting cable is available sep‐
arately at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter.
Using Mercedes-Benz Link
Requirements:
R
The Mercedes-Benz Link control box is con‐
nected with the multimedia system using the
ç USB port.
Multimedia system
327
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Mercedes-Benz Link
#
Select MB Link.
The mobile phone functions and apps are
available and shown on the media display.
You can find more information in the Mercedes-
Benz Link control box operating instructions.
Ending Mercedes-Benz Link
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Mercedes-Benz Link
#
Select Disconnect.
The connection is ended.
The mobile phone continues to be supplied
with electricity.
or
#
Disconnect the connecting cable between
the Mercedes-Benz Link control box and the
multimedia system.
%
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle
is stationary.
Apple CarPlay
®
Overview of Apple CarPlay
®
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
iPhone
®
functions can be used via the multime‐
dia system using Apple CarPlay
®
. They are oper‐
ated using the central control element or the
Siri
®
voice-operated control system. You can
activate the voice-operated control system by
pressing and holding the ó button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
When using Apple CarPlay
®
via the voice-oper‐
ated control system, the multimedia system can
still be operated via the Voice Control System
(/ page 252).
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐
ted via Apple CarPlay
®
to the multimedia sys‐
tem.
The availability of Apple CarPlay
®
may vary
according to the country.
The service provider is responsible for this appli‐
cation and the services and content connected
to it.
Apple CarPlay
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
Information on Apple CarPlay
®
While using Apple CarPlay
®
various functions of
the multimedia system, e.g. telephony or the
media sources Bluetooth
®
audio and iPod
®
, are
unavailable.
328
Multimedia system
Only one route guidance can be active at a time.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐
tem, it is closed when route guidance is started
on the mobile phone.
Connecting an iPhone
®
via Apple CarPlay
®
Requirements:
R
Apple
®
operating system version iOS 8.3 or
above is installed on the iPhone
®
.
R
An Internet connection is required for the full
range of functions for Apple CarPlay
®
.
R
The iPhone
®
is connected to the multimedia
system via the USB port ç using a suita‐
ble cable (/ page 347).
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Apple CarPlay
Setting automatic or manual start
A message appears when connected for the first
time.
#
Automatic start: select Automatically.
Start Automatically is activated O.
Apple CarPlay
®
will now start immediately
after the iPhone
®
is connected to the multi‐
media system using a USB cable.
#
Manual start: select Manually.
#
Select the iPhone
®
in the device list.
Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐
ulations
A message with the data protection regulations
appears.
#
Select Accept & Start.
or
#
Select Decline & End.
Exiting Apple CarPlay
®
#
Press the ò button on the multifunction
steering wheel, for example.
%
If Apple CarPlay
®
was not displayed in the
foreground before disconnecting, the appli‐
cation starts in the background when recon‐
nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay
®
in
the main menu.
Calling up Apple CarPlay
®
sound settings
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Apple CarPlay
5
Sound
#
Select the sound menu (/ page 364).
Ending Apple CarPlay
®
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Apple CarPlay
#
Select Disconnect.
The connection is ended.
The mobile phone continues to be supplied
with electricity.
or
#
Disconnect the connecting cable between
the mobile phone and multimedia system.
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle is
stationary.
Multimedia system
329
Android Auto
Android Auto overview
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Mobile phone functions can be used with
Android Auto using the Android operating sys‐
tem on the multimedia system. It is operated
using the central control element or the voice
control. You can activate the voice-operated con‐
trol system by pressing and holding the ó
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
When using Android Auto via the voice-operated
control system, the multimedia system can still
be operated via the Voice Control System
(/ page 252).
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐
ted via Android Auto to the multimedia system.
The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto
Apps may vary according to the country.
The service provider is responsible for this appli‐
cation and the services and content connected
to it.
Information on Android Auto
While using Android Auto, various functions of
the multimedia system, for example the media
source Bluetooth
®
audio, are not available.
Only one route guidance can be active at a time.
If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐
tem, it is closed when route guidance is started
on the mobile phone.
Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto
Requirements:
R
The first activation of Android Auto on the
multimedia system must be carried out when
the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons.
R
The mobile phone supports Android Auto
from Android 5.0.
R
The Android Auto app is installed on the
mobile phone.
R
In order to use the telephone functions, the
mobile phone must be connected to the mul‐
timedia system via Bluetooth
®
(/ page 317).
If there was no prior Internet connection, this
is established with the use of the mobile
phone with Android Auto.
R
The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐
media system via the USB port ç using a
suitable cable (/ page 347).
R
An Internet connection is required for the full
range of functions for Android Auto.
330
Multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Android Auto
#
Select the mobile phone from the device list.
Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐
ulations
A message with the data protection regulations
appears.
#
Select Accept & Start.
or
#
Select Decline & End.
Activating automatic start
#
Select Start Automatically O.
Starting manually
#
Select the mobile phone from the device list.
Exiting Android Auto
#
Press the ò button on the multifunction
steering wheel, for example.
%
If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore‐
ground before disconnecting, the application
starts in the background when reconnected.
You can call up Android Auto in the main
menu.
Calling up the Android Auto sound settings
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Android Auto
5
Sound
#
Select the tone menu (/ page 364).
Ending Android Auto
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Android Auto
#
Select Disconnect.
The connection is ended.
The mobile phone continues to be supplied
with electricity.
or
#
Disconnect the connecting cable between
the mobile phone and multimedia system.
Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connecting cable only when the vehicle is
stationary.
Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto
and Apple CarPlay
®
Overview of transferred vehicle data
When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay
®
, cer‐
tain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile
phone. This enables you to get the best out of
selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is
not directly accessible.
The following system information is transmitted:
R
Software release of the multimedia system
R
System ID (anonymized)
The transfer of this data is used to optimize com‐
munication between the vehicle and the mobile
phone.
To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the
mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly
generated.
This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐
tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐
media system is reset (/ page 286).
The following driving status data is transmitted:
R
Transmission position engaged
Multimedia system
331
R
Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling
and driving
R
Day/night mode of the instrument cluster
The transfer of this data is used to alter how
content is displayed to correspond to the driving
situation.
The following position data is transmitted:
R
Coordinates
R
Speed
R
Compass direction
R
Acceleration direction
This data is only transferred while the navigation
system is active in order to improve it (e.g. so it
can continue functioning when in a tunnel).
Mercedes me calls
Making a call via the overhead control panel
Requirements:
R
You have access to a GSM network.
R
The contract partner's GSM network cover‐
age is available in the respective region.
R
The ignition is switched on so that vehicle
data can be transferred automatically.
1
me button for service, concierge or informa‐
tion calls
2
SOS button cover
3
SOS button
#
To make a Mercedes me call: press button
1.
#
To make an emergency call: press SOS
button cover 2 briefly to open.
#
Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least
one second.
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency
call can still be triggered. This has priority over
all other active calls.
Information about the Mercedes me call
using the me button
A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
has been initiated via the me button in the over‐
head control panel or the multimedia system.
Using the voice dialog system you access the
desired service:
R
Concierge Service (if the service is activated)
R
Accident and breakdown management
(/ page 335)
R
Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general
information about the vehicle
You can find information on the following topics:
R
Activation of Mercedes me connect
R
Operating the vehicle
332
Multimedia system
R
Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R
Other products and services from Mercedes-
Benz
Data is transferred during the connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 334).
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
using the multimedia system
Requirements:
R
You have access to a GSM network.
R
The contract partner's GSM network cover‐
age is available in the respective region.
R
The ignition is switched on so that vehicle
data can be transferred automatically.
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
ª Contacts
#
Call Mercedes me connect.
The call is made.
After confirmation, the multimedia system
sends the required vehicle data. The data
transfer is shown in the media display.
Then, you can select a service and be con‐
nected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Center.
Arranging a service appointment via a
Mercedes me call
If you have activated the maintenance manage‐
ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred
automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Center. You will then receive individual recom‐
mendations regarding the maintenance of your
vehicle.
Regardless of whether you have consented to
the maintenance management service, the multi‐
media system reminds you after a certain
amount of time that a service is due. A prompt
appears asking if you would like to make an
appointment.
#
To arrange a service appointment: select
Call.
After your agreement the vehicle data is sent
and a Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
employee deals with your appointment. The
information is then sent to your desired
service outlet.
This will contact you to confirm the appoint‐
ment and if necessary consult about the
details.
%
If you select Later after the service message
appears, the message is hidden and reap‐
pears at a later time.
Giving consent to data transfer during a
Mercedes me call
Requirements:
R
A service call is active using the multimedia
system or the overhead control panel .
If the breakdown and Mercedes me connect
Concierge services are not activated on
Mercedes me, the Do you consent to the trans-
fer of your vehicle data and the vehicle's posi-
tion to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center in
order to improve the processing of your request?
message appears.
#
Select Yes.
The relevant vehicle data is sent automati‐
cally.
Multimedia system
333
Transferred data during a Mercedes me call
The data transferred during a Mercedes me call
depends on which service is selected in the
voice control system and whether Mercedes me
connect services are activated.
If no Mercedes me connect services are activa‐
ted and the data protection prompt has been
confirmed the following data is transmitted:
R
Vehicle identification number
R
Mercedes me customer identification num‐
ber
R
Reason for the initiation of the call
R
Language set in the multimedia system
R
Confirmation of the data protection prompt
If a call is made for a service appointment via
the service reminder, the following data may be
transmitted:
R
Current mileage and maintenance data
Transfer is possible assuming the required
data transfer technology is supported by the
mobile service operator and the quality of
the mobile connection is sufficient.
If Accident and Breakdown Management is
called via the voice control system and no
service has been activated, but the data protec‐
tion query has been confirmed, the following
data can also be called up from the vehicle by
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center:
R
Current vehicle location
%
At the time of going to press, this function is
technically not yet available but can be sup‐
ported in the future.
If the data protection prompt has been rejected
the following data is transmitted:
R
Reason for the initiation of the call
R
Rejection of the data protection prompt
Mercedes me connect
Notes on Mercedes me connect
Mercedes me connect provides the following
services:
R
Accident and breakdown management (me
button)
R
Concierge Service (when the service is acti‐
vated), appointment requests or similar (me
button)
R
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto‐
matic emergency call and SOS button)
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are availa‐
ble for you around the clock.
The me button and the SOS button can be found
on the vehicle's overhead control panel
(/ page 332).
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Center using the multimedia system
(/ page 333).
Please note that Mercedes me connect is a
Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, always
call the national emergency services first using
the standard national emergency service phone
numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
(/ page 336).
Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me
connect and other services. These can be
334
Multimedia system
obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https://
me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Information on Mercedes me connect acci‐
dent and breakdown management
The accident and breakdown management can
include the following functions:
R
Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system (/ page 336)
If necessary, the contact person at the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for‐
wards the call to Mercedes me connect
breakdown and accident management. For‐
warding the call is however not possible in all
countries.
R
Breakdown assistance by a mechanic on
location and/or the towing away of the vehi‐
cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center
You may be charged for these services.
More information about Mercedes me connect
services can be obtained in the Mercedes me
portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data transferred during Mercedes me con‐
nect call services
The data transferred during a Mercedes me con‐
nect call depends on the reason the call was ini‐
tiated, which service is selected in the voice
control system and which Mercedes me connect
services are activated.
Which data is transferred for the services can be
taken from the currently valid terms of use.
These can be obtained in the Mercedes me por‐
tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system
Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can
help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall
in no way replaces assistance provided from
dialing 911.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is
available for at least ten years starting from the
manufacturing date.
Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas
where mobile phone coverage is available from
the wireless service providers. Insufficient net‐
work coverage from the wireless service provid‐
ers may result in an emergency call not being
transmitted.
eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes-
Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended,
the system relies on the transmission of data
detailed in the "Mercedes-Benz emergency call
system data transmission" section that follows
(/ page 337).
To disable eCall, a customer must visit an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department
to deactivate the vehicle's communication mod‐
ule.
Deactivation of this module prevents the
activation of any and all Mercedes me con‐
nect services. After the deactivation of
eCall, automatic emergency call and manual
emergency call will not be available.
The ignition must be switched on before an auto‐
matic emergency call can be made.
%
eCall is activated at the factory.
Multimedia system
335
%
eCall can be deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in
the event ownership of the vehicle is trans‐
ferred to another owner in its deactivated
state, eCall will remain deactivated unless
the new owner visits an authorized
Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the
system.
Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency
call system
eCall can help to reduce the time between an
accident and the arrival of emergency services
at the site of the accident. It helps locate an
accident site in places that are difficult to
access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped
with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON.
As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the
event of an accident.
The emergency call can be made automatically
(/ page 336) or manually (/ page 337). Only
make emergency calls if you or others are in
need of rescue.
Only make emergency calls if you or others are
in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency
call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit‐
uation.
Displays in the media display:
SOS READY: eCall available
SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or eCall
is not available.
During an active emergency call, G appears
in the display.
You can find more information on the regional
availability of eCall system at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect_ecall.
%
If there is a malfunction in the emergency
call system (e.g. a malfunction with the
speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS button), a
corresponding message appears in the mul‐
tifunction display of the instrument cluster.
Triggering an automatic emergency call
Requirements
R
The ignition is switched on.
R
The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
If restraint systems such as airbags or Emer‐
gency Tensioning Devices have been activated
after an accident, the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system may automatically initiate an
emergency call.
The emergency call has been made:
R
A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call center.
R
A message with accident data is transmitted
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
can transmit the vehicle position data to one
of the emergency call centers.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel
flashes until the emergency call is finished.
It is not possible to immediately end an auto‐
matic emergency call.
If no connection can be made to the emergency
services either, a corresponding message
appears in the media display.
#
Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone.
336
Multimedia system
If an emergency call has been initiated:
R
Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
connection is established with the emer‐
gency call center operator.
R
Based on the call, the operator decides
whether it is necessary to call rescue teams
and/or the police to the accident site.
R
If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐
lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual emergency call
#
Press and hold the SOS button in the over‐
head control panel for at least one second.
The emergency call has been made:
R
A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call center.
R
A message with accident data is transmitted
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
can transmit the vehicle position data to one
of the emergency call centers.
R
Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
connection is established with the emer‐
gency call center service provider.
R
On the basis of the call, the service provider
decides whether it is necessary to call res‐
cue teams and/or the police to the accident
site.
If no connection can be made to the emergency
services either, a corresponding message
appears in the media display.
#
Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone.
Ending an unintentional emergency call
#
Select ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel. Depress button for several seconds.
Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system
In the event of an automatic or manual emer‐
gency call the following data is transmitted, for
example:
R
Vehicle's GPS position data
R
GPS position data on the route (a few
(hundred meters) before the incident)
R
Direction of travel
R
Vehicle identification number
R
Vehicle drive type
R
Number of people determined to be in the
vehicle
R
Whether Mercedes me connect is available
or not
R
Whether the emergency call was initiated
manually or automatically
R
Time of the accident
R
Language setting on the multimedia system
Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any
questions about the collection, use and sharing
of the eCall system data, please contact MBU‐
SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-
MERC.
For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100.
Customer requests for covered information
should be submitted via the same channels.
Multimedia system
337
For accident clarification purposes, the following
measures can be taken up to an hour after the
emergency call has been initiated:
R
The current vehicle position can be called up.
R
A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
can be established
Online and Internet functions
Internet connection
Information on connecting to the Internet
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from
operating mobile communication equip‐
ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the
driver from the traffic situation. This could
also cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
#
As the driver, only operate mobile com‐
munications devices when the vehicle is
stationary.
#
As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile
communications devices in the areas
intended for this purpose, e.g. in the
rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communication equipment in
the vehicle.
The Internet functions can only be used to a limi‐
ted degree whilst driving.
Function of the communication module
On vehicles with a built-in communication mod‐
ule, the Internet connection is established via an
integrated SIM card.
To use Internet access via the communication
module the following conditions must be met:
R
The vehicle is equipped with a permanently
installed communication module.
R
Mercedes me connect is active and ready for
operation.
R
Mercedes me connect is activated for Inter‐
net access.
R
Country dependent: data volume via
Mercedes me connect is available.
If the data volume limit is reached, the availabil‐
ity of Mercedes me connect services is limited.
338
Multimedia system
The data volume must be purchased via
Mercedes me connect.
%
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter to find out whether it is possible to pur‐
chase data volume in your country.
Establishing an Internet connection
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
#
For example, select z Browser.
%
The multimedia system usually establishes
the Internet connection automatically. If the
multimedia system is not connected to the
Internet, the Internet connection is estab‐
lished when an Internet application is used.
%
The availability of web browsers is country-
dependent.
Connection status
Connection status overview
1
Display of the communication module recep‐
tion field strength
2
Display of existing connection
Displaying the connection status
Multimedia system:
4
System
5
ö Connectivity
#
Select Internet Status.
%
In the case of a connection via the communi‐
cation module the following status informa‐
tion is shown:
R
Type of network
R
Status online/offline
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps
Requirements:
R
The registration for the use of Mercedes-
Benz Apps has been completed.
R
The general terms and conditions have been
confirmed.
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
Ú Mercedes-Benz Apps
#
Select an app.
%
The available features are country-depend‐
ent.
License fees may be applicable.
Multimedia system
339
Operating Mercedes-Benz Apps using voice
control
Requirements:
R
The registration for the use of Mercedes-
Benz Apps has been completed.
R
The general terms and conditions have been
confirmed.
The o symbol indicates that a Mercedes-
Benz app can be used via voice control.
#
Select a Mercedes-Benz app.
The app menu is displayed.
#
To use voice control: select o Lan-
guage.
#
Say the question or command.
%
Voice control is not available in all countries
and languages.
Web browser
Calling up a web page
&
WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information and communica‐
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you will be distracted from the
traffic situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits.
#
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
z Enter URL
#
Enter a web address.
%
The function is country-dependent.
#
To finish the entry and call up the web‐
site: select ¬.
Showing/hiding the web browser menu
If you call up a website by selecting a link, for
example, the web browser menu is hidden.
#
To show/hide: press the % button.
%
The web browser supports video playback.
%
No websites or videos are displayed while
the vehicle is in motion.
340
Multimedia system
Web browser overview
1
URL entry
2
Bookmarks
3
Web page, back
4
Web page, forwards
5
Options
6
Closes the browser
Calling up web browser options
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
Z Options
The following functions are available:
R
Refresh Page/Cancel
R
Zoom
R
Browser Settings
R
Delete Browser Data
#
Select an option.
#
Make the desired changes to the settings.
Calling up the web browser settings
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
Z Options
5
Browser Settings
The following functions are available:
R
Block Pop-Ups
R
Activate Javascript
R
Allow Cookies
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Deleting browser data
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
Z Options
5
Delete Browser Data
The following options are available:
R
All
R
Cache
R
Cookies
R
Entered URLs
R
Form Data
#
Select an option.
#
Select Yes.
Managing bookmarks
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
5
ß Bookmarks
Selecting a bookmark
#
Select an entry.
Multimedia system
341
Creating a bookmark
#
Select Add New Bookmark.
#
Enter a URL and a name.
#
Select ¡.
Editing a bookmark
#
Highlight a bookmark.
#
Select p.
#
Select Edit.
#
Enter a URL and a name.
#
Select ¡.
Deleting a bookmark
#
Highlight a bookmark.
#
Select p.
#
Select Delete.
#
Select Yes.
Closing the browser
Multimedia system:
4
Connect
5
z Browser
#
Select å Close Browser.
TuneIn radio
Calling up Internet Radio
Requirements:
R
The Internet Radio service is activated.
R
The data volume is available.
Depending on the country, data volume may
need to be purchased.
R
A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐
sion free of interference.
The services are country-dependent.
For more information, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
#
Select TuneIn Radio.
The Internet Radio display appears. The last
station set starts playing.
%
The connection quality depends on the local
mobile phone reception.
Internet Radio overview
1
Internet Radio provider
2
Selected category
3
Display (if connected to private user
account)
4
Data transfer rate
5
Current station is stored as a favorite
6
Additional information on the current station
342
Multimedia system
Selecting and connecting Internet Radio sta‐
tions
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
TuneIn Radio
5
è Search
#
Select a category.
#
Select a station.
The connection is established automatically.
or
#
Select Enter Address or POI.
#
Enter a station name using the entry field.
%
A relatively large volume of data can be
transmitted when using Internet Radio.
Saving/deleting an Internet Radio station as
a favorite
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
TuneIn Radio
#
Select a station.
#
Press and hold the central control element
until an audible signal sounds.
The ß symbol appears by the station
name.
#
Select ß Favorites.
The list of saved favorite stations appears.
or
#
Create an account for the online provider
(TuneIn radio) and then log in on the multi‐
media system.
Your favorites are imported to the multimedia
system.
Deleting favorites
#
Select ß Favorites.
#
Select a station.
#
Press and hold the central control element
until an audible signal sounds.
The ß symbol by the station name disap‐
pears.
Setting Internet Radio options
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
TuneIn Radio
5
Z Options
The following options are available:
R
Select Stream: select the stream quality.
R
Login to TuneIn Account: log in to your
TuneIn user account.
R
Log Out of Account: log out of your TuneIn
user account.
#
Select an option.
Media
Audio mode
Information on the audio mode
&
WARNING Risk of distraction when han‐
dling data storage media
If you handle a data storage medium while
driving, your attention is diverted from the
Multimedia system
343
traffic conditions. This could also cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
#
Only handle a data storage medium
when the vehicle is stationary.
Permissible file systems:
R
FAT32
R
exFAT
R
NTFS
Permissible data storage medium:
R
SD card
R
USB storage device
R
iPod
®
/iPhone
®
R
MTP devices
R
Bluetooth
®
audio equipment
%
Observe the following notes:
R
The multimedia system supports a total
of up to 50,000 files.
R
Data storage media up to 2 TB are sup‐
ported (32‑bit address space).
Supported formats:
R
MP3
R
WMA
R
AAC
R
WAV
R
FLAC
R
ALAC
%
Observe the following notes:
R
Due to the large variety of available
music files regarding encoders, sampling
rates and data rates, playback cannot
always be guaranteed.
R
Due to the wide range of USB devices
available on the market, playback cannot
be guaranteed for all USB devices.
R
Copy-protected music files or DRM
encrypted files cannot be played back.
R
MP3 players must support Media Trans‐
fer Protocol (MTP).
Manufactured under license from Dolby Labora‐
tories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D sym‐
bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
344
Multimedia system
Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist
Plus are either registered trademarks or trade‐
marks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries.
"Made for iPod", and "Made for iPhone," mean
that an electronic accessory has been designed
to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,
respectively, and has been certified by the devel‐
oper to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this
device or its compliance with safety and regula‐
tory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod, or iPhone may affect wire‐
less performance.
For the USA: iPhone
®
, iPod
®
, iPod classic
®
,
iPod nano
®
, and iPod touch
®
are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun‐
tries. Lightning™ is a trademark of Apple Inc.
For Canada: iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod
nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Notes on copyright
Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself
for playback are generally subject to copyright
protection. In many countries, reproductions,
even for private use, are not permitted without
the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make
sure that you know about the applicable copy‐
right regulations and that you comply with these.
Activating media mode
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Select a media source.
Playable music files are played back.
Inserting/removing an SD card
&
DANGER Risk of fatal injury from swal‐
lowing SD cards
SD cards are small parts.
They could be swallowed and lead to chok‐
ing.
#
Keep SD cards out of the reach of chil‐
dren.
#
Seek medical attention immediately if
an SD card has been swallowed.
*
NOTE Damage due to high temperatures
High temperatures may damage the SD card.
Multimedia system
345
#
Remove the SD card after use and take
it out of the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
5
Mem. Card
Inserting
The multimedia connection unit is located in the
stowage compartment under the armrest.
#
Insert the SD memory card into the SD card
slot until it engages. The side with the con‐
tacts must face downwards.
Playable music files are played back.
Removing
#
Press the SD card.
#
Remove the SD card.
346
Multimedia system
Overview of the audio mode
1
Active data storage medium
2
Album cover
3
Track, artist, album
4
Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
5
Search
6
Playback Control
7
Media Sources
8
Sound
9
Full Screen (for video playback)
A
Options
Connecting USB devices
*
NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐
tures
High temperatures can damage USB devices.
#
Remove the USB device after use and
take it out of the vehicle.
Multimedia system
347
The multimedia connection unit is found in the
stowage compartment under the armrest and
has two USB ports.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, addi‐
tional USB ports can be found in the stowage
compartment of the center console and in the
rear passenger compartment.
#
Connect the USB device to the USB port.
Playable music files are played back only if
the corresponding media display is activated.
%
Use the USB port identified by ç to use
Apple CarPlay™ and Android Auto.
%
Depending on the vehicle equipment there is
an additional USB port in the rear passenger
compartment. Ports that are labeled with a
battery symbol can only be used to charge
USB devices.
Selecting a track in the media playback
Multimedia system:
4
Media
Selecting a track by skipping to a track
#
To skip backwards or forwards to a
track: navigate up or down.
Selecting a track using the current track list
#
Select è.
#
Select Current Track List.
#
Select a track.
Selecting playback options
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
Z Options
Playing back similar tracks
#
Select Play Similar Tracks.
A track list with similar tracks is created and
played back.
Playback mode
#
Select Random Mode - Current Playlist.
The current track list is played in random
order.
#
Select Random Mode - Current Medium.
All tracks on the active data storage medium
are played in random order.
#
Select Normal Track Sequence.
The current track list is played in the order it
appears on the data storage medium.
Controlling media playback
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
Y Playback Control
A bar with playback controls is shown.
#
To pause playback: select and confirm
Y with the central control element.
The Ë symbol is displayed.
#
To resume playback: select and confirm
Y again with the central control element.
The Ì symbol is displayed.
To fast forward/rewind
#
Move Ë on the timeline.
To hide the playback controls
#
Press the % button.
Video mode
Switching to video mode
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Select a data storage medium.
348
Multimedia system
#
Search for and select video files or playlists
with video files.
Playable video files are played back.
The multimedia system supports the following
formats:
R
MPEG
R
AVI, DivX, MKV
R
MP4, M4V
R
WMV
%
If the vehicle is traveling faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h) the video image is hidden from the
driver. If available, the channel and program
information is continuously displayed.
Due to the large variety of available video
files regarding encoders, sampling rates and
data transfer rates, playback cannot be guar‐
anteed.
Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are sup‐
ported.
Copy-protected video files or DRM (Digital
Rights Management) encrypted files cannot
be played back.
Multimedia system
349
Overview of video mode
1
Active data storage medium
2
Album cover
3
Track, artist, album
4
Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
5
Search
6
Playback Control
7
Media Sources
8
Sound
9
Full Screen (for video playback)
A
Options
Activating/deactivating full-screen mode
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Select a data storage medium.
Playable video files are played back.
#
To activate full-screen mode: select #
Full Screen.
350
Multimedia system
#
To deactivate full-screen mode: press the
touchpad.
Changing video settings
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
Z Options
5
Picture Format
The following picture formats are available:
R
Automatic
R
16:9
R
4:3
R
Zoom
#
Select a picture format.
Adjusting the brightness manually
If the Automatic picture format is switched off,
you can adjust the brightness yourself.
#
Select Brightness.
#
Adjust the brightness.
Media search
Starting the media search
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
ª Search
Depending on the connected media sources and
files, the following categories are listed:
R
Current Track List
R
Keyword Search
R
Playlists
R
Artists
R
Albums
R
Tracks
R
Folders
R
Music Genres
R
Year
R
Composers
R
Videos
R
Podcasts (Apple
®
devices)
R
Audiobooks (Apple
®
devices)
#
Select a category.
%
The categories are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read in and
analyzed.
Media Interface
Information about the Media Interface
Media Interface is a universal interface for the
connection of mobile audio equipment. The mul‐
timedia system has two USB ports. The USB
ports are located in the stowage compartment
under the armrest.
Supported devices
The Media Interface allows you to connect the
following data storage media:
R
iPod
®
R
iPhone
®
R
MP3 player
R
USB devices
For details and a list of supported devices, visit
our website at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect. Follow the instructions in
the "Media Interface" section.
Multimedia system
351
Switching to Media Interface
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Connect a data storage medium to the USB
port (/ page 347).
#
Select a media device.
Playable music files are played back.
Overview of Media Interface
352
Multimedia system
1
Active data storage medium
2
Album cover
3
Artist, track and album
4
Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
5
Search
6
Playback Control
7
Media Sources
8
Sound
9
Full Screen (video playback only)
A
Options
Bluetooth
®
audio
Information about Bluetooth
®
audio
Before using your Bluetooth
®
audio equipment
with the multimedia system for the first time,
you will need to authorize it (/ page 354).
Multimedia system
353
Bluetooth
®
audio overview
1
Active data storage medium
2
Album cover
3
Track, artist, album
4
Track number and number of tracks in the
track list
5
Search
6
Playback Control
7
Media Sources
8
Sound
9
Full Screen (video playback only)
A
Options
Searching for and authorizing a Bluetooth
®
audio device
Requirements:
R
Bluetooth
®
is activated on the multimedia
system and audio equipment (/ page 277).
R
The audio equipment supports the Blue‐
tooth
®
audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP.
R
The audio equipment is "visible" for other
devices.
354
Multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
5
á Bluetooth Audio
Authorizing a new Bluetooth
®
audio device
#
Select ¥.
#
Select Add New Bluetooth Audio Device.
#
Select Start Search on System.
Detected audio equipment is displayed in the
device list.
#
Select a Bluetooth
®
audio device.
Authorization starts. A code is displayed on
the multimedia system and on the mobile
phone.
#
If the codes are identical, confirm on the
audio equipment.
The audio equipment is connected and play‐
back starts.
Selecting previously authorized Bluetooth
®
audio equipment
#
Select ¥.
#
Select a Bluetooth
®
audio device.
Establishing a connection from the Blue‐
tooth
®
audio equipment
The Bluetooth
®
device name of the multimedia
system is MB BLUETOOTH XXXXX.
#
Select Search from Device.
#
Start the authorization on the audio equip‐
ment (see manufacturer's operating instruc‐
tions).
A code is displayed on the multimedia sys‐
tem and on the audio device.
#
Confirm on both devices if the codes are
identical.
The audio equipment is connected and play‐
back starts.
With some audio equipment, playback must be
initially started on the device itself so that the
multimedia system can play the audio files.
%
Device-specific information on authorizing
and connecting Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile
phones can be obtained at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Activating Bluetooth
®
audio
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
#
Select á Bluetooth Audio.
The multimedia system activates the connec‐
ted Bluetooth
®
audio equipment.
Selecting the media player on the Bluetooth
®
audio device
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
ª
#
Select the Bluetooth Audio Players category.
If multiple media players are present on the
Bluetooth
®
audio equipment a list appears.
#
Select a media player.
Playback starts.
%
The function is not supported by every
mobile phone.
Multimedia system
355
Searching for a music track on the Blue‐
tooth
®
audio device
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Media Sources
5
á Bluetooth Audio
#
Select ª.
#
Select a category.
A track list appears.
#
Select a track.
%
The function is only available when the
mobile phone and the media player selected
on the mobile phone support this function.
Switching Bluetooth
®
audio equipment via
NFC
Requirements:
R
Observe the notes on using NFC
(/ page 319).
R
The Bluetooth
®
audio overview is displayed
(/ page 354).
#
Lightly press the NFC area on the mobile
phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
If the mobile phone has already been author‐
ized on the multimedia system as Bluetooth
®
audio equipment, it is now connected.
If the mobile phone is authorized on the mul‐
timedia system as Bluetooth
®
audio equip‐
ment for the first time, it is connected after
confirming the instructions for the mobile
phone (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
Disconnecting Bluetooth
®
audio equipment
Multimedia system:
4
Phone
5
á Media Sources
#
Select the i symbol in the line of the
mobile phone.
The disconnection of the mobile phone takes
place without a confirmation prompt. The
mobile phone remains authorized in the sys‐
tem.
Radio
Switching on the radio
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
#
Alternatively: press the $ button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last frequency
band selected.
356
Multimedia system
Radio overview
1
Active frequency band
2
Station name or set frequency
3
Artist, title, album and radio text
4
Station list
5
Presets
6
Radio Source
7
Sound
8
Options
Multimedia system
357
Switching the HD Radio function on/off
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Z Options
5
HD Radio
#
Switch the function on O or off ª.
%
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation.
U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and
the HD, HD Radio and "Arc" logos are propri‐
etary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Setting the waveband
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
HD Radio FM HD Radio AM and SiriusXM Radio
can be selected.
#
Select a frequency band.
Selecting a radio station
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
#
Navigate up or down.
Calling up the radio station list
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
è
#
Select a station.
Searching for radio stations using station
names or direct frequency entry
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
è
#
Enter a station name or frequency.
#
Select a.
The search results are displayed.
#
Select a station.
Storing radio stations
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
ß Presets
#
Select Store Current Station in the Presets.
Editing radio station presets
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
ß Presets
Moving stations:
#
Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the
left.
358
Multimedia system
#
Select Move Highlighted Station.
#
Select a memory preset.
Deleting stations:
#
Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the
left.
#
Select Delete Highlighted Station.
#
Select Yes.
Tagging music tracks
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
If radio stations provide the relevant information,
this function allows you to transfer information
on the music track currently playing to an
Apple
®
device. You can then purchase the audio
file from the iTunes Store
®
.
#
Select ♫→ Tag This Song.
The track information is saved.
Activating/deactivating radio text
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Z Options
5
Display Radio Text Information
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Satellite radio
Information on the satellite radio
SIRIUS XM
®
satellite radio offers more than 175
digital-quality radio channels providing 100%
commercial-free music, sports, news and enter‐
tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio
employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to
broadcast around the clock throughout the USA
and Canada. The satellite radio program is avail‐
able for a monthly fee. Information about this
can be obtained from a Sirius XM
®
Service Cen‐
ter and at http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or
http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
%
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and
its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel
names and logos are the property of their
respective owners. All rights reserved.
Satellite radio restrictions
Satellite radio mode may be temporarily unavail‐
able or interrupted for a variety of reasons.
These include environmental or topographical
conditions beyond the control of Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC. Thus, operation at certain locations
may not be possible.
Registering satellite radio
Requirements:
R
Satellite radio equipment
R
Registration with a satellite radio provider
R
If registration is not included when purchas‐
ing the system, your credit card details will
be required to activate your account
Multimedia system
359
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
Z Options
#
Select Service Information.
The service information screen appears
showing the radio ID and the current sub‐
scription status.
#
Establish a telephone connection.
#
Follow the service staff's instructions.
The activation process may take up to ten
minutes.
%
You can also have the satellite service acti‐
vated online. To do so, please visit http://
www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http://
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Switching on satellite radio
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
#
Select SiriusXM Radio.
360
Multimedia system
Overview of the satellite radio
1
Active frequency band
2
Logo or cover picture for the song (if availa‐
ble)
3
Category
4
Channel name
5
Artist, track and album
6
SiriusXM Radio Channels
7
Presets
8
Radio Source
9
Sound
A
Playback Control
B
Options
Selecting a satellite radio category
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
è SiriusXM Radio Channels
5
Category
#
Select a category.
Multimedia system
361
Selecting a satellite radio channel
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
#
Navigate up or down.
Saving or deleting a satellite radio channel
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
ß Presets
#
Select Store Current Station in the Presets.
Moving a channel
#
Select Options.
#
Select Move Highlighted Station.
#
Select a memory preset.
Deleting a channel
#
Select Delete Highlighted Station.
#
Select a memory preset.
Displaying EPG information for the current
channel
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
Z Options
#
Select EPG Information about Current Chan-
nel.
Setting parental control for radio
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
Z Options
5
Parental Control
#
Activate the function O.
#
Determine a four-digit character sequence
and select ¡.
All channels with adult content are locked.
Unlocking a channel
#
Enter the four-digit character sequence and
select ¡.
All channels with adult content are unlocked.
Music and sport alerts function
This function enables you to program an alert for
your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events.
Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being
played and sport alerts can be saved during a
live game. You can also specify sport alerts via
the menu option. The system then continuously
searches through all the channels. If a match is
found with a stored alert, you will be informed.
Setting music and sport alerts
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
Z Options
5
Alert for Artist, Song & Sporting Event
Setting a music alert
#
Select Add New Alert.
or
#
Select Manage Artist & Song Alerts.
#
Select ¥ Options.
The following options are available:
R
Mark This Entry
R
Unmark This Entry
362
Multimedia system
R
Mark All Entries
R
Unmark All Entries
R
Delete This Entry
R
Delete All Entries
#
Select an option.
#
Activate Artist & Song Alerts O.
The alert is set for the current artist or track.
If a match is found, a prompt appears asking
whether you wish to change to the station.
Setting a sport alert
#
Select Add New Alert.
or
#
Select Manage Sports Alerts.
#
Select Select New Alerts.
or
#
Select Edit Alerts.
#
Select a team from a league.
#
Activate Sports Alerts O.
Information on Smart Favorites and Tune
Start
Stations in the station presets can be added as
Smart Favorites. Smart Favorites stations are
automatically saved to temporary storage in the
background. If you change to a Smart Favorites
station, you can replay, pause or actively skip
forward or back to broadcasts which you have
missed. If Tune Start is activated and you change
to another Smart Favorites station, the music
track currently playing on the station is automat‐
ically restarted from the beginning of the track.
Adding a channel to Smart Favorites
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
#
Select the active frequency band.
#
Highlight an entry.
#
Select ¥.
#
Select Add Highlighted Channel to Smart
Favorites.
Activating/deactivating TuneStart
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Z Options
5
TuneStart
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Controlling playback
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Y Playback Control
You can pause the playback of the current sta‐
tion or skip forward or backward in the timeline.
This leaves live mode to access the internal tem‐
porary storage.
#
To fast forward/rewind: turn the controller
counter-clockwise or clockwise/swipe left or
right on the touchpad.
#
To jump to the previous/next song: press
the controller left or right/swipe left or right
on the touchpad.
#
To pause playback: select Ë.
#
To return to live mode: navigate to the end
of the timeline.
Multimedia system
363
Displaying satellite radio service information
Multimedia system:
4
Radio
5
Þ Radio Source
5
SiriusXM Radio
5
Z Options
#
Select Service Information.
Sound
Tone settings
Information about the sound system
The sound system has a total output of 100 W
and is equipped with seven speakers. It is availa‐
ble for all functions in the radio and media
modes.
Calling up the sound menu
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
The following functions are available:
R
Equalizer
R
Balance and Fader
R
Automatic Volume Adjustment
R
Other Sound Settings
#
Select a sound menu.
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set‐
tings
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Equalizer
#
Select Treble, Mid Range or Bass.
#
Change the settings.
Activating/deactivating automatic volume
adjustment
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Automatic Volume Adjustment
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Adjusting the balance/fader
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Balance and Fader
#
Adjust the balance and fader.
#
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Information about the Burmester
®
surround
sound system
The Burmester
®
surround sound system has a
total output of 590 W and is equipped with 13
speakers. It is available for all functions in the
radio and media modes.
Calling up the sound menu in the
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
The following functions are available:
R
Equalizer
R
Balance and Fader
R
Automatic Volume Adjustment
R
Surround Sound
R
Sound Focus
R
Other Sound Settings
#
Select a function.
364
Multimedia system
Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings
on the Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Equalizer
#
Select Treble, Mid Range or Bass.
#
Set the desired values.
Activating/deactivating volume adjustment
in the Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Automatic Volume Adjustment
Automatic volume adjustment compensates for
differing volumes when changing between audio
sources.
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Adjusting the balance/fader in the
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Balance and Fader
#
Adjust the balance and fader.
#
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Switching surround sound on/off in the
Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Surround Sound
#
Activate O or deactivate ª the function.
Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester
®
surround sound system
Multimedia system:
4
Media
5
à Sound
5
Sound Focus
#
Adjust the sound focus.
Multimedia system
365
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval
display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the
Instrument Display provides information on the
remaining time or distance before the next
service due date.
You can hide this service display using the back
button on the left-hand side of the steering
wheel.
Depending on how the vehicle is used, the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display may
shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following
cases:
R
Mainly short-distance driving
R
When the engine is often left idling for long
periods
R
In the event of frequent cold start phases
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such
operating conditions.
You can obtain information concerning the serv‐
icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Displaying the service due date
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
ASSYST PLUS
The next service due date is displayed.
#
To exit the display: press the back button
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
Be sure to also pay attention to the following
related topic:
R
Operating the on-board computer
(/ page 238).
Information on regular maintenance work
*
NOTE Premature wear through failure to
observe service due dates
Service work which is not carried out at the
right time or incompletely can lead to
increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
#
Always observe the prescribed service
intervals.
#
Always have the prescribed service
work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐
mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work
will need to be performed more often if the vehi‐
cle is operated under arduous conditions or
increased loads.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only
an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi‐
bility as regards to whether maintenance work
needs to be performed more often than speci‐
fied based on the actual operating conditions
and/or loads.
Examples of arduous operating conditions:
R
regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐
ate stops
R
mainly short-distance driving
366
Maintenance and care
R
frequent operation in mountainous terrain or
on poor road surfaces
R
when the engine is often left idling for long
periods
R
operation in particularly dusty conditions
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently
used
In these or similar operating conditions, have the
interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil
and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The
tires must be checked more frequently if the
vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur‐
ther information can be obtained at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
can only calculate the service due date when
the battery is connected.
#
Note down the service due date displayed on
the instrument display before disconnecting
the battery (/ page 366).
Engine compartment
Active hood (pedestrian protection)
Operation of the active hood (pedestrian pro‐
tection)
In certain accident situations, the risk of injury
to pedestrians can be reduced by the actuation
of the active hood. The rear area of the hood is
raised by approximately 3 in (85 mm).
For the drive to the workshop, reset the trig‐
gered active hood yourself. After the active hood
has been triggered, pedestrian protection may
be limited.
A qualified specialist workshop must re-instate
the full functionality of the active hood.
The active hood is not available in all countries.
Resetting the active hood
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
#
With your hand flat, push down active hood
1 in the area around the hinges on both
sides (arrows).
In doing so, the actuator is depressurized
and you may hear a hissing sound.
The engine hood must engage in position.
#
If the active hood can be raised slightly at
the rear in the area of the hinges, repeat the
step until it engages correctly.
Maintenance and care
367
Opening/closing the hood
&
WARNING Risk of accident if the engine
hood is unlatched while driving
An unlocked engine hood may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
#
Never unlatch the engine hood while
driving.
#
Before every trip, ensure that the
engine hood is latched.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
when opening and closing the engine
hood
When opening or closing the engine hood, it
may suddenly drop into the end position.
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the
engine hood's range of movement.
#
Only open or close the engine hood
when there are no persons in the
engine hood's range of movement.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment may continue to move or suddenly
move again even after the ignition has been
switched off, e.g. the cooler fan.
Make sure of the following before performing
tasks in the engine compartment:
#
Switch the ignition off.
#
Never touch the danger zone surround‐
ing moving component parts, e.g. the
rotation area of the fan.
#
Remove jewelry and watches.
#
Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from touching
component parts under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection
system work under high voltage. If you touch
component parts which are under voltage,
you could receive an electric shock.
#
Never touch component parts of the
ignition system or the fuel injection sys‐
tem when the ignition is switched on.
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
368
Maintenance and care
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windshield wipers while the engine hood
is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind‐
shield wipers are set in motion, you can be
trapped by the wiper linkage.
#
Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine
hood.
#
To open: pull lever 1 to release the hood.
#
Push handle 1 of the hood catch upwards
and lift the hood by approximately 15 in
(40 cm).
#
To close: lower the hood and let it fall from a
height of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
#
If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open
the hood again and close it with a little more
force until it engages correctly.
Maintenance and care
369
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil level using the oil
dipstick
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
Requirements:
R
The engine must have an oil dipstick. If not,
the engine oil level can be checked only with
the on-board computer (/ page 370).
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
installed in the engine compartment in different
locations.
The waiting time before checking the oil level
when the engine is at normal operating tempera‐
ture is five minutes.
#
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
#
Pull oil dipstick 1 out and wipe off.
#
Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again after
approximately three seconds.
R
Oil level is correct: oil level is between 2
and 3.
R
Oil level too low: oil level is at 3 or
below.
R
Oil level too high: oil level is above 2.
#
If the oil level is too low, add 1.1 US qt
(1 liter) of engine oil.
#
If the oil level is too high, drain off excess
engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop.
Checking the engine oil level using the on-
board computer
Requirements
The engine oil level is determined during driving.
Determining the engine oil level can take up to
30 minutes with a normal driving style and even
longer with an active driving style.
In order to receive a result as quickly as possi‐
ble:
R
Warm up the engine
R
Park the vehicle on a level surface
R
Leave the engine running at idle speed
370
Maintenance and care
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
Engine Oil Level
You will see one of the following messages on
the multifunction display:
R
Measuring Engine Oil Level...: measurement
of the oil level is not yet possible.
#
Repeat the request after a maximum of 30
minutes' driving.
R
Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for
indicating the oil level on the multifunction
display is green and is between "min" and
"max": the oil level is correct.
R
Engine Oil Level Add 1.0 l and the bar display
for indicating the oil level on the multifunc‐
tion display is orange and is below "min":
#
Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil.
R
Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar display
for indicating the oil level on the multifunc‐
tion display is orange and is above "max":
#
Drain off any excess engine oil that has been
added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist
workshop.
R
For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On:
#
Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil
level.
R
Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: sensor
faulty or not inserted.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
R
Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail.:
#
Close the hood.
Refilling engine oil
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
&
WARNING Risk of fire and injury from
engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
component parts in the engine compart‐
ment, it may ignite.
#
Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the filler opening.
#
Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐
oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐
nent parts before starting the vehicle.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
tives
#
Do not use engine oils or oil filters
which do not correspond to the specifi‐
cations explicitly prescribed for the
service intervals.
#
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
than prescribed.
#
Do not use additives.
Maintenance and care
371
#
Follow the instructions in the service
interval display regarding the oil
change.
*
NOTE Damage caused by refilling too
much engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the engine
or the catalytic converter.
#
Have excess engine oil removed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
#
Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove
it.
#
Add engine oil.
#
Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
#
Check the oil level again (/ page 370).
Checking coolant level
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.
372
Maintenance and care
&
WARNING Risk of scalding from hot
coolant
The engine cooling system is pressurized,
particularly when the engine is warm. If you
open the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out.
#
Let the engine cool down before open‐
ing the cap.
#
When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safety glasses.
#
Open the cap slowly to release pres‐
sure.
#
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
#
Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be in the bot‐
tom quarter of the temperature display.
#
Slowly turn cap 1 counter-clockwise to
relieve overpressure.
#
Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise
and remove it.
The coolant level is correct in the following
cases:
R
if the engine is cold, up to marker bar 2
R
if the engine is warm, up to 0.6 in (1.5 cm)
over marker bar 2
#
If necessary, add coolant that has been
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Further information on coolant
(/ page 443).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer system
&
WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart‐
ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
Maintenance and care
373
#
Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in
the following.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when open‐
ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has
overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
partment, keep the hood closed and
call the fire service.
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
contact with hot engine component parts or
the exhaust system.
#
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler
opening.
#
Remove cap 1 by the tab.
#
Add washer fluid.
Keeping the air-water duct free
#
Keep the area between the hood and the
windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow
and leaves.
Cleaning and care
Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
reduced braking effect after washing the
vehicle
The braking effect is reduced after washing
the vehicle.
#
After the vehicle has been washed,
brake carefully while paying attention to
the traffic conditions until the braking
effect has been fully restored.
374
Maintenance and care
*
NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car
wash
#
Before driving into a car wash make
sure that the car wash is suitable for
the vehicle dimensions.
#
Ensure there is sufficient ground clear‐
ance between the underbody and the
guide rails of the car wash.
#
Ensure that the clearance width of the
car wash, in particular the width of the
guide rails, is sufficient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a
car wash, ensure the following beforehand:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function are deactivated.
R
The 360° Camera or the rear view camera is
switched off.
R
The side windows and sliding sunroof are
completely closed.
R
The blower for the ventilation/heating is
switched off.
R
The windshield wiper switch is in position
g.
R
The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle, otherwise
the tailgate could open unintentionally.
R
In car washes with a conveyor system: neu‐
tral i is engaged.
%
In car washes with a conveyor system: if you
would like to leave the vehicle while it is
being washed, make sure the SmartKey is
located in the vehicle. The park position j
is otherwise automatically engaged.
%
If, after the car wash, you remove the wax
from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this
will prevent smearing and reduce wiper
noise.
Information on using a power washer
&
WARNING Risk of accident when using
high-pressure cleaning equipment with
round-spray nozzles
The water jet from a round-spray nozzle (dirt
grinder) may cause damage to tires and sus‐
pension components that is not visible.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly.
#
Do not use high-pressure cleaning
equipment with round-spray nozzles to
clean your vehicle.
#
Damaged tires or suspension compo‐
nents must be replaced immediately.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐
lowing when using a power washer:
R
Keep the SmartKey at least 10 ft (3 m) away
from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate
could open unintentionally.
R
Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in
(30 cm) to the vehicle.
Maintenance and care
375
R
Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil.
Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in
(70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the
vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer.
Move the power washer nozzle around whilst
cleaning. The water temperature of the
power washer must not exceed 124 °F
(60 °C).
R
Observe the information on the correct dis‐
tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐
ating instructions.
R
Do not point the nozzle of the power washer
directly at sensitive parts such as tires, slits,
electrical components, batteries, light bulbs
and ventilation slots.
Washing the vehicle by hand
Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number
of countries, washing by hand is only permitted
in specially designated wash bays.
#
Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
#
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using
a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not
expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
#
Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and
dry using a chamois. Take care not to point
the water jet directly towards the air inlet
grille below the hood.
376
Maintenance and care
Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care
Observe the following information:
Cleaning and careAvoiding paintwork damage
Paintwork
R
Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the
treated areas afterwards.
R
Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R
Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gen‐
tly with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
R
Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and
clean water.
R
Tar stains: use tar remover.
R
Wax: use silicone remover.
R
Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.
R
Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
Maintenance and care
377
Cleaning and careAvoiding paintwork damage
Matte finish
Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels.
R
Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engi‐
neering standards.
R
Do not use car wash programs with a final hot wax treat‐
ment.
R
Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products,
gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
R
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Notes on cleaning decorative foils
Observe the notes on matte finish care in the
chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint‐
work care" (/ page 377). They also apply to
matte decorative foils.
378
Maintenance and care
Observe the following information:
Cleaning Avoiding damage to the decorative foil
R
For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without
additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
R
Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing
too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil
irreparably.
R
If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative foil is dull: use the
Paint Cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated
areas afterwards.
R
Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
R
To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft,
absorbent cloth after every car wash.
R
The service life and color of decorative foils are impaired by:
-
Sunlight
-
Temperature, e.g. hot air blower
-
Weather conditions
-
Stone chippings and dirt
-
Chemical cleaning agents
-
Oily products
R
Do not use polish on matte decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect
of shining the foil-wrapped surface.
R
Do not treat matte or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent
stains may occur.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care
cannot always be completely repaired. In such
cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
You can obtain more information on care and
cleaning products from the manufacturer.
In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif‐
ferences may occur between the surfaces that
were not protected by a decorative foil after
removing a decorative foil.
%
Have work or repairs to decorative foils car‐
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. in an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Maintenance and care
379
Notes on care of vehicle parts
&
WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
windshield wipers are switched on while
the windshield is being cleaned
If the windshield wipers are set in motion
while you are cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the
wiper arm.
#
Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades.
&
WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐
pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could
burn yourself.
#
Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and
supervise children especially closely in
this area.
#
Allow vehicle parts to cool down before
touching them.
Observe the following information:
Notes on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Wheels/rims
Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners.
R
Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust.
This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
R
To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brakepads, drive
the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking
it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out.
Windows
Clean windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with
a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning
agents to clean the inside of windows.
Wiper blades
Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth.Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
380
Maintenance and care
Notes on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Exterior lighting
Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent,
e.g. car shampoo.
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable
for plastic lenses.
AIRPANEL
If the vehicle is very dusty or there are salt deposits in the
AIRPANEL mechanics, the adjustment range of the shutters in
the radiator grill may be restricted.
R
Switch on the ignition, and the shutters open automati‐
cally after approximately 120 seconds.
R
Clean the bearing points of the shutters with a power
washer.
When using a power washer, maintain a minimum distance of
11.8 in (30 cm).
Sensors
Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in the
radiator grill with a soft cloth and car shampoo.
When using a power washer, maintain a minimum distance of
11.8 in (30 cm).
Rear view camera
and 360° Camera
R
Open the camera cover with the multimedia sys‐
tem(/ page 221) .
R
Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens.
Do not use a power washer.
Tailpipes
Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-
Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle.
Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
Maintenance and care
381
Notes on care of the interior
&
WARNING Risk of injury from plastic
parts breaking off after the use of sol‐
vent-based care products
Care and cleaning products containing sol‐
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous.
When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts
may break away.
#
Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐
ucts containing solvents to clean the
cockpit.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or death from
bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely
weaken them.
This can, for example, cause seat belts to
tear or fail in an accident.
#
Never bleach or dye seat belts.
Observe the following information:
Cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Seat belts
Clean with lukewarm and soapy water.
R
Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
R
Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 176 °F
(80 °C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display
Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and a suit‐
able display care product (TFT/LCD).
R
Switch off the display and let it cool down.
R
Do not use any other cleaning products.
Plastic trim
R
Clean with a damp microfiber cloth.
R
For heavy soiling: use care product recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
R
Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.
R
Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to
come in contact with the plastic trim.
382
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage
Real wood/trim ele‐
ments
R
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
R
Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and
soapy water.
R
For heavy soiling: use care product recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.
Headliner
Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet
Use carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
Genuine leather
seat covers
R
Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth.
R
Leather care: use leather care agents that have been rec‐
ommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R
Do not use a microfiber cloth.
DINAMICA seat cov‐
ers
Clean with a damp cloth.Do not use a microfiber cloth.
Imitation leather
seat covers
Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. Do not use a microfiber cloth.
Cloth seat covers
Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1% soapy water and
allow to dry.
Maintenance and care
383
Emergency
Removing the safety vest
The safety vests are located in the safety vest
compartments in the driver's and front
passenger door stowage compartments.
#
To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by
loop 2.
#
Open safety vest bag 1 and pull out the
safety vest.
%
There are also safety vest compartments in
the rear door stowage compartments in
which safety vests can be stored.
1
Maximum number of washes
2
Maximum wash temperature
3
Do not bleach
4
Do not iron
5
Do not tumble dry
6
Do not dry clean
7
Class 2 safety vest
The requirements defined by the legal standard
are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct
size and is fully closed.
The safety vest must be replaced in the following
situations:
R
the reflective strips are damaged or dirty
R
the maximum permissible number of washes
is exceeded
R
the fluorescence has faded
Flat tire
Notes on flat tires
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat
tire
A flat tire severely affects the driving charac‐
teristics as well as the steering and braking
of the vehicle.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
#
Do not drive on with a flat tire.
#
Change the flat tire immediately with an
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel.
384
Breakdown assistance
Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
#
Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat
tires).
In the event of a flat tire, the following options
are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐
ment:
R
Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos‐
sible to continue the journey for a short
period of time. Make sure you observe the
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)
(/ page 385).
R
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair
the tire so that it is possible to continue the
journey for a short period of time. To do this,
use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 386).
R
Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you
can make a call for breakdown assistance via
the overhead control panel in the case of a
breakdown (/ page 332).
R
All vehicles: change the wheel
(/ page 428).
%
The emergency spare wheel is only available
in certain countries.
Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire)
&
WARNING Risk of accident when driving
in emergency mode
When driving in emergency mode, the han‐
dling characteristics are impaired. e.g. when
cornering, when accelerating strongly and
when braking.
#
Do not exceed the permissible maxi‐
mum speed for MOExtended tires.
#
Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
maneuvers as well as driving over
obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road).
This applies, in particular, to a loaded
vehicle.
#
Stop driving in the emergency mode if
you notice:
R
banging noise
R
vehicle vibration
R
smoke which smells like rubber
R
continuous ESP
®
intervention
R
cracks in tire side walls
#
After driving in emergency mode have
the rims checked by a qualified special‐
ist workshop with regard to their further
use.
#
The defective tire must be replaced in
every case.
With MOExtended tires (run-flat tire), you can
continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a
total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How‐
ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly
visible damage.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the side
wall of the tire.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐
Breakdown assistance
385
junction with an activated tire pressure monitor‐
ing system.
If a pressure loss warning message appears in
the multifunction display, proceed as follows:
R
Check the tire for damage.
R
If driving on, observe the following notes.
Driving distance possible in emergency
mode after the pressure loss warning:
Load condition Driving distance pos‐
sible in emergency
mode
Partially laden 50 miles (80 km)
Fully laden 19 miles (30 km)
The driving distance possible in emergency
mode may vary depending on the driving style.
Observe the maximum permissible speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand‐
ard tire as a temporary measure.
TIREFIT kit storage location
The TIREFIT kit is located under the cargo com‐
partment floor.
1
Tire inflation compressor
2
Tire sealant bottle
Using the TIREFIT kit
Requirements:
R
Tire sealant bottle and tire inflation compres‐
sor (/ page 386).
R
TIREFIT sticker
R
Gloves (depending on the vehicle equipment)
You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora‐
tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly
those in the tire contact surface. You can use
TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F
(-20 °C).
&
WARNING Risk of accident when using
tire sealant
In the following situations in particular, the
tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient
breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal
the tire properly:
R
There are cuts or punctures in the tire
larger than those previously mentioned.
R
The wheel rim is damaged.
R
You have driven at very low tire pressure
or on a flat tire.
#
Do not drive on.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
386
Breakdown assistance
&
WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning
from tire sealant
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita‐
tion. Do not allow it to come into contact
with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not
swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes.
Keep the tire sealant away from children.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
#
Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately using water.
#
If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐
oughly rinse out the eyes using clean
water.
#
If tire sealant has been swallowed,
immediately rinse out the mouth thor‐
oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting and seek medical
attention immediately.
#
Change out of any clothes contamina‐
ted with tire sealant immediately.
#
If allergic reactions occur, seek medical
attention immediately.
*
NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐
tion compressor running too long
#
Do not run the tire inflation compressor
for longer than ten minutes without
interruption.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on
the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop every five years.
#
Do not remove any foreign objects which
have entered the tire.
#
Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
#
Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the faulty tire.
#
Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out
of the tire inflation compressor housing.
Breakdown assistance
387
#
Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of
tire sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages.
#
Place tire sealant bottle 1 head downwards
into recess 2 of the tire inflation compres‐
sor.
#
Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the
faulty tire.
#
Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7.
#
Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle.
#
Switch on the ignition.
#
Press on and off switch 3 on the tire infla‐
tion compressor.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum‐
ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly
rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation compres‐
sor during this phase.
#
Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes.
The tire should then have attained a tire
pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the
affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐
ble to use clean water.
If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐
lene.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been
attained:
#
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
#
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Please note that tire sealant may leak out when
unscrewing the filling hose.
#
Drive forwards or reverse very slowly for
approximately 33 ft (10 m).
#
Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes the tire
pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specified tire pressure not being ach‐
ieved
If the specified tire pressure is not achieved
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance.
388
Breakdown assistance
Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too
low can significantly impair braking and han‐
dling characteristics.
#
Do not drive on.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:
#
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
#
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from driving
with sealed tires
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds.
#
Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
#
Do not exceed the maximum speed
limit with a tire that has been repaired
using tire sealant.
#
Observe the maximum permissible speed for
a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph
(80 km/h).
#
Affix the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker
to the instrument cluster in a location where
it will be easily seen by the driver.
*
NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire
sealant
After use, excess tire sealant may leak out
from the filling hose.
#
Therefore, place the filling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
kit.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
sponsible disposal
Tire sealant contains pollutants.
#
Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
#
Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla‐
tion compressor.
#
Pull away immediately.
#
Stop driving after approximately ten minutes
and check the tire pressure using the tire
inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specified tire pressure not being reached
If the specified tire pressure is not reached
after a brief drive, the tire is too badly dam‐
aged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire
in this instance.
Damaged tires and tire pressure that is too
low can significantly impair the braking prop‐
erties and the handling characteristics.
#
Do not continue driving.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
In cases such as the one mentioned above, con‐
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or
Breakdown assistance
389
call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
#
Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar
on the driver's side or the tire pressure table
in the fuel filler flap for values.
#
To increase the tire pressure: switch on
the tire inflation compressor.
#
To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure
release button 1 next to manometer 2.
#
When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew
the filling hose from the valve of the sealed
tire.
#
Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the
sealed tire.
#
Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire
inflation compressor.
The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot‐
tle.
#
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐
shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle
and filling hose replaced there.
Battery (vehicle)
Notes on the 12 V battery
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to
work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐
tery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This
can lead to function restrictions in safety-rel‐
evant systems, for example the lighting sys‐
tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program). The operating
safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations:
R
when braking
R
in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
#
In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐
lar incident, contact a qualified special‐
ist workshop immediately.
#
Do not continue driving.
#
Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
R
Further information on ABS (/ page 181)
R
Further information on ESP
®
(/ page 182)
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you only use batteries which have been tes‐
ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
390
Breakdown assistance
Benz. These batteries provide increased impact
protection to prevent vehicle occupants from
suffering acid burns should the battery be dam‐
aged in the event of an accident.
All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
ion battery
&
WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐
trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can cause sparks which
may ignite the highly flammable gas mixture
in the battery.
#
To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal
vehicle body before handling the bat‐
tery.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created
while the battery is charging and during starting
assistance.
&
WARNING Danger of chemical burns
from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic.
#
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
#
Do not lean over the battery.
#
Do not inhale battery gases.
#
Keep children away from the battery.
#
Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐
oughly with plenty of clean water and
seek medical attention immediately.
All vehicles
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by improper disposal of
batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con‐
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective
measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery.
Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐
sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes
or clothing. Wear suitable protective
clothing, in particular gloves, an
Breakdown assistance
391
apron and a face mask. Immediately
rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off
with clean water. Consult a doctor if
necessary.
Wear safety glasses.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
Observe the following if you do not intend to use
the vehicle over an extended period of time:
R
Activate standby mode.
R
Alternatively: connect the battery to a bat‐
tery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or
consult a qualified specialist workshop to
disconnect the battery.
Notes on starting assistance and on charg‐
ing the 12 V battery
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery
When charging the battery and during starting
assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐
tion point in the engine compartment.
*
NOTE Damaging the battery through
overvoltage
When charging using a battery charger with‐
out a maximum charging voltage, the battery
or the vehicle electronics may be damaged.
#
Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
All other vehicles
When charging the battery and during starting
assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐
tion point in the engine compartment.
*
NOTE Damaging the battery through
overvoltage
When charging using a battery charger with‐
out a maximum charging voltage, the battery
or the vehicle electronics may be damaged.
#
Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
&
WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐
gen gas igniting
A battery generates hydrogen gas during the
charging process. If there is a short circuit or
sparks start to form, there is a danger of the
hydrogen gas igniting.
#
Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come
into contact with vehicle parts.
#
Never place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
#
When connecting and disconnecting the
battery, you must observe the descri‐
bed order for the battery clamps.
392
Breakdown assistance
#
When giving starting assistance, always
make sure that you only connect bat‐
tery terminals with identical polarity.
#
During starting assistance, you must
observe the described order for con‐
necting and disconnecting the jumper
cables.
#
Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐
tery clamps while the engine is running.
&
WARNING Risk of explosion during
charging process and starting assistance
During the charging process and starting
assistance, the battery may release an explo‐
sive gas mixture.
#
Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks
and smoking.
#
Make sure that there is sufficient venti‐
lation during the charging process and
during starting assistance.
#
Do not lean over a battery.
&
WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐
zen battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐
tures slightly above or below freezing point.
During starting assistance or battery charg‐
ing, battery gas may be released.
#
Always thaw a frozen battery out first
before charging it or performing start‐
ing assistance.
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument
cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is
very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐
zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the
vehicle nor charge the battery.
The service life of a battery that has been
thawed may be dramatically shortened. The
starting characteristics may be impaired, espe‐
cially at low temperatures.
It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐
tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
All vehicles
*
NOTE Damage caused by numerous or
extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the
engine may damage the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel.
#
Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
Observe the following points during starting
assistance and when charging the battery:
R
Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg‐
ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and
insulated terminal clamps.
R
Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
must not come into contact with other metal
parts while the jumper cable/charging cable
is connected to the battery/jump-start con‐
nection point.
R
The jumper cable/charging cable must not
come into contact with any parts which may
move when the engine is running.
Breakdown assistance
393
R
Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged.
R
Keep away from fire and open flames.
R
Do not lean over the battery.
Observe the additional following points when
charging the battery:
R
Only use battery chargers tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R
Read the battery charger's operating instruc‐
tions before charging the battery.
Observe the additional following points during
starting assistance:
R
Starting assistance may be performed using
only batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
R
The vehicles must not touch.
R
Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Jump-
start the vehicle only when the engine and
exhaust system are cold.
Starting assistance and charging the 12 V
battery
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐
ing brake.
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The transmission is in position j.
R
The ignition and all electrical consumers are
switched off.
R
The hood is open.
Example: engine compartment
#
Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the
jump-starting connection point in the direc‐
tion of the arrow.
#
Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to
the positive pole of the donor battery using
the jumper cable/charging cable. Always
394
Breakdown assistance
begin with positive clamp 2 on your own
vehicle first.
#
During starting assistance: start the
engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle
speed.
#
Connect the negative pole of the donor bat‐
tery and ground point 3 of your own vehicle
by using the jumper cable/charging cable.
Begin with the donor battery first.
#
During starting assistance: start the
engine of your own vehicle.
#
During the charging process: start the
charging process.
#
During starting assistance: let the engines
run for several minutes.
#
During starting assistance: before discon‐
necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec‐
trical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the
rear window heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance/charging process
is complete, perform the following steps:
#
First, remove the jumper cable/charging
cable from ground point 3 and the negative
pole of the donor battery, then from positive
clamp 2 and the positive pole of the donor
battery. Begin each time with the contacts
on your own vehicle first.
#
After removing the jumper cable/charging
cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2.
Further information can be obtained at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.
Replacing the 12 V battery
#
Observe the notes on the 12 V battery
(/ page 390).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Observe the following notes if you want to
replace the battery yourself:
R
Always replace a faulty battery with a battery
which meets the specific vehicle require‐
ments.
The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol‐
ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith‐
ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is
only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith‐
ium-ion battery. For safety reasons,
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use batteries which have been tested and
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
R
Carry over detachable parts, such as vent
hoses, elbow fitting or terminal covers from
the battery being replaced.
R
Make sure that the vent hose is always con‐
nected to the original opening on the side of
the battery.
Install any existing or supplied cell caps.
Otherwise, gases or battery acid could
escape.
R
Make sure that detachable parts are recon‐
nected in the same way.
Breakdown assistance
395
Tow starting or towing away
Permitted towing methods
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
towing it away.
For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both
axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys‐
tems.
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐
ing away incorrectly
#
Observe the instructions and notes on
towing away.
Permitted towing methods
Vehicle equipment/towing
method
Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised
Vehicles with automatic transmis‐
sion
Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at
31 mph (50 km/h)
No Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in
the center position with a steering
wheel lock.
4MATIC vehicles Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at
31 mph (50 km/h)
No No
To tow with a raised axle: towing should be
performed by a towing company.
396
Breakdown assistance
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the
ground
#
Observe the notes on the permitted towing
methods (/ page 396).
#
Make sure that the battery is connected and
charged.
Observe the following points when the battery is
discharged:
R
The engine cannot be started
R
The electric parking brake cannot be
released or applied
R
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The automatic transmission cannot be shif‐
ted to position i or j.
%
Vehicles with automatic transmission: If
the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐
ted to position i, or the multifunction dis‐
play in the instrument cluster does not show
anything, have the vehicle transported away
(/ page 398). A towing vehicle with lifting
equipment is required for vehicle transporta‐
tion.
*
NOTE Damage due to towing away at
excessively high speeds or over long dis‐
tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐
ing at excessively high speeds or over long
distances.
#
A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)
must not be exceeded.
#
A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)
must not be exceeded.
&
WARNING Risk of accident when towing
a vehicle which is too heavy
If the vehicle being tow-started or towed
away is heavier than the permissible gross
mass of your vehicle, the following situations
can occur:
R
The towing eye may become detached.
R
The vehicle/trailer combination may
swerve or even overturn.
#
If another vehicle is tow-started or
towed away, its weight must not exceed
the permissible gross mass of your own
vehicle.
If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away,
its permissible gross weight must not exceed the
permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle.
#
Information on the permissible gross mass of
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden‐
tification plate (/ page 437).
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do
not open the driver's door or front passenger
door, otherwise the automatic transmission
automatically shifts to position j.
#
Install the towing eye (/ page 400).
#
Fasten the tow bar.
*
NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐
tion of the tow bar
#
Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to
the towing eyes.
#
Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism
(/ page 72).
Breakdown assistance
397
#
Do not activate the HOLD function.
#
Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 91).
#
Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 191).
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
#
Release the electric parking brake.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐
ted safety-related functions during the
towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐
ger available in the following situations:
R
the ignition is switched off.
R
the brake system or power steering sys‐
tem is malfunctioning.
R
the energy supply or the on-board electri‐
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is then towed away, signif‐
icantly more effort may be required to steer
and brake than is normally required.
#
Use a tow bar.
#
Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely, before towing the vehicle
away.
*
NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive
power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power
may be too high and the vehicles could be
damaged.
#
Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport
#
Observe the notes on towing away
(/ page 397).
#
Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in
order to load the vehicle.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
%
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The automatic transmission may be locked
in position j in the event of damage to the
electrical system. To shift to i, provide the
on-board electrical system with power
(/ page 394).
#
Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
#
Use the electric parking brake to secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
#
Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping
System PLUS)
&
WARNING Risk of an accident when
transporting vehicles with Adaptive
Damping System PLUS
The reduced damping forces on the vehicle
being transported can cause the vehicle/
trailer combination to start to swing.
398
Breakdown assistance
As a result, when transporting vehicles with
the Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the
vehicle/trailer combination may start to skid.
Consequently, you could lose control of your
vehicle.
#
When transporting, ensure that:
R
The vehicle has been loaded onto
the transporter correctly
R
The vehicle is secured at all four
wheels with suitable tensioning
straps
R
The maximum permissible speed of
35 mph (60 km/h) is not exceeded
when transporting
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur‐
ing it incorrectly
#
After loading, the vehicle must be
secured on all four wheels. Otherwise,
the vehicle could be damaged.
#
A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm)
upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards
must be kept to the transport platform.
#
Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after
loading.
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic
transmission
#
Make sure that the front and rear axles come
to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
*
NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to
incorrect positioning
#
Do not position the vehicle above the
connection point of the transport vehi‐
cle.
Towing eye storage location
Towing eye 1 is attached to the edge of the
cargo compartment under the cargo compart‐
ment floor.
Vehicles with folding bench seat: the towing
eye is located under a cover.
Breakdown assistance
399
Installing the towing eye
#
Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and
remove.
#
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten.
%
Make sure that cover 1 engages in the
bumper when you remove the towing eye.
*
NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to
incorrect use of the towing eye
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐
cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc‐
ess.
#
Only use the towing eye to tow away or
tow start the vehicle.
Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine
start)
Vehicles with automatic transmission
*
NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐
mission due to tow starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged
in the process of tow starting vehicles with
automatic transmission.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow started.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started.
Electrical fuses
Notes on electrical fuses
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher
amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐
ded.
This could result in a fire.
#
Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐
fied new fuses containing the correct
amperage.
*
NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses
Electrical components or systems may be
damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func‐
tionality may be significantly impaired.
#
Only use fuses that have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz and which have the
correct fuse rating.
400
Breakdown assistance
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognize by the
color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and fur‐
ther information to be observed can be found in
the fuse assignment diagram.
Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in
the cargo compartment (/ page 403).
*
NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused
by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical
system or cause it to malfunction.
#
When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse
box.
#
When closing the fuse box, make sure
that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐
rectly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐
ist workshop.
Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:
R
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
R
All electrical consumers are switched off.
R
The ignition is switched off.
The electrical fuses are located in various fuse
boxes:
R
Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
driver's side (/ page 401)
R
Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit
(/ page 402)
R
Fuse box in the front passenger footwell
(/ page 402)
R
Fuse box in the cargo compartment on the
right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel (/ page 403)
Opening and closing the fuse box in the
engine compartment
Requirements:
R
A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 400).
Opening
&
WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windshield wipers while the engine hood
is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind‐
shield wipers are set in motion, you can be
trapped by the wiper linkage.
#
Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine
hood.
Breakdown assistance
401
#
Turn clips 2 on cover 1 counter-clockwise
a quarter-turn.
#
Pull cover 1 upwards in the direction of the
arrow.
#
Remove any existing moisture from the fuse
box using a dry cloth.
#
Loosen screws 4, remove fuse box lid 3
from the top.
Closing
#
Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐
rectly in lid 3.
#
Insert lid 3 into the bracket at the rear of
the fuse box.
#
Fold down lid 3 of the fuse box and tighten
screws 4.
#
Insert cover 1 on both sides.
#
Turn clips 2 on cover 1 clockwise a quar‐
ter-turn.
#
Close the hood.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the
cockpit
The fuse box is on the side of the dashboard
under a cover.
#
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐
ter for further information.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front
passenger footwell
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 400).
402
Breakdown assistance
#
Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the
cargo compartment
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 400).
#
Fold down the side cover.
#
Fold cover 2 down in the direction of the
arrow.
#
Remove cover 1.
The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on
the side of the fuse box.
Breakdown assistance
403
Notes on noise or unusual handling charac‐
teristics
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling
to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or
tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is
defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible to check the
wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire dam‐
age could also be causing the unusual handling
characteristics. If you find no signs of damage,
have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
tires
&
WARNING Risk of accident from dam‐
aged tires
Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss.
As a result, you could lose control of your
vehicle.
#
Check the tires regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tires
immediately.
&
WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to
insufficient tire tread
Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced
tire grip. The tire tread is no longer able to
dissipate water.
This means that in heavy rain or slush the
risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particu‐
lar if vehicle speed is not adapted to suit the
conditions.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low,
tires may exhibit different levels of wear at
different locations on the tire contact sur‐
face.
#
Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the tire
contact surface across the entire width
of all tires.
Minimum tread depth for:
R
Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
R
M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
#
For safety reasons, replace the tires
before the legally prescribed limit for
the minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐
ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g.
prior to a long journey or driving off-road:
R
Check the tire pressure (/ page 406).
R
Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage.
R
Check the valve caps.
The valves must be protected against mois‐
ture and dirt by the valve caps approved
especially for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
R
Visual check of the tire tread depth and the
tire contact surface across the entire width.
The minimum tread depth for summer tires is
â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in
(4 mm).
404
Wheels and tires
Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators
(arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They
are visible once a tread depth of approximately
á in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
Notes on snow chains
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect mounting of snow chains
If you have mounted snow chains to the front
wheels, the snow chains may drag against
the vehicle body or chassis components.
This could cause damage to the vehicle or
the tires.
#
Never mount snow chains on the front
wheels.
#
Only mount snow chains on the rear
wheels in pairs.
*
NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from
mounted snow chains
If snow chains are mounted to steel wheels,
the wheel trims can be damaged.
#
Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
before mounting snow chains.
Observe the following notes when using snow
chains:
R
Snow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain
information about this from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
R
For safety reasons, only use snow chains that
have been specifically approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains
with the same quality standard.
R
If snow chains are mounted, the maximum
permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
R
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do
not use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are mounted.
R
Vehicles with level control: If snow chains
are mounted, only drive at raised vehicle
level.
%
You can deactivate ESP
®
to pull away
(/ page 186). This allows the wheels to
spin, achieving an increased driving force.
Wheels and tires
405
Tire pressure
Notes on tire pressure
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
ficient or excessive tire pressure
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
R
The tires may burst, especially as the
load and vehicle speed increase.
R
The tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
The driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
#
Comply with the recommended tire
pressure and check the tire pressure of
all tires including the spare wheel regu‐
larly:
R
at least once a month
R
when the load changes
R
before embarking on a longer journey
R
if operating conditions change, e.g. off-
road driving
#
Adjust the tire pressure as necessary.
Tire pressure which is too high or too low can:
R
Shorten the service life of the tires.
R
Cause increased tire damage.
R
Adversely affect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to
insufficient tire pressure
Tires with pressure that is too low can over‐
heat and burst as a result.
In addition, they also suffer from excessive
and/or irregular wear, which can significantly
impair the braking properties and the han‐
dling characteristics.
#
Avoid excessively low tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Tire pressure which is too low can cause:
R
Tire defects as a result of overheating.
R
Impaired handling characteristics.
R
Irregular wear.
R
Increased fuel consumption.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from exces‐
sive tire pressure
Tires with excessively high pressure can
burst because they are damaged more easily
by highway fill, pot holes etc.
In addition, they also suffer from irregular
wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐
ing properties and the handling characteris‐
tics.
#
Avoid excessively high tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Tire pressure which is too high can cause:
R
Increased braking distance.
R
Impaired handling characteristics.
R
Irregular wear.
406
Wheels and tires
R
Impaired driving comfort.
R
Susceptibility to damage.
&
WARNING Risk of accident caused by
repeated drop in tire pressure
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged.
Insufficient tire pressure can cause the tires
to burst.
#
Inspect the tire for signs of foreign
objects.
#
Check whether the wheel or valve has a
leak.
#
If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
You can find information on tire pressure for the
vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following
labels:
R
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 412).
R
Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (/ page 407).
Observe the maximum tire pressure
(/ page 418).
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
pressure.
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem: You can also check the tire pressure using
the on-board computer.
Only correct tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Conditions for cold tires:
R
The vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
R
The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
A rise in the tire temperature of 18 °F (10 °C)
increases the tire pressure by approx. 10 kPa
(0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when
checking the tire pressure of warm tires.
The tire pressure recommended for increased
load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect
the ride comfort.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
unsuitable accessories on tire valve
If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause a loss of tire
pressure. Aftermarket tire pressure monitor‐
ing systems will cause the tire valve to
remain open, depending on the design. This
can also result in a loss of tire pressure.
#
Only screw standard valve caps or valve
caps specifically approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto
the tire valve.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
%
The data shown in the images is example
data.
Wheels and tires
407
The tire pressure table shows the recommended
tire pressure for all tires approved for this vehi‐
cle. The recommended tire pressures apply for
cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e.
loading and/or speed of the vehicle.
If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure,
the tire pressure information following is only
valid for those tire sizes.
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in the table for different num‐
bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The
actual number of seats may differ from this.
Some tire pressure tables only show the rim
diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and
can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 419).
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 406)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 412)
R
Maximum tire pressure (/ page 418)
Checking tire pressures manually
#
Read the tire pressure for the current operat‐
ing conditions from the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure
table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.
#
Remove the valve cap of the tire to be
checked.
#
Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
#
Read the tire pressure.
#
If the tire pressure is lower than the recom‐
mended value, increase the tire pressure to
the recommended value.
#
If the tire pressure is higher than the recom‐
mended value, release air. To do so, press
down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using
the tip of a pen for example. Then check the
tire pressure again using the tire pressure
gauge.
#
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
408
Wheels and tires
Further related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 406)
R
Tire pressure table (/ page 407)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 412)
Tire pressure monitoring system
Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem
&
DANGER Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect tire pressure
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommen‐
ded by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehi‐
cle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than
the size indicated on the vehicle placard or
the tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor‐
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu‐
minates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi‐
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han‐
dling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys‐
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illumina‐
ted, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea‐
sons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi‐
cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replace‐
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The system checks the tire pressure and the tire
temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle
by means of a tire pressure sensor.
Wheels and tires
409
New tire pressure sensor, e.g. in winter tires, are
automatically taught-in during the first journey
they are used.
The tire pressure and the tire temperature
appear in the multifunction display
(/ page 410).
If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the
tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned
in the following ways:
R
via display messages (/ page 489)
R
via the h warning lamp in the instrument
cluster (/ page 508)
The tire pressure monitoring system is only an
aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure
suitable for the operating situation. Set the tire
pressure for cold tires using a tire pressure
gauge. Note that the correct tire pressure for the
current operating situation must first be taught-
in to the tire pressure monitoring system.
In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem will automatically update the new reference
values after you have changed the tire pressure.
You can, however, also update the reference val‐
ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring
system manually (/ page 411).
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
R
the tire pressure has been set incorrectly
R
there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
example, by a foreign object penetrating the
tire
R
there is a malfunction caused by another
radio signal source
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R
notes on tire pressure (/ page 406)
Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres‐
sure monitoring system
Requirements:
R
The ignition is switched on.
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
Tires
One of the following displays appears:
R
Current tire pressure and tire temperature of
the individual wheels:
R
Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a
few minutes
R
Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in
process of the system is not yet complete.
The tire pressures are already being moni‐
tored.
#
Compare the tire pressure with the recom‐
mended tire pressure for the current operat‐
410
Wheels and tires
ing condition (/ page 407). Observe the
notes on tire temperature (/ page 406).
%
The values displayed in the multifunction dis‐
play may deviate from those of the tire pres‐
sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high
altitudes, the tire pressure value indicated by
a pressure gauge are higher than those
shown by the on-board computer. In this
case, do not reduce the tire pressure.
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 406)
Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem
Requirements:
R
The recommended tire pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on
each of the four wheels (/ page 406).
Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in
the following situations:
R
The tire pressure has changed.
R
The wheels or tires have been changed or
newly installed.
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
Tires
#
Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
The Use Current Pressures as New Refer-
ence Values? message is shown in the multi‐
function display.
#
To begin restart, press Touch Control on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is
shown in the multifunction display.
Current warning messages are deleted and
the yellow h warning lamp goes out.
After you have been driving for a few
minutes, the system checks whether the cur‐
rent tire pressures are within the specified
range. The current tire pressures are then
accepted as reference values and monitored.
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 406)
Radio-equipment approval of the tire pres‐
sure monitoring system
Radio equipment approval numbers
CountryRadio equipment approval
number
Canada IC: 2546A-AG5SP4
Wheels and tires
411
Country Radio equipment approval
number
USAFCC ID: MRXAG5SP4
FCC ID: MRXMFR
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two con‐
ditions:
(1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
CAUTION:
Any changes or modification not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to oper‐
ate this equipment.
Further information on the declaration of con‐
formity for wireless vehicle components
(/ page 25).
Loading the vehicle
Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac‐
ard
&
WARNING Risk of accident from overloa‐
ded tires
Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a
consequence. Overloaded tires can also
impair the steering and handling characteris‐
tics and lead to brake failure.
#
Observe the load-bearing capacity of
the tires.
#
The load-bearing capacity must be at
least half the gross axle weight rating of
the vehicle.
#
Never overload the tires by exceeding
the maximum load.
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
1
Tire and Loading Information placard
412
Wheels and tires
%
The data shown in the illustration is example
data.
The Tire and Loading Information placard shows:
R
Maximum number of seats 2 according to
the maximum number of people permitted to
travel in the vehicle.
R
Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the
gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
and luggage.
R
Recommended tire pressures 1 for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are
valid for the maximum permissible load and
up to the maximum permissible vehicle
speed.
Please also note:
R
Information on permissible weights and loads
on the vehicle identification plate
(/ page 437).
R
Information on tire pressure in the tire pres‐
sure table (/ page 407).
Further related subjects:
R
Determining the maximum permissible load
(/ page 413)
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 406).
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur‐
suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
Safety Act of 1966".
#
(1): Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
placard.
#
(2): Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
#
(3): Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
#
(4): The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
#
(5): Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
The weight may not safely exceed the availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula‐
ted in Step 4.
#
(6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to
Wheels and tires
413
your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter‐
mine how this reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
%
Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a
trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a
trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have
any questions about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Even if you have calculated the total load care‐
fully, you should still make sure that the maxi‐
mum permissible gross weight and the maxi‐
mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are
not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi‐
cle identification plate.
#
Have your loaded vehicle – including driver,
occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle
weighbridge.
The measured values may not exceed the
maximum permissible values stated on the
vehicle identification plate.
Further related subjects:
R
Calculation example for determining the max‐
imum load (/ page 414)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 412)
R
Tire pressure table (/ page 407)
R
Vehicle identification plate
Calculation example for determining the
maximum load
The following table shows examples of how to
calculate total and load capacities with varying
seating configurations and different numbers
and sizes of occupants. The following examples
use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your vehi‐
cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard (/ page 412).
The higher the weight of all the occupants, the
smaller the maximum load for luggage.
Step 1
Example 1Example 2
Combined maximum weight of occupants and
load (data from the Tire and Loading Information
placard)
1500 lbs (680 kg)1500 lbs (680 kg)
414
Wheels and tires
Step 2
Example 1Example 2
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
51
Distribution of the occupantsFront: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Weight of occupantsOccupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)
Total weight of all occupants750 lbs (340 kg)200 lbs (91 kg)
Step 3
Example 1Example 2
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight
rating from the Tire and Loading Information
placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs
(589 kg)
Wheels and tires
415
Tire labeling
Overview of tire labeling
1
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
(/ page 416)
2
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(/ page 417)
3
Maximum tire load (/ page 418)
4
Maximum tire pressure (/ page 418)
5
Manufacturer
6
Characteristics of the tire (/ page 419)
7
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 419)
8
Tire name
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
Tire Quality Grading
In accordance with the US Department of Trans‐
portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand‐
ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade
their tires on the basis of the following three per‐
formance factors:
1
Tread wear grade
2
Traction grade
3
Temperature grade
%
The data shown in the illustration is example
data.
%
The classification is not legally stipulated for
Canada, but it is generally stated.
Tread wear grade
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified test
track of the US Department of Transportation.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
416
Wheels and tires
and one-half times as well on the government
test track as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate
conditions.
Traction grade
&
DANGER Risk of accident due to inade‐
quate traction
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include either accelera‐
tion, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
#
Always adapt your driving style and
drive at a speed to suit the prevailing
traffic and weather conditions.
*
NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from
wheelspin
#
Avoid wheelspin.
The traction classes, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified govern‐
ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A
tire marked C may have poor traction perform‐
ance.
Temperature grade
&
WARNING Risk of accident from tire
overheating and tire failure
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
#
Observe the recommended tire pres‐
sures and regularly check the tire pres‐
sure of all tires including the spare
wheel.
#
Adjust the tire pressure as necessary.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of per‐
formance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man‐
ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or
on the side wall of each tire produced.
Wheels and tires
417
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
The TIN is a unique identification number to
identify tires and comprises the following:
R
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire
complies with the requirements of the US
Department of Transportation.
R
Manufacturer identification code: manu‐
facturer identification code 2 contains
details of the tire manufacturer. New tires
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols. Further
information on retreaded tires (/ page 424).
R
Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire
size.
R
Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be
used by the manufacturer as a code to
describe specific characteristics of the tire.
R
Manufacturing date: manufacturing date
5 provides information about the age of a
tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the
calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions
state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208"
represents the 32nd week of 2008).
Information on the maximum tire load
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi‐
ble weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci‐
fied load limit. The maximum permissible load
can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv‐
er's side (/ page 412).
Specifications for maximum tire pressure
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
418
Wheels and tires
Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 speci‐
fied for the tire.
Information on tire characteristics
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
This information describes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in side wall 1 and
under tire tread 2.
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index
&
WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐
ing the specified tire load rating or the
permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or
the permissible speed rating may lead to tire
damage and to the tires bursting.
#
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model.
#
Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
1
Preceding letter
2
Nominal tire width in millimeters
3
Aspect ratio in %
4
Tire code
5
Rim diameter
6
Load-bearing index
7
Speed rating
8
Load index
%
The data shown in the image is example
data.
Information about reading tire data can be
obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
Wheels and tires
419
Preceding letter 11:
R
Without: passenger vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards.
R
"P": passenger vehicle tires according to US
manufacturing standards.
R
"LT": light truck tires according to US manu‐
facturing standards.
R
"T": compact emergency spare wheels with
high tire pressure that are only designed for
temporary use in an emergency.
Aspect ratio 3
3:
Ratio between tire height and tire width in per‐
cent (tire height divided by tire width).
Tire code 44 (tire type):
R
"R" radial tire
R
"D": bias ply tire
R
"B": bias belted tires
R
"ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above
149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)
Rim diameter 55:
The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter
of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified
in inches (in).
Load-bearing index 6
6:
Numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre‐
sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)).
The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at
least half the permissible axle load of your vehi‐
cle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit.
See also:
R
Maximum permissible load on the Tire and
Loading Information placard (/ page 412)
R
Maximum tire load (/ page 418)
R
Load index
Speed rating 7
7:
Specifies the approved maximum speed of the
tire.
%
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating. You can obtain information on the
required speed rating from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Summer tires
IndexSpeed rating
Qup to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Rup to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Sup to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Tup to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Hup to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Vup to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Wup to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Yup to 186 mph (300 km/h)
420
Wheels and tires
IndexSpeed rating
ZR...Y
1
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y)
1
over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
1
over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R
Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index
in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to
186 mph (300 km/h).
R
If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there
is no speed rating 7, find out what the max‐
imum speed is from the tire manufacturer.
R
If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7
are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of
your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To
find out the maximum speed, ask the tire
manufacturer.
All-weather tires and winter tires
IndexSpeed rating
Q M+S
2
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
2
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S
2
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S
2
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol
and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu‐
facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire
traction on snow.
Load index 88:
R
No specification given: standard load (SL)
tire
R
"XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein‐
forced tire
R
"Light Load": light load tire
R
"C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on
the maximum load that the tire can carry at a
certain pressure
Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire structure and characteristics: describes
the number of layers or the number of rubber-
coated belts in the tire contact surface and the
tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly‐
ester and other materials.
Bar: metric unit for tire pressure.
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT-
marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
US Department of Transportation.
Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the
number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi‐
cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).
1
"ZR" stated in the tire code.
2
Or "M+S i" for winter tires
Wheels and tires
421
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a
uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
with regard to tread quality, tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grading
assessment is made by the manufacturer follow‐
ing specifications from the U.S. government. The
quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side
wall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressure: the recommen‐
ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified
for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac‐
tory.
The tire and information table contains the rec‐
ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max‐
imum permissible load and the maximum per‐
missible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommen‐
ded tire pressures for cold tires under various
operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed
of the vehicle.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment: the combined weight of all standard
and optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.
Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is
installed.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR
is the maximum permissible axle load. The
actual load on an axle must never exceed the
gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight
rating can be found on the vehicle identification
plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side.
Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire
identification. It specifies the speed range for
which a tire is approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle
weight comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso‐
ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer
drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle
identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's
side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the
GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight
of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle
including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug‐
gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli‐
cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci‐
fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
B‑pillar on the driver's side.
Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the
maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight
of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the
maximum load and the weight of optional equip‐
ment installed at the factory.
Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure.
6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for
tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals
1 bar.
Load index: in addition to the load-bearing
index, the load index may also be imprinted on
the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load-
bearing capacity of the tire more precisely.
Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand‐
ard equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air
conditioning system and optional equipment if
422
Wheels and tires
these are installed on the vehicle, but does not
include passengers or luggage.
Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is
the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or
lbs for which a tire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi‐
mum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on
one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi‐
mum axle load of one axle by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of
measurement for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire
width in percent.
Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying
an outward force to every square inch of the tire.
The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle
has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to
ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel
rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead
to prevent the tire from changing length on the
wheel rim.
Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread
and the tire bead.
Weight of optional equipment: the combined
weight of the optional equipment weighing more
than the replaced standard parts and more than
5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as
high-performance brakes, level control system, a
roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries,
is not included in the curb weight and the weight
of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique
identification number which can be used by a
tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example,
in a product recall, and thus identify the pur‐
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur‐
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and
the manufacturing date.
Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a
code that contains the maximum load-bearing
capacity of a tire.
Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric‐
tion between the tires and the road surface.
Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars)
that are distributed over the tire contact surface.
If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear
limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution
of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi‐
tions in a vehicle.
Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi‐
nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg)
multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
Wheels and tires
423
Changing a wheel
Notes on selecting, installing and replacing
tires
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may fail to rec‐
ognize dangers.
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
rect dimensions of wheels and tires
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are
installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen‐
sion components may be damaged.
#
Always replace wheels and tires with
those that fulfill the specifications of
the original part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the
correct:
R
Designation
R
Model
When replacing tires, make sure to install the
correct:
R
Designation
R
Manufacturer
R
Model
&
WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐
ing the specified tire load rating or the
permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or
the permissible speed rating may lead to tire
damage and to the tires bursting.
#
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model.
#
Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
*
NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through
tire types and sizes that have not been
approved
For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels
and accessories which have been specially
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
These tires are specially adapted to the con‐
trol systems, such as ABS, ESP
®
and
4MATIC, and marked as follows:
R
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R
MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(run-flat tire only for certain wheels)
R
MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐
tain AMG tires)
Certain characteristics, such as handling,
vehicle noise emissions, fuel consumption,
etc. may otherwise be adversely affected.
Furthermore, other tire sizes could result in
the tires rubbing against the body and axle
components when loaded. This could result
in damage to the tire or the vehicle.
424
Wheels and tires
Only use tires, wheels and accessories that
have been checked and recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
*
NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐
ded tires
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom‐
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires.
For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐
anteed.
#
Do not use used tires if you have no
information about their previous usage.
*
NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires
when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a lower tire section width.
The lower the tire section width, the greater
is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when
driving over obstacles.
#
Avoid obstacles or drive particularly
carefully.
*
NOTE Damage to electronic component
parts from the use of tire-mounting tools
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: Electronic component parts are
located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools
should not be used in the area of the valve.
This could otherwise damage the electronic
component parts.
#
Have the tires changed at a qualified
specialist workshop only.
*
NOTE Damage to summer tires at low
ambient temperatures
At low ambient temperatures, tears could
form when driving with summer tires, caus‐
ing permanent damage to the tires.
#
At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C),
use M+S tires .
Accessory parts that are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used
correctly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop
and inquire about:
R
Suitability
R
Legal stipulations
R
Factory recommendations
&
WARNING Risk of accident with high
performance tires
The special tire tread in combination with the
optimized tire compound means that the risk
of skidding or hydroplaning on wet roads is
increased.
In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at
a low outside temperature and tire running
temperature.
#
Switch on the ESP
®
and adapt your
driving style accordingly.
#
Use M+S tire at outside temperatures
of less than 10 °C (50 °F).
Wheels and tires
425
Observe the following when selecting, installing
and replacing tires:
R
Only use tires and wheels of the same type
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires) and the same make.
R
Only install wheels of the same size on one
axle (left and right).
It is only permissible to install a different
wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order
to drive to the specialist workshop.
R
Only install tires of the correct size onto the
wheels.
R
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: All installed wheels must be equip‐
ped with functioning sensors for the tire
pressure monitoring system.
R
At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C), use win‐
ter tires or all-season tire marked M+S for all
wheels.
Winter tires bearing the i snowflake sym‐
bol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road condi‐
tions.
R
For M+S tires, only use tires with the same
tread.
R
Observe the maximum permissible speed for
the M+S tires installed.
If this is below the vehicle's maximum speed,
this must be indicated by an appropriate
label in the driver's field of vision.
R
Break in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km).
R
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
R
When replacing with tires that do not fea‐
ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with
MOExtended tires are not equipped with a
TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle
with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires
that do not feature run-flat characteristics,
e.g. winter tires.
For more information on wheels and tires, con‐
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 406)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 412)
R
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 419)
R
Tire pressure table (/ page 407)
R
Notes on the emergency spare wheel
(/ page 433)
Notes on rotating wheels
&
WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐
ent wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
wheels or tires have different dimensions
may severely impair the driving characteris‐
tics.
The wheel brakes or wheel suspension com‐
ponents may also be damaged.
#
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
wheels and tires are of the same dimen‐
sions.
426
Wheels and tires
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels
differ:
R
Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of
the tire
R
Rear wheels wear more at the center of the
tire
Do not drive with tires that have too little tread
depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet
roads (hydroplaning).
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the
intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If this is not
available, rotate the tires every
3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km),
depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction
of rotation is maintained.
Observe the instructions and safety notes on
"Changing a wheel" when doing so
(/ page 428).
Notes on storing wheels
When storing wheels, observe the following
notes:
R
After removing wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place.
R
Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease
or fuel.
Overview of the tire-change tool kit
Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐
cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit.
For more information on which tire-change tools
are required and approved for performing a
wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.
You require the following tools, for instance, to
change a wheel:
R
Jack
R
Chock
R
Lug wrench
R
Alignment bolt
The tire-change tool kit is in tool bag 1 under
the cargo compartment floor.
Tool bag contains:
R
Jack
R
Gloves
R
Lug wrench
R
Alignment bolt
R
Folding chock
R
Ratchet for jack
Wheels and tires
427
Setting up the folding chock
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
Requirements:
R
The required tire-change tool is available. If
your vehicle is not equipped with the tire-
change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist
workshop to find out about suitable tools.
R
The vehicle is not on a slope.
R
The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
#
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
#
Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position.
#
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift into position j.
#
Vehicles with level control system: Set the
normal vehicle level (/ page 209).
#
Switch off the engine.
#
Make sure that the engine cannot be started.
#
Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
#
Remove the hub caps if necessary
(/ page 428).
#
Raise the vehicle (/ page 429).
Removing and installing hub caps
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(/ page 428).
Plastic hub cap
#
To remove: turn the center cover of the hub
cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub
cap.
#
To install: make sure that the center cover
of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise.
#
Position the hub cap and turn the center
cover clockwise until the hub cap engages
physically and audibly.
Aluminum hub cap
428
Wheels and tires
#
To remove: position socket 2 on hub cap
1.
%
The socket can be found in the tire-change
tool kit.
#
Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2.
#
Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1
counter-clockwise and remove it.
#
To install: position hub cap 1 and turn until
it is completely flush with the wheel.
#
Position socket 2 on hub cap 1.
#
Attach wheel wrench 3 to socket 2 and
tighten the hub cap clockwise.
Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft
(25 Nm).
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements:
R
There are no persons in the vehicle.
R
The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/ page 428).
R
The hub caps have been removed
(/ page 428).
Important notes on using the jack:
R
Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has
been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise
the vehicle.
R
The jack is only designed for raising and
holding the vehicle for a short time while a
wheel is being changed and not for mainte‐
nance work under the vehicle.
R
The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large,
flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
R
The foot of the jack must be positioned verti‐
cally under the jack support point.
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:
R
Never place your hands or feet under the
vehicle.
R
Never lie under the vehicle.
R
Do not start the engine and do not release
the electric parking brake.
R
Do not open or close any doors or the tail‐
gate.
Wheels and tires
429
#
Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts
on the wheel you wish to change by about
one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com‐
pletely.
Position of jack support points
&
WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect
positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle,
the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
#
Only position the jack at the appropri‐
ate jacking point of the vehicle. The
base of the jack must be positioned
vertically under the jacking point of the
vehicle.
*
NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jack support point of the
vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐
cle raised.
#
The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐
port points.
#
Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool
kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the
jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.
430
Wheels and tires
#
Position jack 2 at jack support point 1.
#
Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until jack 2 sits
completely on jack support point 1 and the
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
#
Turn ratchet 3 until the tire is raised a maxi‐
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
#
Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 431).
Removing a wheel
Requirements:
R
The vehicle is raised (/ page 429).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force
to the brake discs, since this could impair the
level of comfort when braking.
*
NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on
wheel bolts
#
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on
a dirty surface.
#
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐
pletely.
#
Screw alignment bolt 1 into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
#
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com‐
pletely.
#
Remove the wheel.
#
Install the new wheel (/ page 431).
Mounting a new wheel
Requirements:
R
The wheel is removed (/ page 431).
Wheels and tires
431
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in
the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recog‐
nize dangers.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from losing a
wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel
nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting
bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/
wheel nuts to come loose.
As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv‐
ing.
#
Never oil or grease the threads.
#
In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
#
Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐
aged hub threads replaced.
#
Do not continue driving.
#
Observe the information on the choice of
tires (/ page 424).
For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an
arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the
correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc‐
tion of rotation when installing.
#
Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from tightening
wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
#
Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
#
Be sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes on "Changing a wheel"
(/ page 424).
#
For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts
which have been approved by Mercedes-
Benz and for the wheel in question.
*
NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel
rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt
If the wheel has too much play when screw‐
ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint
can be damaged.
#
Press the wheel firmly against the
wheel hub when screwing on the first
wheel bolt.
#
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated until they are
finger-tight.
#
Unscrew the alignment bolt.
#
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.
#
Lower the vehicle (/ page 432).
Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change
Requirements:
R
The new wheel has been installed
(/ page 431).
432
Wheels and tires
#
Place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the
jack so that the letters "AB" are visible.
#
To lower the vehicle: turn the ratchet of the
jack counter-clockwise.
#
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with
a maximum of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm).
#
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 to
the specified tightening torque of 111 lb-ft
(150 Nm).
&
WARNING Risk of injury through incor‐
rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
prescribed tightening torque.
#
Make sure the wheel bolts or wheel
nuts are tightened to the prescribed
tightening torque.
#
If you are not sure, do not move the
vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop and have the tightening tor‐
que checked immediately.
#
Check the tire pressure of the newly moun‐
ted wheel and adjust accordingly.
#
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring
system (/ page 411).
Exception: the new wheel is an emergency
spare wheel.
Make sure to observe the following further rela‐
ted subject:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 406)
Emergency spare wheel
Notes on the emergency spare wheel
&
WARNING Risk of accident caused by
incorrect wheel and tire dimensions
The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and
the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mount‐
ing an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel
may severely impair the driving characteris‐
tics.
To prevent hazardous situations:
#
Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
#
Never mount more than one emergency
spare wheel or spare wheel that differs
in size.
#
Only use an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size briefly.
#
Do not switch off ESP
®
.
#
>Have the emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size replaced
Wheels and tires
433
at the nearest qualified specialist work‐
shop. The new wheel must have the
correct dimensions.
Check the tire pressure of the emergency spare
wheel installed. Correct the pressure as neces‐
sary.
The maximum permissible speed with an emer‐
gency spare wheel installed is 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Do not install the emergency spare wheel with
snow chains.
Replace the emergency spare wheel after six
years at the latest, regardless of wear.
%
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: If an emergency spare wheel is
installed the tire pressure monitoring system
cannot function reliably. For a few minutes
after an emergency spare wheel is installed,
the system may still display the tire pressure
of the removed wheel. Only restart the sys‐
tem again when the emergency spare wheel
has been replaced with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further
related subjects:
R
Notes on tire pressure (/ page 406)
R
Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 412)
R
Tire pressure table (/ page 407)
Removing the emergency spare wheel
The emergency spare wheel is secured in the
emergency spare wheel bag in the cargo com‐
partment.
#
Observe the information on mounting tires
(/ page 424).
#
Open the tailgate.
#
Detach the securing straps.
#
Unhook the retaining spring hooks of the
securing straps from the brackets.
#
Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with
the emergency spare wheel.
#
Open the emergency spare wheel bag and
remove the emergency spare wheel.
434
Wheels and tires
Notes on technical data
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognize dangers.
The data stated only applies to vehicles with
standard equipment. You can obtain further
information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Vehicle electronics
Two-way radios
Notes on installing two-way radios
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to
improper work on two-way radios
The electromagnetic radiation from two-way
radios can interfere with the on-board elec‐
tronics if RF transmitters are manipulated or
retrofitted incorrectly.
This could jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle.
#
You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of accident from incor‐
rect operation of two-way radios
If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in
the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation
could interfere with the on-board electronics,
e.g.:
R
if the two-way radio is not connected to
an exterior antenna
R
if the exterior antenna is not correctly
mounted or is not of low reflection
This could jeopardies the operating safety of
the vehicle.
#
Have the low-reflection exterior
antenna installed at a qualified special‐
ist workshop.
#
When operating two-way radios in the
vehicle, always connect them to the
low-reflection exterior antenna.
*
NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐
mit due to failure to comply with the
instructions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if
the instructions for installation and use of
two-way radios are not observed.
#
Only use approved frequency bands.
#
Observe the maximum permissible out‐
put power in these frequency bands.
#
Only use approved antenna positions.
Technical data
435
1
Front roof area
2
Rear roof area
3
Rear fenders
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof,
installing an antenna to the front or rear roof
area is not permitted.
On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you
install the antenna on the side of the vehicle
closest to the center of the road.
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road
Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of aftermarket
radio frequency transmitting equipment") when
retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the
legal requirements for detachable parts.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply and antenna
connectors provided in the pre-installation. Be
sure to observe the manufacturer's supplements
when installing.
Two-way radio transmission output
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the antenna must not exceed the values
in the following table.
Frequency band and maximum transmission
output
Frequency band Maximum transmis‐
sion output
Short wave
3 - 54 MHz
(100 W)
4 m frequency band
74 - 88 MHz
(30 W)
2 m frequency band
144 - 174 MHz
(50 W)
trunked radio sys‐
tem/Tetra
380 - 460 MHz
(10 W)
70 cm frequency
band
420 - 450 MHz
(35 W)
Two-way radio
(2G/3G/4G)
(10 W)
436
Technical data
The following can be used in the vehicle without
restrictions:
R
Two-way radios with a maximum transmis‐
sion output of up to 100 mW
R
RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio system/Tetra)
R
Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the
antenna on the outside of the vehicle for some
wavebands.
This applies to the following wavebands:
R
Trunked radio system/Tetra
R
70 cm frequency band
R
2G/3G/4G
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine
number overview
Vehicle identification plate
Vehicle identification plate (USA only)
1
Maximum gross vehicle weight
2
Permissible front axle load
3
Permissible rear axle load
4
Paint code
5
VIN (vehicle identification number)
Technical data
437
Vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
1
Maximum gross vehicle weight
2
Permissible front axle load
3
Permissible rear axle load
4
Paint code
5
VIN (vehicle identification number)
The permissible gross vehicle weight is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle
weight rating is the maximum weight that can be
carried on one axle (front or rear axle).
Never exceed the permissible gross vehicle
weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating
for the front or rear axle.
VIN in front of the right-hand front seat
1
Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number)
2
Floor covering
Additional plates
1
Plate with information about emissions test‐
ing, including confirmation of emissions
guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as
for California
2
Engine number stamped into the crankcase
3
VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label
at the lower edge of the windshield
438
Technical data
Operating fluids
Notes on operating fluids
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe
the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you
may fail to recognize dangers.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from operating
fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐
ful to your health.
#
Observe the text on the original con‐
tainers when using, storing or disposing
of operating fluids.
#
Always store operating fluids sealed in
their original containers.
#
Always keep children away from operat‐
ing fluids.
+
ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
sponsible disposal
#
Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐
ronmentally responsible manner.
Operating fluids include the following:
R
Fuels
R
Lubricants
R
Coolant
R
Brake fluid
R
Windshield washer fluid
R
Climate control system refrigerant
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Damage caused by the use of products that have
not been approved is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.
You can identify operating fluids approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on
the container:
R
MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R
MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating fluids
is available at the following locations:
R
In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids by entering the designation
-
At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
At a qualified specialist workshop
&
WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly flammable.
#
Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided.
#
Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while
refueling the vehicle.
&
WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
Technical data
439
#
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#
Do not inhale fuel vapor.
#
Keep children away from fuel.
#
Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
#
Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water.
#
If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water. Seek medical
attention immediately.
#
If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
ing.
#
Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
Fuel
Notes on fuel grades for vehicles with gaso‐
line engine
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 439).
*
NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#
Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded
fuel.
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by
volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with
E10 fuel.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
R
Diesel
R
Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100
R
Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100
R
Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refueled with the
wrong fuel:
#
Do not switch the ignition on.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐
fur, this can produce unpleasant odors.
Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane
number specified in the information label in the
fuel filler flap (/ page 168).
If you want maximum engine output: only
refuel with unleaded premium grade gasoline
with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/
95 RON.
As a temporary measure, if the recommended
fuel is not available, you may also refuel with
unleaded regular gasoline with at least 87 AKI/
91 RON. This may reduce engine output and
increase fuel consumption.
Never refuel using gasoline with an even lower
RON.
440
Technical data
*
NOTE Premature wear through unleaded
regular gasoline
Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the
engine to wear more quickly and impair lon‐
gevity and performance.
If unleaded premium grade gasoline is
unavailable and you have to refuel using
unleaded regular gasoline:
#
Only fill the fuel tank to half full with
unleaded regular gasoline and fill up as
soon as possible with unleaded pre‐
mium grade gasoline.
#
Do not drive at the maximum design
speed.
#
Avoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3000 rpm.
Further information on fuel is available at the fol‐
lowing locations:
R
At a gas station
R
At a qualified specialist workshop
R
On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
Information on additives in gasoline
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 439).
*
NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable
additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive
may lead to malfunctions occurring.
#
Only add cleaning additives recommen‐
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel
brands that have additives.
In some countries, the fuel available may not
have sufficient additives. Residue could build up
in the fuel injection system as a result. In this
case, in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Be sure to observe the notes
and mixing ratios specified on the container.
Tank content and fuel reserve
Capacity
Model Total capacity
All models 21.1 US gal
(80.0 liters)
Model Of which reserve
All models3.2 gal (12.0 liters)
Engine oil
Notes on engine oil
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 439).
Technical data
441
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by an
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐
tives
#
Do not use engine oils or oil filters other
than those which meet the specifica‐
tions necessary for the prescribed
service intervals.
#
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
than prescribed.
#
Do not use additives.
#
Have the engine oil changed after the
prescribed intervals.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
oil change carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Further information on engine oil and oil filters is
available at the following locations:
R
In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids by entering the designation
-
At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
At a qualified specialist workshop
Quality and capacity of engine oil
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Gasoline enginesEngine oil specifica‐
tions
E 450 4MATIC 229.5
229.6*
* Recommended for lowest possible fuel con‐
sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each
case; observe possible restrictions of the
approved SAE viscosity classes).
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption,
it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi‐
cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE
viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the
approved SAE viscosity classes must be
observed.
The following values refer to an oil change,
including the oil filter.
Capacity
Model Capacity
All models 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters)
Notes on brake fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 439).
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to
vapor pockets forming in the brake sys‐
tem
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
442
Technical data
the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low,
vapor pockets may form in the brake system
when the brakes are applied hard.
This causes the braking effect to be
impaired.
#
Have the brake fluid renewed at the
specified intervals.
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
You can obtain further information on brake fluid
in the following places:
R
In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids
-
At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
At a qualified specialist workshop
Coolant
Notes on coolant
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 439).
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
component parts in the engine compart‐
ment, it may ignite.
#
Allow the engine to cool down before
adding antifreeze.
#
Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the filler opening.
#
Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze
from component parts before starting
the vehicle.
*
NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐
ant
#
Only add coolant that has been pre‐
mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐
tection.
Information on coolant is available at the fol‐
lowing locations:
R
In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids 310.1:
-
At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
At a qualified specialist workshop
*
NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐
peratures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the
engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐
tected against overheating and corrosion at
high outside temperatures.
#
Always use coolant approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Technical data
443
#
Observe the instructions in the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐
ating Fluids 310.1.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze
concentrate in the engine cooling system should
be:
R
A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection
down to approximately -35 °F (-37 °C))
R
A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 °F (-45 °C))
Coolant capacity
Capacity
ModelCapacity
All models 12.7 US qt
(12.0 liters)
Notes on windshield washer fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 439).
&
WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. It could ignite if it comes into
contact with hot engine component parts or
the exhaust system.
#
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler
opening.
*
NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting
due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid
Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam‐
age the plastic surface of the exterior light‐
ing.
#
Only use windshield washer fluid which
is also suitable for use on plastic surfa‐
ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter‐
Fit.
*
NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by
mixing windshield washer fluids
#
Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐
terFit with other windshield washer flu‐
ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water as the fill
level sensor may be triggered erroneously.
Recommended windshield washer fluid:
R
Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
R
Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa‐
tion on the antifreeze container.
Mix the washer fluid with the windshield washer
fluid all year round.
Refrigerant
Notes on refrigerant
Observe the notes on operating fluids
(/ page 439).
444
Technical data
*
NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger‐
ant
If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli‐
mate control system may be damaged.
#
Only use the refrigerant R‑134a
*
NOTE Damage to the climate control
system due to incorrect refrigerant com‐
pressor oil
#
Only use refrigerant compressor oil that
has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
#
Do not mix the approved refrigerant
compressor oil with a different refriger‐
ant compressor oil.
Work on the climate control system may be car‐
ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop.
All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand‐
ard J639, must be adhered to.
The instruction label on the climate control sys‐
tem for the refrigerant type and the refrigerant
compressor oil is located on the inside of the
hood.
1
Hazard and service warning symbols
2
Refrigerant filling capacity
3
Applicable standards
4
PAG oil part number
5
GWP (Global Warming Potential) of the refrig‐
erant used
6
Refrigerant type
Symbols 1 warn of the following:
R
Possible dangers
R
The need to have service work carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop only
Refrigerant filling capacity
Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil
Model Refrigerant
All models22.2 ± 0.4 oz
(630 ± 10 g)
Model PAG oil
All models2.8 ± 0.4 oz
(80 ± 10 g)
Vehicle data
Vehicle dimensions
The heights specified may vary as a result of the
following factors:
R
Tires
R
Load
R
Condition of the suspension
R
Optional equipment
Technical data
445
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Height when opened
Model
11
Height
when
opened
22 Head‐
room
E 450 4MATIC 81.2 in
(2062 mm)
Vehicle dimensions
All models
Vehicle length194.2 in
(4933 mm)
Vehicle width including out‐
side mirrors
81.3 in
(2065 mm)
Vehicle height 57.8 in
(1467 mm)
Wheelbase 115.7 in
(2939 mm)
Turning radius 39.0 ft
(11.90 m)
Weights and loads
Please observe the following notes for the speci‐
fied vehicle data:
R
Items of optional equipment increase the
curb weight and reduce the payload.
Roof load
All models
Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)
446
Technical data
Display messages
Introduction
Notes on display messages
Display messages appear on the multifunction
display.
Display messages with graphic symbols are sim‐
plified in the Operator's Manual and may differ
from the symbols on the multifunction display.
The multifunction display shows high-priority dis‐
play messages in red. Certain display messages
are accompanied by a warning tone.
Please act in accordance with the display mes‐
sages and follow the additional notes in the
Operator's Manual.
For some display messages, a symbol will also
be shown:
R
Õ Further information
R
¨ Hide display message
You can select the desired symbol by swiping
left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
Press the Õ symbol to show further information
on the multifunction display. Press the ¨
symbol to hide the display message.
You can hide low-priority display messages by
pressing the P button or the left-hand Touch
Control. The display messages will then be
stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as
quickly as possible.
High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐
den. The multifunction display shows these dis‐
play messages continuously until the cause of
the display message has been rectified.
Calling up stored display messages
On-board computer:
4
Service
5
1 Message
If there are no display messages, No Messages
will appear on the multifunction display.
#
Scroll through the display messages by swip‐
ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand
Touch Control.
#
To exit the message memory: press the
P button.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
447
Occupant safety
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
6
SRS Malfunction Service
Required
*The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 34).
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may
not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for
example.
#
Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Recognition of a restraint system malfunction:
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Front Left Malfunction
Service Required (example)
*The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 34).
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may
not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for
example.
#
Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
448
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Recognition of a restraint system malfunction:
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on.
R
The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Left Side Curtain Airbag
Malfunction Service
Required (example)
*The corresponding window curtain airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 34).
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to malfunctions in the window airbag
If the window airbag is malfunctioning, it might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in
the event of an accident with high deceleration.
#
Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front Passenger Airbag Dis-
abled See Operator's Man-
ual
*The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person with an adult stature is on the front
passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐
dent and cannot perform its intended protective function.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
449
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior,
especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
#
Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 45).
#
If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front Passenger Airbag
Enabled See Operator's
Manual
*The front passenger airbag is enabled while the vehicle is in motion:
R
even when a child, a person of small stature or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is
located on the front passenger seat
R
even when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
&
WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury if a child restraint system is used while the front passenger front
airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is
enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
#
Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
450
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 45).
#
If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
*
The PRE‑SAFE
®
functions are malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE Impulse Side
Inoperative See Operator's
Manual
*
The PRE‑SAFE
®
Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
Á
Obtain a New Key
*The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
451
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Á
Replace Key Battery
*The SmartKey battery is discharged.
#
Replace the battery (/ page 67).
Á
Key Not Detected (white
display message)
*The SmartKey is currently undetected.
#
Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
#
If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey
(/ page 153).
Á
Key Not Detected (red dis‐
play message)
*The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle.
The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine:
R
You can no longer start the engine.
R
You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
#
Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 153).
452
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Place the Key in the
Marked Space See Opera-
tor's Manual
*SmartKey detection is malfunctioning.
#
Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
#
Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 153).
Á
Don't Forget Your Key
*Awarning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Lights
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Check Left Low
Beam (example)
*The corresponding light source is faulty.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
%
LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp appears only when all the light-emitting diodes
in the lamp are faulty.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
453
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Malfunction See Opera-
tor’s Manual
*The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Automatic Headlamp Mode
Inoperative
*The light sensor is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Active Headlamps Inopera-
tive
*The active headlamps are malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch On Headlamps
*You are driving without low-beam headlamps.
#
Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
454
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Switch Off Lights
*You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.
#
Turn the light switch to the à position.
b
Intell. Light System Inoper-
ative
*The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of
the Intelligent Light System.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 133).
#
Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Now Available display message will appear.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Inoperative
*Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Camera View Restricted
See Operator's Manual
*The camera view is restricted. Possible causes are:
R
Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
455
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
R
Heavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Clean the windshield.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Malfunctioning
*The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Climate control
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Air Conditioning Malfunc-
tion See Operator's Manual
*Operation of the climate control system is temporarily restricted. Airflow and fresh air supply are set to automatic
mode.
#
Have the climate control system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Let fresh air into the vehi-
cle interior. Air Condition-
ing Malf. Visit Workshop
*The climate control system is malfunctioning.
456
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
&
WARNING Risk of injury and accident due to an insufficient supply of fresh air
If the climate control system is malfunctioning, carbon dioxide levels may increase in the vehicle interior.
Breathing in carbon dioxide may cause dizziness.
#
Open the window to ensure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air.
#
Open the window to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
d
Vehicle Ready to Drive
Switch the Ignition Off
Before Exiting
*You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state.
#
When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart‐
Key with you.
#
If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V
battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery
(starting assistance).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
457
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Ù
Steering Malfunction
Increased Physical Effort
See Operator's Manual
*The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
#
If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
#
Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
#
If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
#
Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Ù
Steering Malfunction Stop
Immediately See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
458
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active Hood Malfunction
See Operator's Manual
*The active hood (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
C
*At least one door is open.
#
Close all doors.
?
*The hood is open.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if the engine hood is unlatched while driving
An unlocked engine hood may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
#
Never unlatch the engine hood while driving.
#
Before every trip, ensure that the engine hood is latched.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Close the hood.
A
*The tailgate is open.
&
DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
459
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.
#
Never drive with the tailgate open.
#
Close the tailgate.
_
Rear Left Backrest Not
Latched (example)
*The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.
#
Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.
¥
Check Washer Fluid
*The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
#
Refill washer fluid (/ page 373).
460
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
+
Check Coolant Level See
Operator's Manual
*The coolant level is too low.
*
NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant
#
Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
#
Add coolant (/ page 372).
#
Have the cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
ÿ
Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehi-
cle Turn Engine Off
*The coolant is too hot.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could
come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
#
Wait until the engine has cooled down.
#
Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not impaired.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
461
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.
ÿ
*The fan motor is faulty.
#
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.
To switch engine off, press
and hold Start/Stop but-
ton for at least 3 secs. or
press 3 times.
*You have pressed the start/stop button while driving.
#
Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 153).
8
Fuel Level Low
*The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
#
Refuel.
8
Gas Cap Loose
*The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
#
Close the fuel filler cap.
#
If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
462
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Transmission
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
Apply Brake to Shift from
'P'
*
You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
#
Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.
To Deselect P or N,
Depress Brake and Start
Engine
*
You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission
position.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
#
Change the transmission position.
#
Start the engine.
Only Shift to 'P' when Vehi-
cle is Stationary
*
Park position j can be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary.
#
To stop, depress the brake pedal.
#
Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary.
Apply Brake to Shift to 'R'
*
You have attempted to select transmission position k.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
#
Select transmission position k.
Driver's Door Open &
Transmission Not in P Risk
of Vehicle Rolling Away
*
The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.
#
Select park position j when switching off the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
463
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
N Permanently Active Risk
of Rolling Away
*
While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutral i has been engaged.
#
To stop, depress the brake pedal.
#
Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary.
#
To continue driving, select transmission position h or k.
Service Required Do Not
Shift Gears Visit Dealer
*The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be changed.
#
When transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans‐
mission position.
#
For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Possible
Service Required
*
The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position k cannot be selected.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction
Stop
*
The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Depress the brake pedal.
#
Engage park position j.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
464
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine
Running Wait Transmission
Cooling
*The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
#
Leave the engine running.
#
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Auxiliary Battery Malfunc-
tion
*The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine.
#
Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
465
Brakes
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only)
Parking Brake See Opera-
tor's Manual
*
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
#
Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
#
Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 178).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
*
The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec‐
tric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
#
Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
#
Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 178).
or
#
Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 178).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
466
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
*
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
#
Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
To apply:
#
Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 178).
To release:
#
Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
*
The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Can‐
ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It
then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
If the battery charge level is too low:
#
Charge the battery.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
467
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
To apply:
#
Switch off the ignition.
The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.
If the electric parking brake is not to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed,
leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised.
If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:
#
Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
#
Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 178).
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
To release:
#
If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 178).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
468
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only)
Please Release Parking
Brake
*
The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing.
The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:
R
A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 178).
R
You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 178).
#
Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.
#
Release the electric parking brake manually.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
469
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
F
(USA only)
!
(Canada only)
Turn On the Ignition to
Release the Parking Brake
*
The red F (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit.
You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.
#
Switch on the ignition.
$
(USA only)
J
(Canada only)
Check Brake Fluid Level
*There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Do not add brake fluid.
470
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
#
Do not add brake fluid.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Check Brake Pads See
Operator's Manual
*The brakepads have reached the wear limit.
&
WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted braking power
When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking power may be restricted.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
471
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
é
ATTENTION ASSIST Inoper-
ative
*ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
é
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
Break!
*ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver
(/ page 227).
#
If necessary, take a break.
ä
Malfunction Drive at Max.
50 mph
*AIR BODY CONTROL is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
#
Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
472
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Â
Lowering
*The vehicle level may be lowered for the following reasons:
R
You have selected a different drive program.
R
You have exceeded the speed limit.
R
You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button.
Á
Vehicle Rising
*Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
Drive More Slowly
*You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.
#
To set the vehicle level, do not drive quicker than 37 mph (60 km/h).
Á
Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too
Low
*You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low.
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
#
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning:
#
Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
473
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
*
NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
#
Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.
#
If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and
set a higher vehicle level if possible.
#
Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 209).
Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.
Á
Vehicle Rising Please Wait
*The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
#
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Active Steering Assist Cur-
rently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 200).
#
Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#
If necessary, clean the windshield in the camera's field of vision.
#
Check the tire pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist Inop-
erative
*Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
474
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Ø
*Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 200).
You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.
#
Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Beginning Emergency Stop
*Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is initiated (/ page 203).
#
Put your hands back on the steering wheel.
You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:
R
Steering
R
Braking or accelerating
R
Pressing a steering-wheel button
R
Operating Touch Control
R
Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 233).
Vehicles with Active Steering Assist: The camera view may be limited by the windshield.
#
Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
Vehicles with Active Steering Assist: If the display message does not disappear:
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
475
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Clean the windshield.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Inoperative
*Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Camera View Restricted
See Operator's Manual
* Vehicles without Active Steering Assist: the camera view is restricted.
Possible causes are:
R
Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision
R
Heavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Clean the windshield.
Blind Spot Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's
Manual
*Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 231).
#
Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
476
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
or
#
If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
#
If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is especially dirty, the sensors in the bumper may be mal‐
functioning.
Blind Spot Assist Inopera-
tive
*Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 231).
#
Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
or
#
If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Active Blind Spot Assist
Inoperative
*Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC Inoperative
See Operator's Manual
*Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
#
If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
477
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Traffic Sign Assist Cur-
rently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.
#
Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Traffic Sign Assist Inopera-
tive
*Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
#
If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Traffic Sign Assist Camera
View Restricted See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The camera view is restricted. Possible causes:
R
Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision
R
Heavy rain, snow or fog
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Clean the windshield.
478
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ë
Off
*The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.
#
Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 206).
ç
- - - mph
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
#
Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 195).
ç
Suspended
*If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will be put
into passive mode (/ page 204).
ç
Off
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 195).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
479
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active Distance Assist Cur-
rently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 194).
#
Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
Active Distance Assist Inop-
erative
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist Now
Available
*Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (/ page 195).
¯
- - - mph
*Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
#
Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 192).
Cruise Control Inoperative
*Cruise control is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control Off
*Cruise control has been deactivated.
If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 191).
480
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
!
÷
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*
ABS and ESP
®
are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be temporarily unavailable.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
tion.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ABS and ESP
®
checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h).
#
If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
481
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
!
÷
Inoperative See Operator's
Manual
*
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
tion.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning
If ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ABS and ESP
®
checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
*
ESP
®
is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
482
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h).
#
If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
÷
Inoperative See Operator's
Manual
*
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐
tion.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
483
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
T
!
÷
Inoperative See Operator's
Manual
*
EBD, ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning
If EBD, ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle
stabilization.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions Currently Limited See
Operator's Manual
* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
Assist or PRE‑SAFE
®
PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially
available.
484
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 186).
#
Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#
If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions Limited See Opera-
tor's Manual
* Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
Assist or PRE‑SAFE
®
PLUS is malfunctioning.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Radar Sensors Dirty See
Operator's Manual
*The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:
R
Dirt on the sensors
R
Heavy rain or snow
R
Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
485
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Clean all sensors (/ page 380).
#
Restart the engine.
Mercedes me connect
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Mercedes me connect
Services Limited See Oper-
ator's Manual
*Service limited.
At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.
#
Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 26).
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
G
Inoperative
*At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is
malfunctioning.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
486
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Battery
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
#
12 V Battery See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The engine is off and the charge level is too low.
#
Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
To charge the battery:
#
Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.
*If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
See Operator's Manual
*The battery is not being charged.
*
NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
487
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Stop Vehicle See Opera-
tor's Manual
*The battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.
*
NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
#
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
#
Switch off the engine.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine
Running
*The battery charge level is too low.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
#
Leave the engine running.
#
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
#
If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
488
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Tire pressure monitor
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
Tire Press. Monitor Cur-
rently Unavailable
*There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are
being received. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily unavailable.
#
Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.
Tire Press. Monitor Inopera-
tive
*The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
&
WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss
in one or more of the tires.
Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics.
#
Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Monitor Inop-
erative No Wheel Sensors
*The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
#
Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
489
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
Wheel Sensor(s) Missing
*There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affec‐
ted tire.
#
Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
h
Check Tires
*The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
R
The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#
Observe the recommended tire pressure.
#
Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the tire pressure (/ page 406) and the tires.
490
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
Please Correct Tire Pres-
sure
*The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual
wheels is too great.
#
Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary.
#
When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 411).
h
Warning Tire Malfunction
*The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire
Flat tires are dangerous in the following ways:
R
The tires can overheat and cause a fire.
R
The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#
Do not drive with a flat tire.
#
Observe the notes on flat tires.
Notes on flat tires (/ page 384).
#
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
#
Check the tires.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
491
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Tires Overheated
*At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tires are displayed in yellow.
#
Drive more slowly.
Decrease Speed
*At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tires are displayed in yellow.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires
Overheated tires may burst, particularly at high speeds.
#
Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
#
Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
Engine oil
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
5
Check Engine Oil At Next
Refueling
*The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
492
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Check the engine oil level when next refueling.
Add engine oil (/ page 371).
Notes on engine oil (/ page 441).
5
Check Engine Oil Level
(Add 1 quart)
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
#
When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 371).
Notes on engine oil (/ page 441).
5
Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level is too high.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
493
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
5
Engine Oil Level Low Stop
Vehicle Turn Engine Off
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil level is too low.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
#
Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
#
Switch off the engine.
#
Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 371).
#
Check the engine oil level.
Notes on engine oil (/ page 441).
5
Engine Oil Pressure Stop
Switch Off Engine
*Display message only for certain engines:
The engine oil pressure is too low.
*
NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil pressure
#
Avoid driving with insufficient engine oil pressure.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
494
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
5
Engine Oil Level Cannot Be
Measured
*The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps
Overview of indicator and warning lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the
ignition is switched on. Some indicator and
warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This
behavior is non-critical. These indicator and
warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they
light up or flash after the engine has been star‐
ted or during a journey.
Instrument Display (standard) Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Display
Depending on the display setting, the positions
of the indicator lamps on the Instrument Display
may differ from the example shown.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
495
Progressive setting
Vehicles with a Widescreen Cockpit: if you
select the progressive display setting, the posi‐
tions of the indicator lamps on the Instrument
Display will change.
Indicator and warning lamps:
L
Low beam(/ page 130)
T
Parking lamps (/ page 130)
K
High beam(/ page 131)
#!
Turn signal lights(/ page 131)
R
Rear fog light (/ page 130)
6
Restraint system(/ page 497)
ü
Seat belt not fastened (/ page 497)
$
USA: brakes (red) (/ page 502)
J
Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 502)
!
Electric parking brake (yellow)
(/ page 502)
F
USA: electric parking brake applied
(red) (/ page 502)
!
Canada: electric parking brake
applied (red) (/ page 502)
!
ABS malfunction (/ page 505)
÷
ESP
®
(/ page 505)
å
ESP
®
OFF (/ page 505)
L
Distance warning (/ page 504)
Ù
Electric power steering malfunction
(/ page 498)
ä
AIR BODY CONTROL malfunction
(/ page 504)
;
Check Engine (/ page 499)
#
Electrical malfunction (/ page 499)
8
Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap loca‐
tion indicator (/ page 499)
ÿ
Coolant too hot or
cold(/ page 499)
h
Tire pressure monitor (/ page 508)
496
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Occupant safety
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
6
Restraint system warning
lamp
The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 34).
&
WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may
not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Devices or airbags, for
example.
#
Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
7
Seat belt warning lamp
flashes
The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
*The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
#
Fasten your seat belt(/ page 38).
*There are objects on the front passenger seat.
#
Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
497
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
7
Seat belt warning lamp
lights up
The red seat belt warning lamp will light up for six seconds once the engine has started.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
*The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
#
Fasten your seat belt (/ page 38).
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Ù
Warning lamp for electric
power steering
The red electric power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*The power-assisted steering or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
498
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Engine
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp
The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*Possible causes:
R
The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
R
Coolant level too low
R
The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
R
The radiator fan is faulty
If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.
&
WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could
come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.
#
Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
#
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue
driving under any circumstances.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
499
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
or
#
Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.
#
Check the coolant level (/ page 372).
#
Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not impaired.
#
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below the red area.
;
Engine diagnosis warning
lamp
The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode.
In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up.
#
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Electrical malfunction warn‐
ing lamp
The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit.
*There is a malfunction in the electrics.
#
Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
500
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
8
Fuel reserve warning lamp
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while driving.
*There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak‐
ing.
#
Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly:
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
8
Fuel reserve warning lamp
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
#
Refuel.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
501
Brakes
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
F
Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (USA
only)
!
Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (Can‐
ada only)
!
Yellow electric parking
brake indicator lamp is mal‐
functioning
The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parking
brake malfunctions.
*
#
Observe the messages on the multifunction display.
502
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
$
Brake warning lamp (USA)
J
Brakes warning lamp (Can‐
ada)
The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*Possible causes:
R
The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.
R
There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
&
WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
#
Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
#
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Do not add brake fluid.
#
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circum‐
stances.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
503
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
L
Warning lamp for distance
warning function
The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
*The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
#
Be prepared to brake immediately.
#
Increase the distance.
Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 186).
ä
Suspension warning lamp
The yellow AIR BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit.
*Amalfunction has occurred in the AIR BODY CONTROL.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
504
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving safety systems
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
!
ABS warning lamp
The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*ABS is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
&
WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock when braking.
The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐
gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
505
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
÷
ESP
®
warning lamp flashes
The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
*At least one wheel and tire assembly has reached its grip limit (/ page 182).
#
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
÷
ESP
®
warning lamp lights
up
The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP
®
is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Have ESP
®
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
#
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
506
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
å
ESP
®
OFF warning lamp
The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
*
ESP
®
is deactivated.
&
WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP
®
deactivated
If ESP
®
is deactivated, ESP
®
cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The availability of further driving safety sys‐
tems is also limited.
#
Drive on carefully.
#
Only deactivate ESP
®
for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP
®
cannot be activated, ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
#
Have ESP
®
checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Observe the notes on deactivating ESP
®
(/ page 182).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
507
Tire pressure monitor
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
h
Tire pressure monitoring
system warning lamp
flashes
The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one
minute and then remains lit.
*The tire pressure monitoring system is defective.
&
WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss
in one or more of the tires.
Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics.
#
Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
h
Tire pressure monitoring
system warning lamp lights
up
The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
*The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.
&
WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
508
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
R
The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#
Observe the recommended tire pressure.
#
Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
#
Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
#
Check the tire pressure and the tires.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
509
1, 2, 3 ...
4MATIC ..................................................... 168
Function .............................................. 168
12 V battery
see Battery (vehicle)
115 V socket
see Socket (115 V)
360° Camera ............................................ 218
Function ............................................... 218
Opening the camera cover (rear view
camera) ............................................... 221
Selecting a view ................................... 221
Setting favorites ..................................221
A
A/C function
Activating/deactivating (multimedia
system) ................................................ 146
Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 146
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .............181
Acceleration
see Kickdown
Accident and breakdown manage‐
ment
Mercedes me connect .........................335
Acoustic locking verification signal
Activating/deactivating ......................... 66
Activating/deactivating automatic
volume adjustment
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 365
Active Blind Spot Assist .......................... 231
Activating/deactivating .......................233
Brake application ................................. 232
Function .............................................. 231
System limitations ...............................231
Active Brake Assist
Function/notes ................................... 186
Setting ................................................. 191
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ........ 194
Active Emergency Stop Assist .............203
Active Lane Change Assist .................. 202
Calling up a speed ............................... 195
Displays in the Instrument Display ...... 204
Function .............................................. 194
Increasing/decreasing speed ..............195
Requirements ...................................... 195
Route-based speed adaptation ............198
Steering wheel buttons ........................ 195
Storing a speed ................................... 195
Switching off/deactivating .................. 195
Switching on/activating ...................... 195
System limitations ...............................194
Active Emergency Stop Assist ...............203
Active hood (pedestrian protection) ...... 367
Method of operation ............................367
Resetting ............................................. 367
Active Lane Change Assist ..................... 202
Activating/deactivating .......................203
Function .............................................. 202
Active Lane Keeping Assist .................... 233
Activating/deactivating .......................235
Function .............................................. 233
System limits ....................................... 233
Active Parking Assist .............................. 221
Cross Traffic Alert ............................... 226
Drive Away Assist ................................ 226
Exiting a parking space ........................ 224
Function .............................................. 221
Maneuvering assistance ...................... 227
Parking ................................................ 223
510
Index
System limitations ...............................221
Active Service System PLUS
see ASSYST PLUS
Active Speed Limit Assist ....................... 197
Display ................................................. 197
Function .............................................. 197
Active Steering Assist .............................200
Activating/deactivating .......................201
Active Emergency Stop Assist .............203
Active Lane Change Assist .................. 202
Displays in the Instrument Display ...... 204
Function .............................................. 200
System limitations ...............................200
Adaptive cruise control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Function .............................................. 133
Switching on/off ................................. 134
Additional value range
Setting display content ........................ 240
Additives .................................................. 441
Engine oil ............................................. 441
Fuel ...................................................... 441
Additives (engine oil)
see Additives
Additives (fuel)
see Fuel
Address book
see Contacts
Adjusting the balance/fader
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 365
Adjusting the bass, mid-range and
treble
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 365
Adjusting the mid-range, treble and
bass
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 365
Adjusting the sound focus
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 365
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 365
ADS PLUS damping system
see AIR BODY CONTROL
After-sales service center
see ASSYST PLUS
Air bag
Reduced protection ...............................42
AIR BODY CONTROL ................................ 207
Setting .................................................209
Suspension .......................................... 207
Air conditioning system
see Climate control
Air distribution
Setting .................................................145
Air freshener system
see Perfume atomizer
Air inlet
see Air-water duct
Air pressure
see Tire pressure
Air suspension
see AIR BODY CONTROL
Air vents ................................................... 150
Adjusting (front) .................................. 150
Adjusting (rear) .................................... 151
Glove box .............................................151
Index
511
Air vents
see Air vents
Air-recirculation mode ............................ 148
Air-water duct .......................................... 374
Keeping free ........................................374
Airbag .........................................................40
Activation .............................................. 34
Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....40
Installation locations .............................40
Knee airbag ........................................... 40
Overview ............................................... 40
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp .....45
Protection ..............................................41
Side airbag ............................................ 40
Window curtain airbag ...........................40
Airflow
Setting .................................................145
AIRPANEL (Care) ...................................... 380
Alarm
see Panic alarm
Alarm system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
All-wheel drive
see 4MATIC
Alternative route
see Route
Ambient lighting
Setting (multimedia system) ................135
Android Auto ............................................ 330
Connecting a mobile phone ................. 330
Ending ................................................. 331
Information .......................................... 330
Overview ............................................. 330
Sound settings ..................................... 331
Transferred vehicle data ......................331
Animals
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 63
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Anti-theft alarm system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Anti-theft protection
Immobilizer ............................................ 90
Anticipatory occupant protection
see PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
see PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
Apple CarPlay
®
........................................328
Connecting an iPhone
®
....................... 329
Ending ................................................. 329
Notes .................................................. 328
Overview ............................................. 328
Sound settings .................................... 329
Transferred vehicle data ......................331
Ashtray
Front center console ............................124
Rear passenger compartment .............. 124
Assistance
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 242
Assistance systems
see Driving safety system
ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 366
Battery disconnection periods .............367
Displaying the service due date ........... 366
Function/notes ................................... 366
Regular maintenance work .................. 366
512
Index
Special service requirements .............. 366
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) .................. 90
Activating/deactivating the interior
motion sensor ....................................... 92
Arming/disarming the tow-away
alarm .....................................................91
Deactivating the alarm ........................... 91
Function ................................................ 90
Function of the interior motion sensor .. 92
The tow-away alarm function .................91
ATTENTION ASSIST ......................... 227, 229
Function .............................................. 227
Setting ................................................. 229
System limitations ...............................227
Attention assistant
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Audio mode
Activating media mode ........................ 345
Connecting USB devices ..................... 347
Copyrights ...........................................345
Information .......................................... 343
Inserting/removing an SD card ........... 345
Media search ....................................... 351
Overview ............................................. 347
Pause and playback function ...............348
Selecting a track ................................. 348
Selecting playback options .................. 348
Track list .............................................. 348
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Automatic distance control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights ......................... 131
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) .......................................... 160
Automatic engine stop (ECO start/
stop function) .......................................... 160
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff .......................................... 43, 45
Function of the automatic front
passenger front airbag shutoff .............. 43
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp .....45
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
Automatic lateral support adjustment
Setting ................................................. 100
Automatic mirror folding function
Activating/deactivating .......................143
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 164
Drive program display .......................... 163
Drive programs .................................... 162
DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 162
Engaging drive position ....................... 165
Engaging neutral .................................. 165
Engaging park position ........................ 165
Engaging reverse gear .........................165
Kickdown ............................................. 167
Manual gearshifting .............................166
Steering wheel paddle shifters ............ 166
Transmission position display .............. 164
Transmission positions ........................ 164
Index
513
B
Bag hook .................................................. 120
BAS (Brake Assist System) .....................181
Battery
Charging (Remote Online) .................... 154
SmartKey ............................................... 67
Battery
see Battery (vehicle)
Battery (vehicle) ...................................... 395
Charging .............................................. 394
Charging (Remote Online) .................... 154
Notes .................................................. 390
Notes (starting assistance and
charging) .............................................392
Replacing ............................................ 395
Starting assistance .............................. 394
Belt
see Seat belt
Blind Spot Assist ..................................... 231
Activating/deactivating .......................233
Function .............................................. 231
System limitations ...............................231
Blower
see Climate control
Bluetooth
®
............................................... 277
Activating/deactivating .......................277
Information .......................................... 277
Bluetooth
®
audio
Activating ............................................ 355
De-authorizing (de-registering) the
device .................................................. 356
Information .......................................... 353
Overview .............................................354
Searching for a track ........................... 356
Searching for and authorizing the
device .................................................. 354
Selecting a media player .....................355
Switching device via NFC .................... 356
Brake Assist System
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Notes .................................................. 442
Brake force distribution
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 186
Brakes
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 181
Active Brake Assist .............................. 186
BAS (Brake Assist System) ...................181
Driving tips .......................................... 157
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 186
HOLD function .....................................206
Limited braking effect (salt-treated
roads) .................................................. 157
New/replaced brakepads/brake
discs .................................................... 155
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 155
Braking assistance
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Breakdown
Changing a wheel ................................ 428
Overview of the help functions .............. 18
Roadside Assistance ............................. 23
Tow-starting ........................................ 400
Towing away ........................................ 397
Transporting the vehicle ......................398
Breakdown
see Flat tire
514
Index
Burmester
®
surround sound system .....364
Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 365
Adjusting the sound focus ................... 365
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings ............................................... 365
Automatic volume adjustment .............365
Calls up the sound menu ..................... 364
Information .......................................... 364
Switching the surround sound on/off
.............................................................365
Buttons
Steering wheel .................................... 238
C
Call list
Making a call ....................................... 324
Overview ............................................. 324
Calls ..........................................................320
Accepting ............................................ 320
Activating functions during a call ......... 321
Calls with several participants .............321
Declining ............................................. 320
Ending a call ........................................ 320
Incoming call during an existing call .... 321
Making ................................................ 320
Mercedes me ...................................... 332
Calls up the sound menu
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 364
Camera
see 360° Camera
see Rear view camera
Car key
see SmartKey
Car wash
see Care
Car wash (care) ........................................374
Care .......................................................... 382
Air-water duct ...................................... 374
AIRPANEL ............................................ 380
Automatic car wash ............................. 374
Carpet .................................................382
Decorative foil .....................................378
Display ................................................ 382
Exterior lighting ................................... 380
Headliner ............................................. 382
Matte finish ......................................... 377
Paintwork ............................................ 377
Plastic trim .......................................... 382
Power washer ...................................... 375
Real wood/trim elements ...................382
Rear view camera ................................ 380
Seat belt .............................................. 382
Seat cover ........................................... 382
Sensors ............................................... 380
Tailpipes .............................................. 380
Washing by hand ..................................376
Wheels/rims ....................................... 380
Windows .............................................. 380
Wiper blades .......................................380
Cargo compartment cover
Extending/retracting ............................ 117
Notes ................................................... 116
Cargo compartment floor
Opening/closing .................................. 121
Cargo tie-down rings ...............................119
Carpet (Care) ...........................................382
Change of address ....................................23
Change of ownership ................................ 23
Changing a wheel
Preparation ......................................... 428
Raising the vehicle .............................. 429
Index
515
Changing a wheel
see Emergency spare wheel
Changing gears ........................................ 166
Manually ..............................................166
Changing hub caps ................................. 428
Character entry
On the touchpad .................................. 274
Using the controller ............................. 274
Charging
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 394
Mobile phone (wireless) .......................127
USB port ..............................................127
Chassis level (AIR BODY CONTROL)
Setting .................................................209
Child safety lock
Rear door .............................................. 62
Rear side windows ................................. 63
Switching on/off (Rear Seat Enter‐
tainment System ) ...............................280
Child seat
Attaching (notes) ................................... 54
Basic instructions .................................. 49
Front-passenger seat (notes) ................. 60
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing) ............ 55
Notes on risks and dangers ...................50
Securing on the front passenger seat ....61
Securing on the rear seat ...................... 59
Top Tether ..............................................57
Children
Avoiding dangers in the vehicle .............50
Basic instructions .................................. 49
Special seat belt retractor ..................... 55
Chock ....................................................... 427
Storage location ..................................427
Chock
see Chock
Cigarette lighter
Front center console ............................124
Cleaning
see Care
Climate control ........................................ 145
Activating/deactivating .......................146
Activating/deactivating the A/C
function (control panel) .......................146
Activating/deactivating the A/C
function (multimedia system) .............. 146
Activating/deactivating the synchro‐
nization function (control panel) .......... 147
Activating/deactivating the synchro‐
nization function (multimedia sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 148
Air distribution settings .......................147
Air-recirculation mode .........................148
Automatic control ................................ 147
Climate style function .......................... 147
Control panel for 3-zone automatic
climate control .................................... 145
Control panel for dual-zone auto‐
matic climate control ........................... 145
Defrosting the windshield .................... 145
Filling capacity for PAG oil ...................445
Front air vents ..................................... 150
Glove box air vent ................................ 151
Inserting/removing the flacon (fra‐
grance system) .................................... 149
Ionization ............................................. 148
Note .................................................... 145
Rear air vents ....................................... 151
Rear operating unit .............................. 145
Refrigerant .......................................... 444
Refrigerant filling capacity ...................445
516
Index
Removing condensation from the
windows .............................................. 148
Residual heat ....................................... 148
Setting rear climate control (multi‐
media system) .....................................147
Setting the air distribution ...................145
Setting the airflow ............................... 145
Setting the climate style ......................147
Setting the fragrance system ............... 148
Setting the temperature ......................145
Switching the rear window defroster
on/off .................................................145
Ventilating the vehicle (convenience
opening) ................................................ 81
Windshield heater ................................ 150
Climate style
Function ............................................... 147
Setting ................................................. 147
Cockpit .........................................................6
Overview .................................................6
Coffee cup symbol
see ATTENTION ASSIST
COMAND
see Multimedia system
COMAND Touch
Managing devices ................................ 280
Combination switch ................................ 131
Combined luggage cover and net
Attaching to the rear seat backrest ...... 118
Installing/removing .............................. 117
Compass ...................................................313
Computer
see On-board computer
Connecting the parcel net ...................... 120
Connection status
Displaying ............................................ 339
Overview .............................................339
Connectivity
Switching transmission of the vehicle
position on/off .................................... 277
Contacts ...................................................321
Calling up ............................................ 322
Deleting ...............................................323
Downloading (from mobile phone) ...... 322
Importing ............................................ 323
Importing (overview) ...........................322
Information .......................................... 321
Making a call ....................................... 323
Name format .......................................322
Options ................................................ 323
Storing ................................................ 323
Controller
Operating ............................................ 268
Convenience closing feature .................... 82
Convenience opening ................................ 81
Coolant (engine)
Check level .......................................... 372
Filling capacity .................................... 444
Notes .................................................. 443
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyrights
License .................................................. 31
Trademarks ............................................ 31
Cornering light function .......................... 133
Cross Traffic Alert ...................................226
Crosswind Assist
Function/notes ................................... 186
Index
517
Cruise control .......................................... 191
Buttons ................................................ 192
Calling up a speed ...............................192
Function ............................................... 191
Requirements: .....................................192
Selecting ............................................. 192
Setting a speed ................................... 192
Storing a speed ................................... 192
Switching off ....................................... 192
Switching on ........................................ 192
System limitations ...............................191
Cup holder
Rear passenger compartment .............123
Cup holder in the center console
Installing/removing (automatic
transmission) .......................................122
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) .........27
Customer Relations Department .............27
D
Damage detection (parked vehicle) .......179
Dashboard
see Cockpit
Dashboard lighting
see Instrument cluster lighting
Data acquisition
Vehicle .................................................. 28
Data import/export ................................. 281
Function/notes ................................... 281
Importing/exporting ............................281
Data storage
Electronic control units ......................... 28
Online services ...................................... 30
Vehicle .................................................. 28
Date
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 276
Daytime running lamp mode
see Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights ........................... 134
Switching on/off ................................. 134
Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................... 91
Dealership
see Qualified specialist workshop
Declaration of conformity
Wireless vehicle components ................25
Decorative foil (cleaning instructions) .. 378
Definitions (tires and loading) ................421
Designs
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 240
Destination .............................................. 304
Editing intermediate destinations ........ 294
Editing the previous destinations ........ 305
External ...............................................305
Saving (current vehicle position) ......... 304
Saving as global favorite ...................... 305
Storing a map position ........................ 304
Destination entry .................................... 290
Entering 3 word addresses .................. 295
Entering a POI or address .................... 290
Entering an intermediate destination ...294
Entering geo-coordinates .................... 295
Selecting a contact ............................. 295
Selecting a POI .................................... 293
Selecting from the map ....................... 296
Selecting previous destinations ...........292
Detecting inattentiveness
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Diagnostics connection ............................26
518
Index
Digital Operator's Manual ........................ 20
Digital speedometer ................................ 243
Dinghy towing
see Tow-bar system
DIRECT SELECT lever ............................... 164
Engaging drive position ....................... 165
Engaging neutral .................................. 165
Engaging park position ........................ 165
Engaging park position automatically .. 165
Engaging reverse gear .........................165
Function .............................................. 164
Display
Care .................................................... 382
Display (multimedia system)
Settings ...............................................275
Display (on-board computer)
Displays on the multifunction display ... 241
Display content
Setting the additional value range ....... 240
Display message .....................................447
Calling up (on-board computer) ...........447
Notes ................................................... 447
Display messages
¯ - - - mph .....................................480
ç - - - mph ...................................... 479
# 12 V Battery See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 487
b Active Headlamps Inoperative .... 454
é ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative .. 472
é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
Break! .................................................. 472
b Automatic Headlamp Mode
Inoperative .......................................... 454
$ Check Brake Fluid Level .............470
# Check Brake Pads See Opera‐
tor's Manual ......................................... 471
+ Check Coolant Level See Oper‐
ator's Manual .......................................461
5 Check Engine Oil At Next Refu‐
eling .................................................... 492
5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1
quart) .................................................. 493
b Check Left Low Beam (exam‐
ple) ...................................................... 453
h Check Tires ................................ 490
¥ Check Washer Fluid ...................460
ÿ Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine Off .................................... 461
! Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual ...............................481
÷ Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual ...............................482
Á Don't Forget Your Key ................ 453
5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be
Measured ............................................ 495
5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehi‐
cle Turn Engine Off .............................. 494
5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop
Switch Off Engine ................................ 494
5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level ........ 493
6 Front Left Malfunction Service
Required (example) .............................448
Index
519
8 Fuel Level Low ............................ 462
8 Gas Cap Loose ...........................462
! Inoperative See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 482
÷ Inoperative See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 483
T Inoperative See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 484
G Inoperative ................................. 486
b Intell. Light System Inoperative
.............................................................455
Á Key Not Detected (red display
message) .............................................452
Á Key Not Detected (white dis‐
play message) .....................................452
6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal‐
function Service Required (example) ...449
 Lowering ..................................... 473
ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50
mph ..................................................... 472
b Malfunction See Operator’s
Manual ................................................ 454
Á Obtain a New Key .......................451
ç Off ..............................................479
ë Off .............................................. 479
F Parking Brake See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 466
h Please Correct Tire Pressure ...... 491
F Please Release Parking Brake .... 469
_ Rear Left Backrest Not
Latched (example) ...............................460
Á Replace Key Battery ................... 452
# See Operator's Manual ............... 487
6 SRS Malfunction Service
Required .............................................. 448
Ù Steering Malfunction Increased
Physical Effort See Operator's Man‐
ual ....................................................... 458
Ù Steering Malfunction Stop
Immediately See Operator's Manual ... 458
# Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run‐
ning ..................................................... 488
# Stop Vehicle See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 488
Á Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low ..... 473
ç Suspended ................................. 479
b Switch Off Lights ........................ 455
b Switch On Headlamps ................ 454
F Turn On the Ignition to Release
the Parking Brake ................................ 470
d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch
the Ignition Off Before Exiting .............. 457
Á Vehicle Rising Please Wait .......... 474
Á Vehicle Rising ............................. 473
h Warning Tire Malfunction ............ 491
h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing ............ 490
Active Blind Spot Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....477
Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative .... 477
520
Index
Active Brake Assist Functions Cur‐
rently Limited See Operator's Man‐
ual ....................................................... 484
Active Brake Assist Functions Limi‐
ted See Operator's Manual .................. 485
Active Distance Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....480
Active Distance Assist Inoperative ......480
Active Distance Assist Now Available
.............................................................480
Active Hood Malfunction See Opera‐
tor's Manual ........................................ 459
Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera
View Restricted See Operator's Man‐
ual ........................................................ 476
Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....475
Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera‐
tive .......................................................476
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera‐
tor's Manual ........................................ 477
Active Steering Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....474
Active Steering Assist Inoperative ........ 474
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera
View Restricted See Operator's Man‐
ual ....................................................... 455
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....455
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inopera‐
tive ...................................................... 455
Air Conditioning Malfunction See
Operator's Manual ...............................456
Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' ............... 463
Apply Brake to Shift to 'R' ................... 463
Auxiliary Battery Malfunction .............. 465
Beginning Emergency Stop .................. 475
Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's Manual .................. 476
Blind Spot Assist Inoperative ............... 477
Cruise Control Inoperative .................. 480
Cruise Control Off ...............................480
Decrease Speed .................................. 492
Drive More Slowly ................................ 473
Driver's Door Open & Transmission
Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away .. 463
Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual .............................. 449
Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator's Manual ...............................450
Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc‐
tioning .................................................456
Let fresh air into the vehicle interior.
Air Conditioning Malf. Visit Work‐
shop ....................................................456
Mercedes me connect Services Limi‐
ted See Operator's Manual .................. 486
Index
521
N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling
Away .................................................... 464
Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta‐
tionary .................................................463
Place the Key in the Marked Space
See Operator's Manual ........................ 453
PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative
See Operator's Manual ........................ 451
PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera‐
tor's Manual ........................................ 451
Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's
Manual ................................................ 485
Reversing Not Possible Service
Required .............................................. 464
Service Required Do Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer .......................................... 464
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running
Wait Transmission Cooling .................. 465
Tire Press. Monitor Currently
Unavailable .......................................... 489
Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative ........... 489
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No
Wheel Sensors .................................... 489
Tires Overheated ................................. 492
To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake
and Start Engine .................................. 463
To switch engine off, press and hold
Start/Stop button for at least 3
secs. or press 3 times. ........................ 462
Traffic Sign Assist Camera View
Restricted See Operator's Manual .......478
Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail‐
able See Operator's Manual ................ 478
Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative ............. 478
Transmission Malfunction Stop ........... 464
Display on the windshield
see Head-up Display
Distance control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Distance recorder
see Trip distance
DISTRONIC
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Door
Child safety lock (rear door) .................. 62
Locking (emergency key) .......................73
Opening (from the inside) ......................70
Power closing function ..........................73
Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 73
Unlocking (from the inside) ...................70
Door control panel .....................................16
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) .... 417
Drawbar
see Tow-bar system
Drinking and driving ................................ 157
Drive Away Assist .................................... 226
Drive position
Inserting .............................................. 165
Drive program display ............................. 163
Drive programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT
Driver's seat
see Seat
522
Index
Driving lights
see Automatic driving lights
Driving safety system .............................180
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 181
Active Brake Assist .............................. 186
BAS (Brake Assist System) ...................181
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion) ..................................................... 186
ESP
®
Crosswind Assist ........................ 186
Overview ............................................. 180
Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. 180
Responsibility ...................................... 180
STEER CONTROL ................................. 186
Driving system
see 360° Camera
see Active Blind Spot Assist
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
see Active Emergency Stop Assist
see Active Lane Change Assist
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
see Active Parking Assist
see Active Speed Limit Assist
see Active Steering Assist
see AIR BODY CONTROL
see ATTENTION ASSIST
see Blind Spot Assist
see Cruise control
see Driving safety system
see HOLD function
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
see Rear view camera
see Traffic Sign Assist
Driving tips
Drinking and driving .............................157
General driving tips .............................. 157
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 155
Drowsiness detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Dynamic handling control system
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
DYNAMIC SELECT .................................... 162
Configuring drive program I ................. 163
Displaying engine data ........................ 163
Displaying vehicle data ........................ 163
Drive program display ..........................163
Drive programs ....................................162
Function .............................................. 162
Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)
.............................................................163
Selecting the drive program ................163
Showing operation feedback ............... 163
E
E10 ...........................................................440
Easy entry feature
Function/notes ................................... 108
Setting ................................................. 109
Easy exit feature
Function/notes ................................... 108
Setting ................................................. 109
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion)
Function/notes ................................... 186
ECO display
Function .............................................. 162
Resetting ............................................. 244
ECO start/stop function ......................... 160
Automatic engine start ........................ 160
Automatic engine stop .........................160
Method of operation ............................160
Switching off/on .................................. 161
Index
523
Electric parking brake .............................177
Applying automatically .........................177
Applying or releasing manually ............ 178
Emergency braking .............................. 178
Releasing automatically .......................178
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Overview of the help functions .............. 18
Reflective safety vest .......................... 384
Emergency braking .................................178
Emergency braking
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Emergency call system
see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Emergency engine start ......................... 400
Emergency key
Locking a door ....................................... 73
Unlocking a door ...................................73
Emergency operation mode
Starting the vehicle ............................. 153
Emergency spare wheel .........................433
Notes .................................................. 433
Removing ............................................ 434
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation .............................................. 34
ENERGIZING COMFORT
Overview of programs .........................287
Starting the program ........................... 288
Engine
ECO start/stop function ......................160
Engine number ....................................437
Starting (emergency operation
mode) .................................................. 153
Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 155
Starting (start/stop button) ................ 153
Starting assistance .............................. 394
Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 170
Engine data
Displaying ............................................ 163
Engine number ........................................ 437
Engine oil .................................................. 371
Additives .............................................. 441
Capacity .............................................. 442
Checking the oil level using the oil
dipstick ................................................ 370
Checking the oil level using the on-
board computer ................................... 370
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ...............442
Quality ................................................. 442
Topping up ...........................................371
Entering characters ................................. 273
Function/notes ................................... 273
ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
ESP
®
Crosswind Assist ................................. 186
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program) ...... 182
Activating/deactivating .......................186
Function/notes ................................... 182
Exterior lighting
Care .................................................... 380
Exterior lighting
see Lights
Exterior mirrors ............................... 140, 141
Anti-glare mode (automatic) ................141
Automatic mirror folding function ........ 143
Folding in/out .....................................140
Operating the memory function ..........109
524
Index
Parking position ...................................142
Setting ................................................. 140
External device
Locking (child safety lock) ...................280
Eyeglasses compartment ........................ 112
F
Fatigue detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Favorites
Adding .................................................271
Calling up .............................................271
Deleting ...............................................271
Moving .................................................271
Overview ............................................. 270
Renaming ............................................. 271
Flacon
Inserting/removing .............................149
Flat tire ..................................................... 384
Changing a wheel ................................ 428
MOExtended tires ................................ 385
Notes ................................................... 384
TIREFIT kit ...........................................386
Flat towing
see Tow-bar system
Floor mats ................................................ 129
Foil covering
Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. 180
Folding bench seat .................................. 103
Folding back ........................................ 104
Folding out .......................................... 103
Installing and removing the seat
cushion ................................................ 105
Notes ................................................... 103
Opening and closing the cargo com‐
partment floor .....................................105
Fragrance
see Perfume atomizer
Free software .............................................31
Frequencies
Two-way radio ...................................... 436
Frequency band
Dialing (on-board computer) ................ 246
Front airbag (driver, front passenger) .....40
Front passenger seat ................................ 96
Adjusting from the driver's seat ............ 96
Front passenger seat
see Seat
Fuel ...........................................................441
Additives .............................................. 441
E10 ...................................................... 440
Fuel reserve ......................................... 441
Gasoline .............................................. 440
Quality (gasoline) ................................ 440
Refueling ............................................. 168
Sulfur content ..................................... 440
Tank content ........................................ 441
Fuel consumption
On-board computer .............................243
Function seat
see Door control panel
Fuses ........................................................ 400
Before replacing a fuse ........................ 400
Dashboard fuse box ............................ 402
Fuse assignment diagram ...................400
Fuse box in the cargo compartment ....403
Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 401
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot‐
well ...................................................... 402
Notes .................................................. 400
Index
525
Fuses
see Fuses
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ........................... 175
Opening or closing the door ................. 174
Programming buttons .......................... 172
Radio equipment approval numbers .... 175
Resolving problems .............................. 174
Synchronizing the rolling code .............173
Gas station search
Starting automatic search ................... 293
Switching automatic search on/off ..... 299
Using automatic search ....................... 299
Gasoline ................................................... 440
Gearshift recommendation .....................167
Genuine parts ............................................ 21
Glide mode ............................................... 167
Glove box
Air vent ................................................ 151
Locking/unlocking ...............................112
H
Handbrake
see Electric parking brake
Handling characteristics (unusual) ....... 404
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 77
Hazard warning lights .............................132
Hazardous substances
Information ............................................ 24
Head restraint
Front (adjusting mechanically) .............. 98
Front (luxury head restraint) .................. 99
Rear (installing/removing) ...................100
Rear passenger compartment
(adjusting) .............................................99
Rear passenger compartment (lower‐
ing from the front) ................................. 99
Head-up Display ...................................... 248
Adjusting display elements (on-board
computer) ............................................ 248
Adjusting the brightness (on-board
computer) ............................................ 248
Function .............................................. 249
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 248
Operating the memory function ..........109
Setting the position (on-board com‐
puter) ................................................... 248
Switching on/off ................................. 250
Headliner (care) ....................................... 382
Heating
see Climate control
High beam
Switching on/off ................................. 131
High-beam flasher ................................... 131
High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...................133
Hill start assist ........................................ 206
HOLD function ......................................... 206
Function/notes ................................... 206
Switching on/off ................................. 206
Hood
Function (active hood) .........................367
Opening/closing ................................. 368
Resetting (active hood) ........................ 367
Hotspot
Setting up (Wi-Fi) ................................. 279
526
Index
I
Identification plate
Engine .................................................437
Refrigerant .......................................... 444
Vehicle ................................................ 437
Ignition
Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 152
Ignition key
see SmartKey
Immobilizer ................................................ 90
In Car Office
Calling up ............................................ 326
Features .............................................. 326
Marking a to-do entry as completed ....327
Noting an incoming call .......................327
Selecting functions .............................. 326
Switching automatic start on/off ........ 326
Indicator lamps
see Warning/indicator lamps
Individual drive program
Configuring .......................................... 163
Selecting ............................................. 163
Inside rearview mirror
see Exterior mirrors
Inspection
see ASSYST PLUS
Instrument cluster
see Instrument Display
Instrument cluster lighting .................... 242
Instrument Display .................................. 237
Adjusting the lighting ........................... 242
Function/notes ................................... 237
Instrument cluster ........................... 10, 12
Setting the additional value range ....... 240
Warning/indicator lamps .................... 495
Intelligent Light System
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...................133
Cornering light function ....................... 133
Interior lighting ........................................ 135
Ambient lighting .................................. 135
Reading light ........................................ 135
Setting ................................................. 135
Switch-off delay time ........................... 136
Interior motion sensor
Activating/deactivating ......................... 92
Function ................................................ 92
Intermediate destination
Calculating a route with intermediate
destinations .........................................294
Entering ............................................... 294
Modifying ............................................ 294
Starting an automatic gas station
search ................................................. 293
Starting the automatic service sta‐
tion search .......................................... 299
Internet
Calling up a web page .........................340
Closing the browser ............................342
Deleting a bookmark ........................... 341
Deleting browser data .......................... 341
Managing bookmarks .......................... 341
Internet connection
Communication module function ........ 338
Connection status ...............................339
Displaying the connection status ........ 339
Establishing .........................................339
Information .......................................... 338
Restrictions ......................................... 338
Index
527
Ionization
Activating/deactivating (multimedia
system) ................................................ 148
iPhone
®
see Apple CarPlay
®
see Mercedes-Benz Link
J
Jack
Storage location ..................................427
Jump-start connection ............................394
General notes ...................................... 392
K
KEYLESS-GO
Locking the vehicle ................................ 70
Problem .................................................72
Unlocking setting .................................. 66
Unlocking the vehicle ............................70
Kickdown .................................................. 167
Using ................................................... 167
Knee airbag ................................................ 40
L
Labeling (tires)
see Tire labeling
Lamp
see Interior lighting
Lamps (Instrument Display)
see Warning/indicator lamps
Lane detection (automatic)
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Language .................................................. 281
Notes ................................................... 281
Setting .................................................281
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur‐
ing system
Installing ................................................ 55
Level control system
see AIR BODY CONTROL
Light switch
Overview .............................................130
Lighting
see Interior lighting
see Lights
Lights ........................................................ 130
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...................133
Adjusting the instrument lighting ......... 242
Automatic driving lights ....................... 131
Combination switch ............................. 131
Cornering light function ....................... 133
Hazard warning lights .......................... 132
High beam ........................................... 131
High-beam flasher ................................ 131
Light switch ......................................... 130
Low-beam headlamps .........................130
Parking lights .......................................130
Rear fog lamp ...................................... 130
Responsibility for lighting systems ...... 130
Setting the exterior lighting switch-
off delay time ...................................... 134
Setting the surround lighting ...............135
Standing lights .....................................130
Turn signals .......................................... 131
Limited Warranty
Vehicle .................................................. 28
Limiting the opening angle (tailgate) ...... 79
528
Index
Live Traffic Information
Displaying subscription information .... 306
Displaying the traffic map ...................306
Displaying traffic incidents .................. 307
Extending a subscription ..................... 306
Issuing hazard alerts ........................... 308
Load index (tires) .....................................419
Load-bearing capacity (tires) .................. 419
Loading .....................................................119
Bag hook ............................................. 120
Cargo tie-down rings ............................ 119
Definitions ........................................... 421
Notes ................................................... 110
Roof carrier .......................................... 121
Stowage space underneath the cargo
compartment floor ...............................121
Loading guidelines ...................................110
Loading information table .......................412
Loads
Securing ...............................................110
Locator lighting
see Surround lighting
Locking/unlocking
Activating/deactivating the auto‐
matic locking feature .............................72
Emergency key ...................................... 73
KEYLESS-GO .......................................... 70
Opening the tailgate .............................. 74
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside ..............................................70
Low-beam headlamps
Switching on/off ................................. 130
Lubricant additives
see Additives
Luggage
Parcel net ............................................ 120
Securing ............................................... 110
Lumbar support
see Lumbar support (4-way)
Lumbar support (4-way) ...........................97
M
Maintenance
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 242
Vehicle .................................................. 23
Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Malfunction
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ................ 212
Restraint system ................................... 34
Malfunction message
see Display message
Map .......................................... 306, 308, 309
Avoiding an area ..................................311
Avoiding an area (overview) .................311
Changing an area .................................311
Deleting an area ...................................312
Displaying the compass ....................... 313
Displaying the map version .................. 311
Displaying the next intersecting
street ................................................... 310
Displaying the satellite map ................. 313
Displaying the traffic map ...................306
Displaying weather information ...........313
Map data ............................................. 312
Moving ................................................ 309
Overview ............................................. 308
Selecting POI symbols .........................310
Selecting text information .................... 310
Selecting the map orientation .............. 310
Index
529
Setting the map scale .......................... 309
Setting the map scale automatically ....313
Updating .............................................. 312
Map and compass
Overview ............................................. 308
Massage program
Overview ..............................................101
Resetting the settings .......................... 101
Massage programs
Selecting the front seats ......................101
Massage settings
Resetting ............................................. 101
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) ...... 377
Maximum load rating .............................. 418
Maximum permissible load
Calculation example .............................414
Determining .........................................413
Maximum tire pressure ........................... 418
Mechanical key
Inserting/removing ............................... 67
Unlocking the tailgate ...........................79
Media
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 247
Searching ............................................ 351
Media display
Notes .................................................. 266
Media Interface
Activating ............................................ 352
Information .......................................... 351
Overview .............................................352
Media mode
Activating ............................................ 345
Media playback
Operating (on-board computer) ........... 247
Media search
Starting ................................................ 351
Media source
Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 247
Memory function
Head-up Display — Calling up stored
settings ............................................... 109
Head-up Display — Storing settings ..... 109
Operating ............................................ 109
Outside mirrors — Calling up stored
settings ............................................... 109
Outside mirrors — Storing settings ...... 109
Seat — Calling up stored settings ......... 109
Seat — Storing settings ........................ 109
Steering wheel — Calling up saved
settings ............................................... 109
Steering wheel — Saving settings ......... 109
Menu (on-board computer)
Assistance ........................................... 242
Designs ............................................... 240
Head-up Display .................................. 248
Maintenance ........................................242
Media ..................................................247
Navigation ...........................................245
Overview ............................................. 238
Radio ...................................................246
Telephone ............................................ 247
Trip ...................................................... 243
Mercedes me calls
Arranging a service appointment ........ 333
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Center ................................................. 333
Consenting to data transfer .................333
Information .......................................... 332
Making a call via the overhead con‐
trol panel ............................................. 332
Transferred data ..................................334
530
Index
Mercedes me connect
Accident and breakdown manage‐
ment .................................................... 335
Information .......................................... 334
Transferred data ..................................335
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Notes ................................................... 152
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Calling up ............................................ 339
Using voice control .............................. 340
Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐
tem ........................................................... 335
Automatic emergency call ................... 336
Information .......................................... 335
Information on data transfer ................337
Manual emergency call ........................ 337
Overview ............................................. 336
Mercedes-Benz Link ................................ 327
Connecting .......................................... 327
Ending ................................................. 328
Overview ............................................. 327
Using ...................................................327
Message (multifunction display)
see Display message
Message memory .................................... 447
Messages
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 262
Messages
see Text messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
Mobile phone
Damage detection (parked vehicle) ..... 179
Wireless charging ................................ 129
Mobile phone
see Android Auto
see Apple CarPlay
®
see Mercedes-Benz Link
see Second telephone
see Telephone
Mobile phone voice recognition
Starting ...............................................320
Stopping ..............................................320
Model series
see Vehicle identification plate
MOExtended tires ................................... 385
Multifunction display
Overview of displays ............................ 241
Multifunction steering wheel
Overview of buttons ............................ 238
Multifunction steering wheel
see Steering wheel
Multimedia system .................................266
Activating/deactivating standby
mode ...................................................180
Adjusting the volume ...........................272
Calling up lists and menus ...................270
Central control elements ..................... 267
Configuring display settings ................275
Configuring drive program I ................. 163
ENERGIZING COMFORT program
(overview) ............................................ 287
Favorites ..............................................270
Main functions ..................................... 270
Overview ............................................. 266
Rear climate control ............................ 147
Restoring the factory settings ............. 286
Standby mode function .......................179
Starting the ENERGIZING Comfort
program ..............................................288
Switching the sound on/off ................. 272
Index
531
Multimedia system
see Entering characters
see Touch Control
see Touchpad
N
Navigation
Calling up the Digital Operator's
Manual .................................................314
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 245
Showing/hiding the menu ...................289
Switching on ....................................... 289
Updating the map data ........................ 312
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 255
Navigation
see Destination
see Destination entry
see Map
see Route
see Route guidance
see Traffic information
Navigation announcements
Activating/deactivating .......................302
Adjusting the volume ...........................303
Repeating ............................................ 303
Switching audio fadeout on/off .......... 303
Navigation messages
On-board computer ............................. 245
Near Field Communication (NFC) ...........319
Connecting the mobile phone to the
multimedia system ...............................319
Information .......................................... 319
Switching Bluetooth
®
audio equip‐
ment .................................................... 356
Switching mobile phones .....................319
Using a mobile phone .......................... 319
Neutral
Inserting .............................................. 165
NFC
see Near Field Communication (NFC)
Non-operational time
Activating/deactivating standby
mode ...................................................180
Standby mode function .......................179
Notes ........................................................ 156
Optimized acceleration ........................ 156
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle .......155
O
Occupant safety
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 63
Occupant safety
see Airbag
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
see PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
see PRE-SAFE
®
Impulse Side
see PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection plus)
see Restraint system
see Seat belt
Odometer
see Total distance
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer ................................. 238
Assistance menu ................................. 242
Displaying the service due date ........... 366
Head-up Display menu .........................248
Media menu ......................................... 247
532
Index
Menu designs ...................................... 240
Menu overview .................................... 238
Multifunction display ............................ 241
Navigation system menu ..................... 245
Operating ............................................ 238
Radio menu .........................................246
Service menu ...................................... 242
Telephone menu .................................. 247
Trip menu ............................................ 243
On-board diagnostics interface
see Diagnostics connection
Online services
Data storage .......................................... 30
Open-source software ...............................31
Opening the tailgate using your foot
see HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Operating fluids
Additives (fuel) .....................................441
Brake fluid ...........................................442
Coolant (engine) .................................. 443
Engine oil ............................................. 441
Fuel (gasoline) .....................................440
Notes .................................................. 439
Refrigerant (air conditioning system) ... 444
Windshield washer fluid ...................... 444
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity (wireless
vehicle components) ............................. 25
Information ............................................ 24
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment ................................. 22
Operator's Manual (digital) ......................20
Optimized acceleration ........................... 156
Activating ............................................ 156
Overhead control panel
Overview ................................................ 14
P
Paint code ................................................ 437
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) .......... 377
Panic alarm ................................................ 66
Activating/deactivating ......................... 66
Panoramic sliding sunroof
see Sliding sunroof
Park position
Inserting .............................................. 165
Selecting automatically ....................... 165
Parking
see Electric parking brake
Parking aid
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ................... 211
Activating .............................................214
Adjusting warning tones ...................... 215
Function ............................................... 211
Problems ..............................................212
Side impact protection .........................213
Switching off ........................................ 214
System limitations ...............................211
Parking assistance systems
see Active Parking Assist
Parking brake
see Electric parking brake
Parking for an extended period .............. 179
Parking lights ...........................................130
Parking position
Exterior mirrors ................................... 142
Index
533
Storing the position of the front-
passenger outside mirror using
reverse gear ........................................ 142
PARKTRONIC
Malfunction .......................................... 212
Partitioning net
Attaching .............................................118
PASSENGER AIR BAG status display
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff
Payload
Calculation example .............................414
Determining the maximum ...................413
Pedestrian protection
see Active hood (pedestrian protection)
Perfume
see Perfume atomizer
Perfume atomizer .................................... 149
Inserting/removing the flacon .............149
Setting ................................................. 148
Perfume vial
see Perfume atomizer
Permitted towing methods .....................396
Personalization
see User profile
Pets in the vehicle .....................................63
Phone book
see Contacts
Picture formats
see Video mode
Picture settings
see Video mode
PIN protection
Activating/deactivating .......................282
Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 382
Playback options
Selecting ............................................. 348
POI
Selecting ............................................. 293
POI symbols
Selecting .............................................. 310
Power closing function
Door ...................................................... 73
Power supply
Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 152
Power washer (care) ...............................375
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection) .................................................47
Function ................................................ 47
PRE-SAFE
®
Sound ................................. 47
Reversing measures .............................. 48
PRE-SAFE
®
Impulse Side ...........................48
Activation .............................................. 34
Function ................................................ 48
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory occu‐
pant protection plus) ................................ 48
Function ................................................ 48
Reversing measures .............................. 48
Preventative occupant protection sys‐
tem
see PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu‐
pant protection)
Previous destinations
Selecting .............................................292
Programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT
534
Index
Protecting the environment
Notes ..................................................... 21
Protection against collision
see Drive Away Assist
Protection against theft
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Pulling away
see Notes
Q
QR code
Rescue card .......................................... 28
Qualified specialist workshop ................. 26
R
Radar and ultrasonic sensors
Damage ............................................... 180
Radiator shutters
see AIRPANEL (Care)
Radio
Activating ............................................ 356
Activating/deactivating radio text ....... 359
Calling up the station list .....................358
Deleting stations .................................358
Direct frequency entry ........................ 358
Displaying information .........................359
Displaying radio text ............................ 359
Editing station presets .........................358
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 246
Moving stations ...................................358
Overview ............................................. 357
Searching for stations .........................358
Setting a channel ................................ 358
Setting the waveband .......................... 358
Storing radio stations .......................... 358
Switching the HD Radio function
on/off .................................................358
Tagging music tracks ........................... 359
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 259
Radio stations
Dialing (on-board computer) ................246
Rain closing function
Sliding sunroof ...................................... 86
Range
Displaying ............................................ 243
Reading light
see Interior lighting
Real wood (Care) .....................................382
Rear climate control
Setting ................................................. 147
Rear door (child safety lock) .................... 62
Rear fog lamp
Switching on/off .................................131
Rear seat
see Seat
Rear view camera ....................................216
Care .................................................... 380
Function ............................................... 216
Opening the camera cover (360°
Camera) ............................................... 221
Setting favorites (360° Camera) ..........221
Rear window
Changing the wiper blade .................... 139
Roller sunblind ...................................... 89
Rear window defroster ...........................145
Rear window wipers
Activating/deactivating .......................137
Index
535
Reflective safety vest ............................. 384
Refrigerant (air conditioning system)
Notes .................................................. 444
Refueling
Refueling the vehicle ........................... 168
Remote Online
Charging the battery ............................154
Cooling or heating the vehicle inte‐
rior .......................................................154
Starting the vehicle ............................. 155
Reporting safety defects .......................... 27
Rescue card ............................................... 28
Reserve
Fuel ...................................................... 441
Reset function (multimedia system) .....286
Residual heat ...........................................148
Restoring (factory settings)
see Reset function (multimedia system)
Restraint system .......................................33
Basic instructions for children ...............49
Function in an accident ......................... 34
Functionality .......................................... 34
Malfunction ........................................... 34
Protection ..............................................33
Reduced protection ...............................33
Self-test ................................................. 34
Warning lamp ........................................ 34
Reverse gear
Inserting .............................................. 165
Rims (Care) .............................................. 380
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .......... 23
Roll away protection
see HOLD function
Roller sunblind .......................................... 89
Rear window .......................................... 89
Side windows ........................................ 89
Roof carrier
Attaching .............................................121
Loading ................................................ 121
Roof load .................................................. 446
Route ................................................ 297, 299
Calculating .......................................... 297
Displaying destination information ...... 299
Planning .............................................. 294
Selecting a type ...................................297
Selecting an alternative route .............299
Selecting notifications ......................... 298
Selecting options ................................ 298
Starting the automatic service sta‐
tion search .......................................... 299
Switching the automatic gas station
search on/off ...................................... 299
Using automatic gas station search .... 299
With intermediate destinations ............ 294
Route guidance ....................................... 300
Canceling ............................................ 303
Changing direction .............................. 301
Destination reached ............................ 302
From an off-road location .................... 304
Lane recommendations ....................... 301
Notes .................................................. 300
Off-road ............................................... 304
To an off-road destination ...................304
Route-based speed adaptation
Displays in the Instrument Display ...... 204
Function .............................................. 198
Route-based speed adjustment
Setting .................................................199
536
Index
Run-flat characteristics
MOExtended tires ................................ 385
S
Safety systems
see Driving safety system
Satellite map ............................................ 313
Satellite radio
Activating/deactivating TuneStart ....... 363
Adding a channel to Smart Favorites ... 363
Deleting a channel ...............................362
Displaying EPG information .................362
Displaying service information ............ 364
Information .......................................... 359
Information about Smart Favorites
and TuneStart ...................................... 363
Logging in ............................................ 359
Moving a channel ................................ 362
Music and sport alerts function .......... 362
Overview .............................................. 361
Pause and playback function ...............363
Restrictions ......................................... 359
Selecting a category ............................ 361
Selecting a channel .............................362
Setting music and sport alerts ............ 362
Setting the parental control ................. 362
Storing a channel ................................ 362
Switching on .......................................360
SD card
Inserting/removing .............................345
Seat ............................................... 93, 94, 113
4-way lumbar support ............................ 97
Adjusting (electrically) ...........................96
Adjusting (mechanically and electri‐
cally) ...................................................... 94
Adjusting the seat backrest angle
(rear passenger compartment) ............ 116
Backrest (rear) locking ......................... 115
Correct driver's seat position ................ 93
Folding the backrest (rear passenger
compartment) back ............................. 114
Folding the backrest (rear) forwards .... 113
Massage program overview .................101
Operating the memory function ..........109
Resetting the settings .......................... 101
Setting automatic lateral support
adjustment .......................................... 100
Setting options ...................................... 16
Workout program overview .................. 101
Seat
see Folding bench seat
see Front passenger seat
Seat adjustment
Configuring .......................................... 100
Seat belt ..................................................... 35
Care ....................................................382
Protection ..............................................35
Seat belt adjustment
Activating/deactivating ......................... 39
Function ................................................ 39
Seat belt warning
see Seat belts
Seat belts ...................................................39
Activating/deactivating seat belt
adjustment ............................................ 39
Adjusting the height .............................. 38
Fastening ............................................... 38
Reduced protection ...............................37
Releasing ...............................................39
Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 39
Warning lamp ........................................ 39
Seat cover (Care) .....................................382
Index
537
Seat heating
Activating/deactivating .......................101
Seat ventilation
Activating/deactivating .......................102
Second telephone .................................... 318
Connecting .......................................... 317
Features ...............................................318
Selecting a gear
see Changing gears
Selector lever
see DIRECT SELECT lever
Self-test
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff ............................................ 45
Sensors (Care) .........................................380
Service center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Service interval display
see ASSYST PLUS
Service station search
Starting automatic search ................... 299
Setting a speed
see Cruise control
Setting summer time .............................. 276
Setting the date format ........................... 276
Setting the distance unit ........................ 281
Setting the map scale
see Map
Shift paddles
see Steering wheel paddle shifters
Shifting gears
Gearshift recommendation .................. 167
Short messages
see Text messages
Side airbag .................................................40
Side impact protection ............................ 213
Side windows ............................................. 80
Child safety lock in the rear
passenger compartment .......................63
Closing .................................................. 80
Closing using the SmartKey ................... 82
Convenience closing feature .................82
Convenience opening ............................ 81
Opening .................................................80
Opening with the SmartKey ................... 81
Problem .................................................82
Roller sunblind ...................................... 89
Size designation (tires) ............................ 419
Sliding sunroof .......................................... 84
Automatic functions .............................. 86
Closing .................................................. 84
Closing using the SmartKey ................... 82
Opening ................................................. 84
Opening with the SmartKey ................... 81
Problem .................................................87
Rain closing function .............................86
SmartKey ................................................... 65
Acoustic locking verification signal ....... 66
Battery ................................................... 67
Energy consumption .............................. 66
Features ................................................ 65
Key ring attachment .............................. 67
Mechanical key ...................................... 67
Overview ............................................... 65
Panic alarm ........................................... 66
Problem ................................................. 69
Unlocking setting .................................. 66
SmartKey functions
Deactivating .......................................... 66
538
Index
Smartphone
see Android Auto
see Apple CarPlay
®
see Mercedes-Benz Link
see Telephone
Snow chains ............................................ 405
Socket (12 V)
Cargo compartment ............................127
Front passenger footwell .....................125
Rear passenger compartment .............125
Socket (115 V) .......................................... 126
Rear passenger compartment .............126
Software update ...................................... 284
Information .......................................... 284
Performing .......................................... 284
System updates ................................... 285
Sound
PRE-SAFE
®
Sound ................................. 47
Wheels and tires ..................................404
Sound
see Burmester
®
surround sound system
see Sound settings
Sound settings ........................................364
Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 364
Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass
settings ............................................... 364
Automatic volume adjustment .............364
Calls up the sound menu ..................... 364
Information .......................................... 364
Spare wheel
see Emergency spare wheel
Special seat belt retractor ........................55
Specialist workshop ..................................26
Speech dialog system
see Voice Control System
Speed index (tires) ................................... 419
Speedometer
Digital .................................................. 243
Standby mode
Activating/deactivating .......................180
Function .............................................. 179
Standing lights ........................................ 130
Start-off assist
see Optimized acceleration
Start/Stop button
Parking the vehicle .............................. 170
Starting the vehicle ............................. 153
Switching on the power supply or
ignition ................................................ 152
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting assistance
see Jump-start connection
Starting the engine
see Vehicle
Starting-off aid
see Hill start assist
Station
Deleting ............................................... 358
Direct frequency entry ........................ 358
Moving ................................................ 358
Searching ............................................ 358
Setting .................................................358
Storing ................................................ 358
Station list
Calling up ............................................ 358
Station presets
Modifying ............................................ 358
Index
539
STEER CONTROL
Function/notes ................................... 186
Steering wheel ........................................ 238
Adjusting (electrically) .........................107
Adjusting (manually) ............................ 106
Buttons ................................................ 238
Operating the memory function ..........109
Steering wheel heater .......................... 107
Steering wheel heater
Switching on/off .................................107
Steering wheel paddle shifters .............. 166
Stowage areas
see Loading
see Stowage compartment
Stowage compartment ............................ 112
Armrest ................................................ 112
Center console ..................................... 112
Door ..................................................... 112
Eyeglasses compartment .....................112
Glove box .............................................112
Rear armrest ........................................ 113
Stowage compartments
see Loading
see Stowage compartment
Stowage space underneath the cargo
compartment floor .................................. 121
Sulfur content ......................................... 440
Sun visor
Operating ............................................ 143
Surround lighting .................................... 135
Setting ................................................. 135
Surround View
see 360° Camera
Suspension
Adjusting the chassis level (AIR
BODY CONTROL) .................................209
Suspension
see AIR BODY CONTROL
Switch-off delay time
Exterior ................................................ 134
Interior ................................................. 136
Switching the surround sound on/off
Burmester
®
surround sound system ... 365
Synchronization function
Activating/deactivating (multimedia
system) ................................................ 148
Switching on/off (control panel) .......... 147
System settings
Activating/deactivating PIN protec‐
tion ...................................................... 282
Reset function (multimedia system) ....286
Setting the distance unit ...................... 281
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 276
Setting the time zone ........................... 276
Setting the time/date format .............. 276
Switching transmission of the vehicle
position on/off .................................... 277
System settings
see Bluetooth
®
see Data import/export
see Language
see Software update
see Wi-Fi
T
Tailgate .......................................................74
Closing .................................................. 75
Emergency release from the inside .......80
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ...........................77
Limiting the opening angle .................... 79
Opening .................................................74
540
Index
Opening dimensions ............................445
Unlocking (mechanical key) ...................79
Tailpipes (Care) ........................................ 380
Tank content
Fuel ...................................................... 441
Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 441
Technical data
Information .......................................... 435
Vehicle identification plate .................. 437
Telephone .........................................247, 315
Activating functions during a call ......... 321
Call and ringtone volume .....................320
Calls with several participants .............321
Connecting a mobile phone (Near
Field Communication (NFC)) ................ 319
Connecting a mobile phone (Pass‐
key) ...................................................... 317
Connecting a mobile phone (Secure
Simple Pairing) .....................................317
De-authorizing a mobile phone ............ 319
Disconnecting a mobile phone .............319
Importing contacts .............................. 323
Importing contacts (overview) .............322
Incoming call during an existing call .... 321
Information .......................................... 316
Interchanging mobile phones ...............318
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 247
Mobile phone voice recognition .......... 320
Notes ................................................... 314
Operating modes ................................. 316
Reception and transmission volume .... 320
Switching mobile phones (Near Field
Communication (NFC)) ........................ 319
Telephone menu overview ...................315
Telephone operation ............................ 320
Using Near Field Communication
(NFC) ...................................................319
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 259
Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........ 129
Telephone number
Dialing (on-board computer) ................ 247
Telephony operating modes
Bluetooth
®
Telephony .......................... 316
Telephony operating modes
see Second telephone
Temperature ............................................ 145
Temperature grade .................................. 416
Text messages ......................................... 324
Calling a message sender .................... 325
Changing folders .................................326
Composing .......................................... 325
Configuring the displayed text mes‐
sages ................................................... 324
Deleting ............................................... 326
Drafts .................................................. 326
Notes ................................................... 324
Options ................................................ 326
Outbox ................................................ 326
Read-aloud function ............................ 325
Reading ...............................................325
Replying .............................................. 325
Sending ...............................................325
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 262
Through-loading feature
see Seat
Time
Manual time setting ............................. 276
Setting summer time ........................... 276
Setting the time and date automati‐
cally ..................................................... 276
Setting the time zone ........................... 276
Index
541
Setting the time/date format .............. 276
TIN (Tire Identification Number) ............417
Tire and Loading Information placard .... 412
Tire characteristics .................................. 419
Tire inflation compressor
see TIREFIT kit
Tire information table .............................. 412
Tire labeling .............................................. 416
Characteristics .....................................419
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) .. 417
Load index ........................................... 419
Load-bearing capacity ..........................419
Maximum tire load ...............................418
Maximum tire pressure ........................ 418
Overview ..............................................416
Speed rating ........................................ 419
Temperature grade ...............................416
Tire Quality Grading ............................. 416
Tire size designation ............................419
Traction grade ...................................... 416
Tread wear grade .................................416
Tire load (maximum) ...............................418
Tire pressure ................................... 407, 408
Checking (manually) ............................ 408
Checking (tire pressure monitoring
system) ................................................ 410
Maximum ............................................. 418
Notes .................................................. 406
Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
ing system ............................................ 411
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 409
Tire pressure table .............................. 407
TIREFIT kit ...........................................386
Tire pressure monitor .............................. 411
Function .............................................. 409
Restarting ............................................ 411
Tire pressure monitoring system
Checking the tire pressure ...................410
Checking the tire temperature .............410
Tire pressure table .................................. 407
Tire Quality Grading ................................ 416
Tire temperature
Checking (tire pressure monitoring
system) ................................................ 410
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 409
Tire tread ................................................. 404
Tire-change tool kit
Overview .............................................427
TIREFIT kit ................................................ 386
Storage location ..................................386
Using ................................................... 386
Tires
Changing hub caps .............................. 428
Characteristics .....................................419
Checking .............................................404
Checking the tire pressure (man‐
ually) ................................................... 408
Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐
sure monitoring system) ......................410
Definitions ........................................... 421
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) .. 417
Flat tire ................................................ 384
Installing .............................................. 431
Load index ...........................................419
Load-bearing capacity .......................... 419
Maximum tire load ...............................418
Maximum tire pressure ........................ 418
542
Index
MOExtended tires ................................ 385
Noise ...................................................404
Notes on installing ...............................424
Overview of tire labeling ......................416
Removing ............................................. 431
Replacing .................................... 424, 428
Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
ing system ............................................ 411
Rotating ............................................... 426
Selection .............................................424
Snow chains ........................................ 405
Speed rating ........................................ 419
Storing .................................................427
Temperature grade ...............................416
Tire and Loading Information placard ...412
Tire pressure (notes) ........................... 406
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 409
Tire pressure table .............................. 407
Tire Quality Grading ............................. 416
Tire size designation ............................419
TIREFIT kit ...........................................386
Traction grade ...................................... 416
Tread wear grade .................................416
Unusual handling characteristics ........ 404
Toll system
Windshield ........................................... 144
Tool
see Vehicle tool kit
Top Tether .................................................. 57
Total distance .......................................... 243
Displaying ............................................ 243
Touch Control .......................................... 267
On-board computer ............................. 238
Operating ............................................ 267
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 267
Touchpad .................................................. 268
Activating/deactivating haptic oper‐
ation feedback .................................... 269
Operating ............................................ 268
Reading the handwriting recognition
aloud ................................................... 269
Selecting a station and track ...............269
Setting the sensitivity .......................... 269
Switching on/off ................................. 268
Tow-away alarm
Activating/deactivating ......................... 91
Function ................................................ 91
Tow-bar system .......................................236
Tow-starting ............................................. 400
Towing away ............................................ 397
Towing eye
Installing .............................................. 400
Storage location ..................................399
Towing methods ...................................... 396
Track
Selecting (audio mode) ....................... 348
Traction grade .......................................... 416
Traffic information .................................. 305
Displaying the traffic map ...................306
Displaying traffic incidents .................. 307
Extending a Live Traffic Information
subscription ........................................ 306
Issuing hazard warnings ...................... 308
Live Traffic Information ....................... 306
Overview ............................................. 305
Traffic map
see Map
Traffic Sign Assist ...................................229
Function/notes ................................... 229
Setting .................................................230
Index
543
System limitations ...............................229
Transferred vehicle data
Android Auto ........................................ 331
Apple CarPlay
®
.................................... 331
Transmission position display ................ 164
Transporting
Vehicle ................................................ 398
Tread wear grade ..................................... 416
Trim element (Care) ................................ 382
Trip
Menu (on-board computer) .................. 243
Trip computer
Displaying ............................................ 243
Resetting ............................................. 244
Trip distance ............................................ 243
Displaying ............................................ 243
Resetting ............................................. 244
Trip odometer
see Trip distance
Trunk lid
see Tailgate
TuneIn
Calling up ............................................ 342
Deleting stations .................................343
Logging out ......................................... 343
Overview ............................................. 342
Registering .......................................... 343
Saving stations .................................... 343
Selecting and connecting to a station
.............................................................343
Selecting stream .................................343
Setting options ....................................343
Terms of use ........................................343
Turn signal indicator
see Turn signals
Turn signals ..............................................131
Switching on/off ................................. 131
Two-way radios
Frequencies ......................................... 436
Notes on installation ...........................435
Transmission output (maximum) .........436
U
Units of measurement
Setting .................................................281
Unlocking setting ...................................... 66
USB devices
Connecting .......................................... 347
USB port ...................................................127
User profile .............................................. 282
Creating .............................................. 283
Importing/exporting ...........................283
Options ................................................ 284
Setting ................................................. 282
Using the telephone
see Calls
V
Vehicle ...................................................... 153
Activating/deactivating standby
mode ...................................................180
Correct use ........................................... 27
Damage detection (parking) ................ 179
Data acquisition .................................... 28
Data storage .......................................... 28
Diagnostics connection .........................26
Equipment ............................................. 22
Limited Warranty ...................................28
Locking (automatically) ......................... 72
544
Index
Locking (from the inside) ....................... 70
Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 70
Locking/unlocking (emergency key) ...... 73
Lowering ............................................. 432
Maintenance ......................................... 23
Parking for an extended period ............ 179
Problem notification .............................. 27
QR code rescue card ............................. 28
Qualified specialist workshop ................26
Raising ................................................ 429
Standby mode function .......................179
Starting (emergency operation
mode) .................................................. 153
Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 155
Starting (start/stop button) ................ 153
Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 170
Towing .................................................236
Unlocking (from the inside) ...................70
Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................70
Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 81
Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐
tem) ..................................................... 263
Vehicle data
Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) ............ 163
Roof load ............................................. 446
Transferring to Android Auto ................ 331
Transferring to Apple CarPlay
®
............ 331
Turning circle .......................................445
Vehicle height ...................................... 445
Vehicle length ...................................... 445
Vehicle width ....................................... 445
Wheelbase ...........................................445
Vehicle data storage
Event data recorders .............................30
Multimedia system/Mercedes me
connect .................................................30
Vehicle dimensions ................................. 445
Vehicle electronics
Notes .................................................. 435
Two-way radios .................................... 435
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .................... 437
Paint code ...........................................437
VIN ...................................................... 437
Vehicle interior
Cooling or heating (Remote Online) ..... 154
Vehicle key
see SmartKey
Vehicle maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle operation
Outside the USA or Canada ...................23
Vehicle position
Switching transmission on/off ............ 277
Vehicle tool kit ........................................ 386
TIREFIT kit ...........................................386
Towing eye .......................................... 399
Ventilating
Convenience opening ............................ 81
Ventilation
see Climate control
Vents
see Air vents
Video mode .............................................. 351
Activating ............................................ 348
Activating/deactivating full-screen
mode ................................................... 350
Overview .............................................350
Settings ............................................... 351
Index
545
VIN ............................................................ 437
Identification plate .............................. 437
Seat ..................................................... 437
Windshield ........................................... 437
Vision
Removing condensation from the
windows .............................................. 148
Windshield heater ................................ 150
Voice command types (Voice Control
System) .................................................... 253
Voice Control System .............................252
Application specific voice commands
.............................................................253
Audible help functions .........................253
Global voice commands ...................... 253
Improving speech quality .................... 253
Language setting .................................253
Media player voice commands .............261
Message voice commands .................. 262
Multifunction steering wheel (operat‐
ing) ...................................................... 252
Navigation voice commands ................ 255
Operable functions .............................. 253
Operating safety .................................. 251
Radio voice commands .......................259
Switch voice commands ...................... 254
Telephone voice controls .....................259
Text message voice commands ...........262
Types of voice commands ...................253
Vehicle voice commands .....................263
Voice prompting .................................. 252
Voice control system
see Voice Control System
W
Warning lamps
see Warning/indicator lamps
Warning system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Warning/indicator lamp
! ABS warning lamp ...................... 505
$ Brake warning lamp (USA) .......... 503
J Brakes warning lamp (Canada) ...503
ÿ Coolant warning lamp ................ 499
# Electrical malfunction warning
lamp .................................................... 500
; Engine diagnosis warning lamp .. 500
å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp .............507
÷ ESP
®
warning lamp flashes ........ 506
÷ ESP
®
warning lamp lights up ...... 506
8 Fuel reserve warning lamp .........501
! Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (Canada only) ...502
F Red indicator lamp, electric
parking brake applied (USA only) ........ 502
6 Restraint system warning lamp .. 497
7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes .. 497
7 Seat belt warning lamp lights
up ........................................................ 498
ä Suspension warning lamp .......... 504
h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem warning lamp flashes ...................508
h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem warning lamp lights up .................508
L Warning lamp for distance
warning function .................................504
546
Index
Ù Warning lamp for electric
power steering .................................... 498
! Yellow electric parking brake
indicator lamp is malfunctioning .........502
Warning/indicator lamps .......................495
Overview ............................................. 495
PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................ 45
Warranty .................................................... 28
Washer fluid
see Windshield washer fluid
Washing by hand (care) .......................... 376
Water tank
see Air-water duct
Weather information ............................... 313
Web browser
Calling up a web page .........................340
Calling up options ................................ 341
Calling up the settings .........................341
Deleting a bookmark ...........................341
Deleting browser data .......................... 341
Ending .................................................342
Managing bookmarks .......................... 341
Overview ..............................................341
Showing/hiding the menu ...................340
Website
Calling up ............................................ 340
Showing/hiding the web browser
menu ................................................... 340
Wheel change
Lowering the vehicle ........................... 432
Mounting a new wheel .........................431
Removing a wheel ................................ 431
Removing/installing hub caps .............428
Wheel rotation .........................................426
Wheels
Care .................................................... 380
Changing hub caps .............................. 428
Checking ............................................. 404
Checking the tire pressure (man‐
ually) ................................................... 408
Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐
sure monitoring system) ......................410
Definitions ........................................... 421
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) .. 417
Flat tire ................................................ 384
Installing .............................................. 431
Load index ...........................................419
Load-bearing capacity .......................... 419
Maximum tire load ...............................418
Maximum tire pressure ........................ 418
MOExtended tires ................................ 385
Noise ...................................................404
Notes on installing ...............................424
Overview of tire labeling ......................416
Removing ............................................. 431
Replacing .................................... 424, 428
Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
ing system ............................................ 411
Rotating ............................................... 426
Selection .............................................424
Snow chains ........................................ 405
Speed rating ........................................ 419
Storing .................................................427
Temperature grade ...............................416
Tire and Loading Information placard ...412
Tire characteristics .............................. 419
Tire pressure (notes) ........................... 406
Tire pressure monitoring system
(function) ............................................. 409
Tire pressure table .............................. 407
Tire Quality Grading ............................. 416
Tire size designation ............................419
Index
547
TIREFIT kit ...........................................386
Traction grade ...................................... 416
Tread wear grade .................................416
Unusual handling characteristics ........ 404
Wi-Fi .......................................................... 277
Overview ............................................. 277
Setting ................................................. 278
Setting up a hotspot ............................ 279
Window curtain airbag ............................. 40
Windows
see Side windows
Windows (Care) .......................................380
Windshield ....................................... 137, 145
Defrosting ............................................ 145
Infrared reflective ................................ 144
Radio waves ........................................144
Replacing the wiper blades .................. 137
Windshield
see Windshield
Windshield heater ................................... 150
Windshield heating
see Windshield heater
Windshield washer fluid .........................444
Notes .................................................. 444
Windshield washer system
Topping up ...........................................373
Windshield wipers
Activating/deactivating .......................136
Replacing the wiper blades .................. 137
Winter operation
Snow chains ........................................ 405
Wiper blades
Care .................................................... 380
Replacing .............................................137
Wireless charging
Function/notes .................................... 127
Mobile phone ....................................... 129
Wireless vehicle components
Declaration of conformity ...................... 25
Workout program
Overview ..............................................101
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
548
Index
1 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Mercedes E-Class Wagon 2020 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Mercedes E-Class Wagon 2020 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 50,91 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Mercedes E-Class Wagon 2020

Mercedes E-Class Wagon 2020 Gebruiksaanwijzing - English - 58 pagina's

Mercedes E-Class Wagon 2020 Snelstart handleiding - English - 2 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info